INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
AMSTERDAM STUDIES IN THE THEORY AND
HISTORY OF LINGUISTIC SCIENCE
General Editor
E.F. KONRAD KOERNER
(University of Ottawa)
Series II - CLASSICS IN PSYCHOLINGUISTICS
Advisory Editorial Board
Ursula Bellugi (San Diego);John B. Carroll Chapel Hill, N.C.)
Robert Grieve (Perth, W.Australia);Hans Hormann (Bochum)
John C. Marshall (Oxford);Tatiana Slama-Cazacu (Bucharest)
Dan I. Slobin (Berkeley)
Volume 3
Leonard Bloomfield
An Introduction to the Study of Language
LEONARD BLOOMFIELD
AN INTRODUCTION
TO THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
New edition
with an introduction by
JOSEPH F. KESS
University of Victoria
Victoria, British Columbia
JOHN BENJAMINS PUBLISHING COMPANY
AMSTERDAM/PHILADELPHIA
1983
F O R C H A R L E S F. H O C K E T T
© Copyright 1983 - John Benjamins B.V.
ISSN 0165 716X
ISBN 90 272 1892 7 (Pp.) / ISBN 90 272 1891 9(Hb.)
No part of this book may be reproduced in any form, by print, photoprint,
microfilm or any other means, without written permission from the publisher.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
For permission to reprint Leonard Bloomfield's book, An Introduction
to the Study of Language (New York, 1914) I would like to thank the publisher
Holt, Rinehart & Winston, and Ms Mary McGowan, Manager, Rights and
Permissions Department.*
Thanks are also due to my colleague and friend Joseph F. Kess for having contributed an introductory article to the present reprinting of Bloomfield's first
book, and to Charles F. Hockett of Cornell University, for commenting on an
earlier draft of my Foreword, suggesting substantial revisions of content and
form. It is in recognition of his important contribution to a re-evaluation of
Bloomfield's oeuvre that the present volume is dedicated to him.
Ottawa, Easter 1981
Konrad Koerner
* Contrary to my earlier observation (see footnote 10 of the Foreword), I was lucky enough, during
my sojourn at the Newberry Library in Fall 1982, to locate a photograph of Leonard Bloomfield as a
man in his thirties at the University of Chicago. I would like to express my thanks to Mr. Daniel
Meyer - of the Library Archives for having provided me with a copy on which the present picture is
based. - Prof. C.F. Hockett kindly furnished the photocopy for the reproduction of Bloomfield's
signature.
CONTENTS
Foreword by the Editor
ix
Introduction by Joseph F. Kess
xvii
Leonard Bloomfield: AN INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF
LANGUAGE
v, 1
FOREWORD
In the foreword to the first volume of ''Classics in Psycholinguistics" written four years ago,1 I remarked that research in the history of psycholinguistics demands not only dual expertise in psychology and linguistics but also
mastery of German, since the bulk of the classic material that should be made
available again is in that language, which in matters of science held a position
until the First World War comparable to English today. Currently, specialists
with that particular combination of skills seem fairly rare, something which
may explain the slow growth of the present series in comparison to all the four
others combined under the umbrella title of "Amsterdam Studies in the
Theory and History of Linguistic Science".
Because of this situation, it was a stroke of good fortune that I was able to
persuade Professor Joseph F. Kess to supply the historical background to the
volume here reprinted, and to indicate the importance of certain intellectual
traditions to present-day research. In addition to the skills already mentioned , Professor Kess approaches the subj ect free from bias — he has no ax to
grind, but is concerned solely with keeping the record accurate; and this he
has done, in my opinion, not just competently but with a certain charm. We all
owe him a debt of gratitude.
It is entirely compatible with that gratitude for me to hold certain views
differing from Professor Kess's on a few points of detail.
Thus, it seems to me quite well established that Albert Paul Weiss (18791931) had a profound influence on Leonard Bloomfield during the 1920s,
when both were at the Ohio State University (1921-27). We have Bloomfield's
own extensive testimony for this, and we can trace the influence in the sort of
psychology Bloomfield admitted into his later linguistic thinking. In sharp
contrast, although the works of Ferdinand de Saussure (1857-1913) and Emile
Durkheim (1858-1917) show certain superficial similarities, there is not a
1) See Albert Thumb & Karl Marbe, Experimentelle Untersuchungen iiber die psychologischen
Grundlagen der sprachlichen Analogiebildang, new ed., with an introduction by David J. Murray
(Amsterdam: J. Benjamins, 1978), v-viii. (Please note that on page v of that book, end of the second paragraph, "2 vols." is a misprint for "20 vols.").
X
FOREWORD
single reference to Durkheim in Saussure's known writings (published or unpublished) , and thus no evidence that Durkheim was in any way the instigator
of Saussure's theory of language. 2 Instead, when mentioning the social nature
of language, Saussure often explicitly cites William Dwight Whitney (18271894).
One might also have reservations about Professor Kess's characterization of Hermann Paul's (1846-1921) Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte (Halle:
Niemeyer, 1880; 5th rev. ed., 1920) as codifying 'historical linguistics', even
though that was Paul's avowed intention. Already a century ago, in reviewing
the first edition of Paul's book, Franz Misteli (1841-1903),3 a follower and
long-time collaborator of Heymann Steinthal (1823-99), whose Vdlkerpsychologie Paul had attacked, proposed that its title should speak of
'Sprachwissenschaft' "linguistic science", rather than of 'Sprachgeschichte',
"language history". Furthermore, said Misteli, Paul frequently contradicts
himself when dealing with the relation between what Paul called 'Sprachgeschichte' and 'descriptive Grammatik'. 4
In 1879 Wilhelm Wundt (1832-1920) founded, in Leipzig, the first institute for experimental psychology ever established in the field. The centennial
of that important event has given rise to a number of individual studies of
Wundt's work (Danziger 1979, Leary 1979, Mueller 1979); they are already
mentioned in Professor Kess's introductory article. In addition to these papers we should now7 list two symposium volumes, 5 from which may be gleaned
valuable information on the 'master psychologist (Blumenthal) himself and
on the impact of his work in the last quarter of the 19th and the first decades of
2) This fable convenue of Durkheinms influence on Durkheim was, interestingly enough, already contradicted in 1931, when Witold Doroszeski (1899-1976) had first proposed it, and this by
no lesser scholar than Antoine Meillet (1866-1936), who had himself collaborated with Durkheim
and corresponded with Saussure regularly. Cf. Koerner, Ferdinand de Saussure (Braunschweig: F.
Vieweg, 1973), 226-27, for details.
3) Zeitschrift fur Volkerpsychologie und Sprachwissenschaft 13.376-409 (1882), especially
pp.380ff.
4) Cf. E. F. K. Koerner, '"Hermann Paul and Synchronic Linguistics", Lingua 29.274-307
(1972), repr. in Koerner, Toward a Historiography of Linguistics (Amsterdam: J. Benjamins,
1978), 73-106.
5) Wolfgang G. Bringmann & Ryan D. Tweney, eds., Wundt Studies: A centennial collection
(Toronto: C. J. Hogrefe, 1980), x, 445 pp., a very informative volume indeed; and Robert W.
Rieber (in collaboration with Arthur L. Blumenthal, Kurt Danziger, and Solomon Diamond), ed.,
Wilhelm Wundt and the Making of Scientific Psychology (New York: Plenum Press, 1980).
FOREWORD
xi
the 20th century. In addition, they provide background material for the understanding of the Zeitgeist. However, neither of the volumes contains much
specifically on Wundt's psychology of language.
But that there should be so little on Wundt's indeed important contribution to psycholinguistic and linguistic theory in general is symptomatic. Apart
from a few passages in Blumenthal's book of 1970 (pp.20-31) from Wundt's
discussion of syntax and selections from volume one of his voluminous Volkerpsychologie entitled "Die Sprache" (Leipzig, 1900; 3rd rev. ed., 2 vols.,
1911-12) pertaining to the language of gestures (The Hague: Mouton, 1973),6
we have nothing on Wundt's (psycho-) linguistic writings in English translation. 7 That is very regrettable: Wundt's two-volume Die Sprache contains
numerous insights into language, only a few of which have been taken up in recent years. One of the neglected subjects is Wundt's discussion of word order,
seemingly known to no contemporary specialist on that topic. 8 In short, a
selection of his writings on child language, language change, word formation,
and many other topics of linguistic interest remains a desideratum. 9
Despite the importance of Leonard Bloomfield (1887-1949) in the development of structural linguistics in North America, much less information
6) "Die Satzfiigung" (selections from chap.7 of Book 2) and "Die Gebardensprache" from chap.2
of Book 1 of Die Sprache, 3rdrev. ed. (1911), respectively.
7) By contrast, many other works by Wundt were translated into English, e.g., his Grundriss der
Psychologie of 1896 (transl. by his former student C. H. Judd in the following year); Grundziige der
physiologischen Psychologie of 1874, reviewed by no lesser scholar than William James (18421910) in North American Review No.121, 195-201 (1875), repr. in both volumes on Wundt mentioned in footnote 5 (pp. 114-20 and 199-206, respectively), and transl. by another American pupil
of Wundt's, E. B. Titchener in 1904. Others include Rudolf Pintner's (1884-1942) transl. (1912) of
Wundt's Einfiihrung in die Psychologie, and Edward Leroy Schaub's translation (1916) of Wundt's
Elemente der Völkerpsychologie of 1912, which was reviewed by Herman K(arl) Haeberlin (1890c.1955) in Psychological Review 23.279-302 (1916). This review has been reprinted in the Wundt
volume ed. by Rieber (cf. footnote 5 above), pp.229-49.
8) Cf. Winfred P. Lehmann, ed., Syntactic Typology (Austin & London: Univ. of Texas Press,
1978), or Bernard Comrie, Language Universals and Linguistic Typology (Oxford: B. Blackwell,
1981), which contain not a single reference to Wundt's theories on the subject. The only such reference seems to be in Aldo Scaglione's work, The Classical Theory of Composition (Chapel Hill,
N.C.: Univ. of North Carolina Press, 1972), pp. 345-46, note 11. Cf. also the excerpts in Blumenthal
(1970:27-29).
9) Among the various other classic texts that still await translation into English, we may mention
Karl Biihler's (1879-1963) Sprachtheorie (Jena: G. Fischer, 1934). (I know of altogether three unsuccessful attempts made during the past 15 years.)
xii
FOREWORD
about his life is available than one should expect, given the number of students
he had or of young scholars who associated themselves with his teachings from
the early 1930s to the mid-1950s,10 and the role he played in the professionalization of the field in general. What is known, however, has been carefully assembled by Charles Hockett in his voluminous A Leonard Bloomfield Anthology in 1970 (referred to as LBA in the following).
In the present context, one would have liked to know more about the circumstances surrounding the writing of his first book here reprinted, An Introduction to the Study of Language, published in 1914, i.e., two years before the
appearance of Ferdinand de Saussure's posthumous Cours de linguistique
generate (Lausanne & Paris: Payot, 1916). The accounts of Bloomfield's
academic career of the years 1910-21 indicate that he was first an instructor
and, from 1913, an "Assistant Professor of Comparative Philology and German in the University of Illinois", as we read on the title page of his first book.
Hockett (LB A 44) affirms that the Introduction was "surely written largely at
The University of Illinois, and before Bloomfield's departure for Europe;
thus mainly in 1913". Thus would rule out the conjecture that Bloomfield
wrote the book after his sojourn in Germany in 1913-14, where he studied at
the universities of Gottingen and Leipzig, where he not only attended classes
by the (then no longer young) Junggrammatiker August Leskien (18401916),11 but most certainly lectures given by Wundt. The reason for Bloomfield's trip to Germany was, as he related himself to his pupil William G.
Moulton (cf. LBA 515), that it was practically obligatory for any member in
an American German department hoping for academic advancement to have
studied in Germany for some time.
However, Bloomfield did not need to travel to Germany to familiarize
himself with Wundt's psychology of language; by the early 1900s many of
Wundt's works had been translated into English, and there were more than a
dozen distinguished scholars in psychology and philosophy at North American universities who had received their training with Wundt in Leipzig. (Compare Miles Albert Tinker's [1893-1977] report of 1932, "Wundt's Doctorate
10) Thus I have been unsuccesful in tracing a photograph of Bloomfield other than the one that
Charles Hockett refaced to his 1970 Anthology, a picture signed by Bloomfield on 6 April 1944,
though depicting him as a man in his late forties rather than mid- or late fifties. [Cf. correction note
to the Acknowledgement on p. v.]
11) Hockett (LBA 542) reports that still in about 1940 Bloomfield held Leskien in high esteem
arguing that he did not think that linguistics had significantly progressed beyond what Leskien had
known 30 years earlier.
FOREWORD
xiii
Students and Their Theses, 1875-1920", which includes at least 14 Americans,
among them Agnell, Catell, Judd, Pace, Scripture, Stratton, Tawney, Titchener, and others, all of whom had taken their degrees between 1886 and
1898.)12 Furthermore, we may note that Bloomfield himself, prior to his departure for Europe, had written a review of the Elemente der Völkerpsychologie (Leipzig, 1912), which appeared in 1913 in American Journal
of Psychology (repr. in LB A 39-43). This review makes interesting reading for
anyone who wants to know how well Bloomfield was familiar with Wundt's
psychological work. It also shows that Bloomfield was particularly interested
in what Wundt had to say about language, not only in his Elemente, but also in
Tomus I of Wundt's magnum opus, Die Sprache. Although Bloomfield is capable of seeing the shortcomings in Wundt's linguistic theories, especially as far
as language development is concerned (LBA 40-42), he considers his work to
be an important contribution for the linguist to contemplate.
We know — and Professor Kess gives a fine account of this change in
Bloomfield's metatheory—that Bloomfield abandoned, from the early 1920s
onwards, more and more his 'mentalistic' position in linguistic matters. It was
about that time that Bloomfield had moved to Ohio State University as "Professor of German and Linguistics" (1921-27), and that he reviewed Sapir's
Language (1921) and the second edition (1922) of Saussure's Cours (repr. in
LBA 91-94 and 106-108, respectively). Both linguists (as had become customary since Paul's Prinzipien of 1880) were making frequent reference to some
kind of psychology; Wundt would have called it Vulgärpsychologie since neither really developed a theoretical framework for a psychological analysis of
linguistic phenomena (cf. Die Sprache, vol.1, 3rd rev. ed., pp.27-28). As a
matter of fact, from about 1910 onwards, Saussure had tried to divest himself
of a psychological argument, replacing terms such as 'image acoustique' and
'concept' by more abstract terms such as 'signifiant' and 'signifie', respectively, proposing an overall, socially motivated science of signs—semiologie
— in which linguistics was to play a central role. 13
Before the First World War, however, German science, not only in linguistics and in psychology, was so overwhelming that it would have been dif-
12) This paper has been reprinted in the volume ed. by Bringmann & Tweney (mentioned in
footnote 5 above), pp.269-79.
13) Cf. E. F. K. Koerner, Ferdinand de Saussure (Braunschweig: F. Vieweg, 1973), pp.311-41,
for details.
xiv
FOREWORD
ficult for any scholar to escape its influence. And Bloomfield was no exception. For instance, in 1901 the neogrammarian Berthold Delbrück (18421922) devoted a book-length study to the question of the place of psychology
in linguistics, with particular reference to Wundt's proposals, in which he argued that the linguist could well live with Wundt's model as with any other,
notably the one provided by Johann Friedrich Herbart (1776-1841), whom
Hermann Paul favoured.14 The Genevan scholar Albert Sechehaye (18701946) who, together with Charles Bally (1865-1947), was later to edit Saussure's lectures on general linguistics on the basis of students' notes (not their
own!), not only did his doctorate in Gottingen in 1902 (rather than with Saussure, who had been professor in Geneva since 1891), but also published a
theoretical outline of linguistic science largely based on Wundtian psychology.15 In short, working out linguistic problems, diachronic as well as synchronic, with reference to psychological doctrine was the normal thing to do at
the time. 16
As already mentioned above (p.ix), soon after his arrival at Ohio State
Bloomfield fell under the spell of the psychologist A. P. Weiss, who was expounding a 'mechanist' brand of psychology, in fact an approach which became the underpinning of Bloomfield's Language (1933), replacing as it were
the 'mentalist' psychology underlying much of his 1914 book (cf. Bloomfield's
Preface to his 1933, partly reprinted in LBA 44). Thus, in a 1927 paper (LBA
176) Bloomfield opts for Weiss' behaviorist model of psychology, a viewpoint
which he appears to have never abandoned afterwards.
Although it is not quite clear whether indeed Bloomfield "was uncertain
14) B. Delbriick, Grundfragen der Sprachforschung mit Rucksicht auf W. Wundts
Sprachpsychologie erortert (Strassburg: K. J. Triibner, 1901). Curiously enough, in his second
(1886) and subsequent editions of his Prinzipien Paul removed the reference to Herbart found in
the first (p. 15). — For a thorough account of the debate, see Erwin A. Esper, Mentalism and Objectivism of Language (New York: American Elsevier, 1968), 15-81. (Note that Wundt replied to Delbriick in the same year.)
15) Ch[arles] Albert Sechehaye, Programme et methodes de la linguistique theorique:
Psychologie du langage (Paris: H. Champion; Leipzig: O. Harrassowitz; Geneva: A. Eggimann,
1908). — As we may gather from Robert Godel's book, Les Sources manuscrites du Cours de linguistique generale de F. de Saussure (Geneva: Droz, 1957), pp.51-52, Saussure did not subscribe to
Sechehaye's psychology of language.
16) Cf., as a further example of this trend, Jacques van Ginneken's (1877-1945) 552-page Principes de linguistiquepsychologique (Paris: M. Riviere; Leipzig: O. Harrassowitz; Amsterdam: E.
van der Vecht, 1907).
FOREWORD
XV
about the psychology [of Wundt, I suppose] and would really have preferred
to leave it out", as Hockett (LBA 45) suggests, it is true that, "despite long
'psychologizing' passages" in his 1914 Introduction to the Study of Language,
the book could only distantly be regarded as a truly psycholinguistic text (as
the series in which it appears might suggest). However, it is clear from many
passages in the book — not only from the Preface, in which he states: "I depend for my psychology, general and linguistic, entirely on Wundt; I can only
hope that I have not misrepresented his doctrine" (p.vi) — that Bloomfield indeed used mentalistic underpinnings for his linguistic argument; compare
especially chap.III, "The mental basis of language" (56-72).17 Little influence
of Wundt may appear to be present in his section on the sentence, except for
passing references to psychological matters (pp. 110,112,119); 18 it is however
more evident in the section on word-order (186-88), for instance. And speaking of semantic change (322-31), Bloomfield emphasizes the importance of a
psychological foundation, referring to Wundt rather than to Michel Breal's
(1832-1915) influential Essai de semantique: Science des significations (Paris:
Hachette, 1897; 6th ed., 1913).19
In the light of the revival of interest in a 'mentalist' conception of language in North America since the mid-1960s and concomitantly a reappraisal
of the work of Wilhelm von Humboldt and his followers,20 which the early
17) For a comparison between Bloomfield's book of 1914 and his Language of 1933, cf. Esper in
his above-mentioned book (cf.note 14), pp. 186-208.
18) However, a careful analysis of Bloomfield's tenets may reveal a fairly deep influence of
Wundt's proposals in syntax; cf. W. Keith Percival's paper, "On the Historical Source of Immediate Constituent Analysis", Notes from the Linguistic Underground ed. by James D. McCawley (New York & London: Academic Press, 1976), 229-42, esp. pp.234-39.
19) Unlike Bloomfield's treatment of 'synchronic' semantics, a comparison between Bloomfield's views on meaning change in 1914 (p.244) and in 1933 (p.428) reveals a very similar viewpoint. More importantly, the actual cause for change is seen in the arbitrary relationship between
sound and sense (Bloomfield 1914:16; 1933:144-45). Cf. W. Terrence Gordon, A History of Semantics (Amsterdam: Benjamins, 1982), sect. 9.3 for details.
20) In his Introduction (1914) we find only two direct references to Humboldt's work and its importance in the development of 19th-century general linguistics (pp. 311.312). But since most general linguists of the period — not only Heymann Steinthal (1823-1899), Franz Nikolaus Finck
(1867-1910), Georg von der Gabelentz (1840-1893), and others, but also Hermann Paul and Wund4
— all of whom are mentioned quite frequently in Bloomfield's writings, were influenced by Humboldt's linguistic thought, we may safely say that Humboldtian ideas can be reckoned with in many
places in Bloomfield's writings without direct acknowledgment.
xvi
FOREWORD
Bloomfield referred to frequently in his earlier writings,21 a republication of
the book by the 27-year-old Bloomfield appears quite justified. Indeed, it is
my claim that Chomsky, who never tired in the 1960s and 1970s of attacking
Bloomfield's later behaviorist and 'mechanist' stance, would have hailed the
earlier Bloomfield — if only for polemical purposes — as expounding the
tradition to follow, if he had cared to read Bloomfield's Introduction to the
Study of Language of 1914.22 For the scholar interested in evaluating the motives that led Bloomfield to change his epistemological outlook on linguistic
science during the 1920s, the volume reprinted here is essential reading.
Les Jardins du Chateau, Quebec
October 1981
K. K.
21) For direct references to Humboldtian ideas in his earlier writings, cf. LBA 37 [1912], 61
[1914], 76 [1916], 129 [1926], 173 [1927], etc.; cf. also Bloomfield's Language (1933), pp.18-19.
22) I find this claim supported, albeit only indirectly, by Arthur Blumenthal's Language and
Psychology: Historical aspects of psycholinguistics (New York: J. Wiley & Sons, 1970), which
acknowledgedly was written in the M.I.T. Department of Linguistics, with Morris Halle and Noam
Chomsky providing support and office space (cf. Preface, p.x). More importantly perhaps, the
book was written with Chomsky's theory of language and his interest in establishing 'respectable
ancestors' in mind (cf. pp.8, 31-32. 47, and elsewhere).
INTRODUCTION
J O S E P H F. KESS
University of Victoria
Leonard Bloomfield (1887-1949) was responsible for two classic
textbooks in the field of linguistics. The second of these, Language (1933), is
familiar to most, but the first, An Introduction to the Study of Language
(1914), is not. We are, however, all familiar with the debate between mentalism and mechanism, a choice of philosophical views which strikes at the
very heart of language investigation. Bloomfield's role was a crucial one in
shaping the direction that the debate took for some time, yet it is on the basis
of his later work that this mechanistic orientation finds its origins. His earlier
1914 book, An Introduction to the Study of Language, shows some striking differences to his later views, reflecting much of the then-current thinking on language matters. As such, it represents not only an interesting commentary on
the theoretical development of an extremely influential linguist, but more importantly, it is a telling document in the evolving history of the discipline and a
rich source for the linguist or psycholinguist interested in how and why we got
from where we were to where we are. It not only suggests a background for
how the discipline shifted during Bloomfield's time, but it also provides a better perspective for how it shifts again with theoretical developments in the
1960s. It is thus primarily this earlier book that is of interest here, and this
short essay will attempt to bring into focus some of the Zeitgeist factors, particularly the psychology of Wilhelm Wundt, which influenced the substance
and direction of the early 1914 book. This introduction will have little to say
about the more recent history of linguistics since 1933, except insofar as it contrasts with the 1914 stage of Bloomfield's development. This has been done
elsewhere (Haas 1978; Hall 1969) and is not taken up here.
Bloomfield's early book fits into the gap left unfilled in the linguistic literature in the English language since Whitney's Language and the Study of Language (1867) and The Life and Growth of Language (1875). George Melville
XV111
JOSEPH F. KESS
Boiling (1871-1963), editor of Language for the first fifteen years of its existence, in reviewing it, compared it to Hermann Paul's Prinzipien der
Sprachgeschichte (1880; 5th and last revised edition in 1920), noting that
"there is no work in the English language with which it should be compared"
(Boiling 1917; reprinted in Hockett, 1970:50). Possibly the most respected
and influential codification of linguistics, that is, historical linguistics, up to
Bloomfield's time had been Paul's Prinzipien. While historical-comparative
linguistics was the initial arena for a highly structured orientation towards language , the notion of the study of language as a natural science was also present
(see Koerner's discussion of August Schleicher in Koerner 1972, 1976), developing into what would become 'descriptive' or 'structural' linguistics. It
was not as if linguistics had no place in the human sciences; in fact, comparative linguistics had blossomed earlier and more rapidly than did psychology.
As a textbook, Bloomfield's 1914 book (henceforth B-1914) had some influence, though not as much as his 1933 text. One cannot underestimate the
value of an integrated model presented by a popular textbook. As Hall
(1969:192) noted of his later book, the influence that Bloomfield had "was
due primarily to the thorough organization of Bloomfield's book and the guidance in scientific method that many younger linguists found in his work and
no-one else's." Though Hall had Bloomfield's 1933 book (henceforth B-1933)
in mind, one can voice the same sentiment about thoroughness in the 1914
version as well. Even so, not all were happy about B-1914 in all respects. For
example, Bloomfield's use of innovative terminology was a feature neither
familiar to nor welcome by all. Diekhoff's (1915) review criticizes him for it, as
does Aron (1918). His work on Tagalog, published in 1917, also shows the
same characteristics, and he was accused by the Philippinist Blake (1919) of
having changed the face of Philippine structure by having used such innovative terminology there as well (see Kess 1979:215-218). This was a pattern
which was not to change between 1914 and 1933. In retrospect, a later structuralist generation of course found this entirely laudatory; for example,
Bloch's (1949:9) obituary not unexpectedly observes that "to some readers,
unaware of the danger that lies in the common sense view of the world,
Bloomfield's avoidance of everyday expressions may have sounded like
pedantry, his rigorous definitions like jargon."
The notion of Kuhnian paradigms (Kuhn 1970) in linguistics has attracted
a good deal of attention. Some, like Koerner (1972,1976) have attempted to
outline paradigmatic stages in the development of linguistics while others,
like Percival (1976), suggest that we simply abandon the search for paradigms
INTRODUCTION
xix
altogether. Psychology has also gone through its discussion of whether the
field of psychology has undergone Kuhnian stages in its evolutionary development during the past century and a half (see Weimer & Palermo 1973, and
Weimer 1974a, b). Regardless of the degree to which Kuhnian notions can be
applied to the history of linguistics or psycholinguistics, it remains the case
that there are interesting differences in the early B-1914 and the later B-1933,
particularly with respect to Bloomfield's psychology of language.
Psychology has tried itself in a number of different directions, and has
failed to come up with a dominant systematic paradigm for more than several
decades at a time. Some find this discouraging (see Hockett's introduction to
Esper 1973), while others (Mueller 1979) simply take this as a matter of
course. The systematic overview of psychology to which B-1914 owed intellectual allegiance was the one fashioned by Wilhelm Wundt (1832-1920). In
the meantime, we also see during the early part of this century a period during
which the goals and methods of psychology are open to question, and characterized by the pursuit of a unified view of the discipline of psychology. It was
during the latter part of this period that the later views that Bloomfield held in
the twenties and thirties regarding the lack of consensus in psychology must
have been forming. This disciplinary upheaval, coupled with his positive associations with the behaviorist Albert Paul Weiss (1879-1931) likely contributed to his appreciation of the emerging paradigm in psychology, but it also
led to his concluding that linguistics could ultimately do without allegiance to
a given system of psychology in its formation as an independent science.
While one may not agree with Kuhn's attempts to relativize the practice
of science, one certainly can appreciate in Kuhn's arguments the notion that a
given stage may be largely the product of the ideas of given period. So one may
say that Bloomfield was a product of the intellectual tenor of his times as well
as his particular academic training. His early work very much reflects, as did
much of American academe in philology and psychology, the prominence of
German intellectual institutions. Many of the early linguists and philologists
were trained in part or in whole at German universities or received their training under American scholars who had themselves undergone such training.
Bloomfield himself took further studies at Leipzig and Gottingen with scholars like August Leskien (1840-1916), Karl Brugmann (1849-1919), and Hermann Oldenberg (1854-1920) in 1913 and 1914, several years after his Chicago
doctorate (1909). Bloomfield's roots, even more so than his contemporaries
Boas and Sapir, thus were also in the neogrammarian tradition, having been
trained in comparative linguistics. His work not only reflects this training in
XX
JOSEPH F. KESS
the rigors of Junggrammatiker traditions in historical-comparative linguistics,
but his 1914 book also shows the specific influence of Leipzig's Wilhelm
Wundt on the psychology of the period. Wundt's psychology of language was
easily available to a Germanic scholar like Bloomfield before his Leipzig visit,
and he must also have listened to Wundt's lectures more than once while
there. Bloomfield was only twenty-six at this time and twenty-seven when his
1914 book was published, a formative stage in his intellectual career no doubt.
Wundt's influential Die Spyache was already in its third edition by this time,
having first appeared more than a dozen years earlier.
Psychology, in the period between 1870 and the First World War was
largely mentalistic, due largely to the influence of Wundt, and the intellectual
tradition in German thought. Its method is typically recorded as being that of
introspection. Wundt is seen by many modern psychologists as the 'father of
experimental psychology', though their uses of the term 'experimental' are by
no means identical. Testimony to his candidacy for this position in the history
of psychology is seen reflected in the centennial of the original 1879 opening of
Wundt's Leipzig laboratory recently celebrated by the World Congress of
Psychology's decision to convene in the same site in 1980. Psychologists prior
to his time, however, found themselves logically within departments of
philosophy, just as Wundt himself had; in fact, Wundt first shared the chair of
philosophy with a philologist. It was, after all, only in 1888 that the first professorship of psychology in the world was filled by James McKeen Cattell (18601944), also a student of Wundt's at Leipzig between 1883-86, at the University
of Pennsylvania.
Wundt has been seen by many of late as a kind of early cognitive
psycholinguist, very much akin to the modern sense. Some of his ideas have
found a renewed respect among many generativist - oriented psycholinguists. Indeed, Blumenthal (1970) even characterizes him as the 'master
psycholinguist'. Wundt was interested in the investigation of the regularities
of certain mental behaviors in an 'experimental' setting. It is interesting to
note that although Wundt is in this sense typically associated with the experimental control of introspection, only four of the one hundred and eighty articles (between 1881 and 1902) in Wundt's journal, Philosophische Studien,
contain introspections; he once even argues against the introspective approach, and is highly critical of both Titchenerian and Wiirzburg introspectionism at the turn of the century (A.L. Blumenthal, personal communication). His functional mentalism did allow experimental approaches to the
conditions of a stimulus situation and observation of reported changes in the
INTRODUCTION
xxi
experience of the observer. In being an advocate of experimental control of
any condition in a scientific sense, dealing with introspection or otherwise,
Wundt changed the orientation of the field, and in fact, allowed the field of
psychology to become what it has become. In admitting both the notions of
experiment and mathematical evaluation to psychology, Wundt was following interests that European scholars had in extending notions of the highly
successful natural sciences like biology and organic chemistry to the study of
human behavior. It was no wonder that his methods were so appealing and his
school at Leipzig attracted younger scholars of the time. It was more than just
the intellectual climate that allowed Wundt's stature; he had a great deal to
say and it was worth paying heed to.
His laboratory and lectures were frequented by both students and scholars from abroad. Many of the early prominent American psychologists were
one-time students under Wundt, though some later were unhappy about
Wundt's influence on American psychology (see Rieber 1980); the list of his
students included Granville Stanley Hall (1844-1924) and James McKeen
Cattell (1860-1944), and the transplanted Edward Bradford Titchener (18671927) and Hugo Miinsterberg (1863-1916) as well as Edward Wheeler Scripture (1864-1945), Edward Aloysius Pace (1861-1938), George Malcolm
Stratton (1865-1957), Lightner Witmer (1867-1956), and Charles Hubbard
Judd (1873-1946). Although the American version of Wundtian psychology
somewhat modified his views (see Blumenthal 1980), it is obvious that he was
influential in the early development of American psychological practices
(particularly in the area of laboratory instrumentation) through his returning
students. One recalls, moreover, that from about 1850 to 1914 much of
American academe, Eastern schools as well as the heavily German-settled
Middle West, looked to Central Europe for its model. Leipzig in fact remained a flourishing center of activity until the war and its aftermath disrupted much of European academic life, eventually breaking its overwhelming influence in many American circles. Hall (1969:211) provides some
further, more personal reasons for the continuing later decline of European
influence in the post-war depression years, when resentment against European scholars in American was also linked to more mundane pragmatic forces
like job placement, as well as the intellectual ones we might have expected.
Language had an important place in Wundt's psychology. His major
psycholinguistic work, the Die Sprache of 1900 (revised in 1904 and in 191112), introduced his ten-volume Völkerpsychologie (1900-1920) as the first
book of the series. The original 644-page volume was even revised upwards to
XX11
JOSEPH F. KESS
1,378 pages in the 1912 edition (Blumenthal 1979). Wundt had not only a profound impact on the psychology of the time, but he also exerted a certain degree of influence in linguistics at the turn of the century. Wundt was true to his
philosophical origins, and everything in its turn was linked, deriving from a set
of primary principles; but it was from psychological principles that all others
were to be derived, including linguistic principles. Clearly, Wundt was very
much aware of what was transpiring in the adjacent field of philology. Wundt
had maintained a running dispute with Paul and in 1901 (Wundt 1901) had
answered Delbriick's (1901) critique of his (1900) Die Sprache with a complete statement of what was for him the relationship between psychology and
historical and descriptive linguistics. As Baker and Mos (1979:3) note, "an
analysis of the exchanges which took place between Wundt and the linguist,
Delbriick, reveals Wundt's extensive command of and respect for the linguistics literature, and his acceptance of the philologist's premise that he could
achieve an understanding 'of each social group through the analysis of its language, believing that the very vocabulary and grammar of a people reveal its
psychic constitution'... The writings over the last thirty years of Wundt's life
(1890-1920) clearly reflect his pursuit of this area, an area he had labelled Volkerpsychologie."
Bloomfield was very much aware of not only Wundt, but also the
specifics of his work. For example, his (1913) review of Wundt's Elemente der
Volkerpsychologie, appearing in the American Journal of Psychology, has nothing but the highest praise for the scope and content of the work. Bloomfield
writes that
the monumental volumes of Wundt's Volkerpsychologie find not only a summary but also a crowning supplement in the Elemente der Volkerpsychologie.
Here the entire mental history of man is outlined in a continuous narrative...
it is safe to say that no other man could have told the story as Wundt has; his
vast learning, powerful psychologic insight, vivid sense of history, and, not
least, his stylistic ability to present states of flow and change have produced a
work of trememdous and awing effect. (Bloomfield 1913; repr. in Hockett
1970:39)
In the preface to his 1914 book (p. vi), Bloomfield also outlines his intellectual allegiance to Wundt, saying "it will be apparent, especially, that I depend for my psychology, general and linguistic, entirely on Wundt; I can only
hope that I have not misrepresented his doctrine. The day is past when students of mental sciences could draw on their own fancy or on 'popular
psychology' for their views of mental occurrence."
INTRODUCTION
XX111
Bloomfield seems to have acquiesced completely to Wundt's establishment of psychology as the propaedeutic science. He observes (1914:322-23)
that
the relation of linguistics to psychology is, on the one hand, implied in the
basic position of the latter among the mental sciences. These sciences, studying the various activities of man, demand in differing degrees but nonetheless
universally, a constant psychologic interpretation .... As language is in its
forms the least deliberate of human activities, the one in which rationalizing
explanations are most grossly out of place, linguistics is, of all the mental sciences, most in need of guidance at every step by the best psychologic insight
available.
Wundt's influence is also clearly seen in several early chapters in the
book. By far the most interesting chapters in this regard are Chapter I, 'The
Nature and Origin of Language', and Chapter III, T h e Mental Basis of Language' (neatly contrasting with Chapter II, 'The Physical Basis of Language').
B-1914 was also sympathetic to psychological interpretations of language as
an outgrowth of folk or ethnic mental life, and certainly Bloomfield's discussion of gesture language and the origins of language mirror Wundt's teachings
fairly closely. In the early years of the century, whether or not one agreed with
Wundt, one would certainly have had to cope with his ideas on the psychology
of language in setting out a detailed explication of what it was that linguistic
science was dealing with. One could not ignore him, and in dealing with the
topic of language, the options would have been either to agree with him or
present compelling arguments why not. There was nothing that would have
replaced Wundtian psychology on the same grand scale, had one the temerity
to reject it wholesale. And indeed, there was so much of Wundt, considering
the voluminous output which characterized his professional life (Boring
[1950] has estimated that Wundt must have produced at a rate averaging 2.2
pages every day between 1853 and 1920 to turn out an astounding 53,735
pages), so that one could find argument and counter-argument for most fresh
approaches if one took the time to look.
As Lane (1945) observes, Wundt's influence was a force to be reckoned
with, and even Hermann Paul (1846-1921), in the fourth (1909) edition of his
Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte, continued their dispute by putting its work in
perspective with respect to Wundt's notions. But by the fifth (1920) edition,
"his quarrel is not with any 'system' of psychology, but... with Wundt's operation with a Volkerpsychologie instead of an individual psychology—the same
objection he had earlier made to Steinthal and Lazarus' work" (Lane,
xxiv
JOSEPH F. KESS
1945:472). It is unlikely that the early Bloomfield would have been in a position to have challenged or ignored the powerful Wundtian system in his 1914
work. But by 1933 he could and did, to the degree that Wundtian notions were
still prominent enough to even be criticized. By the time of B-1933 AngloAmerican empiricism and pragmatism had already challenged and largely replaced Wundtian psychology. The later Bloomfield, of course, was by then
highly formalistic, concentrating on a mechanistic view of language and laying
the foundations for a highly operationalized methodology.
But it should also be pointed out that the early Bloomfield saw the value
of language data for psychology as well. Thus, note the following quote where
Bloomfield observes that
psychology makes a wide use of the results of linguistics... such mental processes, then, as those involved in the utterance of speech cannot find their
explanation in the individual, — h e receives his speech habits from others, —
but must be traced for explanation from individual to individual ad infinitum.
They are products of the mental action not of a single person, but of a community of individuals. These products, — not only language but also myth,
art, and custom, — are the data which make possible the second phase of
psychology, social psychology (German Völkerpsychologie).
As language,
moreover, is less subject than these other activities to individual deliberate
actions which interfere with the communal nexus, it is the most important domain in the study of social psychology. (1914:323-24)
In looking for the beginnings of psychology and linguistics as sciences,
there are a limited number of originators. In linguistics, one has Bloomfield,
and in psychology, one has Wundt; both were specifically intent on defining
the boundaries of the scientific enterprise which came in each of their respective fields to so bear their imprint. In looking for beginnings of psychology as a
science, some (see Mueller 1979) find Wundt a more convincing candidate for
'founding father' than other contemporaries like Gustav Theodor Fechner
(1801-1887), Hermann Ludwig Ferdinand von Helmholtz (1821-94), and William James (1842-1910) for several reasons. There is his initiation of the
world's first psychological journal Philosophische Studien (Leipzig, 18831903, 20 volumes) as well as his founding the world's first experimental
laboratory at Leipzig in 1879. But there is also the matter of perceived intent.
Wundt claimed that he was setting out to establish experimental psychology as
a new science, and this he did in the first edition (1874) of Grundziige der
physiologischen Psychologie [Principles of Physiological Psychology] —
'physiological' having come to mean 'experimental' by this time. One should
still admit, as Mueller (1979) has done, that there were many paths, represent-
INTRODUCTION
XXV
ing different names, ideas, and events that contributed to the development of
psychology around the turn of the century. In this respect, the Wundt of 1879
is best seen as a symbol of those converging ideas and events; Wundt is convenient to focus upon, with the highly systematized psychology that he offered.
It was perhaps not that Wundt was really the great innovator as much as he
was a great synthesizer. His presentation of psychology as a science, and systematic organization of the field must have been attractive to younger scholars
like Bloomfield, who in his turn provided the same kind of systematic synthesis for the study of language, both in 1914 and in 1933. Simply stated, it is not
always easy to demonstrate where 'paradigms' leave off and begin, for scholars who are depicted as revolutionizing a field in the Kuhnian sense are usually
found to have historical antecedents whose thoughts they carry on (see Percival 1976, for an example of this in linguistics). Moreover, one must also give
some credence to the intellectual climate of the times, such that figures must
be seen in the light of their times and their discipline. Whether our picture of
Wundt is an accurate one or not has been questioned by some (Blumenthal
1979, characterizes him as the "founding father we never knew"). But
whether or not Wundt was quietly reinterpreted, by Titchener, and by the historian Edwin Garrigue Boring (1886-1968) after him, as Blumenthal (1979,
1980) suggests, is a difficulty one faces with most earlier scholars. They are
often interpreted through one's own particular training and set of theoretical
and methodological positions. For example, Wundt's experimental journal,
Philosophische Studien, is a good indication of Wundt and his contemporaries' feelings that philosophy and psychology were one. Indeed, Wundt
himself authored four texts in philosophy between 1880 and the turn of the
century. His experimental journal was equally devoted to philosophy and
psychology, containing both reports of experimental studies from his laboratory and philosophical discussions, and later even changed its name to
Psychologische Studien (Leipzig, 1906-17, 10 vols.), Wundt did believe that
philosophy should be more psychological, and in this, he was innovative.
The latter-day student of historical antecedents is often left with a disciplinary history which is written from the bias of the reviewer. Witness, for
example, Weimer's (1974a) contrasting of Blumenthal vs. Boring's presentation of Wundt to us or Marshall's (1970) review of Blumenthal vs. Esper's account of the substance and relevance of Wundt to current psycholinguistics.
History is not only written by the victors; it happens to be rewritten by every
scholar who looks back, and in so doing to some degree squares history with
his/her own theoretical and methodological bias, setting it either at odds or in
xxvi
JOSEPH F. KESS
concert with it.
There is also some question as to just how 'experimental' Wundt was in
his experimental psychology. According to Blumenthal (1979:550), "for
Wundt, 'experiment' meant the study of processes by means of publicly observable and measurable events. Introspective reports, in anything like Titchener's style, are indeed very rare in the experiments that came out of the early
Leipzig laboratory." According to Erwin Allen Esper's (1895-1972) account,
this interpretation is incorrect, and Esper (1971) neither sees Wundt as the important psycholinguistic figure that Blumenthal does nor the experimental
value of introspection as a psychological method. Even Blumenthal (1979)
notes that the massive Völkerpsychologie involves no experimentation, despite the attention paid to psycholinguistic matters. As an exceptionally lucid
piece of deductive speculation, it is quite compatible, though, with the modern generativist frame of reference.
To some like Blumenthal (1970, 1973, 1975, 1977), Wundt's theories
seem especially modern. Wundt's goal as a psychologist was "to give an
explicit characterization of the principles that govern the functioning of cognition in humans, and it was his belief that the study of human language would
provide one of the best means of knowledge about the human mind" (Blumenthal 1973:11). Chomsky's (1968,1972) injunction about linguistics being
a subbranch of cognitive psychology sounds neither innovative nor startling in
this epistemological frame of reference. Moreover, Wundt had similar notions about generating an infinite array of sentences from finite means, a precursory notion of deep and surface structure ('inner and outer forms'), and the
idea of the sentence as the basic unit. It is no wonder that generativists have rediscovered him with such delight.
Thus, for Blumenthal (1970:242) and others, if we now ask
what is the historical relevance of the new American psycholinguistics as a
discipline today, assuming it to be heavily under the influence of the developments in generative grammar. It is, in fact, in an analogous position to that of
Wundt and his followers who in the 1880s opposed the Junggrammatiker (or
narrow empiricist) tradition in linguistics because of its strict limitation of linguistic study to descriptions of utterances. The Junggrammatikers
had
studied only the physical shape of inventories. Wundt then revived the Humboldtian notions about language, essentially the same notions that were recently revitalized in overcoming the limitations of American behavioral linguistics.
Chomsky is pictured as the one who succeeded the preceding paradigm, and
INTRODUCTION
XXV11
in this respect, leapfrogs back as a parallel to Wundtian psychology in both
ideas and achievements. (Not everyone, of course, agrees with the thesis that
Wundt should be honored as Chomsky's ancestor nor that there is even any
honor in such a claim; see Esper 1971.) Chomsky claims that linguistics and
psychology both had failed to reach their full and proper potential by concentrating instead on 'taxonomy' and empirical studies. They are from the
Chomskyan point of view trivial insofar as they do not inform us of anything
vital about the essential nature of language. Chomsky's traditions instead are
to be traced, like the early 1914 Bloomfield, from a line of thought more akin
to one in which Wundt's interests would have been compatible. For Chomsky,
the Cartesian philosophy of language, the Port-Royal grammarians, and finally Humboldt himself, are more fitting prototype figures in terms of their interests in language.
Linguists of the last century were more like philologists in our terms.
Given the Humboldtian view of language and thought which so permeated
much of the contemporary work on language, one of their chief preoccupations was to determine how ethnic character and culture were reflected in language, how concepts might be differently expressed in different languages.
But true to the philosophical proclivities of philologists of the period, there
was more speculation about the nature of such considerations in language
than there was actual research into the formal mechanics of given languages.
The practical details were often left to missionaries, teachers, and others who
had a need for such things, while the underlying human essence of language
was considered more properly approached by deductive means. The influence of ideas about language is seen in Wundt's Völkerpsychologie treatment
of national psychology and the psychology of language. According to Blumenthal (1973:15), "this is again the Humboldtian influence... the spirit of a
society may largely be influenced by the structure and the nature of the language that binds it together." This tradition, though not necessarily through
Wundt, is also found in the work of Boas, Sapir, and their followers in North
America, but does not figure as prominently in the work of Bloomfield's followers.
The psychological interpretation of language was not unique to Wundt.
One also sees it in the writings of his predecessor Heymann Steinthal (18231899), as well as In the American philologist William Dwight Whitney (18271894). Bloomfield himself pays homage to this tradition in noting (1914:312)
that
xxviii
JOSEPH F. KESS
both of these men have been followed by numerous investigators who have
contributed to our understanding of the mental processes of speech and of its
change and development in time; the great advance of psychology in recent
decades and the rise of social and ethnologic studies have been, of course, of
the highest benefit to this phase of the science of language.
Diekhoff s (1915) review of B-1914 in fact criticizes Bloomfield for just
such notions stemming from his following earlier philologists and Wundt a little too closely in their Humboldtian notions of the relationship between language and ethnic character. Diekhoff (1915; repr. in Hockett 1970:47) observes that
it is quite true, as our author means to illustrate, "that the categoric and other
distinctions of one's own language are not universal forms of expression or of
experience"; yet the conclusion ought not to be pressed too hard that the
idiomatic differences between various languages indicate a corresponding
difference in the mental make-up of the peoples concerned ... I cannot convince myself that in this outward remedy of a growing indistinctness any corresponding psychological change should have been involved ... Modes of utterance, or idiomatic turns are very often the result of the most curious historical development, and they no more adequately express psychological operations, than the sound of the individual word can be said to cover a single
psychological concept. Both become conventional ...
Diekhoff further criticizes him for his treatment of the nature and origin
of language, particularly the notion that gesture language was the result of
earlier purposeful movements, and that these accompanied by vocal utterances, ultimately form the original basis of language. Diekhoff characterizes
this as a matter of faith more than a demonstrable fact, and the faith is obviously one placed in Wundt's notions about gesture language. Bloomfield
(1913) himself had noted of Wundt that his discussion of "the origin of language is splendidly treated... toward this we find in the Elemente only a sketch
of the origin of vocal language in the light of gesture (Wundt's greatest single
linguistic contribution lies here)...." (Bloomfield 1913; repr. in Hockett
1970:40). It is obvious that B-1914 notions about gesture language and language origins must have been directly distilled from Wundt.
Wundt's work fits between the two positivist cycles in European thought,
the first during the mid-19th century, the second around World War I. The
second period sees positivism coupled with behaviorism as a popular
philosophy of science. The academic scene witnesses the rise of AngloAmerican empiricism and pragmatism, and the strong turn toward a positivist
philosophy of science makes for a final undermining of Wundt's place of
INTRODUCTION
xxix
prominence. With psychology considered a natural science, enhanced by the
physiological interests which had become so much a part of the discipline,
Wundt's concerns were seen as strictly metaphysical and at odds with psychology as a natural science. Eventually this positivist view won out almost completely and Wundt was largely eclipsed in the discipline's development (see
Danziger 1979, and Blumenthal 1975, for a fuller account of the positivist replacement of Wundt).
Whether Wundt himself presaged the move to radical behaviorism by his
pushing psychology out of philosophy into the natural sciences is questionable, but it is interesting to note that this desire for a new and independent science using experimental methods in the analysis of mental events does give
rise to the next logical step. Here American positivism led to radical behaviorism with its concentration on experimental methods and observable
and replicable features (see Baker & Mos 1979). Wundt perhaps provided the
catalyst by which this turn of events essentially materialized.
The intellectual climate changed in the aftermath of the First World War,
and Wundtian mentalistic psychology gave way to behaviorism, at least in
North America. By the time B-1933 appears, the decline was largely complete, and German intellectual hegemony too was considerably weakened.
Others like George Herbert Mead had also changed their appreciative impressions of Wundtian notions, and Bloomfield was not alone in having come full
circle in abandoning Wundt's notions on the psychology of language (see Blumenthal 1973:16-17). Behaviorism in psychology had largely captured the
American academic imagination, and by the 1920s this type of psychology was
fashionable not only amongst professional academics, but also in the popular
sense. John B. Watson's Psychology from the Standpoint of a Behaviorist
(1919) and A.P. Weiss' A Theoretical Basis of Human Behavior (1824,1929)
were very much in evidence and were to largely replace what vestiges of Central European functional mentalism remained on this continent. One can see
B-1914's adherence to Wundtian psychology as being quite out of place, had
he continued with such loyalties in B-1933. In Mueller's (1979:28) words,
Wundt's way of thinking about psychology, and the thinking of those that followed in his tradition, did not contain the essential ingredients that could
have generated twentieth century psychology... one is struck by the fact that
all [but Wundt] are characterized by experimental or observational procedures that are still acceptable as bona fide scientific procedure. The one line
of inquiry that specified, and was based on, an "experimental" procedure
that is not judged acceptable as a method of scientific investigation at the pre-
XXX
JOSEPH F. KESS
sent time is the line established by Wundt. The paradox is that psychology has
selected as the founder of its science a man whose line of inquiry brought with
it no acceptable experimental method.
Wundtian psychology was simply not compatible with the turn of events in
psychology, nor the kind of behavioristic positivism that Bloomfield and
others in the 1930s subscribed to. While such Wundtian belief systems were
perfectly acceptable in their 1914 context, by 1930 they would have been both
outmoded and incompatible with the developments that were taking place in
the behavioral sciences in America. In contrasting the two intellectual climates and noting the pendulum swings between objectivism and mentalism
in psychology and other social sciences over the last two centuries, Esper
(1968) even suggests that we would have been better off staying where the
Bloomfieldian swing took us rather than having continued on into another
mentalism, namely, that of Chomsky. This, however, may be far from a
majority opinion in the discipline.
Just as the sociology of Durkheim is said to have had an influence on
Saussure, so also did the behaviorist psychology of Albert Paul Weiss (18791931) on the later Bloomfield during the 1920s, when both were at Ohio State
University. How highly Bloomfield thought of Weiss is captured in Bloomfield's obituary of Weiss: "Weiss was not a student of language, but he probably was the first man to see its significance" (Bloomfield 1931; repr. in Hockett 1970:237). Bloomfield moved from a Wundtian view that language could
be accounted for only in terms of human psychology to a Weissian view that
rather human psychology can only be accounted for in human language terms.
According to Hockett (see Esper 1973:xiv), "Weiss helped Bloomfield to
realize that the traditional psychological 'explanations' of this or that feature
of language were nothing more than paraphrases, in mentalistic terms, of
what could be (and often enough already had been) perfectly well described in
purely linguistic terms." Although this particular form of behaviorism did not
hold center-stage in either psychology or linguistics, it did have sufficient impact on linguistics to endow the discipline with the particular complexion it
had from the 1930s to the mid-1950s. Bloomfield had already swung over to
the position that it makes little difference which psychology the linguist accepts by the time his programmatic article "A Set of Postulates for a Science of
Language" (1926) appeared, and the period of psychology-independent
structuralism probably finds its origins here as well as anywhere else.
Weiss' influence is particularly obvious in Bloomfield's (1930) presentation of "Linguistics as a Science". His beliefs regarding linguistics being a sci-
INTRODUCTION
xxxi
ence are still firm, but what this entails is somewhat modified from his 1914
position. No longer does one find explanations of the 'why' of human linguistic behavior; description thereof is sufficient. Bloomfield observes,
linguists do not pretend to explain conditions or changes by saying that the
speakers strove toward such an end, such as euphony or clearness, and when
linguists speak of a soul or a mind, the term is otiose.... It is true that in the
last years some students of language have tried to galvanize the finalistic and
animistic factors into some effect upon linguistic forms, but these scholars
have in this way produced nothing but less useful restatements of results that
were gained by the ordinary methods of linguistic study. (Bloomfield 1930;
repr. in Hockett 1970:229).
These Weissian notions are also evident in Bloomfield's criticism (1933:17) of
Paul's psychological interpretations of language characteristics, noting that
Paul was given to "statements about language with a paraphrase in terms of
mental processes which the speakers are supposed to have undergone. The
only evidence for these mental processes is the linguistic process; they add nothing to the discussion, but only obscure it."
Whether Bloomfield recognized that in the Kuhnian sense psychology is
also given to cycles of thought and paradigms of activity is difficult to discern;
however, like his predecessor Delbruck, he came to eschew such choices between theories in what had become a separate and distinct field. Delbruck's
advice (1901), of course, was to simply ignore developments in psychology
and proceed with the linguistic business at hand. In Delbruck's time, the
choice was between the rigorous mathematical psychology of Johann Friedrich Herbart (1776-1841) and Wundt; in Bloomfield's time the choices were
different, but the principle of disciplinary independence remained for Bloomfield to enforce. Wundt had attempted to replace Herbart's mechanistic and
associationistic psychology with a new experimental psychology, seeing
psychology as the propaedeutic core science, not one as subordinate to or
even partner with other sciences of human behavior. Language is the result of
psychological processes, and one extrapolates from this that the study of
philology and psychology must be linked. And of course looking at his massive Völkerpsychologie volumes one can easily see how for Wundt the entire
complex of human organizational phenomena is ultimately psychological.
Delbruck's conclusion (1901) that it makes little or no difference which system
of psychology, Wundtian or Herbartian, is chosen was for Wundt a rejection of
psychology altogether, since Wundt was himself so convinced of the superiority of his own system (see Kantor 1936:51-53). Delbruck simply saw no par-
XXX11
JOSEPH F. KESS
ticular advantage in understanding or explaining language by choosing one
psychological system over the other, and in so doing, simply rejects them both
as interesting, but not germane. In so doing, Delbriick sets the stage for
Bloomfield's similar rejection of psychology. Where Delbriick would probably have seen some superiority in Wundtian psychology, Bloomfield would
have seen for his own intellectual position the same compatibility in behaviorist psychology; however, a choice was not required, and linguistic science could, in his view, independently proceed without being wedded to
either of these or any other system of psychology.
Thinking probably of Delbriick, Bloomfield (1933:vii) writes, "in 19141
based this phase of the exposition on the psychologic system of Wilhelm
Wundt, which was then widely accepted", but "since that time there has been
much upheaval in psychology; we have learned, at any rate, what one of our
masters suspected thirty years ago, namely, that we can pursue the study of
language without reference to any one psychological doctrine, and that to do
so safeguards our results and makes them more significant to workers in related fields." That the relationship could even be reversed, with linguistics
having a good deal to offer psychology, is obvious in Bloomfield's (1933:32)
suggestion that "the findings of the linguist, who studies the speech signal, will
be all the more valuable for the psychologist if they are not distorted by any
prepossessions about psychology. We have seen that many of the older linguists ignored this [perhaps having Hermann Paul in mind]; they vitiated or
skimped their reports by trying to state everything in terms of some
psychological theory." Although B-1933 carefully makes explicit its intention
to set aside psychological considerations in delineating linguistics as a science,
one should admit that the mechanistic principles of behaviorism were not only
more compatible with the new linguistics, but also likely to be preferred.
Thus one comes full circle from B-1914 to B-1933. Though Bloomfield
called his 1933 book a "revised version of the author's Introduction to the
Study of Language", his reviewers immediately comment on the fact of its
being a totally new book. For example, Edgerton (1933; repr. in Hockett
1970:258), "this is really a wholly new book"; Meillet (1933; repr. in Hockett
1970:264), "au lieu de faire de son ancien ouvrage une edition corrigee, il a
ecrit un livre nouveau fonde sur des theories purement linguistiques"; Sturtevant (1934; repr. in Hockett 1970: 265), "in reality, however, it is a new
book." One also detects a certain relief on the part of some that the early
Wundtian allegiance has disappeared. For example, Kroesch (1933; repr. in
Hockett 1970:261), "the author wisely emphasizes the facts of language
INTRODUCTION
XXX111
throughout rather than psychological interpretations"; Boiling (1935; repr. in
Hockett 1970:278), "the second drive has for its objective the elimination of
'psychological explanations' from our work. Again I am in hearty agreement
with the author... [that] such theories add nothing to our understanding of our
own problems...".
The fact of Bloomfield's being subject to Kuhnian considerations does
not in any way diminish Bloomfield's stature at either point in his career. As
Koerner (1976:708) has suggested, the fact that scholars are reflections "of
their time and not creatores ex nihilo does not by any means diminisii their attainments; their creativity and originality lie in the very fact that they were
capable of making use of the things that were in the air and put forward a
synthesis, a general theory of language, in a rigorous manner not proposed by
any of their contemporaries." In Bloomfield's case, this is all the more enlightening for us, for we can observe both the intellectual tenor which went
into the molding of the discipline as a separate entity and the subsequent shift
to positivism. For those who fail to see the archeological merit in this stratigraphic layering of the evolution of ideas within our own discipline, it will at least
allow them to glimpse their own mentalistic position through the eyes of an
earlier mentalism.
We are at a critical turn in the development of our own understanding of
the discipline. Lest we allow the pendulum swings between mentalism and objectivism to presage yet another, we must make the most of what we have
learned from the past. As Blumenthal (1974:1131) has noted,
the real successes of both the comparative linguistics in the nineteenth century and of the behaviorist linguistics in the twentieth century were concerned with methodology, procedures, and techniques. Those times in both
centuries were perhaps paralleled by similar movements within psychology
in general. The Wundtians, no less than some recent psychologists, then discovered that positivistic psychology was in need of explanatory theory, of a
more sophisticated cognitive psychology...
What we perhaps need now is a new and informed experimental mentalism,
one which allows us to understand mental events, but by inductive means to
balance out our deductive speculations about language and cognition. Unless
we do so, we risk another swing, perhaps even another exciting new
paradigm, but one which ultimately is not as informative as the experimental
mentalism alternative.
Finally, it might be said that we are in many ways what we were and many
of our questions have been also asked in different times and different places.
xxxiv
JOSEPH F. KESS
As Percival (1976) has suggested, the history of our discipline, as all others, is
a history of the progression of ideas, and Bloomfield's Introduction to the
Study of Language of 1914 is a reflection of ideas that come together from a
variety of intellectual sources to focus at one point in the history of the discipline that has become the one we are. One welcomes the re-issuing of a classic
in the field of linguistics, and given both the intellectual origins of Bloomfield's earlier psychology of language and the paradigmatic impact of his later
views on linguistic thought in this century, a classic in psycholinguistics as
well.
REFERENCES
Aron, Albert W. 1918. Review of Bloomfield 1914. American Journal of
Philology 39.86-92. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 54-60.)
Baker, William J., and Mos, Leendert P. 1979. "Mentalism and Language in
(and Out of) Psychology." Paper presented at the American Psychological
Association Convention, New York, N.Y., September.
Blake, Frank R. 1919. Review of Bloomfield 1917. American Journal of
Philology 4.86-93. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 82-89.)
Bloch, Bernard. 1949. "Obituary Notice for Leonard Bloomfield." Language
25.87-94. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 524-532.)
Bloomfield, Leonard. 1913. Review of Wilhelm Wundt's Elemente der Volkerpsychologie. American Journal of Psychology 24.449-453. (Repr. in
Hockett 1970, pp. 39-43.)
—-. 1914. An Introduction to the Study of Language. New York: Henry Holt.
(Repr. in this volume.)
. 1915. "Sentence and Word". Transactions of the American Philological
Association 45.65-75. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 61-69.)
- — . 1917. "Subject and Predicate". Transactions of the American Philological Association 47.13-22. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 70-77.)
. 1917. Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis. (= University of Illinois
Studies in Language and Literature, 3, Nos. 2-4.)
. 1926. "A Set of Postulates for the Science of Language". Language
2.253-164. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 128-138.)
. 1930. "Linguistics as a Science". Studies in Philology 27.533-557. (Repr.
in Hockett 1970, pp. 227-230.)
INTRODUCTION
XXXV
—--. 1931. "Obituary of Albert Paul Weiss". Language 7.219-221. (Repr. in
Hockett 1970, pp. 237-239.)
. 1933. Language. New York: Henry Holt.
Blumenthal, Arthur L. 1970. Language and Psychology: Historical Aspects of
Psycholinguistics. New York: John Wiley and Sons.
. 1973. "Introduction". Wilhelm Wundt, The Language of Gestures. (=
Approaches to Semiotics; Paperback series), 11-19. The Hague: Mouton.
. 1974. "An Historical View of Psycholinguistics". Current Trends in Linguistics, ed. by Thomas A. Sebeok, vol. 12, pp. 1105-1134.
. 1975. "A Reappraisal of Wilhelm Wundt". American Psychologist
30.1081-1088.
. 1977. The Process of Cognition. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall.
. 1979. "The Founding Father We Never Knew". Contemporary Psychology 24:7.547-550.
. 1980. "Wilhelm Wundt and Early American Psychology: A Clash of Cultures". Wilhelm Wundt and the Making of a Scientific Psychology, ed. by
Robert W. Rieber, pp. 117-135. New York: Plenum Press.
Boiling, George Melville. 1917. Review of Bloomfield 1914. The Classical
Weekly 10.166-168. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 50-54.
-----. 1935. Review of Bloomfield 1933. Language 11.251-252. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 277-78.) [Occasioned by the British edition, London: G.
Allen &Unwin, 1935.]
Boring, Edwin Garrigue. 1950. A History of Experimental Psychology. 2nd
Ed. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
Carroll, John B. 1953. The Study of Language: A Survey of Linguistics and
Related Disciplines in America. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Univ. Press.
Chomsky, Noam. 1968. Language and Mind. New York: Harcourt, Brace &
World. (2nd enlarged ed., 1972.)
Danziger, Kurt. 1979. "The Positivist Repudiation of Wundt". Journal of the
History of the Behavioral Sciences 15.205-230.
Delbriick, Berthold. 1901. Grundfagen der Sprachforschung mit Rucksicht
auf W. Wundt's Sprachpsychologie erörtert. Strassburg: Karl J. Triibner.
Diekhoff, Tobias. 1915. Review of Bloomfield 1914. Journal of English and
Germanic Philology 14.593-597. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 45-50.)
Edgerton, Franklin. 1933. Review of Bloomfield 1933. Journal of the American Oriental Society 53.295-297. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 258-260.)
Esper, Erwin Allen. 1968. Mentalism and Objectivism in Linguistics: The
Sources of Leonard Bloomfield's Psychology of Language. New York:
American Elsevier.
XXXVi
.
JOSEPH F. KESS
1971. Review of Blumenthal 1970. Language 47.979-984.
. 1973. Analogy and Association in Linguistics and Psychology. Athens:
University of Georgia Press.
Haas, William. 1978. "Linguistics 1930-1980". Journal of Linguistics 14.293308.
Haeberlin, Herman K. 1916. "The Theoretical Foundations of Wundt's FolkPsychology". The Psychological Review 23.279-302.
Hall, Robert A., Jr. 1959. "Obituary for Leonard Bloomfield". Lingua 2.117123. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp.547-553.)
— . 1969. "Some Recent Developments in American Linguistics".
Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 70.192-227.
Hass, Wilbur A. 1974. Review of Blumenthal 1970. Historiographia Linguistica 1:1.111-116.
Hockett, Charles F., Ed. 1970. A Leonard Bloomfield
Anthology.
Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Kantor, Jacob Robert. 1936. An Objective Psychology of Grammar.
Bloomington: The Principia Press. (Repr., 1952.)
Kess, Joseph F. 1979. "Focus, Topic, and Case in the Philippine Verbal
Paradigm". Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies, vol. 3, Nguyen Dang Liem,
ed. Pacific Linguistics, Series C-No. 45, pp. 213-239.
Koerner, E.F.K. 1972. "Towards a Historiography of Linguistics". Anthropological Linguistics 14.255-280.
. 1976. "Towards a Historiography of Linguistics". History of Linguistic
Thought and Contemporary Linguistics, ed. by Herman Parret, pp. 685718. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.
Kroesch, Samuel. 1933. Review of Bloomfield 1933. Journal of English and
Germanic Philology 32.594-597. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 260-264.)
Kuhn, Thomas S. 1970. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. 2nd Ed.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Lane, George S. 1945. "Changes of Emphasis in Linguistics with Particular
Reference to Paul and Bloomfield". Studies in Philology 42.465-483.
Leary, David E. 1979. "Wundt and After: Psychology's Shifting Relations
with the Natural Sciences, Social Sciences, and Philosophy". Journal of the
History of the Behavioral Sciences 15.231-241.
Marshall, John C. 1970. Review of Esper 1968. Semiotica 2.277-293.
Meillet, Antoine. 1933. Review of Bloomfield 1933. Bulletin de la Societe de
Linguistique de Paris 34:3.1-2. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 264-265.)
Mueller, Conrad G. 1979. "Some Origins of Psychology as Science". Annual
Review of Psychology 30.9-29.
INTRODUCTION
xxxvii
Paul, Hermann. 1880. Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte. Halle/S: M.
Niemeyer. (5th revised edition, 1920.)
Percival, W. Keith. 1976. "The Applicability of Kuhn's Paradigm to the History of Linguistics". Language 52.285-293.
Pulgram, Ernst. 1969. "Sciences, Humanities, and the Place of Linguistics".
Linguistics 53.70-92.
Rieber, Robert W. 1980. "Wundt and the Americans: From Flirtation to
Abandonment". Wilhelm Wundt and the Making of a Scientific Psychology, ed. by Robert W. Rieber, 137-51. New York: Plenum Press.
Rieber, Robert W., and Vetter, Harold J. 1979. "Theoretical and Historical
Roots of Psycholinguistic Research". Psycholinguistic Research: Implications and Applications, ed. by Robert W. Rieber and Doris Aaronson, pp.
21-61. Hilldale: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Robins, Robert H. 1967. A Short History of Linguistics. London: Longmans.
(2nd revised edition, 1979.)
Sebeok, Thomas A., Ed. 1966. Portraits of Linguists: A Biographical Source
Book for the History of Western Linguistics, 1746-1963. Vol. II.
Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Stent, Gunther S. 1972. "Prematurity and Uniqueness in Scientific Discovery". Scientific American 227:6.84-93.
Sturtevant, Edgar Howard. 1934. Review of Bloomfield 1933. The Classical
Weekly 27.129-160. (Repr. in Hockett 1970, pp. 265-266.)
Thomson, Robert. 1968. The Pelican History of Psychology. London: Penguin Books.
Watson, John B. 1919. Psychology from the Standpoint of a Bahaviorist.
Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Weimer, Walter B. 1974a. "The History of Psychology and its Retrieval from
Historiography: I. The Problematic Nature of History". Science Studies
4.235-258.
. 1974b. "The History of Psychology and its Retrieval from Historiography: II. Some Lessons for the Methodology of Scientific Research". Science Studies 4.367-396.
Weimer, Walter B., and Palermo, David S. 1973. "Paradigms and Normal
Science in Psychology". Science Studies 3.211-244.
Weiss, Albert Paul. 1924. A Theoretical Basis of Human Behavior. Columbus, Ohio: Adams. (2nd revised edition, 1929.)
Whitney, William Dwight. 1867. Language and the Study of Language. New
York: Scribners.
XXXV111
JOSEPH F. KESS
. 1875. The Life and Growth of Language. New York: Appleton.
Wundt, Wilhelm. 1874. Grundziige der physiologischen Psychologie. Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann.
. 1883. "Ueber psychologische Methoden". Philosophische Studien 1.140.
. 1897. Outlines of Psychology. Trans, by Charles Hubbard Judd. Leipzig:
Wilhelm Engelmann.
. 1900. Die Sprache. Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann. (Rev. ed. 1904; 3rd
ed. 1911-12.)
. 1901. Sprachgeschichte und Sprachpsychologie, mit Rucksicht auf B.
Delbrucks Grundfragen der Sprachforschung. Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann.
. 1900-1920. V lkerpsychologie: Eine Untersuchung der Entwicklungsgezetze von Sprache, Mythus und Sitte. 10 vols. Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann.
. 1973. The Language of Gestures. (= Approaches to Semiotics; Paperback Series, 6.) The Hague: Mouton.
AN INTRODUCTION
TO THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
BY
LEONARD
BLOOMFIELD
Ph. D., Assistant Professor of Comparative Philology and German
in the University of Illinois
LONDON
G. BELL AND SONS, LTD
NEW
YORK: HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY
TO
PEEFACE.
This little book is intended, as the title implies, for
the general reader and for the student who is entering
upon linguistic work. Its purpose is the same, accordingdy, as that of Whitney's Language and the Study of Language and The Life and Growth of Language, books which
fifty years ago represented the attainments of linguistic
science and, owing to their author's clearness of view
and conscientious discrimination between ascertained fact
and mere surmise, contain little to which we cannot today subscribe. The great progress of our science in the
last half-century is, I believe, nevertheless sufficient excuse for my attempt to give a summary of what is now
known about language.
That the general reader needs such information as is
here given was recognized by Whitney, who wrote, in
the preface of his first-named book: 'It can hardly admit
of question that at least so much knowledge of the nature, history, and classifications of language as is here
presented ought to be included in every scheme of higher
education.' While questions of a linguistic nature are
everywhere a frequent subject of discussion, it is surprising how little even educated people are in touch with
the scientific study of language. I hope that my book
will furnish a simple aid for those who choose to make
up this deficiency in our scheme of general education
Students whose vocation demands linguistic knowledge
are subjected in our universities to a detached course or
VI
PREFACE
two on details of the phonologic and morphologic history
of such languages as Old English, Gothic, or Old French,
— details which are meaningless and soon forgotten, if
no instruction as to their concrete significance has preceded. To this method of presentation is due, I think,
the dislike which so many workers in related fields bear
toward linguistic study. I hope that this essay may help
to introduce students of philosophy, psychology, ethnology, philology, and other related subjects to a juster
acquaintance with matters of language.
In accordance with this twofold aim, I have limited
myself to a presentation of the accepted doctrine, not
even avoiding well-used standard examples. In a few
places I have spoken of views that cannot claim more
than probability, of hypotheses, and of problems yet to
be solved, but I have done this explicitly and only because I think it fitting to indicate the direction in which
our study is at present tending. Consequently the matter
here presented is by no means my own, but rather the
property of all students of language. It will be found in
fuller form and with bibliographic support in the books
mentioned in Chapter Ten, and these books I may therefore name as my more immediate sources.1) It will be
apparent, especially, that I depend for my psychology,
general and linguistic, entirely on Wundt; I can only
hope that I have not misrepresented his doctrine. The
day is past when students of mental sciences could draw
on their own fancy or on 'popular psychology' for their
views of mental occurrence.
L. B.
1) Of Sweet's Primer of Phonetics the first, and of Meillet's
Introduction the second edition was used in compilation, but
the later editions do not, I believe, differ materially as to anything here discussed.
CONTENTS.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
6.
7.
8.
CHAPTER I
THE NATURE AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE.
Expressive movements
Gesture-language
Writing . ..
Audible expressive movements
Development of language in the child
The origin of language
Language constantly changing
Social character of language
. . . .
CHAPTER II.
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE.
1. Unconsciousness of speech-movements
2. Writing an imperfect analysis
8. The vocal chords
4. The velum
6. Oral articulation
.
. . . .
6. Oral noise-articulations
. .
7. Musical oral articulations
8. Infinite variety of possible sounds
9. Glides and mixtures of articulation
10. Syllables
11. Stress
12. Pitch
13. Duration
14. Limitation of articulations in each dialect. . . . .
15. Automatic variations
. . . . . .
Page
1
4
7
8
10
18
16
1 7
18
19
21
26
. 27
. 28
33
38
40
41
43
51
. 52
.53
. 54
VIII
CONTENTS
Page
CHAPTER III.
THE MENTAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
The place of language in our mental life
Total experiences
The analysis of total experiences
The naming of objects
The development of abstract words
Psychologic composition of the word
Grammatical categories
Psychologic character of the linguistic forms . . .
Psychologic motives of utterance
Interpretation of the linguistic phenomena . . . . .
66
56
59
63
65
66
67
. 6 9
70
71
CHAPTER IV.
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
The inarticulate outcry
73
Primary interjections
73
Secondary interjections
75
The arbitrary value of non-interjection al utterances .
77
The classifying nature of linguistic expression . . . .
82
Expression of the three types of utterance
90
The parts of utterances
.
92
The word: phonetic character
97
The word: semantic character
103
Word-classes
108
The sentence
.
. . 110
CHAPTER V
MORPHOLOGY.
1 The significance of morphologic phenomena . . . .
2. Morphologic classification by syntactic use (Parts of
speech)
3. Classification by congruence
4. Phonetic-semantic classes
.
5. Classes on a partially phonetic basis
6. Difference between morphologic classification and nonlinguistic association
7. Classes by composition
,
120
120
127
131
136
139
140
CONTENTS
IX
8. Derivation and inflection
9. The semantic nature of inflection: the commonest categories
10. The semantic nature of derivation
11. The phonetic character of the morphologic processes .
12. Word-composition: semantic value
13. Word-composition not a phonetic process
14. Simple word: compound: phrase
• .
Page
140
141
150
151
159
162
165
CHAPTER VI.
SYNTAX.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
The field of syntax
The discursive relations . .
The. emotional relations
. . • . . . . • .
Material relations
Syntactic categories. . .
The expression of syntactic relations: modulation in the
sentence
Cross-referring constructions . . . . .
Congruence...............................................................................
Government
Word-order
Set phrases: the transition from syntax to style. . • .
The complex sentence
. . .
167
168
170
171
174
176
178
180
182
186
188
190
CHAPTER VII.
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
6.
Language constantly changing
• • • • 195
Causes of the instability of language
195
Change in articulation .
.
• 202
Analogic change .
• • 221
Semantic change .
.
• • • • 237
The ultimate conditions of change in language . • . 2 5 1
CHAPTER VIII.
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES.
1. Language never uniform
2. Increase of uniformity
.
. .
. . . . •
259
262
X
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
CONTENTS
Page
Decrease of uniformity does not offset the increase. . . 263
Inferences from historic conditions
265
The process of differentiation.
. . • . 273
Deduction of internal history from related f o r m s . . . . 274
Interaction of dialects and languages
280
Standard languages
288
CHAPTER IX.
THE TEACHING OF LANGUAGES.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The purpose of foreign language instruction .
Character of the instruction
Age of the pupil
Equipment of the teacher
Drill in pronunciation .
Method of presenting semantic material.
Grammatical information. .
Texts
References
. . . .
292
293
295
297
299
300
302
304
305
CHAPTER X.
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE.
1. The origin of linguistic science
2. How to study linguistics.
. .
3. Relation of linguistics to other sciences . .
.
. . .
307
313
319
INDICES.
1 Authors, etc
2. Languages
3. Subjects
326
327
331
CHAPTER I.
THE N A T U R E AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE.
1. Expressive movements. In the animal world every
mental process is accompanied by a corresponding physical process. Some of these physical processes are expressive movements. Investigation has shown that the expressive movements are most directly co-ordinated with the
emotional element that is present in every mental process.
In man as well as in the lower animals it is primarily
the intensity of the emotional element which appears in
the expressive movements. Everyday observation recognizes the intensity of emotion of monkeys, dogs, or birds
and even of such distant forms as the ant or the fly. In
man and in the animals nearer to man a mild emotion
is accompanied on the physical side by a hurrying of
pulse-beat and respiration. If the emotion is more violent,
the expressive movements extend, successively, to the
facial muscles, then to the hands and arms, and finally
to the legs and feet, embracing a set of actions well
known to common observation. As the violence of the
emotion increases, these movements also grow more energetic. When a certain extreme, however, is reached, the
mental turmoil suddenly ceases and, in exact correspondence with this, there is a stopping of all the physical
manifestations: the muscles grow slack, the legs often
refusing support, and heart-beat and respiration may temporarily or even permanently stop.
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
2
THE NATURE AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
While the expressive movements are thus chiefly dependent on the intensity of emotion, some of them, especially in the monkey and in man, have come secondarily
to indicate also the quality of the emotion. The quality
of the emotion shows itself in the play of the facial
muscles. The various facial expressions are probably
mechanized forms of what were once instinctive efforts
at dealing with experiences of taste. The familiar 'sweet'
or pleasurable expression brings any substance that may
be in the mouth as much as possible into contact with
the tip of the tongue, which is most sensitive to sweet
tastes. Similarly, the 'bitter' or abhorrent expression
withdraws the back of the tongue, which is most sensitive to a bitter taste. Sour tastes are most felt by the
sides of the tongue: a pleasantly sour taste can be best
perceived in the position which we know as a 'smile' and
an over-sour one best avoided by the 'weeping' grimace.
These responses have, in the history of the race, become
purely reflex and hereditary, appearing even in new-born
children.
Owing, moreover, to association between these movements and the emotional qualities in these taste-experiences,
the movements have come to be constant attendants of
all experiences, even other than of taste, which involve
such qualities of emotion. That is, the 'sweet', 'bitter',
'smiling', and 'weeping' expressions are now the physical concomitants of any and all experiences whose emotional quality resembles that, respectively, of a sweet,
bitter, sour, or over-sour taste. Thus any pleasure is accompanied by the first of these expressions and any
abhorrence by the second; the uses of the smile and of
the weeping grimace are too well known to need description. It is not known to what extent this associational
extension of these movements is hereditary.
EXPRESSIVE MOVEMENTS
3
Beside these expressions we find tension, — pleasant
or unpleasant anticipation, — expressed by the innervation of the cheek-muscles, and relaxation, — satiation
or disappointment, — by their loosening. Perhaps these
reflexes originated in the use of these muscles in eating.
Another specialized type of expressive movements are
those which indicate the perceptual content of an experience. In every experience there is present, beside the
emotional elements (with which the expressive movements,
we must suppose, are most directly connected), a series
of perceptual impressions, whether of outer sensation or
of imagery. In fact, it is only by an abstraction that we
can separate the emotional and the perceptual contents
of our mental life. Just as certain expressive movements
originally connected • with experiences of taste have come
to indicate the emotional quality of an experience, so
certain other movements, especially of the hands and
arms, have come to indicate its perceptual content.
Such a movement is that of pointing at things. When
a child grasps at things which it cannot reach, its misjadgment of distance results, in each case, in a mere
movement of the hand in the direction of the object
desired. As the child grows in intelligence it performs
this movement even when it knows it cannot reach things,
and finally also uses the movement to indicate things which
it does not want, — things which merely excite its curiosity or interest, the subjects of its discourse. This development of the deictic expressive movement, which
occurs in every child, is peculiarly human; the monkey
does not get beyond the first stage of sometimes grasping
at things which it cannot reach.
Another type of expressive movement that indicates
perceptual content is the imitative movement. Imitation
is a term that can be applied to many phenomena of ex-
4
THE NATURE AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
pressive movement throughout the animal kingdom. When
we find numbers of ants or bees, for instance, congruently
performing some one task, we must suppose that an instinctive action of some individuals called forth the same
action in all the others. The explanation seems to be that
the bodily movements have become so closely associated
with the mental processes which they accompany, that
the sight of a fellow-individual going through the former
at once awakens the same mental state in the beholder.
Thus a child, seeing another child weep, enters at once
upon the state of anguish associated with this expression,
and consequently weeps in sympathy, as we say, with
the other child. In a grown civilized man these imitative
actions are, however, usually suppressed and even the
sympathetic emotion is reduced to a minimum. This subjection of the imitative movements to the will allows
them to become expressive of perceptual contents. For
we may now accompany any chosen perceptual element
of our mental state by imitative gestures, — provided
only that this element is sufficiently charged emotionally,
for, after all, these movements are at bottom indicative
of intensity of emotion. Especially in speaking of actions
we accompany our picturing with imitative gestures. Also,
anyone asked to define the qualities 'compact' or 'spiral'
will resort to imitative movements. The prevalence of
these varies greatly as a matter of communal habit or
good form among different nations.
2. Gesture-language. Gestures are frequently used as
the means of communication where vocal speech is impossible or undesirable. The systems of gesture-language
thus used by different peoples are strikingly uniform.
The gesture-language of certain of the American Indians,
used where tribes of different language wished to communicate, is closely like that which has been current in
GESTURE-LANGUAGE
5
southern Italy since Roman times (and no one knows
how much earlier), or like that used by the lower classes
in Japan, or by the Cistercian monks under their vow of
silence; and all these forms closely resemble that which
a company of untaught deaf-mutes will, in the course
of a few years, produce for themselves.
Gesture-language is so uniform because it consists
everywhere chiefly of the universally human expressive
movements voluntarily used for communication. The origin
of the communicative use is psychologically intelligible.
An individual sympathetically taking up another's emotion might yet reproduce an entirely different perceptual
content. In so far as his expressive movements indicated
the latter they would differ from those of the first individual. This already would be rudimentary communication. It would develope into more and more deliberate
and explicit forms as the race attained to voluntary use
of expressive movements for any chosen part of one's
ideas, and as individuals, after repeated occurrence of the
divergence of gesture, should foresee this divergence and
make gestures in order to call forth divergent gestures
from their fellow, — in other words, as the exchange of
messages became a motive. We must suppose that all
this took place in connection with vocal language, but
even where gestures are used without vocal language
they remain close to their character of expressive movements.
The deictic movement is of very limited use in gesturelanguage. Objects which, under circumstances, may be
absent cease to be designated by pointing gestures even
when they are present. The deictic gesture thus comes
to be used only of certain constant relations: for expressing the 'I', the 'you'; the 'here' or 'this', and the 'there'
or 'that'.
6
THE NATURE AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
The imitative movements, on the other hand, receive
a wide development in the depicting gestures. These have
been divided into three classes. The simplest kind are
the representative, which depart but little from primitive
imitative movements, — as, for instance, when 'joy' is
expressed by a glad grimace or 'sleep' by closing the
eyes and inclining the head to one side. Like all depicting
gestures, representative gestures are either graphic as
when one draws the outline of a 'house' in the air (gableroof and side walls), or plastic, as in the above gestures
for 'joy' and 'sleep' or when one joins first finger and
thumb in the shape of a circle to indicate 'coin' or 'money'. Suggestive gestures depict not the thing intended
but some part or accompaniment of it that brings it up
by association. Graphic examples are the outlining of a
beard under one's chin to express 'goat' or of a hat over
one's head to express, among the Indians, 'white man'.
The plastic type appears in the gesture for 'silence' in
which the lips are compressed and a finger raised or in
that for 'hunger' in which the cheeks are hollowed and
two fingers, as if grasping a morsel, are held before the
open mouth. Symbolic gestures, finally, arise when still
further associational processes have removed the gesture
from all resemblance to the thing intended or any part
of it. Thus the deictic gestures for space may be used
for time: one points backward for the past and forward
for the future, or, as a plastic example, the suggestive
gesture for 'hunger' may be used for 'wish' or 'desire',
or the suggestive gesture for a 'bad smell', raising of
the nostrils, may be used to express anything arousing
disgust.
The transition from the immediately significant gestures, the deictic and the representative, to the suggestive
and the symbolic is a process of association. The gesture
WRITING
7
is closely associated with a type of experience, and a
new experience with the same dominant features calls
forth the same gesture, without any consciousness of a
transference on the part of the speaker. We shall meet
similar inevitable transferences or rather extensions of
meaning when we speak of vocal language. In gesturelanguage they are limited, however, by the immediate
and apparent connection or identity of most gestures
with the natural expressive reaction to the experience.
Because most gestures are so immediately intelligible a
gesture not immediately intelligible is but slowly adopted,
and the number of such never becomes very great. The
main stock of every system of gesture is made up of
such original forms as the deictic and the graphic representative gestures, which are practically identical with
natural expressive movements.
3. Writing. The expressive movements so far discussed have given rise not only to gesture-language but
also to writing. Picture-writing is originally the tracing
of an expressive movement on a permanent material.
Its close kinship with gesture results in the transference
of symbols from one to the other. We find not only
delineations of objects (such as a house) made with
exactly the same strokes as are used in representative
gesture, but even symbolic gestures are indicated in the
picture. Among the Indians a hand-movement upward
from the head means 'big man' or 'chief': in picturewriting the same meaning is expressed by a line drawn
upward from the head of the figure. Similarly, we find
transference of pictorial symbols to gesture. The pictorial symbol for 'exchange' among the Indians consists of
two crossed lines, — significant either of the act of exchange itself or of the crossing of paths at which barter
between primitive communities usually takes place. In
8
THE NATURE AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
gesture-language this symbol is used in the form of two
crossed fingers.
The further development of writing takes place, as
we shall see, entirely under the influence of vocal language.
4. Audible expressive movements. We have seen
how the expressive movements have developed in man
into a voluntarily used set of symbols by which even
abstract meanings may be communicated. The principal
development of expressive movements in this direction
did not, however, take place in connection with the noiseless movements which we have so far considered. These
are in several respects under a disadvantage. It is perhaps rash to say that they are not capable of sufficient
variation to be fully adequate to our needs; perhaps,
if vocal speech had been denied us, they would have
shown themselves modifiable enough to serve for communication in all respects. There is no question, however, but that they are laborious and slow, demanding a great amount of muscular action on a large scale
for even the briefest utterance. They appeal, moreover,
to the sense of sight, which is not so powerful an arouser
of the attention as hearing and must, indeed, be turned,
often by movement of the entire body, to receive an impression from a new direction. Opposed to all this, the
sound-producing expressive movements are performed by
a delicate machinery requiring but little muscular effort
and appeal to the attention by a channel that is nearly
always open and requires no adjustment of the receiving
apparatus.
Expressive movements producing sound occur widely
in the animal kingdom. Such insects as crickets make
noise by rubbing together parts of their bony covering;
this type of audible expressive movemeut has nowhere
AUDIBLE EXPRESSIVE MOVEMENTS
9
reached a high development. The more familiar type,
in which air expelled from the lungs meets with obstacles in the breath-passage, appears in amphibians, such as
the frog, and especially, of course, in birds and mammals.
The original form seems to be the cry of pain or rage.
Under a violent unpleasurable emotion the breathing
apparatus and trachea are suddenly contracted. The
breath, hereby forcibly expelled, sets into vibration certain elastic protuberances within the breath-passage, the
vocal chords, and is further forced through the mouth
and nose. The result is a penetrating noise.
Such animals as the mouse and the rabbit utter sound
only under extreme emotion. The development from this
primitive outcry seems to occur in two directions. Among
gregarious animals the primitive outcry becomes an instinctively used call for help or for the presence of a
fellow-individual. On the other hand, the cry of anger
of the fighting males at mating-time develops into a
general vocal expression of the emotions of this period.
By a further transition this vocal expression accompanies
any lively pleasant emotion, as in the male song-bird.
The development in this direction brings it about that
the vocal utterance is used not only under extreme stress,
but also for lesser and for pleasurable emotions. Thus
there comes about a differentiation between the utterance
of highly unpleasant emotion on the one hand and that
of lesser pleasant or unpleasant feelings on the other.
The latter, less violent expressions tend to include some
repeated movement of the mouth or some periodic change
in the production of the voice-sound itself. No better
example of this differentiation could be found than the
squeak of a bird in extreme fright or pain and, under
less emotional stress, its regular song. The less violent
kind of utterance may be modulated predominantly as to
10
THE NATURE AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
pitch or as to the noise-quality of the sound. Pitch-modulation is, of course, characteristic of the song of birds,
noise-modulation of the dog's bark or of human speech. In
our song we combine the two; it has been thought that
our unmelodious speech is a degeneration from an earlier
singing habit of expression, but extended research has
shown that this is not the case, human song having probably originated in the chant of rhythmic labor. The melodious quality of the bird's song is due to the position
of its vocal chords at the very bottom of the trachea,
which leaves a long sounding-tube for the pitch-modification of the sound; our speech, on the other hand, receives its great scope of variation as to noise-character
from the extreme mobility of our tongue and other oral
muscles. The various movements of these were, no doubt,
in their origin, expressive movements like those of the
'sweet', 'bitter', and 'sour' or 'tense' and 'relaxed' types.
The effect of the sound upon the producing individual
and his fellows was, however, so forceful, as opposed to
that of the mere movement and grimace, that the acoustic
impression of the sound and not the movement itself became the basis for further associational development.
5. Development of language in the child. The
different stages of vocal utterance appear very clearly
during the growth of a child. The new-born child shrieks
with wide-open mouth when in pain. By the end of the
first month it yells also under other sensations of discomfort and soon afterwards it croons when it is contented. As these less violent emotions are accompanied
by less violent muscular effort, there is already some
differentiation in the sound produced. Gradually modifications of these less violent oral movements set in and
are furthered not only by the growing practice of the
mouth-muscles, but also by the appearance of the teeth,
DEVELOPMENT OF LANGUAGE IN THE CHILD
11
which makes articulation of tongue-tooth sounds possible.
Up to about the end of the first year the child performs
an increasing variety of articulatory movements, especially during pleasurable emotion. There can be no question
that the tendency to this form of expressive movement,
and especially to the great variety of these movements, is
inherited from the past generations of speaking ancestry.
The element of mimicry — that is, of imitation of
the speech of the surrounding adults — becomes more
and more prominent toward the end of the first year,
until the child finally succeeds in repeating, — with no
consciousness of their meaning, to be sure, — syllables
and words that are spoken to it.
At about the same time the child begins to understand
gestures; that is, to associate people's gestures with emotional and even perceptual experiences. It begins by
connecting facial expression with states of emotion, recognizing, as we say, an angry or a cheerful countenance.
Then comes the association of deictic gestures with objects, the child's eyes following the direction in which
one points. At last words begin to be understood: aided,
at first, by pointing gestures, the child begins to associate
such sound-sequences as the nursery words for 'mother',
'father', 'good', 'bad', 'bed', or 'sleep' with the corresponding experiences.
As yet, however, the child does not utter these soundsequences to express the experiences. When it utters them
at all, it does so purely in mimicry. Even in a normal
child the end of the second year may arrive before the
cross-association between the sounds which it imitatively
utters and the significant sounds which it understands
when others speak them, becomes lively enough to enable the child to repeat words with consciousness of their
significant value. When this cross-association has been
12
THE NATURE AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
formed speech may be said to have begun. To be sure,
the child's reproduction of what it hears is for a long
time imperfect. It is no simple task to associate correctly
a sound heard with the articulatory movements that will
produce it, even though, in the case of some, such as the
lip-closure sounds p, b, m, the eye aids the ear. The child
is very much in the position of the adult who hears a
foreign language; its perception is often wrong. Such
mistakes as the confusion of t and k, of f and th are due
to the unsureness of the perceptive habit: the child actually hears the wrong sound, so far as consciousness is concerned. Only after long practice do hearing and articulation become accurate and closely associated with each other.
The child's associating the sounds it hears with certain
experiences is due, of course, to the fact that grown-ups
are constantly producing the sounds in connection, and
in as plain connection as possible, with the proper objects and actions. The association, for instance, between
mama and the child's mother is presented entirely by the
child's elders. In many cases the child will be led to
form a wrong association, which is gradually corrected,
as when it at first calls every man papa. In no case does
the child itself invent a word, in the sense of spontaneously giving meaning to a sound-sequence. Mother or nurse,
to be sure, will often connect some one of the child's
meaningless sound-productions with some person, object,
or other experience and then teach the child so to connect
it: it is in this way that our nursery-words have arisen.
They are sound-groups which are uttered by most children and have come to be traditionally connected by the
adult speech-community with certain meanings; the child,
however, learns to give them these meanings just as it
learns the value of any other words. The connection between sound and sense is in no case originated by the child
THE ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
13
While we thus see in the child the development of
sound-producing expressive movements from the unmodified yell of pain to the most manifold varieties of articulation, differentiated in general character to correspond
to different emotional states, the spontaneous rise of the
use of certain fixed sounds for certain fixed types of experience does not occur in the child. The significant use
of sounds is, so to speak, prematurely forced upon the
individual, who has no opportunity of arriving by his
own powers at the goal of actual language. How the
human species arrived at this significant use of soundutterance is therefore not explained by the development
of the individual under normal circumstances. There are
some accounts, most famous among them that of Herodotus (Histories, II, 2), of children who, for the purpose
of ascertaining the original development of language,
were left to grow up without hearing anyone speak.
The experiment is really impossible, for, to be significant, it would have to be made with a large group of
people left to themselves for generations and even centuries, since the development of language in the race can
not have been other than gradual and communal.
6. The origin of language. The question remains,
then: How did man come to associate fixed sound-sequences with fixed.types of experience? The older answer to this question was based on the individual's learning of language. According to earlier theories the place
of the child's elders was filled, with regard to the race,
by divine care: a divinity directly gave men the use of
speech. A more materialistic but essentially identical
notion was that man himself invented the trick of attaching significance to sounds; some genius of primitive times,
for instance, may have conceived this brilliant idea.
More tenable was the view that the speech-sounds were
14
THE NATURE AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
originally imitations of what they denoted (Stoics, Herder),
or the view that they were originally the natural and
inevitable emotional responses to the corresponding experiences (Epicureans, Rousseau).
The evolutionary point of view has shown the falsity
of the first two explanations and growing psychologic
insight has deprived the last two also of probability.
Gesture-language is in this connection especially instructive. Gesture-language, as we have seen, is nothing but
a higher development of the expressive movements common, in their basis, to many animals. Vocal language
is not essentially different. It consists, at bottom, of expressive movements. In the case of gesture-language the
expressive movements themselves remained the means of
communication; consequently the connection between a
gesture and the original expressive movement is nearly
always apparent, as when the deictic gesture is plainly
a weakened grasping movement and the depicting gestures scarcely differ from natural imitative movements. In
the case of vocal speech, on the other hand, it was not
the movement itself that attracted attention and became
the starting-point for further development, but the sound
which the movement produced. This sound is an effect
which bears only in respect to emotional intensity any
distinct and recognizable relation to the experience
calling it forth. The 'sweet' face-gesture, for instance,
accompanied by production of the voice-sound gives a
sound in no way directly related to the experience of
something sweet or otherwise pleasant. Now, so long as
the face-gesture remained in use, the importance of the
sound could always be secondary, the gesture actually
conveying the message. The sounds themselves were
neither directly significant of the experience, nor could
they, in any conceivable way, have been imitative of most
THE ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
15
experiences: only the movements which produced the
sounds were the expressive correspondents and, therefore,
the indications of the experiences. After the sound, however, had entered into association with the gesture (and,
thus, with the experience), it gradually usurped the more
important place, owing to the advantages already set
forth, and finally came into independent use, without the
gesture. This use of the sound alone opened the road
for unlimited transferences of meaning of the same kind
as those which produce symbolic gestures. In the case
of the latter the predominant direct connection between
an experience and a gesture, — a connection obvious to
all and constantly refreshed, — forbade too divergent a
development. In vocal speech, however, where direct
connection between experiences and sounds was never
felt, the further development by means of associational
shifts of meaning has been unlimited. The connection between sound and meaning, thus, which cannot even'in its
origin have been a direct one, is further destroyed. by the
freedom of transference due to the lack of any immediately
felt connection between experience and utterance, such as
prevents too free a development of symbolic gestures.
It is clear, therefore, that even if one could survey
the whole evolution of sound-producing expressive movements from the single cry of pain to which some animals are limited, up to the present speech of man, there
would be no point at which one could say: Here language begins. Expressive movements are the physical phase
of mental processes: whatever the mental processes, the
expressive movements correspond to them. Man's mind
and his expressive activity have developed in indissoluble connection. In the animal world, as we know it,
the evolution of one phase without the other is inconceivable. This, indeed, is why it is impossible to set up a
16
THE NATURE AND ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE
strictly logical definition of language as opposed to expressive movement in general. Language is the form of
expressive movement adequate to the mentality of man.
This mentality is defined no less than man's language
in the aphorism that 'Man is a speaking animal'.
7. Language constantly changing. The absence of
immediate connection between sound and experience
appears in the fact that, unlike gesture-language, vocal
language differs vastly in different times and places, —
a fact too familiar to need exposition.
The change of language in time is of interest in the
present connection because its phases again illustrate the
absence of any conservative relation between sound' and
sense. The sounds habitually uttered under a given type
of experience are in an unceasing process of change:
those which we utter today are not like those which
speakers of English uttered a thousand or even a hundred
years ago. On the other hand, the transference of meaning also is unlimited; the history of languages shows us
innumerable associational changes of meaning, which in
gesture, where some connection between expression and
experience is upheld, would be impossible. It would be
difficult to find an English word which, if it existed at
all a thousand years ago, has not since then in some
way changed its meaning. All this is due to the fact that
there never was a stage in which a hearer could recognize
any but an arbitrary connection between sound and sense.
The change of language is not a mere endless shifting
of sounds and meanings: we find speech rising in the
course of time to the power of more delicate and abstract
expression and to greater brevity. This development is
due to the assimilating effect, which we shall study in
detail, of experience upon expression; in return the grow
ing power of expression, as we shall see, reacts favor-
SOCIAL CHARACTER OF LANGUAGE
17
ably upon the mental processes. Thus the freedom in
which vocal language differs from that of gesture has
made possible a much higher development.
8. Social character of language. We have seen that
the greatest stimulus toward the development of expressive actions is their emergence into voluntary communicative use. Language has been developed in the interchange of messages, and every individual who has learned
to use language has learned it through such interchange
The individual's language, consequently, is not his creation, but consists of habits adopted in his expressive
intercourse with other members of the community. The
result of this is the individual's inability to use language
except in the form in which the community as a whole
uses It: he must speak as the others do, or he will not
be understood. As a matter of fact he does not, in normal cases, try to speak otherwise, but unquestionmgly
follows his and his fellow-speakers' habits. The change
which occurs in language is thus never a conscious alteration by individuals, but an unconscious, gradual change
in the habits of the entire community. The motives
which cause it are not individual reflective considerations
of the result, but new associative tendencies or new conditions of innervation due to some change in the circumstances of life affecting the community. As we
examine more closely the different aspects of language,
we shall again and again find the same characteristic: as
the individual speaker receives his habits from the community, individual motives do not come into play, but only
causes affecting the community as a whole. And as, moreover, the individual, from childhood, practises his speech
until the details of it are mechanized and unconscious, he
is rarely aware of the specific characteristics, such as the
phonetic or the grammatical, which are involved in it.
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
CHAPTER I I
T H E P H Y S I C A L BASIS OP LANGUAGE.
1. Unconsciousness of speech-movements. The individual's unconsciousness of the details of his speechactivity appears strikingly when we inquire into the
movements by which speech-sounds are produced. While
we know that we speak with the mouth, tongue, and
larynx, the separate movements of these organs rarely
or never enter our consciousness. If we are asked to
describe them, we answer in vague, metaphoric expressions or say things that are altogether wrong. In fact,
as to some of these movements not only the normal
speaker but even the scientific observer is at a loss. For,
in spite of the fact that all these muscles are ultimately
at the command of the will, the innervations which control them have become mechanized; we consciously give
the impulse for whole words and phrases, but the details
of their utterance always proceed unconsciously. The
impulse, moreover, is given in terms of sound, for, in
the association of articulatory movements with sounds,
which is formed very early in life (p. 11) and is, of
course, constantly practised, the latter are entirely dominant, the former almost forgotten. It appears, then, that
even as regards our own speech-movements of every
day, some scientific examination of the facts is necessary.
It happens, moreover, that not only different languages
but even different local variations of the same language
WRITING- AN IMPERFECT ANALYSIS
19
use different sounds. When the normal speaker hears a
foreign dialect or language, he encounters a twofold
difficulty. His perceptive habits lead him to hear sounds
that merely resemble those of his own speech as if
they were identical with the latter; and where two or
more of the strange sounds resemble one of his own, he
may fail to distinguish between them. Thus a German
who is picking up English will confuse our v, w, and wh
sounds, our d and ih (as in then), our t and th (as in
think), and our sh and z (as in azure), for in his own
language he has but one sound resembling each of these
groups. The second difficulty lies in producing the foreign sounds even when their distinctive character is
heard: thus our German may in time come to appreciate
the distinctions we have mentioned, but will still be unable to produce the English sounds.
These difficulties usually prove fatal to the efforts of
those who try to describe languages without adequate
knowledge of 'phonetics. From nearly aR the published
material about American Indian languages, for instance,
it is impossible to get any adequate conception of how
these languages are pronounced. So great a Chinese
scholar as Joseph Edkins was unable to describe some
of the commonest Chinese sounds. It is for this reason
that even teachers who have spoken a language from
childhood are often unable to impart their information
to others. No one can teach a foreigner his language,
unless he can tell his pupil exactly what to do with his
vocal organs to get the proper effect: and this, we have
seen, he cannot do without a certain amount of scientific
study.
2. Writing an imperfect analysis. There is one
activity in the course of which nearly all civilized peoples have made some analysis of the sounds of their
20
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
speech, and that is writing. This analysis has, however,
been gradual and incomplete. In its most primitive form
writing is simply the drawing, carving, or painting of
the visible features of an experience or of symbolic elements representing it (p. 7). When this method of
communication is frequently used, certain elements in
the pictures come to be drawn always in a certain way
and to have a fixed meaning. Gradually such elements
may come to be used as symbols for corresponding words
of the vocal language and to be arranged in the order
that these words have in speech. As the association between written symbol and spoken word becomes fixed,
the symbol may come to be drawn without reference to
its original pictorial value, and to deviate from its older
form, associating the word rather than, in a more direct
sense, the experience. When this has happened, the association may grow to be simply one of written symbol
and sound, regardless of the meaning borne by the sound,
until, after a time, the symbols are used purely in their
phonetic value. The number of symbols may then be
lessened to the point where there is a single character
for every syllable used in the language. Such 'syllabaries'
are a very common form of writing; examples are the
alphabets of India (derived from ancient syllabic forms
of Semitic writing), and the national alphabets of the
Japanese. It is a further simplification when these
characters come to be used not for whole syllables but
for single sounds of the language, as in the Greek, Latin,
and derived alphabets, including our own.
All this development is, of course, gradual. There is,
in most instances, at no time a deliberate and systematic examination of the sounds of the language and an
assigning to each of a written symbol. Accordingly, we
hardly ever find perfect consistency in the relation be-
WRITING AN IMPERFECT ANALYSIS
21
tween sound and writing. There are two factors which
lessen even such consistency as might otherwise develop.
One of these is the use of foreign alphabets. When the
English, for instance, took over the Latin alphabet, the
sounds of English were so different from those of Latin
that consistency was impossible, — a difficulty under
which we labor even today, for our alphabet has not
enough signs for our vowels, and none for our th-sounds,
our sh, our z as in azure, our wh, or our ng as in sing,
and, on the other hand, contains the superfluous characters c, q, and x. The second factor interferes even
more seriously with the regularity of alphabetic writing:
it is the necessary conservatism of orthography. Reading and writing would be very slow processes, if, every
time we read or wrote, we actually stopped to analyze
each word into its -component sounds; moreover, according to emphasis, speed, personal habit, and so on, the
spelling of each word would then be variable, — a condition which would farther militate against ease. Such
a state of affairs never continues long, for the spellings
of whole words are of course remembered and become
traditional. Opposed to this necessary conservatism of
writing, there is the fact that all language at all times
is in an unceasing process of change, — a process so
gradual and subtle that no speaker, through all his life,
is aware of it, yet so unceasing that the orthography of
every language becomes in a few hundred years thoroughly antiquated even in those features which were formerly consistent.
This, of course, is a reason why writing, though involving to a certain extent an analysis of the physical
phase of language, does not satisfy scientific requirements
in this direction. Indeed, so far as the linguistically
untrained person is concerned, writing is often mislead-
22
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OP LANGUAGE
ing, for the individual movements of writing are so much
more consciously performed than those of pronunciation,
that the naive speaker will often think that he speaks
as he writes, when this is not the case. He will think, for
instance, that passed and past or close (verb) and clothes
are pronounced differently, when actuaUy he may never
in his life have heard or made such distinctions.
There are other reasons, too, why writing cannot and
need not accurately analyze the spoken sounds. Although
the human vocal organ can produce an infinite number
of different sounds, each language uses. but a limited set.
Given, therefore, an alphabet of a limited number of
symbols, it could be used by aU languages, though no
two of them would give each symbol the same value.
Now, within limits this is actuaUy the case: thus letters
like p and t are used by both English and French, but
with different values, v and z by both English and Germans, but again with differing values in the two languages. This circumstance may be convenient, on occasion, to printers; it would be absurd, at any rate, for
us to request the Germans and the French to give up
their use of these letters because it does not agree with
ours. Consequently there are differences between the
pronunciations of different languages which do not appear
in writing. The same is true, moreover, of the different
local variations of the same language. The words of
the English language are pronounced very differently,
let us say, by a Chicago an and by a Londoner. These
dialectal differences of pronunciation may be so great
that scarcely a word wiU be pronounced alike over all
the territory in which a language is spoken. In the case
of Chinese, in fact, distant dialects are mutually unintelligible, though the writing is the same. It would obviously be a great inconvenience and a source of much con-
WRITING AN IMPERFECT ANALYSIS
23
fusion, if such variations appeared in the writing: it
would mean, for instance, that a Chicagoan could only
with difficulty read a book printed in London. Thus we
see that much of the value of writing is actually dependent on its not conveying the exact manner of pronunciation.
More than this, there are in the language even of one
and the same person many subtle and complex variations,
which do not demand notation for the practical purposes
of reading and writing. Thus we pronounce our vowels
longer before d than before t, — the o in rode longer,
for instance, than that in wrote, — but it would be superfluous to indicate this difference, for every English-speaking person regularly and unconsciously speaks his vowels
longer before d than before t. An orthography which
actually indicated all the phonetic facts of speech would
be a very cumbersome affair, difficult for even an expert
phonetician to handle, and requiring, above all, close
attention to every single utterance that one wanted to
represent in writing.
It is obvious, then, that even a regular aud consistent
orthography for practical purposes would not contain a
full analysis of the pronunciation of a language, such as
is often needed by the scientific investigator and, in some
degree, by the teacher of languages. For scientific use
several such fully analytic alphabets have been devised;
today the standard one is that of the International Phonetic Association, which shall be used in this book (phonetic characters being printed in square brackets). It is customary, however, even in scientific discussions, to avoid a
constant complete analysis by describing, at the outset,
the sounds and regular variations of a language and assigning a simple character of the phonetic alphabet to
each typical sound, Such a simplified phonetic alphabet
24
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
is of course best for teaching the pronunciation of a foreign language, and, if it can be made to fit all the local
variations of pronunciation, would be the ideal practical
alphabet.
3. The vocal chords. The human vocal organ is a
wind instrument which produces sounds by interfering
with the breathed air that is being driven from the lungs
in expiration. The first interference which the expired
breath meets is at the head of the trachea, in the larynx
or Adams's apple. Within the larynx, to the right and
left, are two muscular protuberances, the vocal chords,
between which the breath must pass. In ordinary breathing the muscles of the vocal chords are relaxed and the
breathed air passes freely through the aperture between
them, which is called the glottis. When one holds one's
breath with open mouth the vocal chords are stretched
so as to close the glottis firmly. Owing to their delicate
musculature, and to two movable cartilaginous hinges,
the arytenoids, in which they terminate at the rear of
the larynx, the vocal chords can be set also in a number
of positions intermediate between that of breathing and
that of firm closure.
Firm closure of the glottis, suddenly opened, occurs
just before coughing or clearing the throat, also under
any strain, as in lifting a heavy weight. As a speechsound it is used in German initially in the pronunciation
of words that in writing begin with a vowel. The sound
so produced is called the glottal stop, and its phonetic
symbol is [ ? ]; a German word like arm 'poor' is therefore
pronounced [ ? arm]. The glottal stop occurs also in a
great many other languages, such as Danish, where found
'dog' is pronounced [hu ? n], but hun 'she' [hun], Lettish,
Hebrew ('aleph'), Arabic ('hamza'), and some Chinese
dialects. Its frequent occurrence in such languages as
THE VOCAL CHORDS
25
Danish produces in English ears the effect of constant
interruption by little hiccoughs.
If the vocal chords are a little less firmly closed, the
compression gives way, from instant to instant, to the
pressure of the breath, so that a vibration productive of
musical sound results. This musical sound we caU voice.
The pitch of the voice is modulated by changing the length
of the chords, for this of course controls the rapidity of
vibration. The loudness or stress of the voice depends on
the violence of the vibration, and may therefore be regulated in two ways. In singing the regulation is (or ought
to be) chiefly effected by varying the breath-pressure, that
is, by expiring more or less rapidly; in ordinary speech
the less cumbersome method prevails of dightly widening
the glottis for a less loud sound and slightly narrowing
it for a louder; for, as the narrowing of the glottis allows
less breath to pass through, the accumulated breath underneath exercises pressure, against which the vocal chords
vibrate under tension, producing a loud sound.
The voice is not heard in every sound of speech. In
the glottal stop, for instance, it obviously is absent. Many
of the other speech-sounds, also, are unaccompanied by
the voice. If one places a finger on the Adam's apple or
stops up one's ears, the voice will be felt as a buzz or
trembling; if one now speaks, such sounds as p, t, k, f, s
[p, t, k, f, s] will be found to lack this buzzing accompaniment, while such as i, d, g, v, z [b, d, g, v, z] have it: the
former are unvoiced or breathed, the latter voiced sounds,
as are also, for instance, our accented vowels.
If the vocal chords are so far separated that the voice
no longer sounds pure, but is accompanied by a friction
sound produced by the breath as it passes through the
glottis, we get a murmur. Most of our unaccented vowels
in English are spoken with murmur instead of voice. As
26
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OP LANGUAGE
an independent speech-sound the murmur is heard in the
Voiced h' of Čech and of Sanskrit, symbol [fi]. If the
glottis is still farther opened, the voice ceases and only
the friction-sound remains: this is the sound of our h [h].
Still another position of the vocal chords is represented by the whisper, in which only the cartilage-glottis,
that is, the space between the arytenoids, is open, the vocal chords themselves being in contact. In what we ordinarily call whispering the whisper is substituted for the
voice, the unvoiced sounds remaining unaltered.
Both in whispering and in ordinary speech the unvoiced sounds are pronounced with the glottis in its widestopen position, the muscles of the vocal chords being relaxed and the breath passing freely through the larynx:
this, as we have seen, is also the position for regular
breathing.
The remarkable delicacy and rapidity of adjustment of
the vocal chords in passing from voice to breathing, from
either of these to murmur, whisper, or h, and in changing
the pitch and stress, requires no further comment. It is
to be remembered, of course, that the details of all these
movements, in spite of complete subjection to the will,
are so mechanized as to be unconscious: anybody can speak
an h, but it takes careful scientific observation to determine exactly how the sound is produced.
4. The velum. When the breath leaves the larynx it
passes, in normal breathing, through the nose. During
most of the sounds of speech it is, however, precluded
from doing so by the raising of the soft palate or velum,
which now cuts off the nasal passage from the throat and
mouth. If one stands with open mouth before a mirror,
breathing through both nose and mouth, and then suddenly pronounces a pure, long ' a h . . . ' [a:], the raising of
the velum can be easily seen, especially if one watches
ORAL ARTICULATION
27
the uvula. Most speech-sounds are thus purely oral. In
a few, such as m [m] or n [n], however, the breath escapes entirely through the nose, the velum being lowered:
such sounds are called nasals. There are other sounds in
which the breath escapes through both mouth and nose:
these are called nasalized (symbol ~), e. g. the vowel in
the French cent [sa] 'a hundred'. Most speakers are, of
course, quite unconscious of the movements of their velum;
yet it is lowered and raised again every time they speak
an m or n.
5. Oral articulation. The mouth performs a double
function in speech. It serves, in the first place, as a resonance-chamber for the musical sound of the voice or
for the whisper. By changing the shape of this resonancechamber we vary the tone-color of the sound: thus by
narrowing and flattening it we get the high tone-color of
the vowel-sound in fee, by hollowing it, the low tone-color of the vowel in foe.
Secondly, by moving the tongue and the lower lip during the passage of the breath, we can produce noises.
Most of these depend on the resistance of the breath-stream,
but noises can also be produced by suction (symbol [*]),
as in the sound with which we urge on a horse by
'snapping' the tongue against the palate [c*]. Such suction-noises occur as regular speech-sounds in the languages of the African Bushmen and the Hottentots. Where
the noises are produced by means of the breath, voiced
or unvoiced, there are two principal methods: either a
complete closure is made and then explosively burst, as
in our p, b, t, d, k, g [p, b, t, d, k, g], — stops, or explosives;
or the closure is incomplete and the noise is produced by
the friction of the breath passing through the aperture,
as in our f, v, th as in think, th as in then, s, z, sh, z as in
azure [f, v, θ, ð, s, z, ∫, 3], — spirants or fricatives. Both
28
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
stops and spirants may be modified by lowering the velum; in the case of the former the breath escapes entirely
through the nose and we hear the nasals, such as m, n,
ng [m, n, ŋ]; in the case of the spirants it escapes through
both mouth and nose, producing nasalized spirants.
6. Oral noise-articulations. The noise-articulations
can be produced in various parts of the mouth.
a) Labials. Stops produced by closure of the two lips, —
bilabial articulation, — are our unvoiced p [p] and voiced
b [b]. The corresponding nasal is our voiced m [m]. Bilabial spirants are not common; a voiced one [u] occurs in
Dutch (written w) and in Spanish (written b, v).
Our English unvoiced [f] and voiced [v] are labiodental
spirants, in which the friction is produced between the
lower lip and the upper teeth and accentuated by the collision of the escaping stream of breath with the upper lip.
b) Dentals. Most of the oral noise-articulations are made
with the tongue. The tongue produces noises with either
the tip or the back articulating against the teeth or the
palate: articulation with the tip is called coronal, with the
back, dorsal.
Coronal articulation against the upper teeth or the gums
just behind them is called dental; it produces, of stops,
the unvoiced [t] and the voiced [d]. These occur in several varieties, such as the interdental, against the lower
edge of the upper teeth, the post-dental, against the back
of the upper teeth (thus in Spanish and in many modern
languages of India, and, in a different variety, in French),
against the border of the upper teeth and gums (so in
German), or a little farther back still (as in the English
t and d), — the last two variants being specifically called
alveolar. Such variations are indicated, where necessary,
in phonetic writing by diacritical marks such as [˕ ] for
articulation with the tongue drawn back, [˕ ] for articu-
ORAL NOISE-ARTICULATIONS
29
lation with the tongue advanced, [˕ ] for greater raising
of the tongue, and [˕ ] for greater lowering; but these signs
can usually be dispensed with by stating beforehand what
varieties are current in a given language. The voiced nasal corresponding to these stops is our n [n], which often
occurs unvoiced [n] in such words as mint, snoe, where
it is spoken just before or after unvoiced sounds. Dental
spirants, more specifically interdental or post-dental, are
our unvoiced [ 0 ] as in think and voiced [5] as in then.
Dental articulation is used also in the trills or r-sounds
of most languages. These sounds are produced by tightening the tongue-muscles so that they elastically resist
the pressure of the breath from instant to instant; an
example is the Slavic or Italian 'rolled' r [r], which is
used also in the stage-pronunciations of French and German. The r-sound of American English [i] is pronounced
with the tongue relaxed, so that there is no trilling and
even very little breath-friction; in consequence the acoustic value of the sound is as much musical as noise-like.
An unvoiced [i] with increased friction often occurs in
such words as try. The friction element of a trilled [r]
reaches a maximum, if the tongue is held close to the roof
of the m o u t h , especially at the sides, where it touches
the upper teeth; if the friction-noise is very great, we seem
to hear a trilled [r] and, simultaneously, a spirant resembling the sound of z in azure: this strongly spirant trilled
[i] is heard in Cecihish.
Another dental articulation is that of the l-sounds or
laterals. In these also friction is so slight that it would
be as well to class them with the musical sounds as with
the noises. Their characteristic resonance is due to the
fact that the breath escapes at the sides of the tongue,
the tip of the tongue being pressed tightly against the
upper teeth or gurus. The tone-color of such an [1] can
30
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
be varied by raising or lowering the back of the tongue, —
that is, altering the shape of the resonance-chamber. Very
high tone-color, due to raising of the tongue, is heard in
the 'light' l of the Slavic languages; less high is that of
German or French l, while that of English is especially
dull, owing to the lowering of the middle of the tongue.
c) Cerebrals. Leaving the dental position, we come to
another form of coronal articulation, the cerebral. In this
the tip of the tongue is drawn up and back, so as to articulate against the highest point of the palate. Many languages of India possess these cerebrals [t, d, n] by the
side of the dentals, distinguishing between the two as sharply as they or we should distinguish between, say, t and k.
Some of these languages have cerebral [ŗ] and [1] which
may also be heard in the English pronunciation of many
Americans.
d) Blade sounds. We come now to the dorsal tonguearticulations, in which parts of the upper surface of the
tongue (as opposed to the tip in coronal articulation) are
brought into contact with the teeth, gums, or palate. The
dorsal articulations that are made farthest forward are
produced, naturally, by the front of the upper surface of
the tongue, which is called the blade. In these sounds the
tongue is contracted so as to form a furrow along the
median line: the breath passes along this furrow, which
directs it against the edge of the upper front teeth. Here
the narrow, strong stream of air produces a sharp, hissing
noise, whence these sounds receive the name of sibilants:
unvoiced [s], voiced [z]. They occur in several varieties: in
French they are post-dental, the tip of the tongue touching the lower teeth, and the blade, except in the center,
where the furrow is formed, touching the upper teeth.
The English and German sibilants are alveolar; in Swedish
there is even a cerebral variety.
ORAL NOISE-ARTICULATIONS
31
The distinctness of the sibilant hiss is lessened, if the
tongue is moved so as to displace the furrow from its
proper relation to the upper teeth, for then the narrow
stream of breath is not accurately directed against the
edge of the teeth, but, instead, eddies round, producing
a peculiar muffled hiss. These abnormal sibilants are usually produced by drawing the tongue back from the [s]position: so in our English unvoiced [J], as in shall and
voiced [3], as in azure, vision. The exact nature of the
eddying current of the breath in these sounds is not known.
The 'kettle' or 'gorge' of the eddy can be enlarged by
protruding and rounding the lips [∫)], as in the German
sch-sound. The French varieties lower the tip of the tongue and slightly raise the back.
The front articulations may be formed in more pronouncedly dorsal variations. Such are our [t∫˔ ] and [d3˔ ] as
in cheap and jump, the 'palatalized' Russian [t˔ ], [d˔ ],
and [S˔ ], the Russian and Polish [t∫˔ ], the Polish 'palatalized' s [∫˔ ], the Norwegian [∫˔ ]. and the German [∫˔ ]
before consonants. These more dorsal varieties of dental
and blade sounds are often conveniently indicated, both
in practical and in phonetic writing, by placing an accentmark over the letter, e. g. t' [t'], rather than by fully indicating the tongue-position, e. g. [ t ˔ ] . It is also sometimes convenient to express them by the signs of the series of sounds to be next spoken of, provided the conditions of the language do not make such expression misleading or ambiguous.
e) Palatals. Dorsal articulations against the hard palate are called palatal. As the hard palate is comparatively extensive, they occur in several varieties. The stops,
unvoiced [c] and voiced [j], are heard in French dialects,
in Lithuanian, and in Hungarian, the nasal [Ŋ] also in
Spanish (written ñ), Italian (written gn), and French (gn),
32
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
the French variety being pronounced farther back than
the others. The spirants of this position are unvoiced [ç],
as in the German ich [ ? iç] 'I' and voiced [j], as in many
German pronunciations of such words as ja 'yes' and legen
'
to lay'. Palatal trills cannot occur, for the back of the
tongue has not enough elasticity to vibrate. A palatal lateral [λ] occurs, however, in southern French, Spanish
(written ll) and Italian (written gl). Those who have not
in their native language the habit of palatal articulation
best learn it, if they produce the sounds with the tip of
the tongue pressed against the lower teeth, but this is not
necessary to the articulation.
f) Velars. Dorsal articulations against the soft palate
again allow of a great deal of variation, owing to the extent of this region. The sounds here produced are called
velars. In English the velar stops, k [k] and g [g], are
produced farthest forward before the i-vowel heard in kin
and give, farther back in can and gap, and farthest back
before back vowels as in coop, goose] the same habit prevails in German. The velar nasal occurs in English, written
ng, as in sing, symbol [ŋ] 1 ). The spirants are: unvoiced
[x], as in the German Bach [bax] 'brook', and voiced [g],
which occurs in modern Greek and in many German pronunciations of such words as sagen 'to say'. A very open
[x˕ ], with little friction, is heard in the Slavic languages.
A velar trill is impossible, but a velar lateral [1] is produced in Polish by raising the back of the tongue: while
accurate median contact with lateral opening is here impossible, the general effect still resembles that of the tongue-tip [1], as well as that of an English w.
g) Uvulars. The hindmost of the dorsal articulations
1) In such words as finger, however, the spelling ng represents two sounds, [ŋg].
MUSICAL ORAL ARTICULATIONS
33
is that of the rear upper surface of the tongue against
the uvula, the little pendent part at the back of the soft
palate. Of these uvular articulations the unvoiced stop [q]
occurs in Arabic and in Greenlandish; the latter language
uses also the voiced nasal [ N ] . In the trill [ R ] it is the
uvula and not, as in the dental trill, the tongue, which
vibrates. This uvular trill is the regular r-sound in Northumbrian English (the ' b u r r ' ) , in Danish, and in the city
pronunciations of French and German. In French and
Danish it occurs also unvoiced [ ]; in these languages it
is often pronounced without the trill-vibration, as a uvular spirant, both unvoiced [ ] and voiced [ ] .
In connection with the oral noise-articulations we may
again mention the laryngeal, produced by the vocal chords;
of these the stop [?] and the spirants, unvoiced [h] and
voiced [h] have already been mentioned (p. 24,ff.). Two more
laryngeal spirants can be produced by compression of the
entire musculature of the larynx: the 'hoarse h' [ H ] and
its voiced form, the 'ayin' [ Q ] of the Semitic languages.
7. M u s i c a l o r a l a r t i c u l a t i o n s . W e may turn now to
the musical articulations or Vowels'. It is important to
observe that there is no definite boundary between the
noise-articulations and the musical articulations. Any spirant can be articulated with varying degrees of closure:
as the pressure of the tongue is relaxed the friction-noise
decreases and the element of musical resonance becomes
more and more audible. Such spirants as the American
English [ r ] , the laterals, and an open [j] are on the border line; if anything, the resonance-element is, in the [ I ] and
[1] at least, dominant. The traditional division of sounds
into 'consonants' and 'vowels', while often convenient,
is therefore untenable for purposes of exact terminology.
Instead, the sounds of speech represent an unbroken series
of relations between noise and resonance: the latter eleB l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
34
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
ment is at a minimum in the unvoiced stops; then come,
in order, the voiced stops, the unvoiced and the voiced spirants, the nasals, the laterals, the r-sounds, and, finally,
the most open musical sounds, in the production of which
the mouth is merely shaped into a resonance-chamber.
In this shaping the chief factor is the tongue-position,
It is customary to distinguish nine typical tongue-positions,
three along the horizontal plane, front, mixed, and hack,
and three along the vertical, high, mid, and low. The former three indicate the region in which the tongue approaches most closely to the roof of the mouth, the latter
three, the degree of approximation. Other factors modifying the quality of the resonance are the tensity or relaxation of the oral muscles, especially those of the tongue, and the position, normal, drawn back, or rounded,
of the lips. It is customary to distinguish two typical
states of each of these factors: wide (that is, loose) and
narrow (that is, tense) vowels, and rounded (lips protruded and rounded) and unrounded vowels.
a) Front vowels. A high front vowel, narrow and unrounded, is produced, if one pronounces the spirant [j]
more and more openly, so that the friction-sound disappears. This vowel [i] occurs in a very characteristic form
in French, where the corners of the mouth are drawn back
to emphasize the shape of the resonance-chamber: this
is the regular French i, as in fini 'done'. In German the
lips are not so far drawn back; the sound so produced
is the German Jong i-vowel, spelled ie or ill. In English
it is the initial sound of such words as year, yes.
The corresponding articulation with muscles relaxed
produces a very different acoustic effect, for the resonancechamber in a high vowel is so narrow that even the slight
increase in width produced by the relaxation of the tongue-muscles is a relatively large change. This wide high
MUSICAL ORAL ARTICULATIONS
35
unrounded front vowel [i] is the German short i, as in
bin 'am' and, in slightly lower position, the English short i,
as in bin.
If, while pronouncing [i], one strongly rounds the lips,
the result is the high front narrow rounded vowel [y],
as in the French June 'moon'. Decidedly lower, but still
of the same type is the German long ii, as in kuhn 'bold'
The rounded wide vowel of this position [y], — i. e. a
rounded [í], — appears, in a lowered variety, in the German short ü, as in Hütte 'hut'
If the tongue is lowered to mid-position from these vowels, the narrow unrounded vowel is [e]. This vowel occurs in German, as in geht 'goes', and in French, as in été
'summer'.
The corresponding wide vowel [è] does not differ from
[e] so characteristically as does [i] from [i], for, what with
the greater width of the resonancechannel, the width add
ed by the loosening of the tonguemuscles is here not
so apparent. The [è] occurs in standard German and (slight
ly lower) in American1) English as the regular short evowel, as in the English men, get
The rounded form of [e] has usually less liprounding
than that of [i], but a form with as great liprounding is
conceivable, since this factor is in no wise bound to that
of tongueposition, but can vary freely. The typical mid
front narrow rounded vowel [0] is the French vowel in
such words as peu 'little', jeune 'young'. A lowered varie
ty is the German long övowel, as in schün 'beautiful'.
The wide form of this vowel occurs, again in a lower
ed variety, as the short German ösound, e. g. in Götter
'gods'.
1) By 'American English' I mean my own Chicago pronun
ciation, common generally to the North Central States.
36
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
The low front position, which is reached from that of
the preceding vowels by lowering the tongue, scarcely ad
mits of any distinction between narrow and wide vowels.
The unrounded vowel produced in it, [ε], is the British
English vowel in men, get; in both British and American
English it is the long vowel before r in such words as
air, care; it occurs in French in such words as lait [Iε]
'milk' and pere 'father'. A wide and lowered variety [æ]
is the American English vowel of such words as man, can.
The narrow rounded vowel [ce] occurs in French, as in
peur 'fear' and seal 'alone'.
b) Bach vowels. It will be simplest to speak next of
the back vowels. In these the rear of the tongue is near
velar articulation and the front concavely lowered, so that
the mouth is in the shape of a long, wide, hollow reso
nancechamber. This shape is accentuated, in most cases,
by protrusion and rounding of the lips. The unrounded
back vowels are very hard to analyze, owing to the in
accessibility to touch and sight and to the relatively un
developed muscular consciousness of the back of the mouth.
The high back narrow rounded vowel [u] is typically
represented by the French sound in tour 'tower', pousse
'grows'. The German long u has a little less characteristic
liprounding; it occurs, for instance, in du 'thou'.
The wide rounded vowel [u] is the short sound in Eng
lish words such as book, foot and is the German short u,
as in Mutter 'mother'.
The unrounded vowel in this position is rare; it oc
curs as a variant of another vowel in Russian and is said
also to be spoken in Armenian and in Turkish; its sym
bol is [m].
The mid back narrow rounded vowel [o] is most typi
cally represented by the French o as in rose 'a rose'. The
German long o, as in Rose, has less distinct rounding; in
MUSICAL ORAL ARTICULATIONS
37
Norwegian and Swedish, on the other hand, there is an
[o)] with the extreme liprounding which French, for in
stance, gives to [u].
The wide form [6] is the German short o, as in Gott
'god'.
The same wide vowel, unrounded, [A], is in American
pronunciation the vowel of such words as cut, hut.
The low back rounded vowel [ɔ ] occurs in English be
fore r in such words as hoarse, more. Within the sphere
of this symbol, though perhaps lower than the preceding
sound, is the British English vowel in got, collar, and the
like. A narrower forward variety is spoken in such French
words as mort 'death' and one still more forward, — al
most a mixed vowel, — in such as comme 'how'. A lower
ed variety of [o] sometimes expressed by the special
symbol [D] is the English vowel in such words as all, law.
It exists in Swedish and Norwegian with the greater lip
rounding normally given to [o].
The unrounded vowel corresponding to [o] is the [A˕ ]
in the British pronunciation of cut, hut. Much commoner
is the unrounded vowel coresponding to [Ą], namely [a].
We may take the variety which occurs long in English
father, car as the normal type. Then the German long
vowel in Kahn 'skiff', Staat 'state' and its wider short
form in kann 'is able', Stadt 'city' are a little lower and
the French vowel in pas 'a step' and pale 'dough' is a
little lower and a little farther back. Higher than this
normal type is the [a˔ ] in the American pronunciation
of such words as got, collar. A divergent variety of this
vowel is [a], pronounced much farther forward than [a];
it is the vowel of such French words as patte 'paw', part
'part', and, slightly fronted and raised, of the British pro
nunciation of man, can, and the like.
c) Mixed vowels. The mixed vowels are less common
38
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
than the front or the back. The high mixed vowel, nar
row and unrounded, [ï], alternates with [w] in the Russian
vowel of such words as [sïn] 'son'; it is pronounced
somewhat back of the ideal mixed position.
Its rounded correspondent is the [ü] of Norwegian, writ
ten u, as in hus 'house'.
The mid mixed unrounded vowel [e], in both narrow
and wide pronunciation, is found in German unaccented
syllables where e is written, as in alle 'all'
The low mixed vowel, unrounded, [ ] is used in the
British pronunciation of such words as heard [h rd], nurse
[n is].
I shaH not attempt to discuss the vowels of the un
accented syllables of English and some other languages,
as they present many and complicated problems and have
been but imperfectly analyzed. It is customary to express
the commonest unaccented vowel of a language, — such
as in the second syHable of the English started (reaUy
[è˔ ]) or the German [ë], as in alle, or the French 'emute'
(really [æ˔ ]), as in je 'I', — by the symbol [ə ], which
thus has different values for different languages and is a
practical rather than a descriptive symbol.
There remain the nazalized vowels, of which French
can give us good examples. In these the velum is well
lowered, so that much of the breath escapes through the
nose, producing the peculiar nasal resonance. Thus in
French there is a nazalized [ɔ ], [ ], as in bon [b ] 'good',
an [ã], as in banc [bã] 'bench', an [ ], as in bain [b ] 'bath',
and an [œ], as in brun [brœ] 'brown'.
8. Infinite variety of possible sounds. It wiU be
seen that even the comparatively few of the most typical
sounds here described form a large list. By way of sum
mary we may unite the most important of them in the
following table.
Velar.
Palatal.
Dental and
alveolar.
Labial and
labiodental.
q
է
p
?
Stops, voiced
G
Nasals, voiced
N
Spirants, unvoiced.
Spirants, voiced.
. .
һ ,
. . .
b, Q
Trills, voiced
ļ
39
Uvular.
Laryngeal.
INFINITE VARIETY OF POSSIBLE SOUNDS
g
F
І
I
1
d
b
1
ŋ
x
J
ç
∫S θ
f
g
I
j
λ
r3zπ
v
ո
m j
I
r
R
Musical sounds, high. .
u w üї y i
Musical sounds, mid.. .
o
Λ
ψ e
Musical sounds, low.. .
ο
Musical sounds, lowest.
σ a a æ
œ ε
We have seen that these sounds, which may be select
ed as typical, are only single instances from among an
infinite variety. Even the stops, which might seem fairly
inflexible, occur in a number of varieties. We have al
ready spoken of the many variations as to point of articu
lation and of the difference of voiced [b, d, g] and unvoi
ced [p, t, k]. In English, standard German, and French
this difference is accompanied by another, that of energy
of articulation: the unvoiced stops of these languages are
pronounced with greater muscular tension at the point
of closure than the voiced stops. Our [p, t, k], therefore,
are fortes, our [b, d, g] lenes. These two differences do
not always go hand in hand: in many German dialects,
for instance, there are unvoiced lenes. Another kind of
variation in stops will appear in § 9, The varions possi
40
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
ble pronunciations of spirants, trills, vowels, and so forth,
and their variations as to place of articulation are more
obvious and have in part been mentioned.
9. Glides and mixtures of articulation. In the ac
tual current of speech another factor of variation ap
pears: the transition or glide from one sound to another, or
from inactivity of the vocal organs to the production of
some sound (or vice versa). I shall mention only the two
most important instances. In passing from an unvoiced
stop to a vowel, we have to perform two movements: to
change the mouthposition and to begin voicing. If these
two movements are performed simultaneously, the result
is a pure stop, as spoken in the Romance languages (e.
g. French) or in the Slavic (e. g. Russian). If the stop
is opened before voicing is begun, so that a puff of un
voiced breath first escapes, we hear an aspirated stop [p',
t', k ' ] , as in English and German, or, even more pro
nouncedly, in Danish. Finally, the glottis may be closed
during the stop and opened at the same time with the latter,
— this is the pronunciation in some Armenian dialects, —
or shortly after it, — this type occurs in Georgian, —
producing choke stops. The other instance I shall mention
is the onglide of initial vowels. Here the oral vowelpo
sition is first taken: if voicing now begins immediately,
we hear a pure vowel initial, as in American English or
French; if the vocal chords are gradually brought from
the breathingposition into that for voicing, they must
pass through that of an [h] (p. 26), producing the aspi
rated initial of our words such as heel, have, hoop, etc. If,
finally, the vocal chords are first closed and then suddenly
opened into the voicing position, we hear a choke initial,
the glottal stop followed by the vowel: this is the way
German words written with initial vowel are pronounced,
such as arm [?arcn] 'poor' (p. 24).
SYLLABLES
41
While there are a number of other instances, notably
in connection with stoparticulation, of various glidepossi
bilities, the glide is in the majority of cases determined
by the positions of the two successive sounds. In passing
from [a] to [u], for instance, there is only one movement
to be performed and only one path for that movement;
similarly, in passing from [n] to [d] all one needs to do
is to raise the velum, and this can be done in only one
way.
Beside glides from articulation to articulation there is
often possibility of mixture of articulations. An [m], for
instance, before an [i], may be pronounced either indiffer
ently or with the tongueposition and lipwidening of the
[i] . The latter is the habit of the Slavic languages. This
mixing in of part of the position of a front vowel, called
palatalization, is very common. In English it occurs only
in the case of [k] and [g], which are pronounced farther
forward before [i], as in kin, give (p. 32). In the Slavic
languages almost every consonant can be palatalized; in
writing an accent mark may be used to indicate this (cf.
p. 31), for instance, in Russian [p'i ∫u] 'I am writing', —
[p'] spoken with the tongueposition of [i] and the cor
ners of the mouth drawn back for the articulation of this
vowel. In labialization sounds are pronounced with the
liprounding of a rounded vowel. An instance is the Amer
ican pronunciation of wh, as in which, whale: the vocal
chords are pronouncing an [h] while the tongue and lips
are in the [u]position, [h)] or [hw].
10. Syllables. While much more could be said about
the different articulations and their glides and mixtures,
it must suffice for our purpose to understand how varied
the possibilities are. Great as is this variety, everyone
who has heard a foreign language spoken will realize
that, aside from the strange sounds, the general manner
42
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
of pronunciation or 'accent' of a language is even more
characteristic. Here, of course, the possibilities are again
unlimited. Pitch, stress, kind of voice (e, g. full voice
and murmur), and duration (speed) are all variable
factors.
Even aside from the factors just mentioned, a sequence
of articulations never appeals to the ear as a series of
coordinate sounds. Some sounds are, in themselves and
aside from any distinction of stress or pitch we may
give them, more sonorous than others. Voiced sounds
are more audible than unvoiced, for the obvious reason
that to the oral noise they add the tone produced in the
larynx. It is equally obvious that the more open a sound,
the greater its volume. In a sequence of articulations,
accordingly, we hear a constant up and down of sonority.
The less sonorous articulations are heard, to speak met
aphorically, as valleys between crests of greater sonority.
The soundsequence between the least sonorous instants
of two such successive valleys we call a syllable. The
most sonorous sounds are the low vowels. Even in a
word like away [æuei] or [ə uei], which is composed en
tirely of vowels, we hear two syUables, for the [u], less
sonorous than the preceding and following lower vowels,
is heard as a valley; similarly the [i] is less sonorous
than the preceding mid vowel [e]: we write [æ ǔ eǐ or
[ə ǔ eǐ ]. The lower sonority of the [i] appears in a com
bination like away again [ə ǔ eǐ ə gen]. The most sono
rous sound of a syllable is called the syllabic, the others
are the non-syllabics. Vowels used as nonsyllabics, like
the [u] and [i] above are often called semi-vowels. The
semivowel [ǔ ] is often, especially if the lips are tenser
than in the syllabic occurrence of [u] in the same langua
ge, written [w], and, as [1], if the friction is at all above
a minimum, approaches a [j], this character is often used
STRESS
43
to express a nonsyllabic [i]. The combination of non
syllabic with syllabic vowels is called a diphthong. If
the syllabic vowel precedes, as in tbe English he [hu]
do
|, day
, toe
, boy _ _, die
_, how
|, we speak of a falling diphthong; if the semivowel
precedes, as in yes
, year , your
, wag
,
wall
of a rising diphthong. A triphthong occurs,
for instance, in use
,
, wait
, etc. One
can also write [hij, duw, dej, tow, jes, jir, jur, wæg, wal,
juwz, juws, wejt].
Next to the vowels in sonority are the trills, laterals,
and nasals; all of them may figure as syllables. Thus
the American pronunciation of words like sir, skirt, heard,
nurse is
and words like bottle, butter,
button, bottom are pronounced
In work
the [u] or [w] is nonsyllabic, the
syllabic.
The boundary between two natural syllables is thus
always the least sonorous sound between the syllabics:
in bottle, batter, etc. it is the [t].
11. Stress. a) Syllable-stress. The inherent sonority
of the speechsounds is partly offset by the possibility
of speaking one sound more loudly than another, —
that is, of distributing the stress (p. 25). Thus the se
quence [ui] can be spoken with the [u] louder, so that
the [i] becomes nonsyllabic: [uj], or with the [i] louder
and the u nonsyllabic: [wi] — for the most sonorous
sound is always the syllabic. Even an
may thus be
turned into an
and an
into an
by speaking
the [e] more loudly than the [a]. On the other hand,
stress cannot wholly offset natural lack of sonority: in
an [as], no matter how loud we try to make the [s], the
[a] will aways be the syllabic, for any voiced [a] is ap
preciably louder than the loudest [s]
44
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
Some languages regulate the stress within the syllable
in conformity with the natural sonority, pronouncing the
syllabic of each natural syllable with greater stress than
the nonsyllabics. This, for instance, is the case in the
Romance and the Slavic languages. In all languages
there is some approximation to this distribution. English
and German depart from it as far as any. In these lan
guages it often happens that a succession of two or even
more natural syllables is spoken with but one effort of
stress. While in French, for instance, one would say
[39 ma psl so lε:j], 'I am called the sun', with higher
stress on each syllabic than on the preceding and follow
ing nonsyllabics, an English word like utter [Λtr] begins
with highest stress, which is maintained through the
syllabic [A], and then sinks steadily to the end of the word,
without regard to the presence of the second syllabic.
In a word like pity [piti] the stress rises through the [p],
reaches its height at the beginning of the first [i], main
tains it through this syllabic, and then uninterruptedly
sinks. The same is true of German words like bitte
[bitə ] 'please' or hasse [hase] 'hate'. There are in all
these words two natural syllables, but they consist of
only one stress-syllable. Since stressweakening by means
of separation of the vocal chords (p. 25) easily passes
over into the slightly wider open murmurposition (p. 25),
the unstressed parts of such words are often spoken with
murmur instead of voice.
The distribution of stress may thus conflict as to
syllableboundaries with the inherent relations of natural
sonority. The boundary between natural syllables is, of
course, within the least sonorous articulation that inter
venes between the syllabics. Thus in utter, "bottle, butter,
button, bottom, pity it is in the [t], in the German hasse
[hasə ] in the [s], in the German bitte [bite] in the [t]:
STRESS
45
in short, the least sonorous sound belongs as much to
one syllable as to the other, — it is the yalley between
the two crests of sonority. In these words there is, how
ever, as we have just seen, but one stresssyllable and
therefore no valley or boundary of stress. The boundary
between two stress rises may, on the other hand, coincide
with the natural syllableboundary. That is, the stress
of one stresssyllable may come to its minimum and that
of the next stresssyllable begin to rise within the least
sonorous sound. This is the case in such Italian words
as anno [an no] 'year' and atto [at to] 'act'. The effect
on the ear is that of a definite separation between the
beginning and the end of the articulation concerned.
Hence we write the symbol twice, once for each stress
syllable, and call such sounds double or geminate sounds.
In by far the most instances, however, the minimum
of stress does not fall within an articulation: English,
German, and French, for instance, have no double sounds.
In the Romance and the Slavic languages the stress
boundary falls, when there is but one nonsyllabic, al
ways before the latter: the minimum of stress is reached
at the end of the preceding syllabic, and the new stress
begins to rise with the nonsyllabic. Hence the division
in the preceding French sentence, or in such Russian
words as [vɔ dї] 'waters', [ba' ba] 'woman', [pə tə ra p'r's']
'hurry up'. When there is more than one nonsyllabic
these languages recognize certain groups of articulations
which may begin a stresssyllable: such groups are treat
ed like a single sound; thus in French [aple] 'to call'
or in Russian [pra ∫t∫'aj t'ε] 'farewell'. Sequences of
sounds which may not begin a stresssyllable must be
divided: thus in the above French sentence [Is] cannot
begin a stresssyllable, hence the division [pεlsɔ ]. In
English and German, on the other hand, the conditions
46
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
are not so simple. 1. In passing from a less highly
stressed syllable to one more highly stressed, we usually
pronounce a single nonsyllabic with the following stress
syllable, as in away [ә wej], again [ә gen], a name [ә nejm];
but we do not always do so, certain meanings demand
ing a different division, as in an aim [әn ejm], in contrast
with a name. 2. In passing from a stressed syllabic
followed by a single nonsyllabic to a less stressed syl
labic, we ignore the natural syllableboundary, as in utter,
pity, bottle, etc. above, — speaking but one stresssyllable.
3. If two or more nonsyllabics intervene, we put the
stressboundary between them, as in until [ә til], hating
[hej tiŋ], wholesome [howl sәm]. — German differs from
English only in that in case 2 it does make a stress
boundary (taking the nonsyllabic with the following
stresssyllable), provided the preceding syllabic is long;
thus, in contrast with bitte [bitə ], hasse [hasə ], spoken as
but one stresssyllable each, it says biete [bi: tə ] 'offer',
Hase [h : zә] 'hare' with two each. After the longer
English vowels the same distribution is often made; one
may say [fa: ðr, æ pļ] as well as [fa:ðr, æpl].
Within each stresssyllable also, different relations of
stress are possible. Two forms are common: the syl
lable either begins with highest stress, which then decrea
ses, or it begins with less than the highest stress, rises
to the highest, and then falls off. In each case the high
est stress may for a short time be maintained. In Eng
lish we use the former type for syllables beginning with
the syllabic, such as all, are, utter, apple, the latter for
those beginning with a nonsyllabic, in which we reach the
highest stress only at the beginning of the syllabic, as in
mid, lid, pity, bottle, etc. (It is best to try these and the fol
lowing examples of stressrelations in a whisper, as pitch
variations — see next § — may otherwise be confusing.)
STRESS
47
In all the preceding instances the stress is maintained
at its height throughout the syllabic and sinks only after
the following nonsyllabic is reached. This is why the
[d] in lid, for example, is so much more stressed than
that in lead (verb) [lijd], the [n] in bi so much more
than that in bean [bijn]: the former [d] and [n], respec
tively, begin with highest stress and descend, but those
in lead and bean begin only after the stress has already
decreased during the preceding nonsyllabic, [j]. This
maintenance of highest stress throughout the syllabic is
called close syllablestress.
The decrescendo of the stress may, on the other hand,
take place within the syllabic. In the Romance and the
Slavic languages this is almost always necessarily the
case, for most of the stresssyllables of these languages
end with the syllabic. This is called open syllablestress.
In English it is less common, occurring chiefly in our
longer vowels, which often stand at the end of a stress
syllable and therefore must needs include the descres
cendo, as in mama [mə m :] and frequently (cf. above)
in father fa:ðr], apple [æpl]. German has open syllable
stress in syllables with long syllabic, as in Wien [vi:n]
'Vienna', Kahn [ : ] 'skiff', and in the first syllable of
biete [bi:tə ] 'offer', Hase [h : zə ] 'hare', and close in syl
lables with short syllabic, as in bi [bin] 'am', k [kan]
'is able', litte [bitə ] 'please', hasse [hasa] 'hate'.
The stress may, further, rise, reach its highest point,
and fall within the syllabic; this is called compound
stress. It is found regularly in certain syllables in An
cient Greek and in Lithuanian. In English it is heard
in a surprised, displeased What!? and in a peeved,
irritable No! (most clearly if the whispering test is used).
These differences in syllablestress constitute one of the
chief difficulties in acquiring a foreign pronounciation
48
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
and are perhaps the most important factor in the pecu
liar 'accent' of a language.
b) Group-stress. Of the several stresssyllables in an
utterance some receive louder stress than others. In this
distribution of varying degrees of stress among the syl
lables, group-stress, the different languages also diverge.
In French the last syllable of an utterance or of such
parts of an utterance as are fairly independent in mean
ing, alone receives higher stress, the other syllables being
fairly equal. Thus the French sentence above quoted, re
ceives, in contrast with the English equivalent, 1 am
'called the 'sun, but one highest stress: [3ə ma pεls 'lε:j],
or at most also a weaker secondary stress on [pεl], the
last syllable of the part of the utterance which corre
sponds in meaning to Ί am called': [3ə ma 'pεl sɔ "lε:j].
In Japanese there is even less difference between the
syllables. English and German, on the other hand, divide
every utterance into small groups of syllables within each
of which there is one highest stress, — stress-groups.
But even these two languages differ from each other;
English, for instance, normally gives highest stress to
one syllable each of an adjective and a following noun,
as in a 'young 'man or 'rotten po'tato, so that such a com
bination contains two stressgroups, while German nor
mally gives higher stress to the noun: ein 'junger "Herr,
'faule Kar" toffel, one stressgroup each. Russian also, in
spite of its entirely different syllablestress, has much
the same groupstress as English or German, but differs,
for instance, in often giving higher stress to a preposition
than to a following noun, as though we should say 'at
the foot, 'under the head: ['za' nə gu, 'pɔ 'd gә tә vu]. English,
German, or Russian, with their frequent high stresses,
can distinguish different meanings by their distribution
of group stress; thus in English 'torment noun, but tor-
STRESS
49
'ment, verb; in German übersetzen
;to
set
f
across' but
to translate'; in Russian
[mu' ka] 'torment' (noun) but [ m u ' k a ] 'flour'. Other
languages with frequent high stress give it a uniform
place with regard to the word, — which, as we shall
see, is a division based entirely on meaning. Thus
Cechish and Icelandic have highest stress on the first
syllable of every word; short words of relational mean
ing, such as pronouns, prepositions, conjunctions, may,
however, lack this stress. In Polish the nexttolast syl
lable of words is similarly, in almost all instances, accent
ed. German departs widely and English very widely
from a fundamental principle of stressing the first syl
lable of every word. There remains, however, the princi
ple that in these languages every word is a stressgroup,
containing one syllable with highest stress and, in longer
words, one or more with intermediate stress (the degrees
of stress are indicated by the varying number of accent
marks before the syllable), e. g. procrastination
with four degrees of stress, highest on
[nej], least on [ti] and
and intermediate degrees on
and
Short relational words, such as a, the,
he, her, in, and the like, have, however, as a rule, low
stress and stand to the preceding or following higher
stress in the same relation as do less stressed syllables
of the same word. Further, the highest stress of some
words is in certain connections weaker than that of others,
so that the stressgroups which represent words fall
under a higher unity of the phrase; examples are the
German combinations of adjective with noun (see above)
or such expressions as a 'great 'big "man, which, how
ever, in nearly all cases, are really examples of sentencestress, to which we shall now turn.
c) Sentence-stress. Among stressgroups the highest
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
50
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
stress of some is in turn higher than that of others. This
highest stress or sentencestress is in all languages given
to the emotionally most vivid part of the sentence, —
a result of the fundamental character of speech as an
expressive movement varying in intensity according to
the intensity of emotion (p. 1). We may illustrate this
by speaking an English sentence with emotional stress
on different words, — as though in answer, for instance,
to various contradicting statements. E. g.: I 'saw the
'young 'man, — I "saw the 'young 'man, — I 'saw the
"young 'man, - I 'saw the 'young "man, and even I 'saw
"the 'young 'man.
We find, thus, a threefold distribution of stress. First,
there is the upanddown of stress within the syllable,
fixed for each language. Secondly, every language ha
bitually gives certain syllables higher stress than others:
we have our accented and unaccented syllables and our
unaccented short words. Finally, the emotionally dom
inant elements of the sentence receive higher stress than
all others. Usually these elements are words, in which
case the emotional stress is given in most languages to
the syllable which otherwise also bears higher stress than
the others. Thus when we say It 'wasn't dis'honesty, it
was "sheer procrasti'"nation, the emotional stress of procrastination is placed on the same syllable which habitu
ally has highest stress in this word. If, however, the
emotionally most charged part of the sentence is not a
word, but only part of a word, the emotional stress may
conflict with the groupstress. Thus, while we say for'give, as in for give and forget, we say "for give in "give
and "forgive. In French, where not a syllable of every
word, but only the last syllable of sentences and phrases
receives habitual groupstress, the emotional sentence
stress is given to the first syllable that begins with a
PITCH
51
consonant of the dominant word. Thus it is almost al
ways a part of a sentence or even of a word which usual
ly is unstressed, that now receives highest stress, 'Iť s
the same person' is [sə la mε:m pεr'sɔ n] but 'Iťs the very
same person9 is [sə la"mε:m pεr'sɔ n]; 'It's impossible' is
[sə t pɔ 'sibl] but 'It's impossible' is [sə t :"pɔ 'sibl]
The rhythmic effects of stressdistribution are heightened
in English and Russian by the habit of speaking in the
less stressed syllables shorter and less extreme vowels
than in the stressed. Other languages, like German, go
still farther and restrict the least stressed syllables to a
single vowel, — in German [ ].
12. Pitch. Pitch, like stress, can be infinitely varied.
The modulation of pitch may correspond to the syllable
division, each syllable being spoken with a unified pitch
scheme. This is the case in Chinese; thus in Peking
[ΓχϋαΊ] with even high pitch means 'flower',[Ώ \]with
low falling pitch, 'speech' or 'picture', [Liy/] with low
rising pitch means 'rain' and [ ї /] with high rising pitch
means 'fish'. While the Peking speech has only these
four pitchschemes, some dialects have as many as nine.
In Norwegian and Swedish stressgroups (words) of one
syllable are spoken with rising pitch and stressgroups
of two or more syllables (corresponding in most, but not
in all cases, to words) are spoken with either rising or
falling and then rising pitch, according to fixed habits;
thus in Norwegian [bьn/] 'ground', ['bьnәn/] 'the ground',
["bь|'nәn/] 'bound'. In Lithuanian, Ancient Greek, and
the oldest Sanskrit we find compound (risingfalling)
pitch belonging habitually to certain syllables.
In other languages, such as English, the different syl
lables have no fixed pitchrelations, but pitch is used in
the whole sentence to express emotional relations. We
use falling pitch for statements, as in He came back or
52
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
the answerword Tes, rising pitch for questions that
contain no questionword, such as Bid you say thai? or
for questionwords used alone, as What?: the compound
pitches are similarly used, thus risingfalling in questions
that contain a questionword, such as What was he doing?,
or in an irritated No, and the fallingrising in an angri
ly surprised What? Compound pitch is usually, if con
fined to one syllable, accompanied, as in these examples,
by compound stress (cf. p. 47).
13. Duration. Duration or quantity, — that is, the
length of the different sounds, syllables, and stressgroups,
— is another important factor.
Thus in English some of the vowels are longer than
others, [æ] and [a], especially, longer than [i] and [ù]. All
our vowels, moreover, are longer before voiced sounds,
as in bid, than before unvoiced sounds, as in bit. In one
case only have we, in American pronunciation, approxi
mately the same vowel in two distinct quantities, namely
[a:] long, as in father, and the same sound (with a slight
difference, p. 37) short [a], as in got, collar, god; in ac
cordance with the preceding rule the [a] before the voiced
sounds in the last two examples is, however, longer than
in got. In standard German the tense vowels are long,
the loose vowels short; in the case of [a] there is, however,
scarcely any difference except that of quantity, e. g. Stadt
[∫tat] 'city', Staat [∫tait] 'state'
In English our nonsyllabics are longer, the shorter the
preceding syllabic; thus the [n] in is longer than that
in men, which is in turn longer than that in man. In
other languages the duration of nonsyllabics is not auto
matic (i. e. does not depend on the surrounding sounds)
but is fixed for each word. Such long nonsyllabics differ
from doubled sounds (p. 45) in that no stressboundary
occurs during their articulation. Accordingly a difference
LIMITATION OF THE ARTICULATIONS IN EACH DIALECT 53
exists between the Norwegian otte ["ɔ \ 't:ə /] 'eight' with
long [t] beginning the second syllable and the Italian otto
['ɔ t to] 'eight' with double [t], the stressboundary com
ing after the closure and before the opening of the [t]stop.
The duration of the various parts of a sentence is less
fixed. Certain tendencies, however, such as that to speak
a parenthetic clause very rapidly (as in This man, — who
for that matter, had very little to do iviih the affair, — ...),
can here be distinguished. No doubt there are also differ
ences between the different languages, but they have never
been ascertained, owing to the difficulty of abstracting
from factors of mood, personal habit, and the like, which
here have comparatively free play.
14. Limitation of the articulations in each dialect.
A language which significantly used any considerable part
of the articulations and variations of stress, pitch, and
quantity that are possible, could be understood only by
the closest application of the attention, and, if it used too
many, could not be understood at all, for the intelligi
bility of language depends, of course, on repetition and
recognition.
As a matter of fact every language limits itself to cer
tain sounds and to certain ways of combining them. Some,
like English and German, employ constant stressrelations
for certain syllables, leaving pitchmodulation for the sen
tence as a whole; others, like French, use both pitch and
stress only in the sentence; still others, like Chinese, as
sign a definite pitchrelation to each syllable and use
stress only to modulate the sentence; Norwegian and Swe
dish use pitch and stress both for the syllable and for
the sentence. The same is true of the individual articu
lations. Thus English and standard German use unvoiced
aspirated fortis [p', ť , k'] and voiced plain lenis stops [b,
d, g]; the Romance and the Slavic languages use only
54
THE PHYSICAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
plain stops, unvoiced fortes [p, t, k] and voiced lenes [b,
d, g]; the Peking pronunciation of Chinese uses only un
voiced stops, aspirate fortes [p', ť , k'] and plain fortes
or lenes [ , d, g]; other languages, such as the Polyne
sian, have but one series of stops; Sanskrit had four, un
voiced fortes and voiced lenes, each in aspirate and plain
form. Such distinctions are recognized by speakers of
the language, and forms not so recognized are interpret
ed as standard forms by the hearer. Thus, though un
aspirated [p, t, k] and unvoiced lenes [b, d, g] are oc
casionally spoken in English, they are not recognized as
different from the more usual forms; such a distinction
as that between [p'] and [p] is not even noticed. Whether
we speak a [t, d, n, 1, r] a little farther forward or a little
farther back is a matter of indifference in English; it is
left to personal habit, mood, or the influence of the sur
rounding sounds; but in Sanskrit and in many modern lan
guages of India the difference between dental and cerebral
articulation is as important as that between any other
sounds; thus in Canarese kondu means 'killed' but kondu,
'taken'. Whether we pronounce farther forward or
back depends mainly on the following vowel and is never
significant, but in Greenlandish or in Arabic [k] and [q]
must be strictly kept apart.
In other words, each language, or, better, each dialect
distinguishes only a limited number of places of articu
lation, and in each place only a limited number of manners
of articulation, and any variations from these are never
significant.
15. Automatic variations. The variations that occur,
while not significant, may be very regular. Our English
vowels, for instance, are longer in final position and be
fore voiced sounds than before unvoiced, longer, to repeat
our example, in bid than in bit, in bee, bead than in beat,
AUTOMATIC VARIATIONS
55
and English spoken without this variation would strike
our ear as very foreignsounding, even though most of us
would be unable to determine exactly what the peculiarity
was Yet in spite of this universal occurrence, — really
because of it, — this difference of vowelquantity is never
significant. It depends solely on the following sound and
can never be determined by the meaning of the word: it
is an automatic sound-variation. Before and after unvoiced
sounds we pronounce our [m, n, 1, r] partly or wholly
unvoiced, e. g. in try, belt, hemp, sent, snow, but we are
not even conscious of this variation: it also is purely au
tomatic. So is the German and English variation between
[k, g] farther forward or back according to the following
vowel, as in , give, — cap, gap, — coop, goose, but in
Arabic, as above mentioned, such pairs as [kaila] 'he spoke'
and [qa:la] 'һ measured' could never be confused.
Every language has, further, limitations as to what
combinations of sounds can occur and as to where, in the
syllable, a given sound or combination may be spoken.
us no English syllable can begin with the combinations
kn, gn, ts, JpjĹ, tsv, Jv], which are common in German,
— even though, distributed between two syllables or at
the end of a syllable, all of these do occur in English, as
in acknowedge, bigness, its, cash price, it's very cold, cash
value. The sound [n] cannot occur at the beginning of
a German or an English syllable but it does so in many
languages. In Peking Chinese a syllable can end only in
a vowel, [n], or [ŋ]. In the Polynesian languages no
syllable ends in any other than a vowel sound.
Each language, therefore, has a limited soundsystem,
which, if only significant distinctions are counted and non
significant variations, whether automatic or merely casual,
are ignored, is never very great.
CHAPTER .
THE M E N T A L BASIS OF LANGUAGE.
1. The place of language in our mental life. Lan
guage plays a very important part in most of our mental
processes, few of which, indeed, are entirely free from
Linguistic elements. While it is possible, for instance, with
some effort, to picture in purely visual terms the actions
we have in mind for the morrow, we hardly ever do so,
but rather plan our day not only by visualizing but also
by wording what we intend to do. If, further, we try to
think of our reasons for these intended actions, or of
their effects, or of anything else not in immediate physical
connection with them, we must resort to language, fram
ing our thought in words and sentences. In short, a very
little introspection shows that nearly all of our mental
life contains speechelements. We cannot conceive of the
human mind without speech. The development of lan
guage, accordingly, must have advanced in inseparable
connection with that of the mental powers generally. To
demonstrate in detail the role of language in our mental
processes would be to outline the facts of psychology. We
are here concerned, of course, only with those mental process
es which most immediately underlie the use of language.
2. Total experiences. The animals have in common
with us a process which may be called the formation of
total experiences. Like us, they experience the outside world
not as a chaotic jumble of sensations, but as a system of
TOTAL EXPERIENCES
57
complex recurrent' units, as a world of objects. The per
ceptual and emotional elements which we group together,
for instance, as a rabbit, appear to a dog also coherent
and distinct from other perceptions and emotions, such
as those of the surrounding trees, the sky, other smells
and noises, the internal bodily sensations, and so on. Like
ours, the dog's apperception, — or, as we subjectively say,
his attention, — may focus the rabbit as the central ob
ject, for the time being, of consciousness. The coherence
and unity of such a total experience are due to habits of
association formed in earlier related experiences: in our
instance the surrounding trees and the sky, the bystanders,
and those of our internal sensations and emotions that
are not connected with the present experience, have all
entered into various combinations in earlier experiences
and have thereby become familiar enough not to be irrel
evantly confused with the present one.
Animals respond to a total experience by an expression
varying at best for a few widely distinct emotional qual
ities; thus the dog barks at the rabbit as he does at a
great many other things. Man differs from the animals
first of all in that he has a distinctive soundreaction for
each one of a great many types of experience, — e. g.
for the type of experience which we call a 'rabbit'. When
ever an experience of a given type occurs, the soundre
action connected with that type is associatively recalled
and reproduced. When we saw the rabbit, for instance,
we did not 'inarticulately' cry out, but exclaimed 'a rabbit.'
This also, to be sure, is not an exact way of dealing
with experiences. We react to countless experiences of
a single type (such as 'rabbit') with one and the same
utterance, while in fact no two experiences are wholly
alike. When we associate the present experience with
certain past experiences and utter with it the soundse
58
THE MENTAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
quence which we heard and uttered with them, we do so
not because the present experience is exactly like the past
ones, — it is not, — but because certain elementary fea
tures are common to it and each of them. These elemen
tary features are known as dominant elements. Thus a
rabbit of different size or color, or one running in the
opposite direction might call forth the same utterance.
We use the word 'book' for objects of many sizes, shapes,
and colors, provided they present certain features. Even
a clearly defined scientific term, such as 'triangle' applies
to an infinite variety of experiences with but a simple
common element. In short, our reaction to experiences,
though much more differentiated than that of animals,
is not just to the individuality of each experience, but
groups great numbers of experiences together under types
within each of which all the experiences are designated
by one and the same reaction.
The association of experiencetypes with fixed and dis
tinctive soundutterances represents an important step in
mental progress. It makes possible attentive and connected
thought. When we recall the experience, we repeat, ac
tually or in imagination, the sounds with which it is con
nected. They are a convenient means of holding the ex
perience in the attention; by recalling the sounds (or their
visual symbols) over and over again, — at first as young
children do, aloud, but, after practice, in imagination alone,
— we can keep the experience before us much longer
than is possible in speechless picturing.
An advantage of the grouping together of hosts of in
dividual experiences under one type is this, that all ex
periences belonging to the type can be dealt with en masse
and need not be recalled one by one, if we use the lin
guistic expression, which deals with all of them alike.
This is conceptual or general thinking.
THE ANALYSIS OF TOTAL EXPERIENCES
59
3. The analysis of total experiences. The existence
of a fixed soundreaction, which enables us to hold an
experience vividly in our attention, also makes possible
the analysis of experiences. Every experience is composed
of a number of elements whose individuality is due to
their having occurred in other contexts in past experiences.
Thus we have seen the color of the rabbit, other four
footed animals, other running animals, and the like. Each
element recalls those past experiences in which it figured.
But it does this obscurely, until language has given the
experience a fixed and easily handled symbol with which
we can keep it from slipping, as it were, through our
fingers. Once language exists, however, the analysis of
the experience into these elements is bound to develop.
At least it takes place in all known languages and is in
all of them, as time goes on, being perfected by a grad
ual but unceasing process of development, to which we
must ascribe also its origin.
This process is the assimilation of expressionrelations
to experiencerelations. We may illustrate it by a sche
matic example. Suppose that in some language the ut
terance connected with the experience of a white rabbit
is patilu and that connected with a white fox is meko, —
in other words, that these experiences, of different emotional
value, are attended by two totally unlike expressions.
Nevertheless, owing to such elements as they have in
common, whenever a white rabbit is seen, not only the
past whiterabbit experiences, with their patilu, but also,
among others, the white fox experiences, with their melco,
will be awakened. Sooner or later one of these types will
assimilate the other's expression; such assimilative pro
cesses are constantly occurring, as we shall see, in every
language, — ?s when, in English, Chaucer s word fader
became the father of present English, under the influence
60
THE MENTAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
of mother, brother. For instance, instead of pat ilu, someone
will, under the influence of meko, say metilu. At first tbis
will happen occasionally, but it will be the more likely
to happen again when one has once spoken or heard the
new form. The associational circumstances are all in favor
of it. Finally the new habit will completely supersede the
old. When this has happened, there are two utterances:
me-tilu 'whiterabbit' and me-ko' whitefox'. Corresponding
to the perceptual element 'white' is the phonetic element
me-. When one now utters me-tilu a certain amount of
analysis is involved: me- expresses the color, ֊ tilu (or ֊ ko)
the kind of animal. These phonetic elements may ulti
mately attain independent use: in answer to such a question
as 'What kind of a rabbit (fox) did you see?' one may
say me 'White', and one may designate 'rabbit' in general
by tilu, 'fox' in general by ko.
When this development has taken place, such an ut
terance as me tilu or white rabbit involves an analysis of
the total experience into these two elements. When we
say white rabbit we more or less vividly separate the two
elements of the total experience. Sometimes we may not
attend closely to the analysis, but at others we shall in
sist on it, as when we say 'No, a white rabbit' or 'No, a
white rabbiť. Such an utterance analyzing an experience
into elements we call a sentence.
The relation of the elements of a sentence to each other
has a distinctive psychological tone. It is called the logical or discursive relation. It consists of a transition of
the attention from the total experience, which throughout
remains in consciousness, to the successive elements, which
are one after another focused by it.
The attention of an individual, — that is, apperception,
— is a unified process: we can attend to but one thing
at a time. Consequently the analysis of a total experience
THE ANALYSIS OF TOTAL EXPERIENCES
61
always proceeds by single binary divisions into a part
for the time being focused and a remainder. In the pri
mary division of an experience into two parts, the one
focused is called the subject and the one left for later
attention the predicate; the relation between them is called
predication. If, after this first division, either subject or
predicate or both receive further analysis, the elements
in each case first singled out are again called subjects
and the elements in relation to them, attributes. The subject
is always the present thing, the known thing, or the con
crete thing, the predicate or attribute, its quality, action,
or relation or the thing to which it is like. Thus in the
sentence Lean horses run fast the subject is lean horses
and the horses' action, run fast, is the predicate. Within
the subject there is the further analysis into a subject
horses and its attribute lean, expressing the horses' qual
ity. In the predicate fast is an attribute of the subject
run.
Constant repetition, to be sure, mechanizing these pro
cesses, saves us the trouble of repeating the entire dis
cursive analysis in every sentence we utter. Such groups,
especially, as are very common are no longer felt as attri
butions (predication is always vividly discursive), the con
crete relation alone remaining uppermost. Thus, in a sen
tence such as A uhite rabbit ran across the field, the first
three words are plainly felt to be the subject, and the
rest the predicate, and within the subject ivhite, within
the predicate across the field are in vivid attributive re
lation, respectively, to a rabbit and ran; but the groups
across the field and a rabbit are not by the normal speaker
felt as discursive relations. He would say simply that a
expresses the 'indefinitiness' and that the expresses the
'definiteness' of the thing, while across is expressive of
local relation. It is only when we give the parts of the
62
THE MENTAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
utterance much more than the usual degree of attention,
that we may feel these relations as discursive, — as ; for
instance, when we say 'It was a house, but I 'don't think
it was the house', where a and the are plainly attributes.
In short, a frequently recurring arrangement of elements
may become habitual and not require a vivid discursive
analysis for its utterance.
As this circumstance shows, discursive analysis is not
an absolute thing: associational identification shades into
it. In most languages we find, accordingly, elements that
are but partially independent. In our schematic represen
tation above, the stage in which me-til 'whiterabbit' and
me-ko 'whitefox' are used, but neither me- nor tilu nor
ko are as yet used independently illustrates this. In such
an English sentence as He suddenly ran across the field
there are several such partly analyzed elements. The element
suddenly, for instance, divides itself into sudden and ly7 but
since the latter cannot be used alone, the analysis is not dis
cursive but merely associative. The same is true of across,
where cross does, in related senses, occur alone, but not
so a-. The rvoweln of ran occurs also in run, and the
vowels [æ] and [A] of these two forms are felt to express
the relative time of the action, but neither is an abstract
rvowelw, as a term for the action itself regardless of
time, in English conceivable, nor is an [æ] or an [A] ever
spoken separately to express the time alone. In father,
mother, brother, the ֊ ther is common to all and thus ex
presses a common element of all three; or, if we add sister,
we nay say that dentalplusr does so, but neither ther
nor a dentalplusr can be used alone in some such sense
as 'i ear relative': there is but the suggestion of an ana
lysis Such imperfectly separable elements are called formational elements, as opposed to the independently re
current units of analysis, words. Words only and scarcely
THE NAMING OF OBJECTS
63
ever formational elements, can be dealt with as conceptual
units of general thinking.
é. The naming of objects. If we look into concrete
experience, we find that all of it centers round objects.
An independent (or, as we say, abstract) quality, action,
or relation never occurs. The soundreactions, therefore,
which form language can originally have been called forth,
in so far as they refer to perceptual experience, only by
objects. Words for qualities, actions, and relations we
must suppose to have been evolved in the later course
of speechhistory.
The linguistic expression of an objectexperience, then,
is the simplest type, psychologically, of such expression.
It is a soundcomplex heard and uttered in connection
with a number of successive concrete experiences, each
of which exhibits certain dominant elements. The words
rabbit or book are associated for each speaker with a long
series of experiences having certain dominant features in
common, much as these experiences may have diverged
in their other features.
Even here we see a certain degree of abstraction. In
speech or thought the soundexpression may be used not
only for a given object exhibiting the dominant features,
but also as a representative of all objects exhibiting them.
In a general statement about 'the rabbit', 'books', or 'a
triangle' these words save us the task of picturing suc
cessively all the rabbits, books, or triangles we can re
call or imagine: we need only dwell on the word and
the associated dominant features, such as a vague visual
image of a rabbit, a book, or three intersecting lines.
Thus, to repeat, the easily handled general concept,
— the basis of logical thought, — is a product of lan
guage.
There are numerous languages, especially on the Ameri
64
THE MENTAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
can continent, which have not gone beyond the naming
of objects. In these languages the qualities and actions
of objects, which in concrete experience never occur apart
from objects, are in expression also always connected
with them. Thus one cannot, at this stage, speak of
'white' or of 'runs', but only of such objects as 'white
rabbit' or 'runningrabbit', or, at best, of c whitething'
or of 'runningthing' — in terms of our diagram, of metilu or me-k·, neyer of me. Every word is an objectex
pression; qualities or actions are never as such expressed
by separate words. One cannot say 'kills' or 'killing',
for instance, but only 'hiskillingofit' or the like. This
state of things forbids any distinction in speech between
predication and attribution, for, as predication usually
has as its subject an object and as its predicate an action
or quality, its explicit expression depends on the exist
ence of actionwords and qualitywords as separate words.
Hence in these 'nominal' or 'attributing' languages such
utterances as 'whiterabbit' correspond equally to our
predication 'It is a white rabbit' and to our attributive
"'white rabbit', and such a locution as our 'The rabbit is
white' is inconceivable: one could only say 'Thisrabbit
(is a) w h i t e r a b b i t ' or ' T h i s r a b b i t (is a) w h i t e t h i n g ' .
Owing to the constant possibility of use as what we feel
to be complete predications, the words of such languages
are often called 'sentencewords'
In addition to the objectexpressions such languages
have only pronominal words. These are expressions of
purely deictic value, referring to the speaker in words
for ' I ' , the one spoken to in words for 'you', the object
near the speaker in words for 'this', the object farther
away in words for 'that', and so on. Their origin is
probably to be sought in sounds uttered in connection
with deictic movements. At any rate, in most languages
THE DEVELOPMENT OF ABSTRACT WORDS
65
they resemble exclamations: as in English, they are usual
ly short words, and occasionally they differ phonetically
from the rest of the wordstock, as when in Russian the
word for 'that', ['ε'tə t], is the only native word beginning
with the sound [ε]. These pronominal words thus re
semble the purely emotional responses to experience which
we shall meet as 'interjections'.
5. The development of abstract words. Language
at the nominal or attributive stage has not attained a
habit of abstraction which English) for instance, has, —
namely the habit of separating, as independent expressions,
the qualities and actions of objects. That our concepts
of quality and action are purely linguistic is evident upon
a little introspection. Experience contains qualities and
actions only in connection with objects. If we try to
think, apart from the word, of 'white', we can do so only
by picturing an object (such as a flat surface) or a suc
cession of fleeting objects whose white color we hold
dominantly in our attention, neglecting their other features.
Similarly, the concept of 'run', 'running', if we exclude
wordimages, can be pictured only as a man or an ani
mal or a succession of such running. This is due to the
fact that in actual experience there is no such thing as
a quality or an action apart from an object. 'What lan
guage does is to furnish a fictitious object, namely the
wordsymbol, by which we represent the unimaginable
abstract concept of quality or action.
The historical origin of words independently expressing
quality or action is various. In English such words as
white used to mean 'whitething', the 'thing' being defined
as to gender, number, and case, and such words as 'runs'
used to involve also an actor, meaning 'heruns' As to
the psychologic character of the expressions as we have
them today, the historic origin is, however, immaterial.
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of L a n g u a g e
66
THE MENTAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
In the words expressive of quality the dominant element
is a single common feature, permanent in each of a
number of objects whose other elements are various.
This permanence of the dominant element allows it, in
its association with the word, to remain vivid: such a
word as white is joined to a lively image of a single ob
ject or of successive shifting objects of white color. In
the actionwords the dominant element is a feature also
common to a number of objects, but in all of them im
permanent. As soon as we attempt to picture the object
vividly, the action is lost: the object stands immovable,
however suggestive of action we may allow its pose to
be. Consequently the perceptual dominant element, aside
from the word, of an actionword is never vivid: as a
rule, in fact, we do not attend, in thought, to any element
except the word itself, which has thus become dominant
in the whole complex. That is why the experiment of
thinking of an actionconcept without using words is
much more difficult than in the case of a qualityconcept.
The psychologic character of the more abstract words,
such as in English, the prepositions (e. g. under, over,
in, by, across), the conjunctions (e. g. if, though, because),
and the abstract nouns (e. g. cause, result, essence, being,
relation), while in itself interesting, need not further con
cern us here, if we remember that the principle is the
same as in the case of actionwords. The dominant ele
ment when these words are used is always the word it
self; in any given occurrence they resolve themselves into
concrete collocations or successions of objects, which ob
jects we do not stop to picture more than vaguely when
the word is being used.
6. Psychologic composition of the word. The word
is thus psychologically a complicative association of those
perceptual and emotional elements which we call its
GRAMMATICAL CATEGORIES
67
meaning or experiencecontent with the auditory and
motor elements which constitute the linguistic symbol.
Where reading and writing are practised the visual and
motor elements of the printed and written word join the
auditory and motor of the spoken. Disturbances of these
associational habits are the muchdiscussed phenomena of
the aphasias.
Among the elements constituting this complex the
dominant may, according to individual disposition, be
visual, auditory, or motor; whether the linguistic elements
alone or the experienceelements also shall be dominant,
depends, as we have seen, on the character of the word:
in objectwords, and, in a different sense, in qualitywords,
elements of perceptual experience may dominate, while
in actionwords and more abstract expressions the lin
guistic symbol is dominant, the experienceelements being
but vaguely imaged. This is why in absentmindedness
or aphasie conditions the most concrete objectwords
(such as proper names) are first and most frequently
forgotten, the qualitywords next and the abstract words
last of all. In learning languages, on the other hand,
we succeed better in remembering objectwords and
qualitywords, which we can associate directly with per
ceptual images, than actionwords and abstract words
(prepositions, conjunctions, particles, etc.) which we tend
to associate only with words of our own language which
either do not correspond exactly, or, in any case, remain
dominant to the exclusion of the foreign words.
7. Grammatical categories. In the analysis of the
total experience into independent elements and in the
partial analysis of the latter into formationa! elements,
certain types may become habitual and finally universal
in a language. For instance, in analyzing a total ex
perience we who speak English always speak of an actor
68
THE MENTAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
performing an action. Many total experiences really are
of this type, e. g. The rabbit ran; in English, however,
this type has been generalized to furnish the mould for
expressing all total experiences, — that is, for all sen
tences, — including those which really involve no actor
or action, such as The rabbit is ichite. Here we use a
fictitious actionword, is, of whose action the rabbit is
supposedly the agent. In Latin, for instance, this would
not have to be done: one could say Cumculus albus, liter
ally 'Rabbit white', where no such fiction is maintained,
— and the same would be true in Russian. In short,
actor and action are grammatical categories in the English
language. Categories like this one, which universalize
certain relations between words, are syntactic categories.
In the imperfect analysis of words into formational
elements also there may be categories. These are called
morphologic categories. An English verbform, for instance,
always contains an imperfect analysis into a formational
element expressive of the action itself and one expressive
of its relative time: one can say he runs or he ran, but
there is no indifferent form, as, for instance, in Chinese,
where [Lp'aŏ/] means, from our point of view, 'runs',
'ran', or 'shall run', indifferently, but, if the element of
time is vivid in the total experience, one can say also,
in two words, [ L p'aŏ/la]'ran' or [jaŏ/Lp'aŏ/] 'will run'.
That is, just as we always express future time in a sepa
rate word (tvill run), so Chinese also analyzes out the
pastelement as a separate word. Latin, on the other
hand, has also a future category: currit 'he runs', cucurrit 'he ran', carret 'he will run'. We say, then, that
the formational expression of present or of past time
with actions is a morphologic category in English, that
of present, past, or future time, in Latin.
The grammatical categories, then, though always based
PSYCHOLOGIC CHARACTER OF THE LINGUISTIC FORMS 69
on relations common in experience, universalize these, so
that they must be formally expressed even where they
are not actually present or where there is no occasion
for focusing them, even though they are present. We
must express actor and action in a sentence and tense
in a verb even where they are not very vivid in the total
experience, — where, respectively, a Latin or a Chinese
speaker could ignore them, just as we ignore numerous
unessential elements of every experience, — and also
where they are not present at all, as in Mount Blanc is
high where the experience presents neither action and
actor nor any particular tense.
The normal speaker, however, blindly accepts the
categories of his language. If he reflects upon them at
all, he usually ends by supposing them to be universal
forms of thought. In linguistics, of course, we must be
careful to distinguish between categories of a language,
be it our own or another, and the features of experience,
as apart from any particular language.
8· Psychologic character of the linguistic forms.
The categories of a language originate in the extension
of some oftrepeated type of expression. In this they
are like all linguistic forms. To the speaker they seem
fixed and universal forms of expression and even of
thought; actually they are habits of association in vogue
in a community. Owing to the similarity of dominant
elements, an experience awakens a series of past ex
periences and is designated by the same word. Owing
to the uniformity of the process of analyzing a total ex
perience, all such analyses, — that is, all sentences, —
may receive the form of certain numerous past ones:
thus arise our syntactic categories. All words present
ing certain common features, — belonging, for instance
to a certain class, — may take on formation al features
70
THE MENTAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
that corresponded to experience in only a limited part of
their occurrences, — such features as timeexpression:
morphologic categories.
The best evidence of the purely associational nature
of linguistic forms lies in their change in history. The
word dog once meant 'mastiff'; it came; however, to
awaken predominantly the idea of dogs in general, with
the species, not the breed, as dominant feature, until it
became the universal expression for all these experiences.
At one time English sentences could be formed without
an actor and an action, but the process of forming a
sentence came, in the course of time, always to awaken
the process of forming actorandaction sentences, until
this type became universal. Similarly, when a new action
word comes into the language, such as the German waltz
or the Japanese hara-kiri, it recalls the verbs of our lan
guage with their timeforms and unconsciously and imme
diately submits to the morphologic tensecategories, re
ceiving the pastforms waltzed, hara-lciried.
Thus language is not, as the sight of a grammar and
dictionary might lead us to suppose, a system of unalterably
fixed and indivisible elements. It is rather a complex set
of associations of experiences in groups, each of which
is accompanied by a habitual soundutterance, — and all
these associations are, like all others, certain of displace
ment in the course of time.
9. Psychologic motives of utterance. True to its
original form of an outcry under the most violent ex
periences, language is most easily realized under emotion
al stress. Some violence of experience must normally
be present to call forth loud expression. If this emotion
al violence is the dominant cause of the utterance, we
speak of exclamation. Under the social conditions of lin
guistic development utterance with predominantly com
INTERPRETATION OF THE LINGUISTIC PHENOMENA
71
municative motive, declarative utterance, is a natural sequel.
Likewise the question, an utterance expressive of uncer
tainty or incompleteness of an experience, is a weaken
ing, as to dominance of the emotional motive, and a trans
ference to communicative use, of the exclamation.
10. Interpretation of the linguistic phenomena. I
have troubled the reader with a psychologic description
which, though perhaps difficult, would have been aH the
more so, had there been appended to each step the ex
amples from various languages that would illstrate the
specific linguistic phases of the phenomena in question.
The most important of these shall in the next chapter
be so iHustrated. After what follows the reader may find
the psychologic description more intel·ligible, if he will
go back to it; so much is certain, however, that the phe
nomena themselves, without consideration of their mental
significance are unintelligible or rather, what is worse,
liable to a post factum logical interpretation which sub
stitutes for the actual state of things our reflections upon
them.
The points of view from which linguistic phenomena
can be regarded are of course various. For those un
familiar with them the greatest importance lies in the
realization that the categoric and other distinctions of
one's own language are not universal forms of expression
or of experience. It is important also to remember that
the meaning of any linguistic expression is due to the
associative habits of those who use it. A deictic or a rep
resentative gesture is intelligible at once, because it owes
its meaning to universal psychophysiologic characteristics
of man. Even a suggestive or symbolic gesture hardly
ever fails of immediate understanding, for the constant
analogy of the simpler gestures predominates over associa
tive transference. Vocal language, quite otherwise, though
72
THE MENTAL BASIS OF LANGUAGE
it has its origin in the direct reactions of our organism
to experience, is the result of a very different develop
ment. The reactions which gave rise to it were reactions
of movement, but the effect which became of selfsatisfy
ing and of communicative value, was the acoustic effect
of these movements. Consequently even the simplest
utterances furnished no analogy, comparable to that of
the simplest gestures, by which every kind of associative
transference and innovation might have been counteracted.
The result is that no language has the character of a set
of sounds in some way logically derivable from the ex
periences which they express.
CHAPTER IV.
T H E FORMS OF LANGUAGE.
1. The inarticulate outcry. .We have seen that our
linguistic utterances are part of the expressive movements
which attend every experience. In many lower animals
also some of the expressive movements produce sound.
The bodily expression of experiences of pain, for instance,
may include not only a sudden withdrawal, but also a
contraction of the thorax forcing out breath through the
glottis, which, likewise contracted, produces the sound
that we describe as a cry of pain. We have seen that
human language is a developed and varied form of such
vocal reflexes.
Even where language in the highest form exists, how
ever, these most primitive reflexes occur by its side;
the inarticulate cry of pain or anger is uttered by human
beings under an extremely violent experience. As a di
rect result of this experience, this cry has nothing to do
with any earlier experiences of the individual. It is in
dependent, accordingly, as to its form, of the utterer's
personal or social history: its sounds need not be speech
sounds used in his community, and it is no more intelli
gible in his speechcommunity than in any other; even
an animal may utter its like.
2. Primary interjections. It is only under the most
violent experiences that such purely reflex vocal utterances
are used by man. If the experience is somewhat less rad
74
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
ical, the vocal utterance is less completely dependent
upon it alone, for ; owing to the universal laws of habit,
the utterance now tends to take that form which the in
dividual happens to have most used or heard under sim
ilar conditions. This factor will, of course, vary accord
ing to the earlier history of the individual. Another in
dividual who has had, in this respect, the same history
and has, accordingly, formed the same habit of association,
will, on hearing the utterance, at once associate the same
experience: that is, he will understand. An individual,
on the other hand, who has not had the same history,
and has never heard the utterance in question, will make
no such association, and will not know what kind of an
experience the utterer is undergoing. Hearing the ex
clamations of a Zulu or a Fijiislander, we may be in
doubt as to whether it is joy, sorrow, anger, or surprise
that he is expressing.
Even in these less radical vocal expressions there is
some element of direct reflex. This appears, on the one
hand, in the rather extended intelligibility of these interjections, as we call them, and, on the other, in their occasion
ally departing somewhat from the regular soundsystem
of the language. An example of both features is the la
bial trill, which is used all over northern Europe as an
expression of intense cold and of abhorrence, although
as a regular speechsound it does not occur in the lan
guages concerned; in writing it is usually reproduced as
brrr! Similarly, various soundcomplexes with the unusual
feature of a syllabic [s] or [∫], written Sh..! or Pst! are
used as an urgent demand for silence. Our peculiar whist
ling expulsion of breath, written Whew! to express ex
treme heat as well as surprise, is another instance of di
vergence from the usual soundsystem. On the other hand,
interjections may remain within the usual soundsystem
SECONDARY INTERJECTIONS
75
and may also vary in the different communities; thus the
interjection of pain is in English ouch! and in German
au! This, indeed, is by far the commoner case.
In the utterance of an interjection there is thus beside
the mere vocal reflex another element: the experience is
lived through as similar to certain earlier experiences/
and is accompanied by the same vocal utterances as were
these earlier experiences. We may say that these ex
periences together constitute a class recognized by the
speechcommunity, in that they are always accompanied
by the utterance of these particular sounds. A certain
degree of pain might, for instance, be called in English
an ouch!experience.
3. Secondary interjections. Experiences less intense,
— that is, having less predominantly emotional value, —
than those so far discussed, are accompanied by utterances
of more specific descriptive value While a person who
inadvertently got his hand into the fire might give an
inarticulate shriek, and one who got his finger blistered
might utter the interjection ouch!, one who merely saw
a fire where he did not expect it, — saw, for instance,
that a barn was burning, — would utter the more delib
erate and specific, though still exclamatory cry of Fire,
fire!
The more specific character of this utterance consists
in its perceptual value. In the inarticulate cry and such
interjections as ouch! only an emotional element of the
experience is expressed; in the utterance Fire! the sounds
uttered are associated by speakers of the language with
the specific perceptual content of fire. Exclamatory utter
ances of this kind are called secondary interjections. There
is no limit to the amount of material detail which they
may contain. Other examples are cries of Help!, Murder!,
Man overboard!, and the like; also exclamations describing
76
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
noises or movements, such as Bang!, Crash!, Snap!, Fizz!,
Puff!, Whoop!, Bip! Here belong also utterances which
name the principal object concerned in the experience,
such as The child, the child!, Gold!, Forgery!, Mother!,
A shooting star!, A white rabbit! The calling of descrip
tive names is, of course, also exclamatory: You thief!,
Villain!, Generous man! Of especial importance are com
mands: March!, Get up!, Bring me a glass of tv ater,
please!, or the use of people's or animals' names to call
their attention: 0 stranger!, John!, Child!, Boggle!
The reflex element may here be present in various degrees
and find expression in modulations of pitch, stress, duration,
and the like. The modulations so permissible are different
in different languages: the articulations which form the
basis of the utterance, however, are in each case determined
by their association with the kind of experience concerned.
A foreigner does not understand them, because he possesses
an entirely different set of associative habits in this re
gard. It will be noticed, also, that some of these secondary
interjections involve a considerable degree of discursive
analysis (though not, usually, a predication); in so far as
they do so, they are exclamatory sentences.
The same articulations may be used at other times with
a minimum emotional content. A chemist, after long in
vestigation of what a certain component of a preparation
was, could turn to his client or his pupils and, holding
up a testtube, quietly say Gold. A lawyer, after some
consideration of the technical validity of a paper, could
say, with very little emotion, Forgery. The significance
of all these utterances, in other words, is due not to the
emotional value with which they may be used, but only
to their association, in speaker's and hearer's mind, with
certain material contents of experience. This association
has to be formed by every member of the speechcorn
VALUE OF NONINTERJECTIONAL UTTERANCES
77
munity before he can speak or understand what is spoken.
It is only in the inarticulate outcry, and, to a lesser extent,
in the primary interjection, that the universal reflexes of
the human body undergoing an experience determine the
form of utterance; in the words of material content this
association is, so to speak, an external one and differs
greatly in the different speechcommunities.
4. The arbitrary value of noninterjectioiial ut
terances. We saw in Chapter I how most new members
of a speechcommunity, namely children, are taught to
make these associations. The problem of the origin of
language, we further saw, resolves itself into the question
as to how these associations originally came into being.
The answer we found (p. 14, f.) was that the movement
which produces the sound was originally an expressive
movement, but, as the sound produced by the movement
was in communication the striking element, further devel
opinent proceeded from the sound and not from the move
ment. As no essential connection between sounds and ex
perience was felt by the speaker, transferences and changes
had free play, so that even between movement and ex
perience there soon remained no recognizable connection.
For instance, the experience of a bitter taste produces a
very characteristic expressive movement of the facial and
oral muscles which, if the experience is violent enough,
may be accompanied by soundproduction. The sounds
resulting from this expressive movement may have been,
in some time and place, the current expression for 'bitter'.
As time went on, however, there happened that which,
as we shall see, is universal in language: the manner of
articulating the sounds gradually changed until they were
very different from those formerly spoken. Even by this
time the movements which made up the articulation of
the soundsequence were no longer those of the 'bitter'
78
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
faceexpression. But another, even more radical and equally
universal kind of change must also be considered: people
do not go on using the same expressions for ever. There
is a constant tendency, as we have seen and shall in
greater detail later see, to assimilate expressions to one
another when the experiences are at all alike. Thus our
expression for 'bitter' might be somewhat changed so as
to resemble the expression for 'sharp', or 'bad' or even
'sweet', for 'almondlike' or 'uneatable' or 'nasty'. Of
these processes we shall see many examples when we
come to speak of the changes of language. For the pres
ent it is clear that the immediate physiologic connection
between expression and experience, which at some particu
lar time must have existed in a great many expressions, can
in the case of no expression be of indefinite duration. The
English word bitter, for instance, cannot be interpreted
as an expressive movement, for we know that thousands of
years ago, if it then existed at all, it had some such form
as bhidr and further that, whenever it began to be
used, it was not an expression arising directly from the
experience of a bitter taste, but rather a descriptive term
which meant literally 'biting', for it was originally an
adjective derived from the verb to bite. The expressive
habits of the community, in other words, are in a con
stant process of change, and though, for language to be
gin, it was necessary that certain soundsequences should
be called forth by certain stimuli, it was neither necessary,
once given this beginning, nor even possible that this
direct connection should continue to exist.
It may be asked, then, if there are in use today any
expressions which are still at the stage where there is a
direct connection between experience and movement. If
we look into our own feeling with regard to certain of
our words, there might appear in English to be a great
VALUE OF NONINTERJECTIONAL UTTERANCES
79
many such. For instance, our words flame, flare, flicker,
flimmer, flaslı seem to us highly expressive of certain fea
tures of the experience of fire. Other words that might seem
directly expressive are puff, fizz, bang, sip, diddle, snap,
smash, whack, squeak, and so on. We are very much surpris
ed to learn that to a foreigner these words are as unintel
ligible as any others, — until, of course, he learns English.
Let us look a little more closely at these expressions.
In the words flame, flare, flash, flimmer, flicker we find,
corresponding to the common halfemotional, halfpercep
tual element of meaning, the common initial soundgroup
fl-. In flare, flash, flimmer, and flicker the rest of the
meaning also seems to be directly and immediately ex
pressed; and here again, if we look for words with simi
lar meaning, we shall find the same soundgroups recur
ring. Thus flare relates itself to glare and blare. The
-icker of flicker, which expresses to our feeling the small
repeated movements of the flame, performs a similar
function in snicker. The immer of flimmer, expressive to
us of a quiet, small, continued action, is similarly expres
sive in simmer , shimmer, glimmer. In flash the sounds
ash express to us a very different, more rapid and violent
kind of movement also conveyed in clash, crash, dash,
lash, mash, slash, smash, splash. Or, to leave our fl- words,
the articulation of b in bang, biff, bump, buffer, box, beat
corresponds to a common element of meaning which, we
feel, is directly expressed by all these words. In the
common parlance of schoolroom and dictionary they are
'onomatopoeias'.
This peculiar feeling on the part of those who know
the language is in all probability, however, due to
nothing other than the existence of parallel words
expressing the same shade of meaning with the same
sounds. When we utter any such word the other words
80
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
of similar meaning are awakened, and their similarity
of form adds corroborative strength to the impulse of
articulation. That is, if we had only flash and not the
other words in fl- and in ash, it would not seem to us
any more aptly and immediately expressive of its meaning
than such terms as chair, throw, combustion. In short,
there is no ulterior connection between these words and
their meanings, or even between such formational sound
groups as fl- or ash or - and the elements of meaning
conveyed by them. Even if it should be found with any
certainty that the movements producing these sounds
are, in a psychophysiologic sense, the natural expressive
movements attending the experiences which they in present
English express, this would not alter the case. We might at
first wonder at the correspondence and then realize that a
selective process by which associations and assimilations
occur had favored in each case the most suitable articulations.
All this, however, would not change the fact that these
words, like others, are limited to their language and out
side of it are understood no more than others, and that
these words have arisen and changed in the course of time
by exactly the same processes that affect all words. The
peculiar feeling of directness of meaning which they give
us is due, then, entirely to the associative conditions of
our vocabulary and not to these words' being any such
thing as primitive reactions to experience: their history
is the same as that of other words. Aside from primary
interjections, the forms of language owe their function
entirely to their association with experiences in the speak
ers' minds. The peculiar value in the speakers' feeling
of such expressions as the above, is called sound-symbolism,
— a term which is useful, if we remember that the 'sym
bolism' is such only within the expressive habits of the
given community.
VALUE OF NONINTERJECTIONAL UTTERANCES
81
There are still other cases in which there seems to be an
actual connection between the sounds uttered and the
experience, this time in the sense that the experience
contains a noise which is imitated in the expression. This
is especially the case in birdnames, such as cuclwo. Such
investigation as there has been shows that among the
Germans, for instance, there have been in use great num
bers of birdnames explicable only in this way, — that
is, as onomatopoeias. This, however, is not a general prin
ciple, but only a special instance of the way in which
language is expressive. It happens . that some birds,
— and there are probably few other such fields in human
experience, — are naturally recognizable by their calls,
and it is not surprising that, if the call became the dom
inant element in these experiences, the expressive habit
of designating the birds by a more or less rough imita
tion of it should have come into currency In English
this is far less the case, our birdnames being mostly de
scriptive of the birds' appearance or habits (red-breast, bluebird, mocking-bird), and, where an onomatopoetic name
seems to exist, its form is usually determined by associa
tion with usual words of the language, as in the case of
Boh-White and ivilip-poor-Wili. The range of onomato
poeia is thus at best very limited, and where it occurs
it can take rank only as one of the many forms of as
sociational habit that occur in language.
As we look first at inarticulate outcries, then at inter
jections, and finally at the words of ordinary speech, we
thus find a continuous gradation. The outcry is entirely
the product of the present circumstances, of the primary
interjection this is not fully true, and the utterance with
material content depends for its form entirely on the
habits of the speaker, which he shares with his speech
community. These habits are in a sense arbitrary, differing
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
82
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
for the different communities and changing gradually in
the course of time. A new member of a community must
learn its speechhabits as he would any other set of
communal habits.
5. The classifying nature of linguistic expression.
The arbitrary nature of speechexpressions is directly due
to the fruitful principle which makes communication by
means of any such expressions possible. If each speaker
reacted under each experience in such a way that no trace
of his earlier history affected the reaction, communication
would be impossible. No two speakers would ever react
alike and no one speaker would ever react twice alike.
Fortunately we are so constituted that our past does
unceasingly modify our present: a present experience is
inevitably assimilated by past ones of a similar nature
and is attended by the same or similar expressive actions
as were these. Thus the circumstance that an English
speaking person and a German will express similar ex
periences, respectively by borse and Pferd, — an arbitrary
divergence, — is due to the very fact that each expression
is moulded by the past history of the speaker. The one
has heard and spoken horse when such an experience oc
curred, the other Pferd.
The identity of the several experiences that are in each
case designated by the same expression (e. g. horse or fire)
is not actually inherent in them. This is obvious, if we
recall the psychologic truth that no two experiences,
whether belonging to one person or to different persons,
are ever exactly alike. When we express each of a great
number of experiences by the soundsequence fire, we are
associating them on the basis of an only partial similarity.
In our survey of the sounds of speech we saw that
language would be unintelligible, if all of the infinity of
possible sounds were employed, that the difficulty of
CLASSIFYING NATURE OF LINGUISTIC EXPRESSION
83
understanding would grow as this infinity were approached,
and that actually each community uses only a limited
number of the possible sounds; that this limitation alone
makes possible wellfixed habits of articulation and hear
ing. We are now' again face to face with this principle.
If each experience, owing to its indisputable individuality,
were to be accompanied by a special utterance, no sound
sequence would ever be uttered more than once, and
communication by means of speech would be impossible.
It is the habitual inclusion under one form of expression,
— that is, under one specific soundsequence, — of vast
numbers of experiences presenting certain dominant fea
tures, which enables us to understand one another.
We are so accustomed to think and express ourselves
in the terms of our language that we are not ordinarily
conscious of the subjective character of this inclusion or
classification. Only the poet, who looks directly at the
experience and seeks for an exact expression of it, must
constantly realize this fact. Science also, on the basis of
objective analysis, can make an extended classification of
experiences and then arbitrarily determine that a given
expression shall be used whenever certain features are
present: this, of course, is the process of scientific defini
tion. In ordinary life no such analysis is made: certain
general, often very complex features are associated with
the expression and all experiences in which these features
are dominant are classed together and expressed alike.
Yet, even in ordinary life, there are circumstances when
the uncertain character of our classifications is thrust
upon our notice, and that is in the face of some novel
experience. Á man who for the first time confronts a
phenomenon which, let us say, looks like fire but gives
out no heat, or one that presents a different exterior,
being, say, a liquid, but produces the same charring effect,
84
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
combined with smoke, as a fire, — this man will ask 'Is
this fire or not?' — or, if he is more philosophical, 'Am
I to call this fire or not?' The answer to the question
must come, if it be given at all, from the consensus of
the speechcommunity, which may or may not in turn
call upon a scientific definition to settle the usage by
determining a logically recognizable dominant feature.1)
The subjective character of our speechclassifications is
brought home most of all, however, by the study of
language itself; for here we constantly find that different
speechcommunities make very different classifications.
There may be languages, for instance, where no such
classification as 'fire' is made, but where there is an en
tirely different expression for each of such classes as
'campfire', 'cookingfire', 'forestfîre', and so on: in such
a language experiences which we should regard as falling
into a single class would fall into several distinct classes.
In other words, a number of experiences that are classed
together in one speech ֊ community may not be classed
together at all, or may form but a small part of a larger
class, or may be in some other way distributed in another
speechcommunity. All depends on the expressive habits,
— that is, on the linguistic tradition, — of the speech
1) The vagueness with which these dominant features may
be defined is the motive in the anecdote of the traditional
Irishman who for the first time in his life saw a parrot. It had
escaped from its owner and perched in a tree, which the Irish
man at once climbed. As he was about to lay his hand on the
parrot, it exclaimed 'Hands off! Hands off!' The Irishman was
dumbfounded, raised his hat, bowed, and said, 'Excuse me, sir;
I thought ye were a bird.' — That is, speech was for him a
dominant feature of human beings, dominant even to the exclu
sion of factors of visual appearance. General usage could have
corrected him by changing his associational habits, — the science
of zoologj, by giving him criteria of logical validity.
CLASSIFYING NATURE OF LINGUISTIC EXPRESSION
85
community. It is especially important to remember that,
except for the case of terms of purely scientific character,
this classification is due to associative tendencies and is
not affected by any logical considerations which individual
speakers may undertake. People of a nation whose language
had no expression for 'fire' but only for 'campfire', 'forest
fire', 'cookingfire', and so on, might know very well that
all these have certain features in common, and might
even study physics and chemistry and arrive at the scien
tific concept of combustion, — but their language would
remain the same It would provide, always in accordance
with its existing habits, some analytic expression, such
as 'campfires, kitchenfires, forestfires, and the like',
which would be used for the scientific concept of 'fire'.
This may be illustrated by a few actual instances.
In Malay the experiences which may be logically de
fined by us as 'offspring of the same parents' are classed
together, and for such an experience is used the word
sudara. In English we form no such class; we form two
classes, according to the sex, and speak of a brother or a
sister. Now, it would be manifestly absurd to say that
a Malay does not know his brother from his sister; it
would be no less absurd, however, to say that English
speaking people are unable to form the general idea con
veyed by the Malay word. Both languages can express
the experiences for which no single designation exists by
a compound expression which analyzes them, — the Malay
by saying sudara lakílaki and sudara perampuwan, where
the added modifying words resemble our terms 'male' and
'female'; and the English by saying brother or sister or
child of the same parents.
There are still other possibilities. In Chinese the ex
periences of which we are speaking fall into four classes:
The first two denote males, the
86
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
second two, females; and in each of these pairs the former
denotes an older, the latter a younger member of the
family. While we make no such classes, we can analyti
cally designate these relatives by saying older brother,
younger brother, older sister, younger sister. The Chinese,
on the other hand, can express the idea of 'brother' by
saying
of
'sister'
by saying
and
of the Malay sudara by
— all of
which expressions are comparable to our expression of
the Malay term by brother or sister. It would be as absurd
to say that the Chinese classification shows the Chinese
to lack power of generalization or else to have a partic
ularly strong feeling for relationship as it would be to
say that we have less power of generalization than a
Malay or more feeliug for the difference of sex; or else
that we have little feeling for the distinction between
older and younger brothers and sisters, — when, to take
the last point, English law has from time immemorial
made much of it.
If any final demonstration were needed of how inde
pendent linguistic classification is of logical insight, it
would be furnished by the German form of these words.
This language, when speaking of one person, makes the
same classification as English: Bruder, Schwester, but
when speaking of more than one, makes also that of the
Malay, using the term Geschwister, for experiences which in
English would have to be analyzed into brothers and sisters,
brothers or sisters, brother and sister, brother and sisters,
brothers and sister, as the case might be. It is evident that
whatever hasty conclusions were drawn from the contrast
between the Malay and English expressions would have
to be applied in turn to one and the same German, from
moment to moment, according to the number of people
he happened to be talking about.
CLASSIFYING NATURE OF LINGUISTIC EXPRESSION 87
The English translations given for the German Geschwister, however, show that, where a classification is not
made and an experience is instead expressed by some
analytic phrase, the analysis is constantly open to the
speaker. If the expression is very frequently used, it may,
to some extent nevertheless become mechanized, and need
not involve the entire conscious analysis every time it is
used.
A few more instances of divergent classification may
be of value. The general word in English for locomotion
is go, in German gehen. To begin with, however, while
we can say I go, a German cannot say ich gehen, but must
in this connection use a slightly different form, gehe: ich
gehe. Aside from this, the German word is more inclusive,
in that it is used also of the specific form of locomotion
separately classed in English as walk. On the other hand,
our word ride is more inclusive than the German terms
reiten, used of riding on the back of an animal, and fahren,
of riding in a vehicle or vessel. A black horse is in
German Eappe, a white horse Schimmel; compare our
bay, roan, sorrel when used as nouns. The relation ex
pressed by our on in on the table is in German auf, but
that in on the wall is in German an: auf dem Tisch, an
der Wand. It will also be seen from this example how
our word the corresponds to an element variously expressed
in German. In French there are no simple expressions
corresponding to our stand or sit; the idea must in each
case be analyzed into être debout (assis) 'be upright (sit
ting)', rester debout (assis) 'remain upright (sitting)', se
tenir debout (assis) 'hold oneself upright (sitting)'.
Even pronominal expressions (p. 64), in which the simple
deictic value might lead us to expect entire uniformity,
differ greatly. Three 'persons', that of the speaker, the
one spoken to, and the person or thing spoken of, are
88
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
everywhere distinguished. Some languages, however, use
material objectwords instead of the first and second per
sons; so the Malay for 'I' sahaya 'companion', hamba,
beta, or patek 'slave', rather than the purely pronominal
aku, and for 'you' rather the name of the person addressed
or tuwan 'master' or datoh 'grandfather', than anku 'you'
In Japanese such objectexpressions are exclusively used,
no purely pronominal terms for 'you' and 'I' being known.
Similarly, Polish uses pan 'gentleman', 'sir', pani 'lady',
'mistress', 'madam' to all but intimates and servants,
rather than ty 'you'. Other languages identify different
persons: thus the Italian uses ella or lei, literally 'she',
'it', for 'you', the German similarly Sie 'they' for 'you
these pronouns originally referred to such nouns as 'your
grace', singular and plural, and are thus results, of the
preceding type of usage. All these forms had their origin
in polite phrases. The same was once true of the English
you: it was the plural, politely used instead of the singu
lar thou, — a use which finds its parallel today in the
French vous instead of singular tu and the Russian [vїļ
instead of singular [tï]. In Italian, German, and French
the substituteforms are almost universal, the old words
for 'you' (singular), — German du, French tu, Italian
tu, — being used only to intimates, children, and in prayer.
In the plural some languages differ from ours in distin
guishing two kinds of 'we', one including, the other ex
cluding the person or persons addressed: thus, in Malay,
inclusive liita, exclusive kami.
Related to this is the expression of varieties of deixis,
such as the 'here' and 'this', the 'there' and 'that'. In
this, too, languages differ somewhat. In the Scotch dialects
of English three types of deixis occur: not only a 'here'
and a 'there', but also a 'yonder', and not only a 'this'
and a 'that', but also a 'yon'. Likewise in Latin one used
CLASSIFYING NATURE OF LINGUISTIC EXPRESSION 89
hic for an object near one, ille for one farther off, and
iste for one near the person addressed; in German, too,
one says hier 'here', da 'there', and dort 'yonder'.
Beside the deictic expressiou s most languages distinguish
anaphoric reference : mention of things known or spoken
of, as, for instance, in English: he, she, it, they] other
languages make no distinction between anaphoric and
deictic reference. Within the anaphoric relations a single
instance may be cited of a distinction absent in some
languages (including English) but observed in others;
namely, the distinction between anaphoric reference to
an object immediately concerned and that to another
object. So in Latin: Amat sorōrem suam 'He loves his
sister', that is, his own sister, but Amat sorōrem eins Ήe
loves his sister', that is, someone else's (who has been spoken
of) sister. Similarly in Norwegian 'he took his hat' is
Han tok sin hat, if the hat belongs to the one who took
it, but Han tok hans hat, if it belongs to someone else.
The same distinction is made in the Slavic languages.
A striking example of differences in classification is
furnished by the numerals. In most languages the numbers
are divided, as in English, into series of ten, the multiples
of ten receiving analytic expression: the decimal system.
This had its origin in counting on the fingers, — an
origin plainly apparent, also, in the quinary or fives system
of the Arowak, a Carib language, in which the expression
for 'five' is the same as that for 'one hand', -tekabe,
for 'ten' as for 'two hands', biaman-tekabe; that for 'fifteen'
means 'onefoottoes' (sc. 'added'), aba-maria-Jcutihibena,
while 'twenty' is 'one man', aba liiku. Our peculiar words
eleven and twelve (instead of oneteen, twoteen) may be traces
of a duodecimal system with which speakers of English
may have come in contact in prehistoric times. In French
one counts from sixty twenty units to eighty: 'sixtynine,
90
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
seventy, seventyone' are soixante-neuf, soixante-dix ('sixty
ten'), soixante-onze ('sixtyeleven'), and so on; 'eighty' is
quatre-vingt ('fourtwenties'). This is a trace of a vigesimal
system, probably used by the prehistoric inhabitants of
France. At any rate, in the Basque (which probably rep
resents the speech of prehistoric times in this part of
Europe), the vigesimal system prevails, though the dec
imal has encroached upon it. Thus 'twenty' is hogei,
'twentyone' hogei-ta-bat, 'twentytwo' hogei eta bi, 'thirty'
hogei eta hamar ('twenty and ten'), and so on, while 'forty'
is be ogei, 'sixty' hirur-ogei ('three twenties') and 'eighty'
laur hogei ('four twenties'). Wild peoples who have little
occasion for systematic use of numbers, often have less
extensive systems. Thus the Kham [t*kham] Bushmen in
South Africa have a trial system, with words for 'one',
'two', and 'three'; higher numbers are expressed by com
binations: 'four people' are 'two people, two people', 'five
people' are 'two people, two people, one person', — or
else one simply uses the word for 'many'.
In short, just as each language uses only a limited set
out of the infinity of sounds possible to the human vocal
organ, so each language divides the infinitely various
experiences of life into a limited number of classes within
each of which all experiences are named by the same
expression. The classes so recognized by the different
languages are, as we have just seen, very different. It
need hardly be said that the description of the various
experienceclasses and of the soundcomplexes used to
express them, constitutes the lexicon or dictionary of a
language.
6. Expression of the three types of utterances.
There are, as we have seen, three types of psychic con
ditions under which speech occurs (p. 70). The simplest
and most fundamental one is that in which an experience
EXPRESSION OF THE THREE TYPES OF UTTERANCES 91
by its violence forces a soundproducing expressive move
ment. The most typical instance of this is the insuppress
able cry of pain or rage. Almost as characteristic are
the circumstances under which the primary interjections
are uttered, and finally, the endless variety of expressions
which may be used as secondary interjections. All these
utterances, in which the dominant motive is the emotional
stress contained in the experience, are exclamatory utter
ances. We have seen that language must have had its
beginning in these, since it is a developed form of ex
pressive movement (p. 9).
We have also seen that there is no fixed boundary
between an exclamatory utterance and one in which the
emotional prompting is at a minimum and the communi
cation of a material content is the determining motive,
as in the chemist's Gold or the lawyer's Forgery (p. 76).
Most of our speech today is of the latter kind, declarative
utterance. Some emotional tone is, to be sure, present in
every experience,, and the minimum of emotional tone
must be greatly exceeded before the experience will receive
loud expression, but the declarative utterance is always
chiefly prompted not by the emotional content itself but
by some material content connected with sufficient value
to bring about utterance.
Finally we have interrogative utterance, unified by the
peculiar emotional tone of doubt or hesitation at the ac
ceptance of an experience into a particular sphere: In
this form also the emotional tone may be so great that
the utterance merges with the exclamatory type, as in
What!? — Gold!? — Forgery!?
The constellation under which an experience receives
expression always modifies the form, though it may do
so in the most diverse ways. ín English, for instance,
interrogative and declarative utterances are distinguished
92
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
not only by pitchmodulation, as in Your father has gone
out (even, then falling pich) and Your father has gone
out? (rising pitch), — see p. 51, f. — but also often by
wordorder, as when the interrogative of the preceding is
Has your father gone out?, as well as by particular question
words: Where is your father? (rising, then falling pitch).
In Latin the three questionwords ne, nonne, and
have no content except that of expressing the interroga
tive situation, and the same is true of the Slavic li, —
e. g. Russian [zda 'rɔ va l'i va∫a'ma'ť] 'Is your mother
well?', literally 'Well (li) your mother?' — and of the
Chinese [Lmo/].
On the other hand, very much the same pitchmodula
tion that with us is expressive of interrogation is in
Norwegian usual in declarative utterances. Similarly, ex
clamatory sentences have in English a peculiar pitch
modulation of greater range than that of other utterances,
but Italians use a very similar modulation for declarative
and interrogative speech, which makes them in our ears
seem to be excited when really they are not. The accom
paniment of the utterance by a primary interjection may
also be used to express exclamatory value, as 'n Ostranger!,
Oh, come on! The names of persons or animals used as
secondary interjections, to call them, have in many lan
guages a particular form when so used, called a vocative;
e. g. Latin Filli 'Son!' (otherwise, for instance, Filius
abcst 'The son is away') or ancient Greek Páter 'Father!'
(as opposed, for instance, to Patér apēn 'The father was
away'). An action expressed exclamatorily as desired or
commanded has in many languages a particular form for
this use, an imperative, as in Latin Audī! 'Hear!' or Ľa!
'Give!' (as opposed, for instance, to Audis 'Thou hearest'
or Dare valt 'He wants to give').
7. The parts of utterances. We have so far in this
THE PARTS OF UTTERANCES
93
chapter been speaking of utterances as units and ignoring
the fact that most of them consist of definite parts
(p.60,ff.)·
Many of the utterances of which we have spoken are,
in fact, indivisible, — for instance, Ouch! or Fire! or
Gold! or in Malay the word sudara or each of the four
Chinese words
They present
the simple instance of a soundcomplex used in its entirety
for the expression of an experience lived through as
falling into a class with certain earlier ones.
Many other of the utterances I have quoted are, how
ever, more complex, containing formational elements
(p. 62). The English word flash, for instance, is felt to
belong, on the one hand, to a group with flame, flare,
flicker, flimmer, on the other, with clash, crash, dash, slash,
etc. This word is, to be sure, used repeatedly to express
a certain type of experience; but to this value is added
another factor: it relates the experience, on the one hand,
to such as would be expressed by flame, flare, and so on,
and, on the other, to such as would be designated by
crash, dash, slash, and the like. It does this subtly, without
analytic consciousness on the speaker's part, and yet cer
tainly, as is shown by the peculiar feeling of pregnant
significance (p. 79, f.). Or, to take one of several other
instances of formationally composed words that have oc
curred, the German gehen 'go' or 'walk' relates the ex
perience, on the one side, to that of gehe in ich gehe 'I
walk' and other similar forms, and, on the other side, to
reiten, fahren, and many others with final en and the
meaning of general verbforms.
That is to say, beside expressing the classification of
the experience with those past experiences with which
it is unconditionally thrown into one class, these utterances
at the same time imply that the experience is similar to
94
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
a number of others, — this implication being made by
a partial similarity of form. We thus obtain, beside the
total assimilation of experiences into a single class or
word, a grouping of such single classes into larger and
looser classes, the ^morphologic wordclasses'. The associ
ational character of the grouping appears in the fact that
we cannot, for instance, say -ash for a violent movement
or fl- for an experience of fire, and so on: these are for
mational elements, not words (p. 62). Though the value
— especially the emotional value — of these words is
due very greatly to the associations which their formational
elements express, the normal speechfeeling, no matter
how often it associates these words with one another,
never stops to analyze them. Such utterances as flash or
father (p. 62), therefore, though composed of parts, are
nevertheless conceptually units.
The unity of such expressions as these may outweigh
the divisibility in various degrees. In the case of flare,
flash, flimmer, flicker, flame the soundcomplex fl- is a
formational element, the expression of a similarity of the
the experiences, which can never occur alone. In fact, it
can not be added at liberty to any other utterance, but
occurs fixedly and exclusively in certain words. What is
more significant still, the same sounds occur in other
words, such as flow, float, fly, flutter, with a different value
entirely, or, at any rate, if there is association with our
first set of words, in a much extended and vaguer value.
If, now, we look at an English expression, such as the
plural fires, the parts at once appear to possess a much
greater degree of independence than in the instances so
far mentioned. Even the normal speaker feels at once
that the first, larger part, fire-, of the expression is iden
tical with the singular, fire, and that the last part, s [z],
is identical with the same sound in other expressions,
THE PARTS OF UTTERANCES
95
such as fathers, boys, sisters and with the similar sounds
[s] and [әz] in cats j ropes and watches, peaches.1) In fact,
even the normal speaker would not need to think long
before he could define the common element by saying
that the -s expresses plurality. Nevertheless, as the s
cannot be used in this sense in certain words, such as
man, deer, goose, foot, — and, further, as it could not be
used independently in the sense, let us say, of 'several'
or 'many', it is but a formational part of the expression
fires, even if a more independent part than, say, the flin flash.
In the possessive father's the first and larger element,
father, has as much independence as fire in the last in
stance, but the second element, -s [z], has more. For,
beside occurring also, with the same value, in such ex
pressions as boy's, Icing's, man's, it may even occur with
some measure of independence, as in the King of England's son and the man I saw yesterday's father. Never
theless its independence is not complete. One who said
V , meaning some such thing as 'possession' or 'belong
ing', would not be understood, nor is the speaker of
English, no matter how conscious he may be of the value
of the possessive s as a part of the larger expressions,
ever tempted to essay this independent use.
Another type of the same phenomenon is illustrated
by Turkish plurals, such as hullar 'slaves', evler 'houses'.
The Turkish speaker could not use -lar or 1er alone in
some such sense as 'several', any more than the English
speaker could so use his s. Moreover the vowel of this
element is a, if the preceding part of the word has a
1) Owing to the similarity of the writing and to the autom
atism of the soundvariation, the normal speaker is not con
scious of the difference between the endings [s], [z], and [әz].
96
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
back vowel, e, if it has a front vowel, — obviously an
indication of the unity of the whole expression in the
speaker's analysis of experience. On the other hand, side
by side with this dependence, there are features which
show the soundsequence iar or 1er to have a more in
dependent value than the English pluralsuffix; most im
portant among them the fact that, if the plurality is
otherwise expressed, the suffix is left off, as in dori adam
'four men', not dört adamlar.
Of a different character, again, is au English expression
such' as thirteen. The transparency of the meaning, due
to the association with such forms as, on the one hand,
fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, etc., ten, tenth, and, on the other,
three, third, thirty, makes it certain that every speaker
feels the thir- to mean the units above ten and the teen
to mean the ten. Nevertheless, no one would say inde
pendently, thir instead of three or teen instead of ten. Yet
cases like sixteen, seventeen, nineteen, where the first part,
six, seven, nine does occur independently, make the second
part so distinct in the feeling of speakers that we have
come to speak of 'a girl in her teens'. The formational
element teen is more nearly independent, therefore, than
any we have yet analyzed out of a unified expression.
If we look finally, at an English word like bulldog,
there can be no question, from the outset, but that the
elements bull and dog are used independently. Still, there
is a reservation: for bidldog does not mean 'a bull and
a dog', but only a certain kind of a dog that may be
supposed in some way to resemble a bull. The word bull
independently used has never this meaning; it means a
'bull' and not like a bull', — it is a noun and not an
adjective. In the expression bulldog, therefore, the element
bull is not fully independent, for, though closely associa
ted with the independent use of the same soundsequence
THE WORD: PHONETIC CHARACTER
97
its value is not exactly the same; the expression bulldog,
consequently, retains a considerable degree of unity; as
we shall see, it is technically a compound word.
The independence of the parts is even greater in a
Chinese expression such as
for 'brother'. The
elements
and
occur independently in the
respective senses of 'older brother' and 'younger brother';
the unity of the whole expression consists only in its
habitual use, with this order of the parts, in the sense
of 'brother' or 'brothers' — a very 'loose' compound.
8. The word: phonetic character. An expression
in which the independence of the parts is fully realized
can no longer be said to have unity in the sense of the
preceding cases. The English expression older brother, for
instance, contains two parts, older and brother, each of
which is used to designate a class of experiences and can
recur in this capacity in the most varied connections, as
in I am older, older men and my brother, Where is brother?
younger brother. Such elements of speech, independently
recurring as expressions of experiences viewed as similar,
are, of course, words (p. 62). It will be evident from the
foregoing illustrations of less independent elements ap
proaching the independent use of words, that the word
is by no means a mathematically definable concept; in
fact it is sometimes very hard to decide what is and what
is not a word. It may be a'pazzie, even in one's own
language, to decide whether an element can or cannot be
independently used. Does the usage in bull terrier, bull
pup, and a few similar instances justify us in setting up
an adjective bull and calling bulldog two words? Probably
not, for all these expressions may be looked upon as
compounds of uniform type, — but the point is disputable:
a dogfancier who spoke of 'three terriers, two fox and
one bull' would be using bull in this sense as an inde
o mfield, Study of Language
98
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
pendent adjective, no different from small, large, white, or
black.1)
It is also clear that the unity or plurality of words
used to express a given experience must vary greatly in
different languages. We have seen how what a Malay ex
presses by sudara is expressed in Chinese by a very loose
compound of four parts, and in English by three inde
pendent words: brother or sister What we express by the
word brother, a fairly closeknit unit, the Chinese express
by a compound of two parts, and the Malays by the
two words sudara laklaki. Finally, the Chinese unit [Lti\]
would be in English two words, younger brother, and in
Malay, — where we might expect three or four words,
— again but one: adel. To take another example, — our
expression I am eating meat, corresponds to the German
one of three words: Ich esse Fleisch, to the Latin of two;
Garnem edo, and in Aztec to a single fairly closeknit
compound word: Ninakakwa.
It is especially to be observed that the unity of such
expressions as we found above to be unified, was in no
way due to any phonetic peculiarity in these words. If
we found thirteen, for instance, to be a single word, this
was not due to anything in the immediate phonetic form
of the expression, but only to the fact that thir- does not
occur independently. Likewise, where an expression con
sists of several words, phonetic observation does not reveal
any pause between them. Indeed such pronunciations as
1) The written form of the expressions gives, of course, no
answer, for the graphic (p. 20, f.) separation of the words is only
a halfconscious and unscientific attempt at answering the question
we are here dealing with; genuine compound words may be
found in good English printing as separate words, as hyphenated
combinations, or run together as one word, e. g. bull moose, bullpup) bulldog.
THE WORD: PHONETIC CHARACTER
99
that shown by Latin versification of something like
[karnē:do] for Garnern edo, or in English of [æt∫u] for
at you, show this most plainly, and it is safe to challenge
anyone who does not understand a language, be it Eng
lish or any other, to divide the current of speech into
words. The word, in short, is a semantic, not a phonetic
unit. It is only through a process uf analyzing the mean
ing that people can come to distinguish the wordbound
aries, as we imperfectly do in our writing.
Secondarily, however, every language does make some
phonetic recognition of the word: but this differs greatly
in different languages.
A language which shows little phonetic recognition of
wordboundaries is modern French. In a French sentence
there is no feature which shows where one word ends and
the next begins. The stressaccent, for instance, is not
distributed according to the words, but rests on the last
syllable of the sentence, or, in longer sentences, on the
last syllable of connected word groups (p. 48). On account
of this lack of phonetic wordboundaries French has been
called, par excellence, 'tһ language of tbe pun. A good
illustration is the couplet quoted by Passy in his Petite
phonétique2, page 22., The two verses are pronounced ex
actly alike. They each read:
[g la mγ də la 'rε:n la tur m ŋa 'ni:m];
the worddivision, however, is seen in the conventional
orthography :
Gal, amant de la Beine, alla, tour magnanime,
Galamment de l'Arène à la Tour Magne, à Nîmes.
'Gal, lover of the Queen, went, brave feat, gallantly from
the Arena to the Large Tower, at Nîmes.' For the same
reason uneducated Frenchmen have great difficulty in sep
arating their words in writing; Passy quotes an instance
100
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
in which
'I
am "being
good with Miss (the governess)' was written by a child:
je suisage avecmane moiset, the conventional orthography
(and real worddivision) being: Je suis sage avec Made
moiselle. The onesound utterance au [o] 'to the' is two
words, for it is semantically composed of the fully ana
lyzable elements à [a] 'to' and le [1ә] 'the', the substitu
tion of au whenever they come together being a purely
phonetic automatism.
All this is in some contrast to languages like English,
in which nearly every word has a high stressaccent on
one of its syllables (p. 49). Certain small words which
lack this stress, — commonly, for instance, such words
as the, a, is, in, and (p. 49), — we call enclitics, if they
are semantically joined to the preceding word (hasn't, let
'im), and proclitics, if to the word that follows (a rabbit,
in speaking) ; they alone can offer difficulty as to the number
of words in a sentence. This clearness is increased by the
fact that we use an almost entirely different set of vow
els in unstressed syllables from that of the stressed. It
is only the presence of stressless words that makes half
way possible the pun which answers the question, 'What's
the difference between a rheumatic man and a healthy
man who lives with his parents?' by saying, 'One is well
at some times and has a rheumatism others, and the other
is well at all times and has a room at his mother's'. It
will be noticed, however, that the boundary between, words
is sufficiently marked by certain stressrelations to rob
such similarities of their full effect: in the latter phrase
our stress begins to increase with the m of mother's, in
the other the m is weak and stress begins on the initial
vowel of others. There is the same difference, for instance,
between a name and an aim (p. 46).
In Norwegian and Swedish all words not enclitically
THE WORD: PHONETIC CHARACTER
1
or proclitically used have one of two pitchmelodies, ris
ing or fallingrising (p. 51). Cechish has a stressaccent
regularly on the first syllable of all but enclitically used
words, and Icelandic has a similar habit; Polish stresses
almost always the nexttolast syllable of its words (p. 49).
In Chinese the phonetic recognition of the word is es
pecially striking. Every word here consists of only one
syllable ending in vowel, [n], or [ŋ], and uttered on one
of a limited number of pitchmelodies (p. 51); the only
exceptions are enclitics.
If we look beyond the single utterance, we find another
set of phenomena involving phonetic recognition of word
boundaries. These phenomena may be described as sound
variation in wordinitial and wordfinal, and are spoken
of by the name which the grammarians of ancient India
gave them, sandhi. The beginning or the end of a word
often varies phonetically according to the phonetic char
acter of the preceding or the following word. In Eng
lish, for instance, the word you [juǔ ] or [ju] when
coming after a final [t] is pronounced [∫u], and after
a final [d], [3u], e. g. won't you, did you. We thus find
one word occurring with three different initials, — a
variation which does not occur within any word, and
therefore marks phonetically the wordboundary. The
most familiar example of sandhi is the socalled 'liai
son' of French. The word vous 'you', for instance, is
[vu] except before a word closely connected in mean
ing that begins with a vowel, where it is [vuz]; thus
vous avez 'you have' is [vu za 've] but vous faites 'you
make' is [vu 'fst]. Such a variation without change of
meaning, as that between [vu] and [vuz] occurs only at
the end of words and is therefore a sign of active rec
ognition of the wordboundary even in French. Another
of the many instances is the word a 'has' [a], which be
102
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
fore a semantically closely joined vowelinitial becomes
[at], written at, e. g. elle a sonné 'she raag' [s la so 'ne],
but atelle? chas she?' [a 'tεl]. The most extreme instance
of the use of sandhi, at least in writing, is Sanskrit, the
language from which the name of the phenomenon is
taken; here the end of every word has a number of forms
that appear according to the nature of the following in
itial, which also is sometimes affected. Thus: devah pa
tati 'the god falls', devas taira 'the god there', devah ca
rati ?the god wanders', deva eti 'the god goes ', devo gacchati
'the god walks', and, with change also of the following
initial, before atra 'here', devo 'tra 'the god here'. Sandhi,
however, does not imply so vivid a recognition of the
word as do those features which appear in each single
utterance; for sandhi makes itself felt only when several
utterances containing the same word are taken in view,
and under these conditions the very reappearance of the
word already constitutes such a recognition.
There is always a tendency, when a word has several
sandhiforms, that these may come to vary not in auto
matic soundvariation, according to the character of the
preceding or the following sound, (as is the case in San
skrit), but that the difference of form may come to imply
some semantic difference. A transition to the latter type
is the French liaison, which limits the longer forms, such
as [vuz] and [at] to occurrence before words closely con
nected in sense. An instance still farther along toward
semantic differentiation occurs in Irish. This language
has a soundvariation in wordinitial which, however, does
not depend upon the phonetic character of the preceding
wordfinal, but arbitrarily on the preceding word; that
is, Irish words may be divided into a number of otherwise
arbitrary classes, according to the effect they have on a
closely following wordinitial. Examples are: tα b 'there
THE WORD: SEMANTIC CHARACTER
103
are cows' but a va 'his cows'; uu 'an egg', an tuv 'the
egg', na nuv 'of the eggs', a huv 'her egg'. This variation
has semantic value in that it does not depend automati
cally on the adjoining sounds but implies a division of
words into classes, — i n this instance, however, not of
the words in which the variation occurs, but of the words
that may closely precede them. A great many other se
mantic classifications as we shall see, are expressed by
soundvariations and affixed sounds in almost all languages:
in so far as these soundvariations and affixations affect
either the end or the beginning of words, they involve,
of course, a recognition of the word as a unit.
9. T h e word: semantic character. The word, then,
is not a phonetic unit, but is to be defined as a semanti
cally independent and recurrent element which can be
dealt with as a conceptual whole. We have seen that,
in spite of this, a language may recognize within its words
a relation to other words of partially similar meaning.
This relation expresses itself, as we have seen, by partial
phonetic similarity, as in flame, flare, flimmer, flash or in
flash, crash, dash, etc., or in fathers, boys, fires. It may,
however, receive no phonetic expression, but inhere en
tirely in a parallelism of use, especially as to categoric
distinctions, as in the plurals fathers, men, geese, children,
or the verbs, present tense, third person singular, eats,
is, has, may, can. Here there is no phonetic similarity
between the forms, but their function with regard to the
English categories of actor and action, number, and tense
(p. 68) is in each group uniform. The formational elements,
as we have seen, may stand in various degrees of de
pendence, from the comparative unity of flash, clash, and
the like, where the normal speaker is unconscious of the
relating values, to such comparative independence as that
of the English possessive s (p. 95), or of the members
104
THE FORMS OP LANGUAGE
of a compound like bulldog, which, in slightly divergent
use, occur as independent words. Semantically, the ele
ments can be of the most various significance, from the
almost purely emotional tinge of ƒl,, cl, ash, immer to
the explicit relational value of a plural or possessive sign,
or the material explicitness of the elements of compounds
such as bulldog.
Different languages vary, of course, widely in the mean
ings of the formational elements into which imperfect
analysis divides a word. The greatest complexes of se
mantic elements in single words are found in the attribut
ing languages, where every word is an objectexpression
(p. 64). For here the expression of experiences of action
and quality cannot dissociate these elements from objects;
one cannot say 'white' but only 'whiterabbit' (as a single
word) or, at best 'whitething', and cannot express 'runs'
or 'nning' except in 'rabbit'srunning' or 'running
rabbit' (again, as a single word) or, at best, in 'heruns',
'unningthing', 'isrunning'. Consequently, any expres
sion of quality or action must be in a word containing
these elements together with that of an object. We find
such words, therefore, as the Greenlandish [tusaRpaRa]
'hearinghismine', that is, ' hear him' : the action is viewed
as an object possessed by the actor and by the object
affected, or, to put it more justly, the actor is expressed
as an object possessing the action. Similarly, where qual
ity is to be expressed, it appears as an element of the
word which also expresses the object that has the qual
ity; thus 'iar' (or ' e is a liar', cf. p. 64) is [sal:uto:q],
' i g liar' [sal:uto:qaoq]. Only an objectexperience can be
independently expressed, as in [qim:qe ' o g ' (or 't is a
dog'). All this corresponds, as we have seen, to the con
crete facts of outer experience, where we never meet qual
ities or actions apart from objects. The same objective
THE WORD: SEMANTIC CHARACTER
105
character of the word is responsible for the inclusion of
objects standing in some relation to another object, for
these, too, are qualifying elements. Here belong such
words as
'househis', 'his house' and [qitoRnaRa]
'childmine', ' y child': the 'he' or T as possessor is, of
course, not present in the actual experience as an object;
all that is there present is the house or the child as
sociatively standing out as 'his' or 'my' possession: the
inclusion in the same word is, therefore, concretely jus
tified. This is true also of such words as [kiagun:eq]
'heatsufferingresult', 'perspiration', — for here the heat
and the suffering are not objects figuring in the experi
ence, but are associatively presented features of the 're
sult'. Our abstract relational words, finally, are, of course,
by no means found in such a language,, where the relation
is expressed as an associative feature of the object. Thus
our 'in' appears in [nuname] 'landin', 'in the land', our
'across' in [nunak:ut] 'landacross', 'across the land', and
our conjunction 'when' in such a form as [tuawioRtoR
s:'ol:une aneRlaRpoq] 'hurryusingverywhenhis here
turns', i. e. 'hurrying very much, he goes home'.
In many languages which, like our own, are not con
fined to this objective expression, we find, nevertheless,
frequent inclusion of several partly analyzed elements
under one word. It is possible that extended investigation
will determine that these features are always, as they
surely sometimes are, traces of an older objective habit
of expression.
The inclusion of qualities of an object in one word
withthe object, as in the Greenlandish
'liar
big', 'bigliar', appears in 'diminutive', 'augmentative', 'pe
jorative' and similar formations, as in the Italian sorellina
'little sister' beside sorella 'sister', librone 'ig book' be
side libro 'book', tempaccio 'nasty weather' beside tempo
106
THE FORMS OPLANGUAGE
'weather', or the German Männchen or Männlein
'ttle
man' beside Mann 'man', compare our manikin. Such
forms are common in many languages, especially the
Romance, Slavic, and Baltic (Lithuanian). The value,
especially as to emotional tone, of these formations is differ
ent enough from that of the analytic' expression by means
of adjective and noun to prevent interference. Much rarer
are compounds whose elements correspond to adjective
and noun, like the Sanskrit mahādhanam 'bigbooty'.
Such compounds are almost equal to the analytic ex
pression, mahad dhanam 'big booty'. The only difference,
in fact, lies in the very slight tone of unity expressed
by the fixed order of the members and by the nonin
flection of the one element, as in the plural mahādhanäni
'bigbooties', opposed to the twoword mahānti dhanāni
'big booties'. The presence of genuine adjectives, which
tend to be awakened in the productionof the sentence,
is the cause for the rarity of these forms. These genuine
adjectives are themselves probably sprung from nominal
expressions. In the oldest scientifically attainable stage
of English, Primitive IndoEuropean, the value of such
an adjective as 'white', for instance, seems to have been
'whiteperson' or 'whitething' as often as the present
purely qualitative meaning. Thus in Latin, which is
another historic descendant of Primitive IndoEuropean,
adjectives are frequently used as substantives. So bonus,
, bonu mean not only 'good', but also, respectively,
'good man', 'good woman', 'good thing' or 'blessing';
juvenis means both 'young' and 'young man, youth' ; sa
piens both 'wise' and 'wise man', and so on; this appears
also in some of the Latin adjectives borrowed in English,
as German, Italian both noun (person of this nationality)
and adjective, — but not so the native English forms,
such as English, Danish, which are adjectives only.
THE WORD: SEMANTIC CHARACTER
7
The verb, like the adjective, is in English an independ
ent word, inclusive of the actionmeaning only; sing or
sings or sang does not express the actor, even though the
first two of these forms can occur only with certain actors.
In Italian canta can be used as well as egli canta to include
the actor: 'he sings'; in Latin and many other languages
this is the regular usage, there being no other way of saying
'he sings' than the oneword expression cantat; the verb,
in other words, does not occur independently of an ob
jectelement, namely that of the actor. When we say in
Latin Fuella cantat 'The girl sings', the latter word ex
presses the idea not only of 'sings', but also of an actor,
'shesings', more exactly defined by puella. This resembles
the expressions of an objective language, like the Green
landish [takuwa:] 'seeingofhimhis', 'he sees him', which
reappears in its entirety even where the actor is specific
ally expressed: [qim:ip takuwa:] 'tothedog seeingof
himhis', 'the dog sees him'.
Inclusion of objects in some relation to other objects
is also common. It appears most of all in compound words.
Thus bulldog includes in one word with the object 'dog'
the other object to which the dog stands in an associative
relation, here that of resemblance; similar instances are
sofacushion, payday, schoolboy, and the like. In many
languages we find pronominal elements expressing these
relational objectideas; so, especially, in the Semitic langua
ges, e. g. Egyptian Arabic dulābl 'my cupboard', dul
aboh 'his cupboard', dulābha 'her cupboard', dulābhum
'their cupboard', and so on, like the Greenlandish [qitoRna
] 'my child'.
The abstract relational elements, finally, which pertain
to an object, are very extensively found formationally
combined with it. The extreme of this is seen in the
Uralic languages, as in F;nnish, for instance, which has
108
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
twelve 'eases' expressing local relations, such as the 'in
essive', e. g. silmässä 'in the eye', the 'adessive' silmällä
'by the eye', the 'ablative' silmältä 'from the eye', the
'comitative' silmäne along with the eye', and so on. The
caseforms of the more familiar languages are in part
of this type; in Latin, for instance, there are a number
of locutions in which the caseform expresses the object
together with a relational element. So especially the 'ab
lative of means': manu 'by hand', lacte vivant 'by means
of milk they live'. Less common in Latin are forms like
Bōmae 'at Rome', 'to Rome', Gallia 'from Gaul'.
The genitive or possessive case is another example: John's,
as in John's hat, expresses the possessive relation in par
tial analysis in one word with the objectelement, John.
But, as we have seen (p. 95), the analysis is almost equal
to that into a separate word, for we can use such turns
of speech as the man I saw yesterday's father. Even here
the use of the independent word of expressing the re
lation is more frequent: we say not the table's legs but
the legs of the table. The relational element of number,
also, is in most languages included in the objectexpression,
as in boy: boys, man: men. A language in which this is
not the case is Chinese. Here a word like [ 3AN/] 'man,
men, people' expresses only the object, not its number;
only if the number is a vivid element in the experience,
is it expressed, and then by an independent word.
10. Wordclasses. Partial analysis, such as just de
scribed, is due to association of experiences with others
like them. Consequently, we may say that the words
containing a given formational element fall into a class.
Thus those English nouns which express, by means of
an element s, plural number in addition to the object
content, form a class, e. g. boys, fathers, rabbits, stones,
trees, fires, eggs, etc. Or, again, all the words containing
WORDCLASSES
109
a given material formational element, as boy, boy's, boys,
boyish, boyishly. Where a relational element expresses a
categoric distinction, it is the basis of a class, even though
it has no uniform expression. Thus the English plurals
just quoted are only a smaller class within a larger one
containing also such forms as knives, houses, men, geese,
feet, children, oxen, etc., which have not the same plural
formation and, in some cases, not even the final s, but
fulfil the same function with regard to the grammatical
categories of the language.
We find, however, other wordclasses which are not
expressed by formational similarity at all, but seem to
go back, none the less, to emotional associations of the
speakers. The wellknown three 'genders' of nouns in
German, Latin, and Greek, or the two of French and Dano
Norwegian are an example. To only a minimal extent do
these agree with any perceptual reality, such, for instance,
as animal sex. Thus in German two nouns for Vornan' will
be found in different genders: die Frau 'feminine' gender,
das Weib 'neuter' gender; similarly, of men: der Mann
'the man', 'masculine' gender and die Schildwache 'the
sentry', 'feminine' gender, das Männchen 'the little man',
'neuter'; sexless objects appear equally in all three gen
ders; der Tisch 'the table', is 'masculine', die Tür 'the door',
is 'feminine', and das Fenster 'the window' is 'neuter'.
Similar are the 'animate' and 'inanimate' genders of many
American languages, or the dozen andmore genderclasses
of certain African languages.
Naturally, we cannot expect the associational habits of
speechcommunities, which underlie these morphologic
classifications, to coincide with the results of conscious
scientific study of the universe. The noungenders are
an example of this. Another instance is furnished by the
English actionwords. In these we make no distinction
HO
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
between the performance of an action, as in I eat, I walK,
I write, and the undergoing of a sensational process, as
in I hear, I see. Our expression seems everywhere to
correspond to the former type of occurrence. In other
languages, such as Greenlandish, the second type is gener
alized; one says, in accordance with reality, [takuwa:]
'appearingofittohim' i. e. 'he sees it', but also [tukaRpa:]
'stampingofit.tohhn', i. e. 'he stamps on it, tramples
it', where the English type of expression is more appropri
ate. In Georgian both types exist: one very justly says
[vt'ser] 'Iwrite' and, differently, [mesmis] 'metosound
ingis', i. e. 'sound comes to me', 'I hear', Yet, as we
must in such cases expect, the distinction is by no means
carried through with scientific correctness; seeing, for
instance, is viewed as if it were an activity, not a sen
sation: [vnaxav] 'Isee',
The phase of linguistics which studies these classes, —
that is, the structure of words, — is morphology.
11. The sentence. When the analysis of experience
arrives at independently recurring and therefore separate
ly imaginable elements, words, the interrelations of these
in the sentence appear in varied and interesting linguistic
phenomena. Psychologically the basis of these interrela
tions is the passing of the unitary apperception from one
to the other of the elements of an experience (p. 60, f.).
The leading binary division so made is into two parts,
subject and predicate, each of which may be further ana
lyzed into successive binary groups of attribute and sub
ject, the attribute being felt as a property of its subject.
The subject of the sentence is analyzed out of the total
experience as the substratum, more or less permanent,
and, owing to earlier experiences, the relatively familiar
element, which in the predicate receives definition (The
rabbit is an animal) or description (The rabbit is white),
THE SENTENCE
111
or is apperceived as the substratum of an action {The
rabbit runs across the field, The rabbit is being chased).
The explicit predication of quality or action is impossi
ble for languages in which every word expresses an ob
ject (p. 64). In these languages the sentence consists of
one or more objectwords. Each of these, since it can
occur alone as a sentence, is capable of expressing what
we look upon as a predication; any series of them, conse
quently, contains no expression as to where the predica
tion lies. These words, then, are sentencewords. The
Greenlandish [qim:eq] thus can mean 'dog' or 'It is a
dog', [sal:uto:qaoq] 'big liar', 'He is a big liar', or 'He
lies very much', and so on.
In contrast with this stands such a language as English,
in which the existence of independent actionwords and
qualitywords removes all obstacles to the expression of
predication. Am ong such languages, also, there are, howev
er, a great many differences. Latin, for instance, presents
some features that remind one of the nominal languages.
Its verb always includes expression not only of the action,
but also of the acting object. Accordingly, predication
can in Latin also be expressed in one word, — a sentence
word, — even though only a limited portion of the words,
the verbs, can be so used: cantat 'he, she, it sings', edo
'I eat', and so on. Where a qualityword, — an adjective,
— forms the predicate, there is often no difference be
tween predication and attribution. Thus magna culpa means
either '(a) great fault' (attributing adjective) or '(The)
fault (is) great' (predicating adjective). Russian makes
this distinction by using different forms of the adjective;
thus, in [mu'3rk 'b'ei'in] the adjective is the predicate:
'(The) peasant (is) poor', and in [Vs'dnï mu'3ïk] it is
an attribute: '(the) poor peasant'. English has gone farther.
It expresses predication only and always by means of the
112
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
verb; where no action is involved, the abstract verb is,
expressive only of the relation of predication (in the form
of an action), is used (p. 67, ff.) ; we cannot say fault great
or peasant poor but only The fault is great, The peasant
is poor. Moreover, the English verb does not, like the
Latin, include the expression of an acting object: we cannot
say sings or eat, but only He sings, I eat, — so that no
sentenceword exists.
By thus confining the function of predication to our
actionwords and that of subject to our objectwords, we
have produced the syntactic categories of action and
actor (p. 68). If, now, it happens that the subject of a
total experience is not an object, but an action, this action
cannot be expressed by a verb, but must be put in the
form of a noun. This is the function of our abstract
nouns, such as skating in Skating strengthens the ankles.
Similarly, if the subject of the statement is really a quality,
no genuine qualityword (adjective) can be used, but only
an abstract noun of quality, such as length in The length
of the wall was two miles. When the predicate does not
really involve an action, we have seen that the abstract
verb is fulfils the predicative function. Attribution is
always expressed by adjectives with nouns, by adverbs
with verbs. Hence the use of nominal and verbal adjec
tives and adverbs when an object or an action is attrib
tive: a boyish man, he spoke boyishly, skating boys, he
spoke drawlingly. For attributive occurrence of objects
we have, however, also our possessive form: John's hat
The categoric distinction between these 'parts of
speech', — verbs, nouns, and so on, — i s by no means
a necessary attendant of independent words for quality
and action. Chinese, for instance, also has such words,
[e. g.
'good' or
'buy', — but the functions
of subject, predicate, attribute are not confined to any
THE SENTENCE
113
such classes. Thus the qualityword
appears as
attribute in
'good man' and as predicate in
'He (is) good'. The actionwords
'buy'
and
'sell ' appear as attributes (where we in English
should have to use verbal adjectives 'buying', 'selling') in
'a trader, merchant', and so on. In the
modern speech there are also the independent words
and
which independently express the relations, re
spectively, of attribution and predication; thus one can
say also
'good (attribution) man', and
'he (attribution) hat', 'his hat', and
'trader', as well as
'He
(predication) good', almost exactly our 'He is good'.
The process of analyzing an experience may be tem
porarily interrupted by the associative addition of ele
ments viewed as entering into the same discursive relation
as some one of the original elements. As well as we say
He is a good student, we can include other attributes of stu
dent suggesting themselves as parallel to good: He is a
good, intelligent, industrious student. Such groups are call
ed serial groups. It is possible that they represent a
specialized, automatized form of the discursive relation.
They are especially common in English and the languages
most closely related to it; we say John and Mary ran
rather than John ran, Mary ran, but this condensed habit
of expression is not everywhere so common.
While the sentence has its foundation in the discursive
analysis, other forces also play a part in determining its
form. Most important of these are perhaps the emotional
relations of the elements. The relations of emotional
stress find expression especially in the modulation of
loudness (p. 50). In addition to this, however, they affect
the sentence in various ways in different languages. A
method in English, for instance, is to plaec the emotion
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
114
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
ally dominant element1) in some way out of its usual
position, preferably first or last. Thus He came last is
turned into Last came he. This inversion can be effected
also by making the dominant element predicate of an
introductory sentence: It was lie who came last, It was
last that he came, It was me they beat. The introductory
words are here entirely abstract and are spoken with
very low stress, so that phonetically the dominant element
practically comes first. This construction is the regular
one, as we shall see, in some languages.
The material or concrete relations between the elements
of a sentence may also play a part in its structure. These
relations are, of course, endless in variety, and their
linguistic expression is scarcely less manifold; we are
interested, however, only in those cases where such a
concrete relation receives some other expression than
that of the underlying discursive construction. Such
specialized expression of concrete, nondiscursive relations
is of course, always a sequence of words that once stood
only in discursive relation but then became mechanized
in the particular use. Are the two words in Home in dis
cursive relation? Which is attribute, which subject? We
cannot answer: for our feeling the relation is simply this,
that in expresses a local inclusion with regard to Borne.
Our feeling is due to the fact that this type of expression
has become mechanized: we reel it off without entering
upon the discursive analysis, which, when such locutions
were first used, was vividly present.
1) The term 'psychological (as opposed to the 'logical' or
'grammatical') subject', used in this meaning by many writers,
is to be avoided as confusing. There is nothing more 'psycho
logical' about an emotionally dominant element than about the
subject of a discursive analysis, and 'subject' is a discursive,
not an emotional concept.
THE SENTENCE
115
Thus, as we have seen, the concrete relation of an actor
performing an action has in English furnished the uni
versal form for the sentence. When, for instance, the
subject is not an actor but the goal (object affected) of
an action, we make it actorsubject of the abstract verb
is and use in the predicate a verbal adjective denoting
the quality of something that has undergone an action.
Thus we say He is hurt, The rabbit was killed, The house
was being built. For such locutions Latin has special verb
forms, the 'passive', which express an action as being
undergone, allowing the object affected to be expressed
as actor: Domus struebätur 'The house was being built'.
Where there is no actor at all, we use in English a purely
formal word : It is raining, It was four years ago.
Another concrete relation which we feel as entirely
unique is that of the goal or object affected of an action
Originally this seems to have been an ordinary attribute
of the predicate verb. In Latin, as in Old English, there
are two caseforms of nouns used in this way: the 'accu
sative' for the object fully affected and the 'dative' for
the object less fully affected. Thus in Tater filio librum
dat 'the father gives the son a book', librum is in the
'accusative' filiō in the 'dative' case. In present English
these distinctions of wordform are almost entirely lost.
Nevertheless the expression of these relations has remained
a thing by itself. The' object fully affected follows the
verb; that less fully affected either stands between the
two or is viewed as in prepositional (local) relation: this
latter usage amounts to an analysis of the relation of
object less fully affected into an independent word. Thus
we say either The father gives the son a booh or The father
gives a booh to the san. In Chinese also the object fully
affected has a constriction all its own: while all other
attributes precede their subject, the object affected follows
116
THE FORMS OF I ANGUAGE
its actionword. Thus
'I fear him',
'He
fears me'. The object less fully affected
has a different expression, which, however looks like a
specialized form of the preceding: a few actionwords take
it as their goal, forming a phrase which then as attribute
precedes the main actionword of the sentence. For in
stance
'He sends me
festivalpresents' (more literally: 'He, giving me, sends
festivalpresents'). Here
the subject, is followed by
the predicate, in which
is an attribute com
posed of the actionword
'give' followed by its
object affected,
T . This twoword attribute, accord
ing to the general principle, precedes its subject
an actionword meaning 'send', which is followed by its
object affected
, in which the former word
'festival' is an attribute of the latter 'presents'.
Coming, finally, to our English prepositiongroups,
with which we began as an example of crystallized con
crete relations, we may seek their origin in older con
structions of attribution. Local relations are always, con
cretely, relations with regard to objects; we find them,
accordingly, in many languages expressed by caseforms
of objectwords, as in the Latin Fugit Corinthō 'Heflees
fromCorinth', ('ablative' case), venit ('Hecomes
toRome' ('accusative' case), the Sanskrit parvate tisthati
'Onthemountain hestands' ('locative' case) prayacchati
savyena 'Hehandsout with(his)left(hand)' ('instrumen
tal' case); compare also the Finnish caseforms on p. 108.
This purely attributive usage is still seen in a later stage,
when there come into use set phrases of certain adverbial
attributive words with these caseforms of nouns. Thus,
to take an example from Ancient Greek, we find such
sentences as Keplialês αpo phāros liéleske 'From(his)head
off thecloak hedrew', 'He drew the cloak from his
THE SENTENCE
117
head'. Here the verb héleske 'Hedrew' has, beside the
object fully affected pharos, the attributes αpo 'off,' an
adverbial word, and the caseform, of ablative value,
lcephalēs 'fromthehead', Later such combinations of ad
verbial word and caseform became habitual and were
crystallized into a standard expression of the concrete
local relations with regard to objects: apà kephalės 'from
the head'. The same occurred in English, and even today,
when our caseforms are practically lost, such phrases
are our regular expression for local relations: from Corinth,
to Borne, from his head, into the fields. Thus we obtain
the collocation of preposition plus noun which would be
entirely inexplicable on the basis of the purely discursive
relations from which history shows it has grown. In Chinese
similar phrases have a very different origin. One can there
say
'He goes into the fields',
but it would perhaps be more literal to translate 'He,
entering (the) fields' interior, goes'. For the central ele
ment of the predicate is here
preceded by its
attribute of three words, which consists of the actionword
'enter' followed by its object fully affected
Lli/] 'fields' interior'.
Of similar nature are our words the and a. The relation
of the to rabbit in the rabbit or of a in a rabbit is scarcely
the regular discursive one of attribution. Originally the
word the was probably a deictic word similar to our that:
it was used attributively with a noun; in time, however,
it came to be used anaphorically (of objects not actually
present, but of those which had been mentioned or were
otherwise specifically known), until today the use of the
is a peculiar and categoric expression of definiteness of
an object. Likewise, a, an was originally the numeral
'one', attributively used. It came in time to be used when
ever only one object was meant and the definite the could
118
THE FORMS OF LANGUAGE
not be used. Today, in consequence, we have three syn
tactic categories affecting nouns: every object must be
spoken of either as definite (at least with the), or as in
definite (at least with a), or as collective, without the
article, as in Man wants but little . . . or Men are easily
moved by such tilings. This is in contrast with most lan
guages. In Latin, for instance, homo means 'the man',
'a man', or 'man', and such attributes as itte 'that' or
Unas 'one' or quidam 'some' are used only where such
elements are actually and vividly present in the experience;
they stand, then, in regular attributive relation to their
noun.
As a last example I shall cite our 'infinitive' verbforms.
These express the action as complement of another pre
ceding verb, e. g. I shall go, He can speak, You must ivrite
a letter, I want to forget it, They tried to deceive us, — the
relation between the two verbs being in many instances
expressed by the word to. This form of expression would
baffle all attempts at reducing it to terms of attribution
or predication. But it was not always so. In the older
forms of English the infinitive is a verbal noun, compa
rable to those we now use in ing (as skating), occurring
most frequently in two caseforms, an accusative, e. g.
Old English bindan 'to bind' and a dative case, Old
English bindanne, bindenne. The accusative form was used
as the object fully affected of a verb; thus I shall go, for
instance, meant originally 'I owe going' and was parallel
to such expressions as 'I owe money'. The dative form,
after the preposition to, was used like any other noun
with a preposition (see above), such a sentence as He
went to eat meaning 'He went to eating', parallel to 'He
went to London'. The scheme of these expressions has
long ago, however, become so automatized that they are
used where the original discursive relation could not be
THE SENTENCE
119
interpreted into them, — for any feeling for this historic
ally underlying relation has long ago disappeared. The
preposition to, by the same token, has here become an
abstract relational element, expressing the relation between
the two verbforms; its independent value can be seen in
such expressions as He doesn't want to.
These peculiar developments; beyond predication and
attribution, of the sentencerelations of a language, are,
of course, an important part of its syntax. The descrip
tion of typical cases could be greatly expanded. The
principle, however, is everywhere the same: the discur
sive relations of predication and attribution, which are
inherent in the formation of the sentence, lie at the basis
of all set locutions in which the material content becomes
dominant. While a Chinese speaker, on reflection, will
realize that 'fields' in the above sentence (p. 117) is the
object affected by the actionword 'enter', — for the word
can thus occur in a sentence without any other
actionword, as the central element of the predicate:
'He
enters the fields', — he would per
haps have difficulty in appreciating the relation of 'enter'
to 'go' as the regular attributive relation of his language,
just as an English speaker would undoubtedly be at a
loss, were we to require him to explain in terms of attri
bution and predication, the relations of the words in He
goes into the fields. In short, the change of language pro
duces such relationwords as our prepositions, with the
simple and direct forms of expression which they make
possible, out of the concrete, cumbersome habits of an
older time. This change is at the same time a develop
ment of the mind: the conceptual values of our words
of quality, action, and relation would be impossible with
out these words (p. 65), just as the latter can exist only
as the result of a definite mentallinguistic development.
CHAPTER V.
MORPHOLOGY.
1. The significance of morphologic phenomena.
The morphologic classes of a language represent communal
associative habits: they express the associative connections
which the national mental life of a. people has made
between the types of experience which the language ex
presses in words. Thus we in English find some connec
tion between flare and flash, between father and mother,
between boys and stones. Every formational element
common to a number of words involves a grouping
together of these words on the basis of what to the com
munity has appealed as a common element in the ex
periences expressed by these words. The classifications
of language are, in fact, the clearest expressions of the
associations made by the community as a whole. They
are, accordingly, of great ethnologic significance. This
significance is increased by the fact that they are far less
subject to reflection than other communal activities (such
as religion) and are never, in any but the most highly
cultured communities, modified by such reflection.
2. Morphologic classification by syntactic use
(Parts of speech). The first kind of morphologic word
class of which we shall speak, — and it is in many
languages the most fundamental, — is really a syntactic
phenomenon. It is thé division into parts of speech. This
MORPHOLOGIC CLASSIFICATION BY SYNTACTIC USE
121
division is due to the existence of syntactic categories, —
in English mainly to that of actor and action. The Eng
lish parts of speech received some mention in the last
chapter, where our classification of noun, verb, and ad
jective was spoken of. The classification may in its entirety
be described as follows:
a) The verbs express an action (1 eat, they danced) or
another element viewed as such (he is). Their distinctive
characteristics are several. They always form the nucleus
of the predicate; predication cannot be expressed in any
other way in the English language. The actor, real or
formally viewed as such, must always be explicitly men
tioned with the verb. Nearly every verb expresses by its
form the time, present or past, of the action. In the
presenttime forms most verbs vary according to the
number and person of the actor, in that a thirdperson
singular actor requires a special form: I, we, you, they
eat, but he, she, it eats.
The only exception to all this is the noncommittal or
infinitive verbform, e. g. eat in I shall eat this apple. This
form expresses the action apart from any actor. It can
be used only in exclamatory utterance, where it serves
as a command (Eat!), and as a supplement to another
verb (p. 118). The infinitive differs from the presenttense
form in only one verb: be (présent tense: we are); it is
lacking in several others (can, may, shall, will).
Verbs are modified by adverbs (see below).
b) The nouns express an objectexperience, be it really
such (stone, house, man) or viewed as such (skating, length,
greenness). They are distinguished by a number of char
acteristics from verbs (e. g. they cannot express predi
cation) and from the other parts of speech. They express
the actor or the objects affected by an action (The man
gave his son a booh), as well as that to which something
122
MOKPHOLOGY
is equated or under which it is subsumed by the predi
cation (He is a merchant, The whale is a mammal). They
can stand in attribution to other nouns only when in
their possessive form (the mari!s hat). Nearly every noun
shows by its form whether one or more than one of the
objects is intended. The nouns are modified by the attrib
utive nouns already mentioned, by adjectives, and by
attributively used pronouns, among which the and a, an
are especially frequent, owing to certain syntactic habits
of the language (p. 117, f.), and they are used in set phrases
with prepositions (p. 117). The constrast with verbs is
thus complete.
This contrast is, however, less in the verbal nouns
(ending in ing) which express what is usually looked
upon as an action (e. g. skating in Skating strengthens the
ankles), for these verbal nouns can, like a verb, be follow
ed by mention of the objects affected: Giving them alms
is no remedy, I am tired of hearing him grumble.
c) The adjectives express a quality (green, large, long)
or what is viewed as such (growing, burning, boyish).
They can be used to express neither predication nor action,
actor, or objects affected, but stand only in attribution
with nouns or, in the predicate, as qualities predicated
of the subject (The man is good). Beside the usual form
they have two variations which express a superior and
a superlative degree of a quality (better, best). Adjectives
are modified attributively by adverbs.
A peculiar variety of adjectives are the verbal adjecti
ves or participles, which express as a quality what is
usually viewed as an action, e. g. a running boy, broken
toys. These verbal adjectives are used in set phrases with
the verbs is, has, to express durative and perfectic manner
of action (see below, p. 145), as in I am reading k,
He was dreaming, I have written him a letter, Have you
MORPHOLOGIC CLASSIFICATION BY SYNTACTIC USE 123
written?, He had arrived. Like the verbal nouns, the
verbal adjectives can be followed by expression of the
objects affected, as in several of the above examples.
A few of our adjectives may be said to form a subclass
in that they can be used in the predicate only: He is
asleep, awake; The ship ran aground,
d) The pronominal words are unified by their relational
value, personal, deictic, anaphoric, numeral, etc.; in their
syntactic use they can be divided into a number of sub
classes. They are used to express actor or objects affected
(He gave me it) or, in the predicate, that relational element
to which something is equatod (Is it I, It is mine), —
differing in these uses from nouns in that they never are
attributively modified by adjectives, though some of them
are so modified by other pronouns. They are used, further,
as attributive modifiers of nouns and of other pronouns
(the man, this man, three men, the other), but differ in
this use, as well as in the predicate, from adjectives in
that they always precede the latter when both are present
(three good men, the old house). Some pronouns occur in
the nominal uses only (who, I, mine), these and a few
others (what) are never modified by another preceding
pronoun; two, the and a, never occur in the nominal, bat
only in the modifying uses. While less homogeneous as
to syntactic use, then, than the other parts of speech,
the pronouns, taken together, yet constitute as distinct
a class as any, owing to their peculiar meaning and to
their resistance to material modifying elements.
e) The adverbs attributively express the circumstances
of qualities and actions, such as place (here, there, where),
time (then, yesterday, afterwards), degree (more, very),
manner (rapidly, slowly, kindly), and the like. They alone
have the function of modifying adjectives and, in a direct
sense, verbs. As in the case of ad]ectives/ their form may
124
MORPHOLOGY
express a superior or superlative degree of the experience
(kindlier, kindliest) but no other relations.
f ) Prepositions express a relation, usually spatial, with
regard to an object. Accordingly, they are used only
with nouns or with nominally used pronouns, preceding
them and their modifiers in a unique construction, the
set phrase of preposition plus noun (p. 117).
g) The conjunctions express relations between coordi
nate parts of speech and between predications. Subordi
nating conjunctions express a relation of time, condition,
cause, and the like (when, if, because, though) with regard
to a predication. Thus they relate a predication, as a
whole; subordinately to another predication (When he saw
the house, he . . . .). Coordinating conjunctions express
serial relations of all kinds (and, or, but, both . . . and, ei
ther ... or). Externally, this function involves their appear
ing between coordinate words, phrases, and predications.
h) Interjections (of the primary type) are, of course,
opposed to all the other classes of words, in content, use,
and form.
The most striking circumstance about this classification
is that the normal speaker is utterly unconscious of it.
It requires a considerable degree of mental training and
even of linguistic habit of thought before one can by
introspection analyze these classes. And yet they are used
correctly every day by millions of speakers who would
be utterly incapable of making such an introspective anal
ysis, and perhaps even of understanding it, if it were
made for them. With all the complexity of the classifi
cation, confusion between the different parts of speech
never occurs. This is a most important fact, especially
in view of the unconscious nature of the habits, and one
which could be illustrated by many features of English
usage. It is attested, for instance, by the failure of homo
MORPHOLOGIC CLASSIFICATION BY SYNTACTIC USE
125
nyms to introduce even the slightest confusion. Such
homonyms as wood (noun) and would (verb), for instance,
could be confused only in the dreamworld of Alice in
Wonderland. The noun wood occurs with preceding ad
jectives, prepositions, and pronominal modifiers, in the
function of actor, object affected, or predicate noun; the
verb would, expresses only and always a predication, must
be accompanied by mention of an actor, is modified by
adverbs only, and is followed by an infinitive supplement.
Even where the homonymy is significant, corresponding
to some resemblance of semantic content, as in the case
of stone, noun in a stone, verb in they stone him, and ad
jective in a stone gate, the same distinctions hold true,
and a single syntactically joined word will show which
of the homonyms is present: all that is necessary to show
that the noun is meant is the modifier a, the verb is at
once identified by a preceding actor, and the adjective
by a following subject. In short such homonymy never
obscures the boundaries between these classes, as it well
might, were they less clearly drawn; thus one is never
tempted to confuse house [haos] noun and house [haöz]
verb, or gun, bullet, arrow, nouns and shoot verb, in spite
of the corresponding homonymy in stone. Likewise there
is no confusion between adverb and preposition in spite
of such homonymy as that of in, preposition (in thehouse)
and in, adverb (He walked in)] no confusion between prep
osition and conjunction in spite of the homonymy of
after, preposition (after the meal) and after, conjunction
' after they had gone). For instance, the conjunction cor
responding to in would never be expressed as in, no
matter how ignorant the speaker, but would be while,
during, or the like; and the adverb corresponding to after
would (in spite of homonymy of adverb and preposition
in such cases as in) never be after, but always afterwards
126
MORPHOLOGY
or then. In short, the classification into parts of speech,
though not appearing in the phonetic form of the single
word, is as distinct as any other classification in the
language. Selfexplanatory and selfunderstood as it seems
to us when once we are made conscious of its existence,
it is by no means universal in linguistic expression. In
fact, the parts of speech used in English occur in only
a limited number of languages. In Chinese, for instance,
as we have seen (p. 112, f.), a word, no matter whether it
expresses object, quality, or action, is externally treated
alike, and may express subject, predicate, or attribute;
thus we saw on p. 113 the word
'good' (quality)
as attribute and as predicate, and the words
'buy' and 'sell' (action) as attributes; as predicate they
appear in such sentences as
'buy
one
volume book', i. e. 'buy a book'. Similarly the action
word
'speak' appears as predicate in
'He speaks Northcapital (Peking) lan
guage', but as subject in
'His Northcapital language speaking is good', i. e.
'He speaks the Peking language well', where we must
translate the uniform
by a verb in the one case,
where it is predicate, and by an abstract noun of action
in the second, where it is subject.
Chinese may, indeed, serve us as an example of a lan
guage with parts of speech entirely different from ours.
It has no such parts of speech as noun, verb, adjective,
and adverb. 'Good' is a quality, 'man' an object, 'speaks'
an action in China as everywhere else, but the fact that
these experiences belong to these different spheres is not
expressed in the Chinese sentence. In Chinese we can
distinguish primarily two parts of speech. One, by far
the more numerous, is used according to certain rules of
wordorder, chiefly the following: subject precedes predi
CLASSIFICATION BY CONGRUENCE
127
cate, attribute its subject. Example:
'he
good man', to be.taken as subject and predicate, the latter
consisting of an attribute and its subject, i. e. 'He is a
good man'. Other examples have occurred earlier in this
book (p. 113).
Within this first class of words a subdivision can be
made between intransitive and transitive words. The object
affected by a transitive word follows it (in opposition to
the usual rule of attributesubject), e. g.
'He
speaks Northcapital language'. The word
, for instance, is intransitive, and could never, like
be followed by the expression of an object affected.
Other examples will be found on pages 116, 119, 126.
The words of the transitive class thus resemble some of
our verbs (or, again, our prepositions, see page 117); but
the resemblance is distant, for the Chinese transitive
words by no means, as we have seen, either occur only
as predicates or monopolize this function; further they
alone can, by definition, be followed by expression of
objects affected, whereas in English this is exactly the
feature in which verbal nouns and adjectives (p. 122, f.) com
pete with verbs; and our verbs, on the other hand, can by
no means all of them take an object affected.
The other part of speech consists of words not subject
to these rules of wordorder, but used, sometimes invaria
bly, sometimes at will, between words of the former type
to express explicitly the relation between them. Thus
expresses predication,
attribution, and the sen
tence above could read
the mean
ing being unchanged but more fully stated (cf. p. 113).
3. Classification by congruence. A peculiarity of the
classifications by use in the sentence, — parts of speech,
— which we have just seen in Chinese and English, is
that the phonetic form of the word itself does not express
128
MORPHOLOGY
the classification. Thus stone noun, verb, and adjective
are alike in form; similarly in preposition and in adverb,
after preposition and after conjunction, or in Chinese
expressing attribution and
'low',
It would be
impossible to find in such words as street, house
gun, arrow any formal feature to show that they are nouns,
as opposed to such adjectives as sweet, narrow or to such
verbs as beat, souse, run.
The next type of morphologic wordclass that demands
discussion, has the same feature of not involving formal
identification of the classes. It also is really a syntactic
rather than a morphologic phenomenon.
We had occasion in the last chapter to notice that
wordboundaries are sometimes phonetically recognized
by the fact that wordinitial or wordfinal may vary accord
ing to the sounds that precede or follow (p. 101,ff.). In
some cases, as in the Sanskrit example there quoted, the
variation is an automatic soundvariation and therefore of
no morphologic significance. In another example this
was different; in the Irish tα b 'there are cows' and a
va 'his cows' (p. 102, f.), the variation of b : va does not
depend upon the preceding sound. One says also b
'the cows'; further, b 'soft' but ró vog 'very soft', ban
'white' but bo vαn 'white cow', brisk 'break' but do vrish
'did break', and so on. The speaker must have a class
feeling for words such as tα, na, after which b is spoken,
as opposed to words such as a, ró, , do, after which v
is spoken. The words in these two classes possess no
distinguishing characteristics, by themselves, as to form
or meaning: they constitute a class, in each case, by virtue
of the effect they have on other, — in our instance, the
following, — words in the utterance. These are word
classes by congruence. That there are several such classes
in Irish appears from bó 'cow': an vó 'the cow: ar mó'
CLASSIFICATION BY CONGRUENCE
129
'our cow' and from uv 'gg': an tuv 'the egg': na nuv
'of the eggs': a hav 'her egg'. Each of these classes has
one distinctive feature, and that is simply the fact that
the words in it are felt to have this phonetic effect on
following words, as it were necessarily and as part of
the expression of the meaning. To the Irish speechcon
sciousness nothing else seems possible: here, as always,
the morphologic classification of a word is ; in the feeling
of the speakers, part of its semantic value. For this very
reason most speakers of a language are unconscious of
their morphologic classifications, taking the classification
element for granted as an inevitable part of the meaning.
Another example of classification apparent not in the
classified word itself, but in its effect on other words, —
classification b y congruence, — is that of the German
noungenders. There is nothing in such German nouns
as Leib 'body', Anker 'anchor', Auster 'oyster', Frau
'woman', Weih 'woman', Fenster 'window', either in form
or in material meaning, to indicate a classification. All
attributive words, however, such as adjectives and pro
nouns, and all later anaphoric reference to these or other
nouns at once show them to fall into three separate
classes. Thus the definite article ' t h e ' has in the nomina
tive case singular three forms, one being used with each
class of nouns: der Leib, der Anker, — die Aasler, die
Frau, — das Weib, das Fenster; and similarly in anaphoric
reference, the pronoun referring to nouns of the first or
'masculine' gender is er, to the second or 'feminine', sie,
to the third, 'neuter', es. This German classification differs,
then, from the Irish in that not the next word, but all
the attributively modifying words and all words express
ing anaphoric reference, even though spoken much later,
are affected.
Speakers of English can contrast this German gender
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of L a n g u a g e
130
MORPHOLOGY
classification with their own language. In English such
words as the or good are the same for all nouns, and,
though we have in the singular three anaphoric pronouns,
he, she, it, these differ not in being assigned to different
classes of nouns, but only in actual meaning, just as any
three other words may differ. While we refer to human
beings beyond infancy according to sex as he or she, we
are in other cases free to recognize sex or not: thehorse
he
or the horse... it. When we use the sexforms to refer
to a sexless object, we are, by a genuine metaphor, attribut
ing personal and sexual character to it, as when we refer
to a ship or a steamengine or the moon as she. In short,
he and she differ as any other words may differ, e. g. man,
uoman, child, and do not, like the three German forms
of the pronoun, involve the constant presence of a classifica
tion of nouns. Chinese, which has but one anaphoric
word
, does not in this differ much from English.
The difference is merely parallel to that between the
Chinese
'older brother',
'younger brother'
and our brother, where the Chinese has two different words
to our one: in the anaphoric pronoun we have three words
to the Chinese one. Both languages are in this respect
widely different from the German with its er, sie, es, which
demand a complete and always present classification of
the nouns in that language.
Another type of classification by congruence is seen
in Chinese. Anything counted is expressed in this lan
guage by the numeralword and the designation of the
thing counted, and the latter is preceded by a modifying
word of fairly material content expressing the unit of
the objectidea; e. g.
'one piece man', i. e.
'one man'. Now, there is a considerable number of such
numerative words, and the choice of the numerative word
depends upon the thing counted. Thus one says:
PHONETICSEMANTIC CLASSES
131
'three piece man', i. e. 'three men',
'three piece mace', i. e. 'three mace
(coin)', but:
'three root book', 'three books',
'three tail fish', 'three fishes',
'three rank earlier born', 'three
teachers',
'three branch thread', 'three threads',
'three coverlets', —
very much as we speak of three head of cattle. Owing to
the material content of these numeratives there is a cer
tain amount of freedom in their use: in the North, for
instance,
encroaches on the others, but this freedom
has definite limits; each of the forty or more numeratives
has its range of objects with which it is used. It is appar
ent that the Chinese speechfeeling divides everything
that may be counted into a number of classes which re
ceive distinction in the numerative word. Here again we
see a classification by congruence, though of a very different
kind from those which we examined in Irish and German.
4. Phoneticsemantic classes. The two kinds of
classification so far considered have this in common, that
the words classified in no way show the classification
in their immediate form. In the classification by syn
tactic use it is in the sentence that the classification appears,
the different classes here performing entirely different
functions;, and in the classifications by congruence it is
in the form of following words or of attributively or
anaphorically connected words or in the choice of certain
other words, uever in the classified word itself, that the
classification is expressed.
Now, it is conceivable that such classifications may
receive expression in the classified wold itself. For instance,
there are in Italian two genderclasses of nouns, the classifi
132
MORPHOLOGY
cation receiving expression, as in German, by variation
in the form of attributive and anaphoric words. In addi
tion to this, however, very many of the masculine nouns
end in o and very many of the feminine in a. Although
there is one feminine in o (la mano 'the hand') and there
are a few foreign masculines, usually, however characterized
by peculiar accent, in a (e. g. il sofà 'the sofa'), the feel
ing that nouns in o are masculine, those in a feminine
is part of the Italian speechfeeling. In German and Eng
lish the prepositions, pronouns, and conjunctions tend to
be shorter than other words, and similar tendencies occur
in other languages, notably in the Semitic and the Malayan.
All this shows that a wordclassification may express it
self in more than one way, although, as a rule, the ex
pression is in only one direction complete and regular,
and in the others imperfect and irregular, as in the Italian
o and a endings.
There are, however, wordclasses which receive expres
sion in the form of the classified words alone. These are
the commonest of all classes: most of our instances in
the third and fourth chapters illustrated them. Thus
we there set up a formula by which metilu might be used
for 'white rabbit' and meko for 'white fox'. In these two
hypothetical expressions the phonetic element me corre
sponds to the common semantic element of 'white'. To
turn, now, to our actual instances, we may recall a num
ber of them.
English father, mother, brother, sister: common phonetic
element, dental plus er; these words form a semantic
class in that they are all nouns designating a near rel
ative.
English flame, flare, flash, flimmer, flicker: the common
phonetic element is the initial fl; the words fall into a
semantic class in that all of them express phenomena of
PHONETICSEMANTIC CLASSES
133
fire with especial reference to its peculiar moving light.
This class is of interest in the present connection, be
cause it illustrates the emotional rather than perceptual
value and the illdefined rather than clearcut extent of
many of these classes. For there can be no doubt that,
in the feeling of many speakers, flicker again associates
itself with such words as flutter, fly, and even, further,
with flit, flip, flop, flap, and so on. All these words share
the initial fl and are more or less vaguely related in
meaning ; indeed, the feeling for the semantic connection
may vary in the same speaker under different circum
stances. In short, the extent or the existence of a phonetic
semantic wordclass may be very doubtful, and could
be determined with accuracy only for a given person at
a given time, and here only if a full insight into his
associative disposition at the moment were attainable.
The different members of such wordclasses, may, more
over, cohere in differing degrees. Thus flare and flash read
ily and vividly associate each other so do flicker and
flimmer; so, perhaps, though in lesser degree, do flicker
and flutter; then, again, flip, flop, and flap form a smaller
class within the larger, their coherence being expressed
by the common final p; or, further, flicker, flimmer, flit,
flip possess a common semantic value in the smallness
and fineness of the movement designated, to which corre
sponds, in form, the common vowel . We are dealing
here with complex and delicate habits of association of
emotional rather than perceptual significance.
This appears, further, in the fact that these classes
cross each other. We have seen (p. 79), in our instance,
that flicker also connects itself with snicker; likewise,
flimmer with glimmer, slummer, simmer, where the first
two words are closely associated, the last one perhaps
more loosely. The word flash belongs also to the large
134
MORPHOLOGY
but coherent class of clash, crash, dash, gash, gnash, hash,
lash, mash, plash, slash, splash. To this there join quash,
squash, even among us, who pronounce the yowel in these
words as [D] instead of [ ]. Further, the word sash, no
doubt belongs with lash, even though it is far from the
other words of the class, and plash, splash weakly join
to wash. Then again, crossing this class is the associa
tion of mash with mush.
English bang, biff, bump, buffer, box, beat form a more
or less homogeneous class, but bed or buy or boat, which
also have initial b, surely do not belong to it. The best
illustration of the peculiar character of these classes is,
however, box ('to strike blows with the fist'), which de
cidedly belongs to this class, while the homonymous box
('receptacle') surely does not. If the reader, in first read
ing the list, took box in the latter sense, he no doubt felt
a disturbing value when he came to it; yet, keepingthe
former sense in mind, he will be able to reread the list
without this feeling. This is comparable, of course, to
the drawings which may be interpreted as a concave or
a convex object, according to one's momentary predisposi
tion. So beat above is homonymous with beet.
Phoneticsemantic classes are also the following, some
of which were quoted in the fourth chapter:
English thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, etc., to which come,
more loosely, ten and tenth.
English thirteen, thirty, third, three, crossing the latter
class.
English fres, fathers, boys, sisters, cats, ropes, watches,
peaches, etc., all expressing a plurality of objects with
the common phonetic element [z] and, by an automatic
soundvariation peculiar to this ending, [s] and [ə z].
English father's, boy's, king's, man's,priest's, boss's, etc.;
the common phonetic element is homonymous with that;
PHONETICSEMANTIC CLASSES
135
in the last class, but the attributive use puts these words
into different connections; notice, moreover, such opposi
tions as men, but man's
English dance, dances, danced, dancing, dancer, with a
common material element expressed by the common
sounds [dæns].
English eat, eats, ate, eaten, eating, eater, eatable: com
mon phonetic element, front diphthong plus t, with ma
terial content of the action 'eat'.
English danced, walked, rocked, loved, cried, landed,
bounded, etc.; common phonetic element [t] and, by an
automatic variation, [d] and [ə d], the content being the
past time of the action relative to that of speaking.
Russian ['b's' dnï] 'poor' in attributive use, ['b'e d'in]
'poor' in predicative use (p. 111). Here the common ma
terial content finds expression in the common phonetic
element ['b'єdn.., b'e'd'.. n], the soundvariations being
common in the language.
Greenlandish [tusaRpana] 'I hear him', [tusaRpat] 'thou
hearest him', [tusaRpa:] 'he hears him', etc., where the
common phonetic element [tusaRpa] corresponds to the
common meaning, 'sounding of him' (cf. p. 104)
Semantically similar are the Nahwatl (Aztec) forms
niktlamaka 'I give him something", niktemaka 'I give it
to someone', nikmaka 'I give it to him', and so on.
The crossing of the classes is very apparent in a lan
guage like Latin, in which, for instance, words like edo
'I eat', edis 'thou eatest', edit 'he eats', edimus 'we eat', etc.
have the common phonetic element ed and the common
semantic element of the material content 'eat', while such
groups as edo 'I eat', rego 'I rule', lego 'I read', and so on,
have a common 0 expressing the actor as the speaker, edis
'thou eatest', regis 'thou rulest', legis 'thou readest', a com
mon is expressing the actor as the one addressed, and so on
136
MORPHOLOGY
5. Classes on a partially phonetic basis. Still other
morphologic classes depend partly, but not entirely on
phonetic similarities.
English nouns, for instance, fall into two categoric
classes: every noun expresses an object either as one or
as more than one. Now, this classification of nouns into
singular nouns and plural nouns is, to begin with, classifica
tion by congruence, for our presenttense verbs and many
of our pronouns vary in form according to whether a
singular or a plural noun is the actor, or, respectively,
that modified or referred to, e. g. The boy skatcs, The
boys skate, The man smokes, The men smoke, this boy, these
boys, my hat... it, my hats... they. In addition to this,
however, almost every singular noun has by its side, clo
sely associated with it and falling with it into a seman
ticphonetic class, a plural noun of the same material
content: boy, boys (belonging to the larger semanticphonet
ic class boy, boys, boy's, boyish, boyhood, etc.); man, men
{manhood, manly, mannish, etc.); hat, hats; knife, knives;
and vice versa. Our singular nouns form a class, conse
quently, in that nearly all of them are related, in uniform
semantic relation, to plural nouns which resemble them
in form; and our plural nouns form a class because each
of them has by its side a similarly related singular. Now,
within these classes there are a number of subclasses
according to the formal relation to the corresponding
word of the other class. Thus the plural nouns, boys,
fathers, hats, rocks, peaches, watches and the great majority
of other plural nouns form a large class in that they add
[z] [s] o r [ə z] — these three endings varying automati
cally, — to the form of the corresponding singulars. A
smaller class is formed by those which also add a sibi
lant, but at the same time substitute [v] for the final [f]
of the singular: calves, knives, loaves (as opposed to cliff,
CLASSES ON A PARTIALLY PHONETIC BASIS
137
bluff, etc. in the preceding class; all these plural nouns
together however belong to a single phoneticsemantic
class, see page 134). Houses, beside adding the ending
[ə z], substitutes [z] for the final [s] of the corresponding
singular house, and thus forms a class by itself. Men,
women, geese, mice, children, oxen, sheep, etc. form a class
in that they lack the usual sibilant ending; and within
this class the first four words belong with a few others
to a subclass, the members of which differ from their
singulars in vowel only; within this, again, mice and lice
form a smaller class in having exactly the same vowel,
corresponding to the same singular vowel in mouse, louse.
Children and oxen, further, probably form a class in that
they add an n suffix; within which class each word again
stands by itself. Sheep, fish, and deer constitute a sub
class by virtue of homonymy with their singulars.
Owing, finally, to the close association between corre
sponding singulars and plurals, the singulars correspond
ing to the plurals within each of these classes, larger or
smaller, also form a class. Thus most singular nouns
belong to the large class of boy, father, hat, rock, peach,
watch, because they correspond to plurals with the reg
ular sibilant addition; kiife, calf, loaf, etc. form a class
because they correspond to plurals with [v] for the final
[f]; house forms a class; so do man, woman, mouse, louse,
goose, etc., within which mouse and louse are a smaller
class, and so on.
We see thus in the English nouns two kinds of word
classification not entirely marked by phonetic common
elements, namely:
Classes due to the association of each word with another
word in uniform semantic relation to it; for instance: aD
singular nouns; all plural nouns;
Classes due to the association of each word with another
138
MORPHOLOGY
word in uniform semantic and phonetic relation to it;
for instance: the plural nouns calves, knives, lives, wives,
loaves, etc., or the singular nouns mouse and louse, or the
singulars or plurals, respectively, corresponding to these
classes.
We may illustrate such classes by our verbs also. Classes
by semantic parallelism are: a) all infinitives: be, have,
eat, sing, love, dance; b) all forms used of the present
tense, when the speaker himself is the actor: am, have,
eat, sing, love, dance, homonymous in all cases except am
with a) and d); c) all presenttense verbs used with a
third person singular actor: is, has, eats, sings, loves, dan
ces, — in a few instances homonymous with b) and d),
e. g. can, shall, will; d) all presenttense verbs used with
actor in the second person ('you') or in the plural: are,
have, eat, sing, love, dance, — homonymous in all instan
ces except are with a) and b).
As in the instance of all singulars and all plurals of
nouns, these classes are at the same time classes by con
gruence, for b) is used only with the actor I, c) only with
a singularnoun or singularpronoun actor, and so on.
However, all these together constitute a large class, again
by semantic parallelism, as opposed to those that now
follow, and this classification is not supported by any
features of congruence. For, while all the preceding refer
to an action viewed as present in relative time, those
which follow express the action as past in relative time
or unreal in modal character (cf. below):
e) all verbs expressing the action as past, used with
a singular actor of first or third person: (I, he, John) was,
had, ate, sang, loved, danced, — rarely homonymous with
a), b), d), e. g let, put, cost; f) all past tense verbs used
with an actor in the second person or in the plural num
ber, and all verbs referring to an action as not really
MORPHOLOGIC CLASSIFICATION etc.
139
taking place: were, had, ate, sang, loved, danced,—homon
ymous in all instances except were with e).
Within each of these six classes there are, as among
the nouns, subclasses by phonetic and semantic parallelism.
To take only one instance, class e) has one largest sub
class within which all words have a final [d] (loved, trudg
ed), [t] (danced, passed), or [ə d] (rested, waited), — these
suffixes vary automatically, — as opposed to the corre
sponding forms of a), b), d). Other subclasses show other
forms of dentaladdition, e. g. sent, lent, etc. or should,
would, could, where each also stands in a smaller class by
itself. Still other classes lack the dental, differing from the
presenttense forms usually by change of vowel; e. g. such a
class as sang, rang, drank, sank, etc. (present: sing, ring,
drink, sink). Another class is formed by the few instances
of homonymy with the present (let, hit, beat, cost, etc.). The
two past verbs which bear no relation whatever, formally,
to the corresponding presents also each form a class: was
and went. The presentforms corresponding to each of
these classes again form a class.
6. Difference between morphologic classification
and nonlinguistic association. The ways in which a
morphologic wordclassification may express itself, then,
are various. Nevertheless, it is always possible to recog
nize a morphologic class, as opposed to a nonlinguistic
psychologic connection. If sew closely associates needle,
the connection is not linguistic, for the two words belong
in English to no one morphologic class, not even to the
same part of speech. On the other hand, if go is closely
associated with went, this association receives linguistic
expression, for the semantic relation between these two
words so habitually receives expression by phonetic simi
larity (dance: danced; sing : sang) that in this one instance
the lack of phonetic similarity does not disturb the usual
140
MORPHOLOGY
feeling of coherence of pastform and presentform: go:
went fall into a morphologic class by their parallelism,
semantically, with dance: danced, sing: sang, etc. If the
English language possessed no other pair of words that
stood to each other in the same semantic relation as go:
went, or if there were other such pairs, but phonetic re
semblance between them were everywhere as totally out
of the question as in this instance, — then, to be sure,
go and went would not fall into a common morphologic
class beyond that of verbs.
7. Classes by composition. The most explicit ex
pression of a classification of words is the likeness of
compounds to simple words and to each other, as when
bed, bedsheetj bedcover, bedpost, bedroom, bedridden, etc., or
bedroom, diningroom, room, etc., fall into a class. Of this
type of wordclassification we shall speak later.
8. Derivation and inflection. From the survey which
we have just made of the principal types of morphologic
classes, it appears that most commonly, when a number
of words fall into a morphologic class, they present some
phonetic resemblance to one another, and, of course, some
phonetic divergence. That is, they differ formationally,
e. g. flame: flash: flare or boys: stones: fathers or boy:
boys: boyish.
In grammatical writings about English and the langua
ges possessing a similar morphology it has become usual
to distinguish two kinds of formational differences, accord
ing to the semantic nature of the classification. If the
words have in common an element expressing material
meaning and differ only in an element of relational con
tent such as is categoric in the language (e. g., in Eng
lish, number or tense), it is customary to speak of them
as different 'forms' of one 'word' and of the relation be
tween them as inflection. Thus boy: boy's: boys or eat:
COMMONEST MORPHOLOGIC CATEGORIES
141
eats: eating: ate: eaten are examples of inflection. If the
words have in common an element expressing material
meaning, but differ also in such an element, the relation
between them is called derivation. Examples are flash:
flare: flame or flash: crash: dash or boy: boyish or eat:
eater: eatable, and so on, provided always that the relation
between the words shall be not merely a difference of
categoric function. If the words have in common only
a relational element, as boys, fathers, stones, etc., it is
common to call them 'parallel forms' of different words.
In the habits of speakers words related by inflection
are very closely associated with each other. For the naive
speaker, taking the categories of his language for granted
as the natural and inevitable forms of expression, feels
the inflectionally different words (or 'forms'), e. g. boy:
boys, as necessary variations in the expression of a ma
terial content. The inflectionally related words are for
him really 'forms' of one 'word', — 'forms' made neces
sary by the exigencies of expression.
9. The semantic n a t u r e of inflection: t h e common
est categories. Inflection, therefore, could be defined as
variation between words to express relational differences
which involve appurtenance to different categories. What
is inflection in one language may, of course, be nothing
of the sort in another, where the categories are different.
It will be worth while, then, to mention some of the
relations which are expressed by inflection in different
languages, — that is, to mention some of the commoner
morphologic categories. Some of these we met in the third
and fourth chapters, where, however, we were interested
in the general rationale of relational expression, rather
than in the ground covered by the individual categories
Number. Among the English parts of speech the nouns
have the categories of singular and plural number. Nearly
142
MORPHOLOGY
every noun must express whether one object or a plural
ity is meant: we may say that each of these Vords' has
two inflectional 'forms', a singular and a plural.
Some languages distinguish three numbers, singular,
dual (for two objects), and plural, an instance being the
Sanskrit devah 'a god, the god, god', devāu 'the two gods,
two gods', devāh 'the gods, gods (more than two)'. An
cient Greek also had inflection for these three numbers,
and the singularplural distinction was categoric, as in
English. The distinction between dual and plural, how
ever, was not categoric; the dual, in the writings that
have come down to us, is used only of such objects as
usually exist in pairs (ōsse 'eyes', kheire 'hands', etc.) and
even there is not obligatory, occurring, indeed, less often
than the plural. The contrast, in this respect, between
Sanskrit and Greek is instructive: the categories represent
obligatory forms of expression, the element which the
different forms express being always associatively perceived
in the experience; a noncategoric distinction receives
expression only where the element involved (here, in Greek,
duality) is vivid enough to enter into the analysis in spite
of the lack of a regular habit in this direction. It accord
ingly can serve logical or esthetic impulses of the speaker;
the dual of Ancient Greek, as lovers of Greek literature
will testify, appears as one of the many graces of that
tongue, while in a Sanskrit utterance the use of the dual
is esthetically a matter of indifference. We have seen
(p. 108) that in Chinese, for instance, the expression of
the number of an objectidea is by no means obligatory,
the category of number being absent.
Gender. It has already been mentioned that English
has no categories of noungender. The genders of German
appear in the congruence of the adjectives and pronouns.
Like German Latin, Greek, Sanskrit, and the Slavic langua
COMMONEST MORPHOLOGIC CATEGORIES
143
ges have three genders. The Romance and the Scandi
navian languages have two, and some of the Bantu lan
guages of Africa go as high as twentyone, e. g. the Su
biya: here relations of number and person are viewed as
coordinate with the purely emotional genderdistinctions,
there being a category for the speaker, one for the speaker
and those with him, one for the person addressed, one for
the person addressed and those with him, one for a single
person, one for several persons, one for one small thing,
one for several small things, one for abstracts, and so on.
Case. Case appears as a category in English especially
in the personal and anaphoric pronouns, which vary accord
ing to the function of the object in the sentence: as actors
appear I, he, she, they, as objects affected by the action
of a verb or as objects with regard to which a preposition
al relation is expressed, me, him, her, them, and as attrib
utive possessors my, his, her, their. In the nouns there
is inflection for the first and third of these relations only,
and the possessive form is limited in occurrence almost
entirely to nouns denoting living beings (John: John's;
father: father's); nevertheless, the obligatory inflection
of the pronouns forces the speaker to make a constant
(categoric) distinction between these three relations.
German has four cases, the objects affected by a verb
being divided into two categories, that of objects fully
affected and that of objects less fully affected: e. g. Er
gab mir das Buch 'He gave me the book', where mir, as
object less fully affected, is in the 'dative' case, das Buch,
as object fully affected, in the 'accusative' and Er schlug
mich 'He beat me', where mich is in the accusative. The
prepositions in German also vary as to the case they de
mand: Er legte das Buch auf den Tisch 'He laid the book
on the table', den Tisch accusative: Es liegt auf dem Tische
'It is lying on the table', dem Tische, dative.
144
MORPHOLOGY
The local relations of objects which English or German
analyze fully out of the experience and express by inde
pendent words (prepositions), are in many languages in
flectionally included in the objectword, which thus varies
categorically according to them, — so that there may be
a great number of cases. Thus, in Sanskrit, devah 'god'
corresponds to our 'nominative' (J, he), devam to the Ger
man accusative, expressing the object as fully affected,
devāya to the German dative, expressing the object as
less fully affected by the action, devasya to our possessive,
'the god's'; but there are also a number of further cases:
the 'instrumental' devena expressing the object as a means
or an accompaniment ('by means of the god' or 'with
the god'), the 'ablative' devāt expressing it as that from
which ('from the god'), the 'locative' deve, as that in or
near which ('by the god' or 'in the god'); and to these
comes also a special form, the 'vocative', for interjectional
use, as in calling, deva ' 0 god'. (See also pages 76, 92).
The Latin cases have already been mentioned (p. 108).
The number of cases in some languages, especially some
of the Uralic, such as Finnish (cf. p. 108), is greater, but
the principle is everywhere the same.
Tense. We have in English two tenses of verbs, past
and present. Some European languages add a third tense,
a future, e. g. Latin canto 'I sing', cantabam 'I sang',
cantado 'I shall sing' (cf. p. 68). Future action is in Eng
lish, as the translation shows, analyzed into the independ
ent words shall or will, which express futurity with a
suggestion, respectively, of obligation or intention (in the
present time), or, else, the present tense is used: Tomorrow
we die. The category of tense is in many languages, as,
for instance, in Chinese, entirely absent as such, time
relations being expressed by independent words (p. 68).
Manner (Aspect). A much commoner basis of cate.
COMMONEST MORPHOLOGIC CATEGORIES
145
gories than tense is manner of action. It does not exist
as a morphologic category in English, where we either
ignore the manner of an action or else analytically ex
press it. Thus I am writing, I was writing are expressive
of 'durative5 action, I bave written, I had written of 'per
fectie' (completed) action, I often write, I used to write
of 'iterative' action, I wrote it down of 'final terminative',
He burst out weeping of 'inceptive terminative' action, and
I once wrote of 'punctual' action. Many languages, how
ever, express the manner of action in the same word with
the action itself, making categoric distinctions between
the different manners. Thus the Slavic languages distin
guish categorically between, on the one hand, durative
and iterative (in Slavic grammar called, together, 'imper
fective') action, e. g. Russian [p'i 'sa:t'] 'to write' and
['p'i' sï vet'] 'to be wont to write, to write repeatedly',
and, on the other hand, punctual and terminative action
(in Slavic grammar, together, 'perfective'), e. g. Russian
[nə p'i 'sart'] 'to write (once), to write down', [sp'i 'sa:t']
'to write off', i. e. 'to copy', [pr'i p'i 'sat'] 'to write over',
i. e. 'to sign away'.
Voice. Another set of categories not found in English
are the voices or conjugations, such as 'active', 'middle',
'passive', 'causative', 'applicative', and the like. Thus, in
Latin amat, active voice, is 'he loves', amātur passive voice,
'he is loved, is being loved', or in Greek élyse 'he freed'
is active, elythē 'he was freed' is passive (actor as suffer
ing the action), and elysato 'he freed himself' or 'he freed
for himself' (e. g. elysato tēn thygatéra 'Hefreedforhimself
the daughter', i. e. 'He freed his — own — daughter')
is middle (actor as acting upon himself or for himself).
In Sanskrit the active voice shows the following 'con
jugations': pαtati, normal, 'he falls'; poZtαyati, causative,
'he causes to fall, fells', pāpatlti, intensive, 'he falls hard'
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
146
MORPHOLOGY
or 'he falls repeatedly'; pipatisati, desiderative, 'he wishes
to fall' or 'he is about to fall'. Middle and passive forms
run parallel to the active; thus the passive of the above
causative is pātyate 'he is being felled, he is felled'; cf.
further, yαjati 'he sacrifices' (used of the priest who
sacrifices in another's behalf) active, yαjate 'he sacrifices
(for himself)' middle, and ijyαte 'he (it) is being sacrificed'
passive, all three being of normal conjugation. In both
Greek and Sanskrit middle and passive are in a large
part of the forms homonymous; in Modern Greek there
is no middle voice.
The applicative conjugation is frequent in American
languages; it expresses the action as applying to some
person or thing that would not be involved, were the
actionword used in normal conjugation. Thus in Na
hwatl the normal nipetlatsiwa 'Imatmake', i. e. 'I make
mats' or niktshva 'Iitmake', i. . 'I make it' (as in
niktsiiva se kaXi 'Iitmake one house', i. e. 'I build a
house') has by its side an applicative niktsiwilia, as in
niktsiwilia in nopiltsin se kaXi 'Iitmakefor the my
son one house', i. e. 'I build a house for my son', with
two objects affected instead of one. The applicative, in
applying an action normally without objects affected to
such an object, often coincides in meaning with the caus
ative of Sanskrit, as in nimiki 'Idie', nikmiktia 'I
make him die, kill him'. As the English translations
show, we lack these categories, looking upon the various
forms of action either as upon totally different experiences
(die: kill), giving them an indifferent derivational' ex
pression (fall: fell), or analyzing the relation (sacrifices:
sacrifices for himself: is sacrificed, etc.).
Mode. One verb keeps alive in standard English a
categoric distinction of mode, namely the verb to be. In
he were, as opposed to the actual or 'indicative' he is,
COMMONEST MORPHOLOGIC CATEGORIES
147
he was, we have an 'unreal' mode, and, as it is not stand
ard English to say, for instance, If he was here, he would
help us, we may call the distinction of mode categoric.
Those dialectic ('illiterate') forms of English which do
not use the form he were have lost this category: in them
the 'past' tenseforms are expressive not specifically of
action in the past, but of any action not present, be it
past or viewed as unreal; they have a present and a past
unreal form, merging what are in standard English the
categories of mode and tense. In older and still to some
extent in literary English a third mode, an 'optative',
also' exists, and is used to express action as possible. It
is homonymous with the infinitive, from which it differs
by the precedence of a subjectactor: If he be there, Be
he live or be he dead, as opposed to he is, he were.
In Ancient Greek three modes were categorically
distinguished. An action viewed as really occurring was
in the indicative: phérei 'he carries', tonto gígnetai 'this
happens', while actions not so viewed fell, by a categoric
distinction, which, however, was in part merged with
congruencerelations of tense, into the 'subjunctive' : hina
pherēi 'sothat hemaycarry', phobeitai me touio genetai
'hefears that this mayhappen', or into the optative: phéroi
αn 'he might carry', ei toūto génoito 'if this shouldhappen'.
The English translation shows how we analyze such
modal relations by means of words like may, can, should.
German also has three modes, an indicative: Er ist kranJc
'He is sick', an optative: Er gehe 'Let him go', Man
sagte, er sei krank 'They said he was sick', and an unreal:
Wenn er krank wäre 'If he were sick'; German grammars
call the last two the 'first' or 'present' and 'second' or
'past' subjunctive.
Both Ancient Greek and German have, like many other
languages, a special set of imperative forms for inter
148
MORPHOLOGY
jectional use of the verh in commands: German geh! 'go*,
Ancient Greek phére 'carry', pheretō 'let him carry', where
the English equivalent is either the infinitive form or,
for the third person, the infinitive of the verb let which
directs the command, by an analysis of the situation, at
the person spoken to.
Actor. We have seen that the English verb varies in
form according to the person and number of the actor.
The variation according to number (The boy skates, The
boys skate) is properly a phenomenon of congruence with
the numbercategory of the noun or pronoun expressing
the subjectactor. The same may be said of the variation
according to person (I am, you are, he is), although there
can hardly be said to exist a categoric system of 'persons'
in nouns and pronouns, since there is only one first
person pronoun (J, we), and only one for the second
person (you): the 'person' of these words is simply their
content as words.
In some other languages, as we have seen (p. 107),
words expressing action really include personalanaphoric
mention of the actor. Thus Latin verbforms such as
edo 'Ieat', edis 'youeat', edit 'he (she, it)eats', edimus
'weeat', etc., do not vary in mere congruence with cat
egories of an actor, but actually include mention of the
actor, who may not in any other way be expressed. The
Latin verb, then, expresses not only an action, but an
actor and an action, and just as it has categoric variation
according to tense, mode, and voice of the action, it also
varies categorically according to number and person of
the actor.
Goal (Object affected). In other languages the action
word includes the objects or object affected by an action,
or these together with an actor. This phenomenon is
known as 'incorporation'. Here the actionword may, of
COMMONEST MORPHOLOGIC CATEGORIES
149
course, be inflected for person and number of the object
affected. We have already seen such forms from Green
landish (p. 104) and from Nahwatl (p. 135). The follow
ing forms from the latter language will further illustrate
this inflection:
nimitsmatštia 'Itheeteach', 'I teach thee',
nametsmatštia 'Iyeteach', 'I teach ye',
nikmatštia 'Ihimteach', 'I teach him',
nikinmatštia 'Ithemteach', 'I teach them',
tinetsmatštia 'thoumeteachest', 'thou teach est me',
titetsmatštia 'thouusteachest', 'thou teachest us',
tikmatštia 'thouhimteachest', 'thou teachest him',
tikinmatštia 'thouthemteachest', 'thou teachest
them',
netsmatštia 'meteaches', 'he teaches me',
and so on. Two objects affected are seen in nitetlamaka
'Isomeonesomethinggive', 'I give someone something',
niktlamaka 'Ihimsomethinggive', 'I give him some
thing', nikmaka 'I give it to him'. Here we see a three
fold inflection: for actor and for two objects affected.
Possessor. With objectwords the person, number, and
even gender of another attributive object may be expressed
(p. 107, with example from modern Arabic), and this ex
pression may be categoric. In Nahwatl, for instance, one
cannot say 'mother' or 'hand' without expressing an at
tributive (possessing) object, as in nonan 'naymother'
or toma 'ourhand'; one can also say te 'someone's,
an uncertain person's mother'. In some languages this
applies to every objectword, so that one cannot say, for
instance, 'house', but only 'my house', 'hishouse', 'an
uncertainperson'shouse', or the like.
An interesting phenomenon found in some languages
is the fusion of the categories of possessor of an object
with those of performer of an action. In the language
150
MORPHOLOGY
of the extinct Lules in South America, for instance, the
following showed parallel inflection:
umues my mother
amaitsis I love
umuetse thy mother
amaitsitse thou lovest
umuep his mother
amaitsip he loves.
No English translation, of course, could do justice to
this complete merging of what we analyze as two entirely
different relations. In other languages the possessor of
an object is fused with the object affected by an action;
thus in Grreenlandish these and the actor also are in part
expressed alike:
'househis', 'his house',
'thy house' show the same inflectional endings as
[tusaRpat] 'soundinghisthine', i. e. 'thou hearest him'.
All this illustrates the vast divergence as to the semantic
character of inflection.
10. The semantic nature of derivation. When the
relation between words of a phoneticsemantic class is
not a difference of category, we call it derivation (p. 141);
thus the relation between flame, flash, flare, etc. or be
tween bull, bullock, we have seen, is derivation. In such
instances as the latter it is frequently said that the longer
word is 'derived' from the shorter, or a 'derivative' of
it. This mode of expression is permissible, as long as
one does not allow it to affect one's view as to the his
torical priority: historically it is quite possible in such
cases that the longer word existed before the shorter
one, which then, in reality, may have been derived from
the longer.
As to the semantic values of derivation, it is impos
sible to set limits, or even to quote, as in the case of in
flection, some of the commoner relations expressed. Al
most any material relation may be expressed by it. The
following sets of derivatives may illustrate this multi
plicity:
THE SEMANTIC NATURE OF DERIVATION
151
English flame, flash, flare, flimmer, flicker.
English drip, drop, droop, dribble, drabble.
English clash, crash, dash, flash, gash, gnash, hash, lash,
mash, plash, slash, splash.
English dribble, nibble, quibble.
English tend, tense, tension, tensity, tenseness, intense,
intensive, intensity, intend, intent, attend, attention, inatten
tion, attentive, inattentive, etc. No doubt tend is moreover
associated, for most of us, with trend.
From the Nass dialect of Tsimshian (British Columbia):
[haliĭe:] 'to walk along the edge of the water', [wi : ts ? hĭe:]
'to walk back through the house', [aldaie:] 'to walk in
the dark', and so on.
Crossing this class: [aldawa:ç] 'to paddle in the night',
[aldaĭe:] 'to walk in the dark'.
11. The phonetic character of the morphologic
processes. The formal phase of morphology includes
every conceivable phonetic variation.
This phonetic variation is to be sharply distinguished
from automatic soundvariation. Whether we say [ju] as
in Will you? or [Ju] as in Won't you? [wiljn, wownt∫b],
has nothing to do with our meaning (and is therefore of
no grammatical significance) but depends entirely on the
nature of the sound we have been uttering when we come
to the you. The same is true, for instance, of the Sanskrit
sandhivariations (p. 102). On the other hand, whether we
say dash or mash or plash or splash, and whether a Ger
man says der, die, or das, and an Irishman bó, vó, or mó,
is of decided significance. In these English words the
material content varies with the difference of form; in
the German and the Irish the morphologic category of
other words is involved.
Pitchvariation. Pitchvariation for derivation can occur,
of course, only where the pitchrelations within a word
152
MORPHOLOGY
are fixed. It is found, for instance in Norwegian and
Swedish; thus in the former language: ['skri: ver/] 'write,
writes' (presenttense form of yerb): ['skri:\ /] writer'.
In Chinese there are a great many words distinguished
only by their pitchrelations, and in some instances such
words are derivationally connected in the feeling of the
speakers, e. g.
'difficult' and
'suffer',
'buy' and
'sell'.
Stressvariation. The place of the stress in a word is in Eng
lish significant and consequently can be used for morpho
logic soundyariation. As the quality of certain vowels fur
ther depends automatically in English on the place of the
stress, the following examples illustrate both morphologic
: yerb
and automatic soundyariation: accent, noun
[ə 'sent]; — address, noun
or
: verb [
'djes]; — overthrow, noun
verb
'the hands':
'of
Similarly, in Russian:
the hand'; —
) 'I recognize': [u 'znα ju] 'I shall
recognize'. Place of stress is interesting in Ancient Greek:
in the verb it varies automatically and cannot, therefore,
be of morphologic significance; in the other parts of speech
it is free and receives morphologic employment, e. g. in
tomos 'slice': tomós 'cutter'.
Variation of articulations. Vowelvariation is common
in English morphologic expression: goose: geese; man:
men; foot: feet; mouse: mice; woman [wumə n]: women
[wimen]; eat: ate; see: saw; sing: sang: sung: song; ride:
: read, past tense
; sip:
rode; read, present tense
sop: sup: seep: sap; drip: drop: droop; sniff: snuff; snip:
snap, — and so on. The terms 'umlaut' and 'ablaut' are
used in the grammar of English and the related languages
as designations for certain cases of vowelvariation: 'um
laut' for our vowelvariation for number in the noun (mouse:
PHON. CHARACTER OF MORPHOL. PROCESSES
153
mice) , 'ablaut' for that in the tenseinflection of the verb
(sing: sang).
Consonant variation also is common in English; we
have seen it in our example of clash: crash: dash: flash, etc.;
also in the Irish bó: vó: ó and the like. Further Eng
lish examples are have: has: had; crash: crack; squeak:
squeal; squaivk: squall; bend: bent; send: sent. Another
example is the Kafir word for 'all' which varies in con
gruence with the gender — the Kafir is a Bantu lan
guage, cf. p. 143, — of the word it modifies: bonke: lonke:
yonke: zonke: wonke: konke.
It is common to find soundvariation in both conso
nants and vowels, as in flame: flash; crash: creak; was:
were; will: would [wud]; can: could; German schneiden
'to cut'
schnitten 'were cutting'
and
the like.
Affixation. Somewhat different from soundvariation is
the plus or minus of sounds seen in such groups of words
as sing: sings: singer: singing or man: manly or bull:
bullock. This kind of wordvariation is called affixation,
the phonetic element that is common to a set of words
related by affixation being spoken of as the kernel, the
elements present or absent in the different words, as the
affixes. Thus in the first group among our instances sing
is the kernel and s [z], er, and ing are affixes. Here
again our terminology is metaphoric: there is no reason
to believe that the longer words of a group related by
affixation necessarily arose from the shortest word by
any actual process of 'affixing' or adding phonetic elements:
that is a question of historic fact which is not answered
by our use of the terms 'affix' and 'affixation'. Instead
of 'affix' the terms 'determinative', 'formative', and 'for
mans' are current in certain branches of grammar; and
154
MORPHOLOGY
the kernels of certain wordgroups in certain languages
are called 'bases', 'stems', and 'roots' 1 ).
The difference between soundvariation and affixation
is not an absolute one, but depends frequently on our
point of view. We might call Latin amas 'thou lovest':
amat 'he loves' an example of soundvariation; if, however,
we take into view some other forms of this verb, such
as amo 'I love', amāvit 'he loved', amētur 'he may be loved',
it is possible to call them all related by affixation, the
kernel being am, the affixes in the quoted forms, ās, at,
o, āvit, ēt . In this instance the group does not contain
a word that equals the kernel, or, as we might say, has
'affix zero', — a condition fulfilled by the first of the
quoted forms in the example of English sing: sings, etc.
An English group like flash: flame: flare: flicker might
be regarded as an example either of soundvariation or
of affixation to a kernel ft.
In all these examples the affix appears at the end of
the word and is, specifically, a suffix or ending. Other
examples of suffixation are the German articleforms der:
die: das (with kernel d), English bull: bullock; man: man's:
manly: mannish; boy: boys: boyish, and so on.
Prefixation borders, like suffixation, on soundvariation:
thus the forms of the Kafir word for 'all', bonke: lonke:
1) As to the last of these terms, it may be well to warn the
reader against attributing to it any mystical character. Fifty
years ago most students of language believed that the kernels
they had abstracted from some of the ancient languages possessed
a unique validity and age: that, in fact, they or their like were
the original elements with which language had begun and out
of which its more elaborate forms were pieced together. Today
we mean by all the above terms simply certain phonetic ele
ments common to sets of formationally related words, and do
not allow our terminology to commit us to any view as to the
histoiic origin of these related words.
PHON. CHARACTER OF MORPHOL. PROCESSES
155
yonke: zonke: wonke: konke are often spoken of as a kernel
nke with different prefixes, — owing to certain morpho
logic features which prevail in the language. Other ex
amples of prefixation are, from the English, hind: unkind;
speak: bespcak; septic: aseptic, and the like. Plash: splash;
mash: smash; lash: slash, and the like may be viewed
as soundvariation or as prefixation, — the former be
cause the initial group of s plus consonant is exceedingly
frequent in the language.
Infixation is affixation within the word. We may view
Latin amat 'he, she, it loves': amant 'they love' as infixa
tion, the kernel being amat, the infix, n; on the other hand,
if we include in consideration the abovequoted forms
amo 'I love', amāvit 'he loved', amētur 'he may be loved',
and so on, we shall speak rather of suffixation of at, ant,
, etc. to a kernel am. Less pliable examples of infixation
are English clap: clamp and Latin fidit 'he split': findit
'he splits', scidit 'he rent': scindit 'he rends'. Another
example of affixation may be seen in Sanskrit, e. g. in
yuktαh 'yoked, bound': yunktalh 'theytwo yoke, bind':
yunakti 'he (she, it) yokes, binds' ; the kernel of the word
group to which these forms belong is here seen as yuk,
with the suffixes ~tah and ti and the infix na: n.
These Sanskrit forms illustrate also the phenomenon
of automatic soundvariation in affixes. The infix is here
na when accented, but n when unaccented, — a varia
tion by no means universal in the Sanskrit language. We
have a few similar instances in English, where, for in
stance, our pluralsuffix of nouns, our possessive suffix
of nouns, and our thirdperson singular congruencesuffix
of verbs all have a homonymous form which appears as
[ə z] after sibilants, as [z] after nonsibilant voiced sounds,
and as [s] after nonsibilant unvoiced sounds:
plurals: watches, peaches, — boys, fathers, — hats, cliffs;
156
MORPHOLOGY
possessives : boss's, Madge's, — John's, father's, — counf'y
Pete's;
thirdperson verbs: watches, dances, — loves, hears, —
waits, counts.
Yet the language as a whole cannot be said to have such
an automatic soundvariation as this: the automatic va
riation is peculiar to these suffixes.
Affixation may of course be accompanied by morpho
logic soundvariation; instances are the German will'wants
to': wollen 'want to' (suffix en, with vowelvariation i: o);
English child: children (suffix ren with vowelvariation
[aë]: [i]); or the different affixational processes may occur
together, as in Ancient Greek lambαno 'I take': élubon
'I took' (kernel lab, prefix e, infix m, suffixesawō and
on; the shifting of the accent is here automatic).
Reduplication. A peculiar kind of affixation is redupli
cation, which consists of the repetition of the whole word
or some part of it. Examples are Malay tuwan 'master':
tuwuntuwan 'masters'; Latin quis 'who?': quisquis 'whoev
er'; Sanskrit bharti 'he carries': bharībharti 'he carries
hither and thither' (reduplication with infixed ); Latin
tendit 'he stretches': tetendit 'he stretched'. Reduplication
is often irregular, approaching the other forms of affixation,
e. g., connected with the above Sanskrit bharti a form
jabhāra [jabhaira] 'he carried' (kernel -bh-r-, prefix or
irregular reduplication ja-, vowelvariation a: ā, suf
fixes -ti and a); Latin pello 'I drive': pepull 'I drove'
(reduplication with soundvariation and different suffixes).
The boundary between reduplication and the other forms
of affixation is thus not a sharp one: English do: did
could be looked upon as an example of either process.
It is noteworthy that reduplication is confined to cer
tain narrow spheres of meaning. It often denotes increase,
changing, for instance, words in the singular number to
PEON. CHARACTER OF MORPHOL. PROCESSES 157
plurals of different kinds, as in our instance of the Malay
tuwantuwan 'masters'. Other examples are Japanesejama
jama 'mountains' (jama 'mountain'); Nahwatl in tsatsan
ojajake '(into) the hishouses theyeachwent', i. e. 'They
went each into his house', as opposed to in tsan ojake
'they went (together) into their (one) house'; okcitspil
'little man', plural okitšpipil 'little men'; Tsimshian [aljix]
'to speak', [ə l?aljix] 'to speak, of several people'; [Gap]
'tree', [GanGran] 'trees'. It may further denote repetition,
continuity, or intensity: Latin quisquís 'whowho', i. e.
'everytime who', 'whoever'; Sanskrit damedame 'in every
house', as opposed to dame 'in the house' : Greek ébēn 'I
stepped': ē 'I made repeated steps, walked'; Sanskrit
bharībharti 'he carries hither and thither'; Nahwatl ktōna
'cut': kōkotōna 'cut in many pieces': kokotōna 'cut many
things' ; English snip-snap, fiddle-faddle, slip-slop, flip-flop.
Occasionally it has diminutive sense, as in these English
examples, where, for instance, flip-flop expresses a less
violent movement than flop; the same is true in Dayak
(a Malayan language of Borneo) of hai 'large': haliai
'fairly large'; handang 'red': hahandang 'reddish'. Desire
for an action as opposed to the action itself we see in
Sanskrit jīvāmi 'I live': jijīvišāmi 'I desire to live'; vidmah 'we know': vivitsati or vividisati 'he wishes to learn',
compare also page 146. Finally, it expresses perfectie
action, as in the Greek léloipa 'I have left' as opposed to
the durative leípo 'I am leaving', and, rarely, but in this
use familiar to us from Latin, it expresses past tense:
Sanskrit jabhāra 'he carried', Latin tetendit 'he stretched',
pepulit 'he drove'.
Homomorphy and suppletion One and the same se
mantic relation between two words, — such as in Eng
lish the difference of present and past tense, — may find
expression in the most various formal processes. Thus in
158
MORPHOLOGY
the presentpast inflection of the English verb we find
suffixation (dance: danced), vowelvariation (sing: sang),
consonantvariation (send: sent), and so on. We saw in
paragraph 5 that all words making a given inflection in
the same formal way fall into a class by phoneticsemantic
parallelism. Thus our 'regular' verbs with the suffix ed
for the past form a large class, as do also our different
groups of 'irregular' verbs. The same can be said of the
pluralinflection of our nouns.
Among the small 'irregular' classes so singled off, the
formal relation between inflections may be that of iden
tity. This phenomenon is called homonymy or, more
specifically, homomorphy. For instance, among the Eng
lish verbs there are a few which are alike in the two
tenses: cost, hit, beat, put, let These unchanging verbs are,
however, so much in the minority that we do not ordina
rily realize that their present and past tenses are alike.
The identity of the two forms constitutes simply an irreg
ular kind of inflection, owing to the vast preponderance
of verbs that do vary. In the nouninflection homomorphy
is seen in deer, sheep, fish.
The opposite of homomorphy is siippletion, which con
sists of the entire absence of phonetic relation in some
few members of a large class by semantic parallelism;
that is, where the whole class is so numerous that in the
few cases where the 'forms' are not formally related, we
still feel that they belong together. Among the English
verbs, for instance, we find the inflectional forms be, am,
are, is, was, were which in spite of complete dissimilarity
belong together by parallelism with the other verbs. An
other example is go: went (p. 139, f.). In the forms of the
adjective we have, beside the regular type, "kind: kinder:
kindest, the suppletive sets good: better: bed, bad: worse:
worst Similarly, in the relation between adjective and
WORDCOMPOSITION: SEMANTIC VALUE
159
derived adverb, beside the regular kind: kindly, rapid:
rapidly, etc., the suppletive good: well, and in that between
cardinal numeral and ordinal numeral, beside the regular
four: fourth, six: sixth, etc., and the irregular three: third,
five: fifth, also the suppletive one: first, two: second. Supple
tion is found, as a rule, in very common words, and irregu
larity also, though in a far less degree, tends to confine
itself to these.
12. Wordcomposition: semantic value. In para
graph 7 I mentioned the relation of compounds to each
other and to simple words as the most explicit expression
of morphologic classification.
Wordcomposition consists of the use of two or more
words in a combination that has a different meaning from
that of the simple words in syntactic collocation. This
may be illustrated by a few transparent Erglish examples.
Our word longnose, as in I can't stand that longnose (mean
ing a person) differs from a long nose, for it means not
a nose of this shape, but a person having such a nose.
Shorthand does not mean what the words short hand as
separate successive words in syntactic collocation would
mean, but, instead, is used of a certain kind of writing.
A different kind of deviation from the meaning of inde
pendent words appears in bulldog. This compound, to be
sure, does designate a dog: but bull, a noun, could not in
English syntactic collocation, modify another following
noun, such as dog (p. 96).
The problem of in any way classifying compounds is
an exceedingly difficult one, because the material and log
ical relations between the 'members' of compounds are,
even within one and the same language, often wellnigh
endless in variety. Perhaps the most justifiable basis of
classification is that which distinguishes compounds which
in form resemble a syntactic wordgroup and those which
160
MORPHOLOGY
do not. By this classification longnose, shorthand, crows
foot, manofwar, for instance, would belong to the former
class, for, though diverging in meaning, these compounds
externally resemble such collocations as long nose, short
hand, crow's foot, man of war (as opposed to man of peace).
To the second class would belong bulldog, appletree, sofa
cushion, and the like, which do not resemble syntactic
groups. The compounds of the latter class can further be
divided according to whether they describe an actually
present feature of the experience, like appletree, or, like
bulldog, express merely an associative element entering
from past experiences: the apples are perhaps visible on
the tree, but the dog merely reminds one of a bull.
While the specific values of compounds as opposed to
collocations of simple words vary greatly even within a
single language, yet, when we look at other languages,
we find that each one has certain limitations. As an instance
of a kind of composition not found in English, the follow
ing Nahwatl examples may serve: simple words, nakatl
'meat' (or Tt is meat') and nikkiva 'I eat it': compound,
nindkakica 'Irneateat'; in English we form no verbal
compounds of this type, though we freely parallel them
in our nouns, such as meateater. A further example from
Nahwatl is nisotsitemoa 'I seek flowers': simple words,
sotsitl 'flower' and niktemoa 'I seek it'. These Nahwatl
compounds differ from simple words, in that the simple
words can always express a predication apiece: nikkwa
nakati can mean 'I eat it. It is meat'
The following Sanskrit compounds, called in the grammar
of that language 'copulative', would also be impossible
in English: vrlhih 'rice', yavah 'barley' (both in the nom
inative case, singular number): vrīhiyavāu 'rice and bar
ley' (nominative case, dual number), as though we should
say 'ricebarleys' for 'rice and barley'. This Sanskrit
WORDCOMPOSITION: SEMANTIC YALUE
161
compound differs from a syntactic collocation in that the
case and number are expressed not for each member sep
arately, but only once, at the end, as in any simple word;
this gives a tone of unity to the whole. Other examples
of this type are :
nominative
plural, 'brahmans, kshatriyas, vaiçyas, and çudras' (men
of the four castes); or
'round',pïnah 'plump': vrtta
pīnah 'round and plump',
In Chinese
, as we have seen (p. 86), means
'brother, brothers'; a syntactic collocation of the two
words
'older brother' and
'younger brother',
if it occurred at all, could mean only 'younger brother
of an older brother'. This differs from anything we have
in English; it would correspond to a compound brothersister in the meaning of 'brother or sister', 'child of the
sameparents'. Similarly
as a syntactic collo
cation would mean 'ten fours' (compare, for instance
'four tens', 'forty'), but it is really a compound,
'tenfour', meaning 'fourteen'.
We may illustrate now some of the varieties of com
pounds used in English. Most strikingly different from
the simple words in syntactic succession are the socalled
'exocentric' compounds, which denote an object having
the thing named in the compound, as long-nose, shorthorn, swallow-tail. Similar to these are the forms longnosed, short-horned, swallow-tailed, rough-shod; these are
in total effect nearer the simple words (compare, for in
stance, tailed monkeys), but still, in their use of adjective
modifying adjective differ from a collocation of words,
where we use adverbs to modify adjectives (roughly shod).
The compounds consisting of two nouns have already
been mentioned. We may name such further examples
as dog-pound, dust-rag, schoolroom, headache, summerbouse, man-nurse. The semantic relation between the
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
162
MORPHOLOGY
parts is, it appears, of practically unlimited variety. We
have mentioned also the type in which an object affected
by an action and the actor or instrument (in the form
of a verbal noun) are joined together: meateater, lion
tamer, tennisplayer, screwdriver, coathanger.
13. Wordcomposition not a phonetic process. It
will be noticed that nothing has here been said about
any formal difference between compounds and syntactic
collocations. If we recall the fact that the word, — and,
therefore, by inclusion, also the compound word, — is
not a phonetic unit (p. 99), it will be clear that there
need not necessarily be a phonetic difference between a
compound and a succession of words. The difference be
tween a single word, simple or compound, and a .succes
sion of words lies in the semantic value and not in the
sounds. Not even the stressaccent of a language like
English or German necessarily distinguishes a compound
from a succession of words. This is especially clear in
German, where such compounds as durchmessen 'to mea
sure through, to cross' [durç 'm&sn] do not differ in ac
cent from such collocations as sich messen 'to vie, to
measure oneself' [ziç 'mssn]. In English we have the
same similarity under certain conditions of stress, thus
my mother with an emphatic my, resembles in stressre
lations the compounds godmother, grandmother, and simi
larly mother of mine resembles motherinlaw.
Furthermore, a compound need not be phonetically
continuous. In Latin nē quidem 'not even' is a compound
word which may be separated, as in ne Caesar quidem
'not even Caesar'. Similarly, in German, wenngleich 'even
if', as in Wenn ich gleich schreie 'Even if I cry', and a great
many compound verbs like vorlesen 'to read aloud', as in
Ich les' ihm jeden Abend vor 'I read to him every evening'.
In French we find such compound words as ne pas 'not'
WORDCOMPOSITION NOT A PHONETIC PROCESS
163
in Je ne lui donne pas. . . 'I don't give him . . ' In English
we have such verbcompounds as bring out in the sense
of 'emphasize, make clear' (the simple words appear in
collocation in Bring out your golfsticks), which are sepa
rated in such sentences as You don't bring that out very
clearly.
All this shows us that the concept of a compound,
like that of a word is not absolutely definable. Is stand
off in Stand off, there! a compound? It differs from the
ordinary use of stand, which excludes the idea of move
ment; on the other hand, in view of stand up and stand
aside we might say that stand means not only 'to be in
an upright position' but also 'to assume an upright po
sition'. (Gf. p. 97, f.). That is to say, then, the difference
between compounds and sets of simple words is, like that
between derivationally formed words and compounds
(p. 96), a matter of the speaker's associative disposition
which may vary from person to person and from hour
to hour.
While phonetic differences between compounds and
simple words are thus by no means necessary, they are,
on the other hand, not uncommon. A number of examples
deserve mention.
In English compounds usually differ in stress from
successions of simple words. In general, our syntactic
groups of simple words tend to be evenly stressed, with
a highest stress on each word, while our compounds, like
all other single words, have a high stress on one syllable,
usually the first. Thus, for instance, we distinguish
phonetically between 'bulldag and the simple words in
'bull, 'dog, and 'cat, between a 'crowsfoot and a 'crows
'foot, between a 'longnose and a 'long 'nose, and between
'bloodshed an î 'all the 'blood 'shed in the 'Civil ' War.
It is evident that in languages that have a regulated
164
MORPHOLOGY
pitch within the word, difference of pitch may figure iL
phonetic divergence between compound and simple word.
Thus in Norwegian we find land [Ian/] 'country', mand
[man/] 'man': landmand [lan\man/] 'farmer, peasant,
countryman'.
It is common also to find compounds differing in
vowel and consonant articulations from the simple words,
e. g. fore and bead, but forehead, —
German die Sonne 'the sun', genitive case der Sonne 'the
sun's', das Licht 'the light': das Sonnenlicht 'the sunlight',
with an added n. Thus Sanskrit vrïhiyavāu Vice and
barley' is in the genitive vrlhiyavayoh cof rice and barley',
where the lack of inflection of vrīhi-'rice', — a form
which, moreover, never occurs as a separate word, —
distinguishes it both semantically and in form from
vrihih 'rice5, genitive vrtheh. So malhādhanam as opposed
to mahad dhanam (p. 106). Likewise, in Ancient Greek
hylotómos means 'woodcutting (adjective)' and is inflected,
for instance in the accusative, for congruence with a noun,
hylotómon: the first element is here uninflected: as an in
dependent word, moreover, it is in the nominative
in the accusative
and in no form
The greatest divergence between simple words and
compounds appears in those languages which, owing to
an objective habit of expression, compounds are in most
frequent use (p. 104). Thus the Nahwatl compound above
quoted ni-nalia-liwa 'I eat meat' corresponds to the simple
words nalzatl 'meat, it is meat', and nikkwa 'I eat it'.
Thus, aside from the semantic divergences, there are the
following in form alone: tl in simple word is left off in
compound; ni- at beginning of simple word appears at
the beginning of the compound; k (semantically 'it')
left off in compound.
Like the English forehead (where the spelling preserves
SIMPLE WORD: COMPOUND: PHRASE
165
our feeling of connection with simple words), such Na
hwatl compounds approach the boundary where the com
pound would cease to be felt by the speaker to resemble
any simple words, and, consequently, would no longer
be a compound. This line is, of course, not sharply trace
able. Those who know the word
'sewingbag'
from speech alone will scarcely feel it to be a compound,
as will those who know it from its written form house
wife or in its 'spelling pronunciation'
14. Simple word: compound: phrase. This, then,
is the second direction in which compounds approach
simple words. On the one hand, we have seen instances
where it was doubtful whether a certain element was
merely an affix or a member of a compound word: In
fourteen, sixteen, seventeen, etc. (p. 96) the element teen
may be a suffix: in that case the words are simple; if,
however, in view of the usage in She is in her teens, teen
is an independent word, then fourteen, etc. are compounds.
Similarly, in Italian there are a number of words with
a suffix accio, accia, expressing the idea of unpleasant
ness, e. g. roba 'stuff, goods': robaccia 'trash', tempo 'weath
er': tempaccio 'nasty weather', Alfredo 'Alfred': Alfre
daccio 'naughty Alfred', vecchio 'old', 'old man': vecchiaccio
'unpleasant old man', etc. In view of the locution Quanto
siete accio! 'How unpleasant you are!' all these may, how
ever, be looked upon as compounds. On the other hand,
we now find compounds departing so widely in form from
the corresponding simple words, that the compositional or
merely formational structure is again questionable. It is, of
course, really in both eases the same phenomenon seen from
a different point of view: in cases like fourteen our feeling
inclines to take the word as simple, in those like housewife
to recognize a compound of two members: both approach
the boundary between simple words and compounds.
166
MORPHOLOGY
We have seen, also, that compounds may approach
the value of syntactic collocations, until, in cases like
bulldog (p. 97) and stand off (p. 163), we may hesitate
before the alternative of speaking of composition or of
setting up the apparent first members as independent
words.
Thus we see, in our survey of morphology, the most
varied types of expression: first, the unit word, which,
if classed at all with any other, must be suppletively
classed, in the manner of go: went; then the inflected
word, grouping itself with others that express the same
material content with a difference of category, such as
eat, eats, ate, eaten, eating; then again, the derived word,
bordering on a compound, such as unkind, fourteen; and
finally, the compound, bordering, in its turn, on a syn
tactic collocation of words.
It is with this syntactic collocation that we shall have
to do in the next chapter.
CHAPTER VI.
SYNTAX.
1. The field of syntax. Syntax studies the inter
relations of words in the sentence. These interrelations
are primarily the discursive ones of predication and at
tribution (pp. 61,110, f.), to which may be added the serial
relation (p. 113). These are modified by the emotional
dominance of individual words (p. 113, f.) and specialized
into set forms designating material relations of objects
(p. 114, f.).
Syntax cannot be sharply separated from morphology.
This is apparent when we find that it is not always pos
sible to determine what is one word, what a combination
of words. There is, however, another more essential
point of contact. To the extent in which the words of
a language include relational content, to that extent the
morphology of a language involves questions of syntax.
In an objective language, where relations are included
with the material content of every word, there is com
paratively little left to say of the syntax. The sentence,
indeed, is often a single word, as in the Nahwatl nina
w
'Imeateat': the syntax of such a sentence is, of
course, the morphology of a word. When we come to
languages like Latin or Sanskrit, in which the noun, for
instance, appears in a number of caseforms with each
its relational content (pp. 108,143 ; f.), it is the task of mor
168
SYNTAX
phology to define the values of these cases. These re
lational values must be carefully studied, before syntax,
in the strict sense, can be begun: but in defining them
we are already entering upon the interrelations of words.
The value, for example, of the dative case in Latin (p. 115)
involves the use of dativecase nouns in the sentence. In
English the syntax is more extended, for relations are
here more frequently expressed by independent words:
the dative case of Latin, for instance, often by the prep
ositions for or to (p. 115). Chinese has no inflection
and scarcely any derivation: its grammar is almost en
tirely a matter of syntax.
The forms of syntax are less fixed than those of mor
phology, because the utterance of a sentence is a more
complex process and one more easily displaced than that
of a word. In exclamation, especially, the usual syntactic
habit is often disturbed, the elements of the experience
effecting expression in other than the accustomed form.
Thus we may exclaim A rabbit — white! instead of A
white rabbit! 'Anacolouthon', the breaking off one's con
struction, is common where the emotional charge is
considerable: I wonder if he — but of course he has not
done it!
2. The discursive relations. The substratum of the
interrelation of words in a sentence is formed by the
binary discursive groupings of predication and attribution
(p. 61) and by the s e r i l grouping (p. 113). We saw in
the fourth chapter (p. 111) that these relations are not
always expressed, that in Latin, for instance, Magna
culpa could express a predication 'Great is the fault' or
an attribution 'Great fault'. The discursive relations may,
as a matter of constant habit, fail to receive Syntactic
expression. In a Latin sentence such as Cantat 'He (she)
sings' we have an actorsubject and an actionpredicate,
THE DISCURSIVE RELATIONS
169
but, as both are included in one word, the predication
does 'not receive syntactic expression, but only morpho
logic. In other languages there is no distinct expression
of predication at all. In Nahwatl piltsin means, from the
English point of view, either 'He is a son' or 'a son'
Almost every word here can be used to express a pred
ication or, especially within a larger utterance, as part
of a predication. The utterance nikmaka tlasJcalli in no
pilts in can be looked upon as 'I give it him. It is bread.
It is that one. It is my son.' or as 'I give my son bread'.
The difficulty of interpretation is due entirely to the
English idiom ; from the Nahwatl point of view there is
no difference between the two forms of expression. This
is true of many American languages: their words are
'sentencewords' (p. 64) with the power of expressing
a predication, and there is no formal indication in any
utterance as to whether a given word is or is not ex
pressing predication. This sentenceword quality, indeed,
is what gives to the Latin verb, such as canted, the
power of expressing an entire predication, both subject
and predicate. In Latin this quality is confined, however,
to the verb. In contrast with this is English, in which
no word can, by itself, express a whole predication: not
even our verb, for it, unlike the Latin verb, does not
include an actorsubject; we cannot say Sings, but only
He sings, She sings.
Thus we may, by contrasting two such languages as
Nahwatl and English, see the different degrees of rec
ognition which the discursive relations may receive. In
Nahwatl predication is formally a matter of indifference:
any word may express it or not, and the Aztec speaker
does not need to decide whether it is doing so or not.
In English at least two words are needed to express a
predication: a subject and a predicate. The subject must
170
SYNTAX
be a word of the noun or pronoun class, and the pred
icate must be a verb. Verbs, moreover, except for one
special form, the infinitive, always constitute a predicate,
and such a predicate is not permitted to appear without
a subject. In short, predication is precisely defined and
serves as the basis of our wordclassification (parts of
speech) and of our sentencestructure.
In viewing such phenomena as these one must guard
against confusing a sentenceequivalent with a sentence.
If one asks, in English, Did he bring it? and gets the
answer Yes, this answer is in communicative value equal
to a predication, He brought it. Linguistically, however,
it is not a sentence, but only a sentenceequivalent. If
one asks What are you doing? and receives the answer
Writing, this is in communicative content equal to a
sentence, I am writing, but as language it is only a
word, not an utterance presenting discursive relations.
3. The emotional relations. The emotional sub
stratum of sentences is to some extent independent of
these discursive relations. The different elements in a
sentence usually vary as to the place they hold in the
emotional interest of the speaker; in the whole sentence
there is often unity in that some one element markedly
exceeds the others in emotional value. The natural ex
pression for these relations seems to be greater stress
(loudness) for the more highly charged words (p. 50);
this seems to be a universal habit among languages,
though the exact degree of stressdifferences varies. We
can imagine a sequence of words spoken with varying
distribution of emotional value, for instance in opposition
to a series of contrary propositions: the dominant ele
ment will in each case receive highest stress (pp. 50,
113) e. g.: To'day is my birthday. Today 'is my birthday,
Today is 'my birthday, Today is my 'birthday. There may
MATERIAL RELATIONS
171
be two dominant elements: To'day is 'my birthday (and
tomorrow is my mother s). In languages that express more
than one semantic element in one word, different parts
of a word may be thus stressed. Even in English, with
our rigid stressaccent on certain syllables, we can speak
not only of 'bulldogs and 'lapdogs, but also of bull'dogs
and hull'frogs. This may be more pronounced where
more semantic elements are included in one word, thus
in Mesquaki (one of the Algonquian languages) ['wo ba
mi nu] 'Loolc at me', [wo ba 'mi nu] 'Look at me\ [wo ba
mi 'nu] 'You look at mo'.
Differences of wordorder, also, may be used to express
the emotional relations. 'Julius loves Julia' is in Latin
Jūlius Jūliam amat, but 'Julius loves Julia' is Jūliam
amat Jūlius. This appears to some extent also in Eng
lish, as in the contrast between I bought a hat yesterday
and Yesterday I bought a hat, He came last and Last came
he. Where the wordorder is not free, a similar effect
can be obtained by altering the logical structure of the
sentence (p. 114), e. g. It is Julia whom Julius loves. In
the Celtic languages and in French this mode of expres
sion is very common; we may recall its use in Irish
English.
4. Material relations. Another factor entering into
the syntactic structure of the sentence is the perceptual
content. Certain wordsequences or types of wordsequen
ces become habitual as the expression for certain rela
tions of the objects of the perceptual world; thus in
English we have studied the peculiar construction of
words designating spatial relations (prepositions) with
words denoting the object with regard to which the re
lation holds true (p. 116). I shall not here recall the
instances that have been given of such syntactic forms
(pp. 114, ff.), but shall speak in greater detail of only one
172
SYNTAX
of these, the relation of actor and action, which in
English has been identified with that of subject and
predicate.
This generalization is not in accord with experience, for
actually a sentence may not express an action, as does
He ate an apple, but an equation, e. g.: That tall man is
my father, a subsumption: The whale is a mammal, the
assigning of a quality: The peasant is poor, a condition:
He is sleeping, or the process of undergoing something:
He sees; He is getting drenched, and so on. These differ
ences of material content are not given expression in
the English sentence: in English and many of the related
languages the sentencetype of action has been generalized.
As a French scholar has said, these languages present
the sentence in the form of a little drama in which the
subject is always acting.1)
In Russian the sentencestructure is in part the same
as in English, but the actiontype has not been so com
pletely generalized; the assignment of a quality still has
a different form: [ m u ' 3 i / b ' e ' d'in] 'peasant poor', 'The
peasant is poor'. This form of locution would be im
possible in English, because we cannot express predi
cation except as an action, by means of a verb, — in
this case the abstract verb is, whose actual content is
only that of predication, put into the form of an action,
and by the speaker felt as such. Latin allows in these
cases of both types expression: Magna culpa or Magna
est culpa.
All three of these languages, English, Russian, and
Latin, express as an action by the subject sentencecon
tents in which the subject is actually undergoing,some
thing. They view the undergoing process directly as an
1) M. Bréal, Essai de Sémantique4, p. 86.
MATERIAL RELATIONS
173
action, as, for instance, in saying He sees instead of
'Lightvibrations strike him'. In part they use special
expressions which reverse the occurrence; for this Latin
has a special voice, the passive (p. 145). Amātur 'He
is being loved, is loved', for instance, represents the sub
ject as actor of a verb, the content of which is 'to be
the object of affection'. Russian uses for such sentences
a manner of expression 'frequent in languages of our type;
it represents the subject as acting upon itself, when, re
ally, other actors are acting upon it, e. g. [g 'zs ta t∫'i
'ta' ji tsa] 'The newspaper readsitself, 'The newspaper
is being read, is read'. Similarly in French: Cela se
raconte partout 'That itself tells every where', 'That is be
ing told everywhere'. In English we use a circumlocution
which represents the actor as being (cf. above) in the
condition of being acted upon: It is being read, It is read,
He is getting drenched, exactly like He is being impudent,
He is poor, He is getting old. This form of expression
occurs also in French: IL est aimé de tous 'He is loved
by all', like Il est bon 'He is good'. German uses a cir
cumlocution with the word 'becomes', e. g. Das Lied
wurde gesungen 'The song became sung', i. e. 'The song
was sung', exactly like Es wurde halt 'It became cold';
so also in Scandinavian (which also has a real passive,
comparable to the Latin, in restricted use), e. g. Nor
wegian Sangen blev sunget 'The song was sung', like Det
blev koldt 'It grew cold'.
The distinction between an action performed by the
subject and a sensational process undergone by it finds
expression, inconsistently, — as is always the case in
linguistic expression of such distinctions, — in Georgian.
There, as we have seen (p. 110), we find the contrast of
[vt ? ser] 'Iwrite' and [mesmis] 'me tosoundis', i. e.
'I hear'.
174
SYNTAX
Just as in English we generalize the type of occurrence
in which the subject is performing an action, so some
languages generalize that in which there is assigned to
the subject some quality or condition. So, for instance,
in the language of the Wolof in western Africa one says
sopa 'lovinghe', 'He loves' just as one says
'goodhe', 'He is good': the action of loving is expressed
as a predicate of exactly the same kind as the quality of
goodness.
In still other languages the occurrence in which the
subject undergoes an action is generalized (p. 110), and
one says, for instance, not 'I kill him' but 'He dies for
me'; so in Greenlandish, not only [tusaRpa:] 'Sounding
itshis', i. e. 'There is sounding of it to him', 'He hears
it', but also [tikipia:] 'Reachingitshis', 'There is reach
ing of it to him', 'He reaches it' or [qajatoRlune]
'Boatusinginhis', that is 'It was when he used his
boat'.
As these translations show, Greenlandish illustrates
another generalization as well: it expresses all these oc
currences as statements of possession. Thus [tusaRpa;]
'soundingitshis' and [tikipia:] 'reachingitshis' are
parallel to [il:ua] 'househis', 'his house'; and [qaja
toRlune] is parallel to [il:une] 'househis (own)', 'his
(own) house'. The same generalization of a possessive
sentencetype we saw (p. 150) in the language of the
Lules, where one said amaitsis 'lovemy', 'I love', amait
sip 'lovehis', 'he loves', exactly as one said umues
'mothermy', amuep 'motherhis'.
5. Syntactic categories. We may thus contrast sever
al languages as to the freedom or rigidness of their
sentencestructure. As opposed to English, for instance,
Russian and Georgian are comparatively liberal, in allow
ing of two sentencetypes. In English the emotional re
SYNTACTIC CATEGORIES
175
lations receive free expression: one may, without altering
anything else; speak with greater stress any part of the
sentence that happens to be emotionally dominant. To
some extent in French and completely in Old Irish, the
emotional relations of the sentence also are forced into
set form: the dominant element must stand as the predi
cate of an abstract deictic subject (p. 171). Thus in
French the regular way of saying 'I did that' is C'est
moi qui ai fait cela 'It's I that have done that', and in
Old Irish glosses we find always such expressions as is
oc precept sosceli attó 'It's at preaching ofthegospel
Iam'.
In short, just as there are morphologic, there are also
syntactic categories (p. 68), and the existence of the
two is often involved in one and the same mental habit:
so with the English parts of speech and the English
actionsentence. The English language has the syntactic
categories of actor and action; that is, it has identified
subject with actor and predicate with action. Our parts
of speech serve these syntactic demands: the verbs, for
instance, express an action (or some other content viewed
as such) and must therefore be present as the central
element of the predicate in every sentence. Old Irish
has the dominantcategory: the emotionally dominant
element has to be the central element of the predicate
Other syntactic categories affect single wordclasses. We
have in English three syntactic categories affecting the
noun. An object (or several objects) must be explicitly
described as either (1) definite, (2) indefinite but individ
ual, or (3) collective or unindividual (p. 118). In the first
case some deictic pronoun must modify the noun, in the
second case some indefinite pronoun, and only in the third
case, that of collective or unindividual use, may the noun
ne unmodified. We can speak of man or of mcn only if
176
SYNTAX
we mean either all men: Man needs but little..., Men are
easily moved by such things, or men, regardless of identity :
Men were shouting. If we do not mean this, we must say
either (2) 'an indefinite man', 'a number of indefinite men',
e. g some man, any man, one man. some men, six men, se
veral men, or else, (1) deictically, this man, that man, your
man, Smith's man, these men, those men, etc. This formal
demand is so insistent that we have two pronominal words
of abstract meaning which serve no other purpose than,
with the least possible amount of incrimination, to pro
vide this description: (1) the 'definite article' the and
(2) the indefinite article' a, an. These categories are ab
sent, for instance, in Latin, where one could say homo,
whether one meant 'man', 'the man', or 'a man', and only
when such elements were actually vivid needed to say ille
homo 'that man' or homo aliquis 'some man'.
Another syntactic category in English is that of strictly
transitive verbs, that is, of verbs which demand expression
of an object affected. Thus one cannot say He broke without
adding an object affected: He broke the bowl, He broke it,
or, at the very least, He broke something. This peculiarity
is shared by the verbal nouns and adjectives derived form
such verbs, e. g. Breaking stone is hard work; Breaking the
shell, he examined the contents.
6. The expression of syntactic relations: modula
tion in the sentence. We may now turn to the formal
means of expressing syntactic relation. At the basis of all
such expression lies the fact that the words of a sentence
are spoken consecutively, in an uninterrupted sequence.
Although within this sequence there may be pauses, these
cannot be extended at liberty.
The unity and the wordinterrelations of the sentence
may be further expressed by modulations of pitch and of
stress. This modulation is limited by the habitual word
MODULATION IN THE SENTENCE
177
accent and the habitual syllableaccent. In a language like
ours, where certain syllables of words are habitually pro
nounced with greater stress than others, the stressmodu
lation of the sentence is not entirely free, but will always
be a compromise between these habitual stressings and
the 'ideal' sentencestress, — that is, the stressrelations
that we might conceivably use, were we not bound to
stress certain syllables. Thus in Today is 'my birthday,
where my, the emotionally dominant element, receives
highest stress, we are also bound by the convention of
our language, to give the syllables day in today and
birth in birthday higher stress than we give to and day.
When we speak of bull'dogs and bullfrogs, or of 'aseptic
and 'antiseptic, the sentencemodulation of stress is at
odds with the conventional word accent and carries off the
victory.
In languages with fixed pitchrelations for certain syl
lables, words, or groups, the ideal sentencepitch is forced
similarly to compromise with the syllablepitch and group
pitch. Thus, in Norwegian, the three words han 'he', heter
'is called', and the name Hjalmar all have, when spoken
alone, simple rising accent; e. g. [han/]. In the sentence
Han heter Hjalmar, however, the pitchmodulation of the
sentence overcomes that of the first two words, and one
says [Lhan heiter j a l / r m a r / ] . In other languages with
wordpitch, such as Chinese, the conditions are similar.
In contrast with this, English sentencemodulation of pitch
has almost no obstacles to overcome, for, beyond the cir
cumstance that we pronounce the stressed syllables with
higher pitch, this factor is left entirely to syntactic em
ployment. Consequently we can maintain such habits as
the use of even and then falling pitch in statements (He
came back), rising pitch in sentencequestions (Did you
say that?), and rising falling pitch in wordquestions ( What
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
178
SYNTAX
was he doing?), not to speak of a number of modulations
for more delicate emotional shadings. In our ears such a
language as Norwegian sounds, accordingly, like a mono
tonous series of questions or enlivening exhortations.
Such modulations, then, are of decided significance. In
English words of less material content receive weaker
stress, so especially abstract and purely formal words:
the 'man, a 'man, It is 'cold, He 'ate it, He 'gave the 'book
to his 'brother. These words receive greater stress only
when they are used in more than mere satisfying of syn
tactic requirements: It'is cold. The sequence of attribute
and subject shows in English even stress: the 'young 'man;
in He 'failed completely to make his meaning clear, the ad
verb completely, in even stress with failed, modifies it, but
in He 'failed completely to make his meaning clear, it modi
fies the less stressed make.
7. Crossreferring constructions. In general, however,
these sentencemodulations of pause, pitch, and stress ex
press the emotional rather than the discursive or the ma
terial relations between the words. These are expressed
in varipus other ways.
Most obvious and most cumbersome among these means
is the double expression of an element, first relationally
in connection with another word and then explicitly in a
separate word expressing the material content. Speakers
of English can best feel the value of such double expression
by calling to mind dialectal locutions like John his knife
or John he went home. Here John gives the material con
tent of the element which in he, his is expressed anaphori
cally over again in relation with the other elements of
the sentence; — the use of John here is called 'absolu
tive'. These constructions are unnecessarily cumbersome,
for in English John can figure as subjectactor, or, in
possessive inflection, as attributepossessor (John went
CROSSREFERRING CONSTRUCTIONS
179
home, John's knife); and it is safe to suppose that educated
writers' and speakers' disuse of this construction is due
to the feeling that the added word is superfluous. Sup
posing, however, that it were impossible in English to
say went home without an anaphoric actor he, and impos
sible to say knife without an anaphorically expressed pos
sessor: then such constructions as John hewent and John
Msknife would be unavoidable.
These conditions are fulfilled in numerous languages.
In Latin, for instance, where the verb always includes
personalanaphoric mention of the actor, and a form such
as cantat means 'hesings' or 'shesings', one cannot say
'The girl sings' but only puella cantat literally, then, '(The)
girl shesings'.
The same may be true of objects affected. In Nahwatl
nikmaka means 'Iithimgive'. To express concretely the
objects affected one may form a compound with one of
them, e. g. niktlaskalmaka 'Ihimbreadgive'. For the sec
ond of the objects affected, however, and most commonly
also for the first, one adds specific mention of the object
in an absolutive form: nikmaka tlaskalli in nopiltsin 'I
himit give, bread, (the) myson'. Just so in Greenlandish:
[qaĭne tukaRpa:] 'Hisboat hetramplesit' (more literally,
— cf. above, — 'It is his boat. There is trampling of it
of him').
The parallel to John his knife is seen in the Greenlan
dish [qim:ip neqa:] '(The) dog hismeat'.
This method of syntactic expression is subject to some
ambiguity. The relation of the words for 'bread' and 'my
son' in the Nahwatl example above can be deduced from
their content, but it is not expressed otherwise than by
the material absurdity of the subject's giving his son to
some bread. When we learn, further, that the word ex
pressing the actor may also in absolutive form follow the
180
SYNTAX
actionword, we see that this method of syntactic expres
sion, with all its explicitness, is far from being propor
tionately exact or clear.
8. Congruence. Another expression of syntactic rela
tions is the phenomenon of congruence, which we have
several times met (pp. 128, ff.). Congruence is syntactically
expressive because it is limited to words in certain rela
tions with each other, — such as subject and verb in Eng
lish. When we say I am; you, we, they are; he, she, it is,
the form of the verb shows in the first case, for instance,
that the verb has as its actor the speaker. To be sure, the
congruence is not needed, for even without it, as in I, you,
lie, she, it, we, they can (shall, will, did, gave, etc.), the po
sition of the actorword immediately before the verb ex
presses the relation between the words: our congruence
of verb with person and number of actor is logically su
perfluous.
This, however, is not true of most cases of congruence.
In those European languages which divide their nouns
categorically into genderclasses and express this classifi
cation by congruence of attributive, anaphoric, and rela
tive words, locutions constantly occur in which congruence
alone expresses the syntactic relations. In German such
expressions as das Fremden unzugängliche Haus, literally
'the tostrangers unapproachable house', are clear because
das, the article, is in congruence ('agrees') only with H us,
not with Fremden, which would require, by congruence,
another form of an article attributive to it. So in relative
reference, Die Maus im Keller, welche naß war,... (literally
'The mouse in the cellar, which wet was,...') is clear: the
form welche shows that the relative pronoun refers to the
'feminine' noun Maus; if it is the cellar which was wet,
one says Die Maus im Keller, welcher naß war,..., with
the 'masculine' congruenceform of the relative pronoun
CONGRUENCE
181
Such congruence of attributive words with gender, num
ber, and case of their subject nouns may serve to relate
words in what would seem to us the most puzzling jumble.
This is true, especially, in the older stages of the European
languages. Thus, in Latin, Horace was able to write:
. . . Mē tabulā sacer
votivā paries indicat üvida
suspendisse potentī
vestimenta maris deō.
'By a votive tablet the sacred wall shows me to have hung
up drenched garments (as an offering) to the mighty god
of the sea', — word for word: 'Me byatablet sacred vo
tive wall shows wet tohavehungup powerful clothes of
thesea tothegod'. The sentence includes four adjectives
and five nouns, which are grouped, adjective with noun,
only by the congruence of the former with the latter as
to gender number, and case. That is, sacer 'sacred' agrees
only with paries 'wall', vōtwā 'votive' only with tabula
'tablet', ūvida V e t ' with vestimenta 'clothes', and potentï
'powerful' agrees only with deo 'god', leaving maris 'the
sea's' without an adjective. In short, the application of
the adjectives is expressed entirely by their congruence.
To be sure, not every instance is as clear as this one.
Suppose that instead of 'sacred wall' a Roman had said
'sacred temple', sacra aedes. Now, owing to homonymy
between the adjective forms for the nominative singular
feminine (sacra) and the accusative (and nominative) plural
neuter (üvida), sacra could belong with vestimenta ('sacred
garments') and üvida with aedēs ('drenched temple'), and
only the material content or the order in which the words
were presented to the hearer could determine the syn
tactic relations between these adjectives and nouns.
But even when there is no homonymy congruence can
never be unambiguous. For, if ambiguity is to be avoided
182
SYNTAX
in every instance, the number of categories according to
which there is congruence must approach infinity. In
the Bantu languages of southern and central Africa con
gruence plays a very large role in syntactic expression,
and we find, accordingly, a large number of categories
of the objectexpressions with which other words must
agree. The Subiya language, as above mentioned, (p. 143),
so distinguishes in all twentyone categories. In the Kafir,
which is closely related to this dialect, one says, for in
stance (p. 154):
bonice abazalwana 'all the brothers',
lonice ilizwe 'all the land',
yonke indlu 'all the house',
zonke izilo 'all the creatures',
wonlce umhlaba 'all the earth*,
kconlke ukutya 'all the food',
where the attributive 'all' varies in congruence with the
noungenders. Similarly, an attributive noun varies in
congruence with that modified, which precedes it:
umfazi gowomtu 'the wife of the man',
ihase lelomtu 'the horse of the man',
umfazi gowenlcosi 'the wife of the chief,
ihase lelenkosi 'the horse of the chief'.
The numeral words similarly agree:
immini zamasumi mane 'days tens four, fourty days',
ubusuke hamasumi mane 'nights tens four, forty nights'.
So also the actionword:
umntu uyadla innyama 'the man goes to eat meat',
abantu hayadla innyama 'the men go to eat meat'.
9. Government. Another means of expressing syn
tactic relations is wordvariation according to the relation
the word bears to some other word. With such word
variation we are familiar from the discussion of morphol
ogy, where we saw (pp. 104,ff.,143, f.) how relational ele
GOVERNMENT
183
ments are in most languages included in the same word
with concrete elements to which they pertain. In so far as
such inflection includes relations to other words of the
same sentence, it is of syntactic force. When the English
verb includes in its form an indication of time, this in
dication is, generally, of no syntactic importance. In the
sentence He bought many clothes the form bought express
es the time, relative to the speaker's present, of the oc
currence, but not the relation of the verb to the other
parts of the sentence: this relation is no different when
the other tenseform, He buys many clothes, is used. In
the noun, on the other hand, we have a special form,
the possessive, which indicates that the noun in this form
is an attribute (possessor) of some other noun. As oppo
sed to Father has a new hat, Who has seen my father?,
with my father, the form father's in Where is father's new
hat? shows the experienceelement father to be neither
actor nor object affected nor point of view of a local re
lation, but attribute of another noun. In our pronouns,
where we have a third caseform, this goes farther. The
forms I, he, she, we, they, who are used only as subject
of a verb or in the predicate of a sentence expressing
equation, e. g. It is he. The forms my, his, her, our,
their, whose are attributive, and the third set of forms,
me, him, her, us, them, whom, show the content of the
pronoun to stand in the relation of object affected to a
verb, or of point of view to a preposition: He saw me,
I know him, Come to us. As between It is he and It hurts
him, for instance, the variation in the form of the pro
noun shows the relation to the verb: him is object affected,
he not so, but 'complement', that is, genuine predicate
following the abstract equationverb is. He loves her
shows by the form of the pronouns who is the actor,
who the object affected Eection or government, then, is
184
SYNTAX
the process by which a word has a different form accord
ing to its relation to other words in the sentence.1)
Government is in very active use in such languages
as German, Latin, Greek, or Sanskrit, where the nouns
(or words modifying them) have different caseforms fol
different relations. In Latin Pater fīlio librum dat in any
order of the words is equally clear, for pater is in the
nominative form, as actor, filio in the dative, as object
less fully affected, lībrum in the accusative, as object fully
affected: 'The father gives the son a book'; the caseforms
of the words express the syntactic relations.2) In the
quotation from Horace,
. . . Mē tabula sacer
vōtiva pariēs indicat ūvida
suspendisse potentī
vestimenta maris deō,
we have seen how congruence shows the grouping of
adjectives with nouns, to wit: vōtivā tabidā Votive tablet',
sacer pariēs 'sacred wall', ūvida vestimenta 'drenched
garments', potentl deō 'powerful god'. Government lays
clear the syntactic relations of these nouns. Namely,
(sacer) pariēs, in the nominative case, must figure as sub
ject of the verb (indicat .'shows'); me, as accusative form,
is object fully affected by this verb; tabula (votiva), an
ablative form of instrumental value, expresses the means
1) Those dialectal speakers who say It is me, him, her, us,
them, using the accusative form wherever a pronoun appears
after a verb, make no use of government, but instead use the
nominative and accusative forms merely in congruence with the
position of the pronoun: in position before the verb, one set of
forms; in position after it or after a preposition, another.
'¿) Between pater 'father' and dat, literally 'hegives', the re
lation is, however, really expressed by crossreference, cf. above.
GOVERNMENT
185
of the action ('by means of a votive tablet*); (ūvida)
vestimenta, again accusative, is the object fully affected
by the infinitive suspendisse 't have hung up'; maris is
in the genitive case, expressing, somewhat like the Eng
lish possessive, an attributive relation, 'the sea's'; (po
tentī) deo, finally, in the dative case, is the object less
fully affected by suspendisse, 'to the mighty god'. The
meaning is, accordingly, as we have seen, 'The sacred
wall, by a votive tablet, shows me to have hung up
drenched garments to the mighty god of the sea'.
But, as a matter of fact, some of these forms are by
no means unambiguous. Partly this is due to homonymy:
me could be ablative ('by means of me') as well as ac
cusative, and the accusative üvida vestimenta could also
be nominative (subject of a verb). The ambiguity is re
moved only by the fact that indicat, the verb, must have
an object affected, for which mē, in the beginning the
only form available, is accordingly taken, as an accusa
tive: and later, when üvida vestimenta appears, the indu
bitable nominative, sacer paries has already occupied the
place of subjectactor.
Moreover, even aside from homonymy, the sentence,
30 far as government is concerned, is left ambiguous, for
government tells us neither which accusative, me or üvida
vestimenta, is the object affected by indicat and which by
suspendisse, nor does it show which noun maris 'of the
sea' modifies. Like the ambiguities already mentioned,
these also are removed by that very natural means, the
order of the words: when we hear indicat, me alone is
available as object affected, and the position of maris
between potenti and deo suggests the concretely obvious
connection. In other sentences the material content alone
can remove the ambiguity: Uvida vestimenta mē suspendisse indicat, — a good Latin sentence, — could mean
186
SYNTAX
either 'It shows me to have hung up wet garments' or
'It shows wet garments to have hung me up'.
Government may extend to all kinds of relational ex
pression. Thus in German one says Er ging in den Wald
'He walked into the woods', but Er ging in dem Walde
'He walked in the woods'. The two relations which we
express in English as into and in are expressed in Ger
man by the same word in, government alone distinguish
ing: the object with regard to which the relation is
viewed stands in the former instance in the accusative,
in the latter in the dative case.
10. Wordorder. In the discussion of our quotation
from Horace it appeared that some of the ambiguity left
by government as a syntactic method was naturally re
moved by the order in which the words were presented
to the hearer. This function of the wordorder was by
no means due to any convention of the Latin language,
but entirely to the natural reproductive processes of the
listener, who would, for instance, at once take up mē as
the object fully affected by indicat, because, when he
heard the latter word, no other accusative had yet reached
him. The speaker analytically expressing his total ex
perience will naturally follow some connected order, ex
cept for such emotionally dominant elements as thrust
themselves, regardless of logical or material connection,
at once into expression. The hearer, for his part, re
produces as he hears and uses each element as it comes,
unless habitual processes of the language force him to
hold them apart, as when the Roman, hearing tabulā
sacer, is kept by the congruencehabits of his speech,
from even tentatively applying the adjective to this noun,
but waits for another with which sacer will agree. In
short, quite independently of any fixed habit, the order
of words in a sentence cannot but be to some extent
WORDORDER
187
indicative of their syntactic relations, just as all the
words of a sentence, to begin with, form an uninterrupted
sequence.
In many languages, such as our own, the order of words
has a habitual syntactic significance. Where a Latin, for
example, could pronounce in any one of the six mathe
matically possible orders the words Julias (nominative),
Juliam (accusative), and amat ('he, she loves', verb), ex
pressing by crossreference and goverment that Julius is
the actor, by government that Julia is the object affected,
there we can say only Julius loves Julia. The noun pre
ceding the verb is in English the actor, that following
it, the object affected.
This use of wordorder as a syntactic method is doubly
significant. From a logical, post factum point of view, it
makes use of what is inevitably present, for in some order
the words must be spoken, and dispenses with any further
encumbrance for the expression of relations. Psychologic
ally, it involves a fixed habit as to the order with which
one in speaking analyzes and in hearing reproduces a
total experience. The fixing of this habit cannot but save
energy: the English sentence can be understood, — that
is, the experience reproduced by the hearer, — with less
effort of the attention than the Latin.
In English wordorder is the prevailing method of syn
tactic expression. We have already seen that the actor
subject precedes the verb. The objects affected follow it,
the object less fully affected preceding that fully affected
(He gave John a book), unless, indeed, the former relation
is analyzed into a separate word (He gave a book to John),
when it falls under the head of preposition with its noun,
which always follows the objects affected. The abstract
verb is precedes the true predicate (This man is my bro
ther, You are good). Attributive modifiers precede nouns
188
SYNTAX
(a good friend, father's hat), and prepositions precede the
noun with regard to which they are used (in the house).
Only as to the attributive modifiers of verbs is there some
freedom (Quickly he ran, He quickly ran, He ran quickly).
Thus not only the discursive but also material and emo
tional relations are expressed by wordorder.
In Chinese wordorder is even more exclusively the
expression of syntactic relations. The subject precedes
the predicate, as in
'He (is) good' or
'He
goes', and attributes precede their subject:
'good man, good people',
'Slow
ly go', 'Go slowly'. The material relation of objects affected
is also recognized: they follow the transitive word, e. g.
'I
fear him',
'He fears
me'. Other examples have been explained on pages 115,ff.
and 126, f.
11. Set phrases : the transition from syntax to style.
In spite of this simplicity of Chinese syntactic expression,
an Englishspeaking person who had access to information
as to the meaning of every individual Chinese word and
knew these rules of wordorder, would still fail to under
stand many sentences of this language. He would be baf
fled byset combinations of words, 'idioms', deviating from
the meaning of the simple words and thus approaching
the value of compounds. In such idiomatic phrases Chinese
is very rich. They exist, however, in every speechcommuni
ty and not least in English and its various local forms.
A stranger would have no success, if he attempted, word
by word, to understand such usage as that of at in We
sat at the table. He threw it at me, He is at work, Don't
be angry at me, Not at all, and so on, or of do in He did
it, Did he go?, Did he do it?, Do to death, It does him
credit, He did me a service, How do you do?, Do the roast
well, I have done six copies, You would do wisely to go, of
THE TRANSITION FROM SYNTAX TO STYLE
189
have in I have your hat, I have written, I have to do it, You
had better go, of about in We wallied about the garden, We
talked about you, About three miles, and so on.
When the idiomatic set phrase deviates too considerably
from the individual meanings of the words, we have, of
course, a compound word: the boundary is by no means
clearly traceable. Is at all a compound? In Chinese we
have seen
in which the first word means 'older
brother' and the second 'younger brother'; together the
two, were this not an idiomatic phrase, would mean 'younger
brother of an older brother'. The phrase, however, may
be looked upon, from the English standpoint as mean
ing 'older brother(s) and (or) younger brother(s)', i. e.
often 'brothers, brother'. Shall we call the Chinese ex
pression a compound or a twoword phrase?
On the other hand, the boundary between set phrase
and syntactic expression is never c]early traceable. What
is one of a number of equally favored possibilities of ex
pression in one generation, may in the next become a
habitual phrase, and a few generations later be the only
correct expression. Some time ago one said indifferently
in English He gave me it. He gave it me, or He gave it
to me. Today we use, in America at least, the last of these
far more frequently than the first two; tomorrow it alone
may be correct, — or else an idiomatic use here prevalent
in the sense of 'He scolded me, punished me' may spe
cialize it. In such a sentence as He sees me the syntactic
relations are expressed by congruence (he sees), govern
ment (he sees, sees me), and wordorder. The expression
was therefore just as intelligible in times when the third
factor was absent and one could say Me he sees, He me
sees, and the like. The order He sees me here became,
successively, the favorite phraséologie order and then the
only correct one.
190
SYNTAX
12. The complex sentence. This crystallization of word
groups is psychologically most natural. Once a certain
expression has been heard and used, it is, by the principle
of habituation, more likely to be called up and used in
the future than some other less familiar form. Ultimately,
if enough used, it becomes mechanized, in the sense that
a single initial impulse is sufficient to start off the utter
ance of the entire wordgroup, so that the relations be
tween the single words, like the single articulatory move
ments, need no longer be conscious. Most of our speak
ing, in fact, is done in this way. We speak by whole
phrases, even by whole sentences, and, at the very least, by
certain wellpractised schemes, — sentenceskeletons that
require but the variation of a few words from utterance to
utterance. If we stop to analyze even a moderately long
sentence of ordinary speech into single words and stop to
determine the relations between them, the result is a very
complex structure and the process always strikes us as
unnatural: we are certain that in speaking the casual
sentence we built up no such maze of variously inter
woven attributions, serial groups, and predications. Our
feeling is justified, for most of the wordgroups within
which such relations ultimately subsist are in actuality
so practised that no analytic activity of the attention is
necessary for their utterance. Unless this were the case,
it would require a master mind to construct any but the
briefest and baldest utterances.
The utterance of longer, more complex sentences is
due, therefore, to the mechanization of greater and greater
groups of words. The most typical illustration of this is
the attributive subordination of one predication to an
other. In languages that have no specific expression of
predication this subordination does not formally appear.
When a Greenlander says [tuawioRtoRs:'uol:une aneRlaR
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE
191
poq] we may interpret it as 'Itisinhishurryingvery
much. Hegoeshome' or as 'Hurrying very much, he goes
home'. Which interpretation is the jnster depends on the
mental process of the speaker in each instance, unless it
happens that the expression is known to he a very common
one, when we may be sure of subordination. This simple
succession of two predications one of which is psychologic
ally, but not in expression, subordinate (i. e. attributive)
to the other, is called parataxis. Another example of it
is the locution so frequent in German fairy tales: Es war
einmal ein Mann, der hatte drei Töchter 'There was once
a man. He had three daughters' or There was once a
man who had three daughters'; exactly as in the Green
landish example, both English renderings are wrong: the
German expression could, formally, be two sentences, but
in the feeling of every German speaker the second pred
ication is subordinate to the first. An English example
is He writes me he is sich Modulations of stress, pitch,
and duration (pause) may, of course, enter as expression
of the subordination.
If, however, the expression of subordination goes be
yond this, we have no longer parataxis, but hypotaxis. Such
a phenomenon as hypotaxis is conceivable only when
large wordgroups constituting parts of the whole utter
ance have become specifically or in plan mechanized.
Hypotaxis is attained by means of special attributive forms
for larger subordinate elements. Such a form is the Eng
lish verbal adjective (participle) in ing followed, like the
verb, by expression of objects affected: Giving his friend
the letter, he turned to go. This form of expression is in
some languages so great a favorite that, of a number,
say, of occurrences, only a few receive independent pred
icative expression. In English the participle is generally
used only where it may be taken as an attribute of the
192
SYNTAX
subject of the sentence: in other languages the subordinate
elements may modify various parts of the sentence. In
Turkish, for instance, there occur such constructions as
[xod3a umanmaz, biri daxra gelip, øĭle Søĭler, xod3a gertfek
sanurp, kuzuju bogazlar], literally: 'Master believingnot,
oneofthem again coming, similarly speaking, master true
believing, the lamb slaughters', i. e. 'When the master
did not believe this, another of them came and spoke
similarly; whereupon the master, now believing it, slaugh
tered the lamb'. In Sanskrit, which has generally a struc
ture similar to that of Latin, we find in certain writings,
perhaps owing to the influence of other languages of India,
which construct very much on the Turkish principle, an
extended use of such participial expression. For instance,
Ity älocya, tena, grāmq gatvā, Dadhilearnanāma bidälo,
māsādyāhārena sqtosya, prayatnäd ānlya, svakandare
dhrtab, literally: 'So havingreflected, byhim, tothevillage
havinggone, Dadhikarnabyname (a) cat (nom.), bymeans
ofmeatandotherfood havingsatisfied, carefully having
brought, inhiscave waskept'. All the participial ex
pressions (ending in ya and tvā) here apply not to the
subject (the cat), but to the instrumental ('byhim'); here,
as above in the Turkish example, these expressions are
really attributes not of any objectword or other element,
but of the predication as a whole. Hence we may here
translate: 'After he had so reflected, by him, when he had
gone to the village, a cat, Dadhikarna by name, when he
had given it its fill of meat and other food and led it
carefully home, was kept in his cave', or, changing to the
active and coordinating construction favored in English:
'After these reflections he went to the village, and, hav
ing satisfied a certain cat named Dadhikarna with meat
and other food, brought it carefully home and kept it in
his cave'
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE
193
In these examples the subordinated elements deviate
considerably in form from independent predications. In
English, however, we may, by means of a subordinating
conjunction express one predication, word for word, as
attributive to another. Thus, paratactic: It looks like rain;
he had better carry an umbrella; hypotactic: As it looks
like rain, he had better carry an umbrella, where as, the
subordinating conjunction, expresses the attributive char
acter of the first predication. Beside using such subordinat
ing conjunctions as as, when, if, how, since, because, while,
after, although, and the like, we express hypotaxis also by
our relative pronouns, e. g.: I dont know the man whom
you mention, where the peculiar wordorder (whom you
mention, as opposed, for instance, to you mention him) and
the double function of the relative pronoun whom as both
member (in this case, object affected) of the subordinate
sentence and expression of the subordination, carry the
hypotaxis. A peculiar form of hypotaxis is the English
construction in which a noun figures as predicate or as
object affected in the principal sentence and at the same
time as object affected in the second; the subordination
is expressed by this double function of the word and by
a wordorder differing from the normal: thus the last
sentence could be put: 1 don't know the man you mention
or He isn't the man I mean. This type of hypotaxis, is
called, by its Greek name, the construction apò koinoù.
In German subordination is expressed by subordinating
conjunctions or relative pronouns and, most strikingly,
by the wordorder: the verb stands second among the
elements of the declarative sentence, except in case of
subordination, when it stands last. Consequently, although
German has much homonymy between adverbs and sub
ordinating conjunctions and between relative and demon
strative prono uns, hypotaxis is always clearly distinguished.
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
194
SYNTAX
Thus in Da kam er, 'Then he came', da is adverb and
we have an independent sentence, but in Da er ham, konnten
wir ihn fragen 'Since he came, we were able to ask him',
da is a subordinating conjunction and da er kam, a 'de
pendent clause'. The paratactic Es war einmal ein Mann,
der hatte drei Töchter 'There was once a man; he had
three daughters' (der anaphoric pronoun) is distinguished
by wordorder only from the hyp tactic Es war einmal
ein Mann, der drei Töchter hatte 'There was once a man
who had three daughters' (der relative pronoun). By such
means the sentence may in literary languages like San
skrit, Latin, German, or English be expanded until it is
simply a kind of logical puzzle. In natural speech, how
ever, no matter how complex a sentence may be from
the logical point of view, it really never consists of more
than a very few elements, each of which, even if discursi
vely divisible, is in the mind of the speaker nevertheless
a single assodatively mechanized element, which he is
not compelled to analyze, unless some circumstance should
particularly draw his attention to it.
Here again, the actual conditions of language are not
mathematically definable. It is impossible to determine
exactly how far every speaker goes in the analysis of the
total experience and how much of what he says is a
matter of practised combinations. Here again, moreover,
the constant change in language makes itself apparent:
new phrases und methods of construction come into favor
and old ones lapse into oblivion,
CHAPTER VII.
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE.
1. Language constantly changing. The speech of
former times, wherever history has given us records of
it, differs from that of the present. When we read Shak
spere, for example, we are disturbed by subtle deviations
from our own habit in the use of words and in construc
tion; if our actors pronounced the lines as Shakspere and
his contemporaries did, we should say that they had an Irish
or German brogue. Chaucer we cannot read without some
grammatical explanation and a glossary, correctly pro
nounced his language would sound to us more like Low
German than like our English. If we go back only about
forty generations from our time to that of Alfred the
Great, we come to English as strange to us as modern
German, and quite unintelligible, unless we study carefully
both grammar and lexicon.
2. Causes of the instability of language. It is by
no means surprising that language changes. As a physical
phenomenon it consists of certain finely graded habitual
movements, which, we know, cannot always be performed
in exactly the same way. There must be endless infinitesi
mal variations, smaller even than those which scientific
observation unmistakably reveals, — not to speak of such
as can be heard by anyone who listens for them. Thus,
such a sentence as Going to the university? is often pro
196
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
nounced
To be, sure, we are so mach
in memory of the sound that these words have in more
deliberate speech (and, in our state of culture, of their
form in writing) that we ordinarily fail to notice what
sounds we or our acquaintances have actually uttered;
yet, as the language is spoken by generation after genera
tion, such tendencies cannot but have their lasting effect.
The same is true, mutatis mutandis, of the other phases
of language. The experience itself is always new: shall
the speaker class it under this particular word or that?
A member of a happy family points to his house and
says: 'This is our little home.' What more natural than
that, just as his interlocutor might now tell people that
'N. has a beautiful little home/ other people should gradu
ally come to speak of any house intended for dwelling
purposes as a home, until we read in our newspapers that
there is for sale 'a fine new tenroom home/ and realize
that for many English speaking people the word home
has no longer the meaning which it used to have.
In the morphologic wordclasses we need only look at
the assimilative process by which inflection takes place
(p. 59, f.), to see how unstable it must be, from its very
nature. Preterite tense and unreal mode are expressed by
only one form in every English verb except tuas: were.
It is a natural consequence that many speakers use was
for were, saying, for instance, 'If he was here, he wouldn't
allow it.' Owing to the identity of form of other verbs
(came, said, had, thought) such a speaker, without con
sciousness of innovation, says was where were is in our
feeling alone correct.
Gradual change in the manner of performing articula
tionmovements, the inclusion of new experiences under
new words, and the occurrence of a few unprecedented
morphologic assimilations among the many previously
CAUSES OF THE INSTABILITY OF LANGUAGE
197
usual ones, — these are inevitable attendant occurrences
of all language. On the other side are the no less inevi
table conservative forces. The speaker hears others who
are not making the same innovation and either realizes
that he spoke in violation of custom and perhaps un
intelligibly, or, far more commonly, has the correct form
reawakened or strengthened in his speechpredisposition
with out evergro wing aware of the temporary divergence. His
interlocutor's answer, for instance, contains the forms [juni
'vrSÍ ti], house, If he were here, and, inadvertently, these
instead of the new associations are uppermost when next
he speaks. But when our interlocutors, too, have formed
the new association, so that it is in them strengthened
by our use of the new form, they will notice nothing
unusual in our words and will utter the like. Finally the
new association may become practised and vigorous, and
the old fall into such desuetude that, when we hear its
forms, they seem strange and unusual.
It is evident, then, that an innovation, in order to spread,
and not to lapse into oblivion as a oncemade slip of the
tongue, must be such as to fall in readily with the other
habits and associations of the speakers. The use of was
for were has spread because one form for all the numbers
and persons of preterite and unreal, — that is, the absence
of these distinctions, — is customary in all other verbs.
No change takes place in a language unless there is a
predisposition for it in a large number of speakers. Fashion,
to be sure, and the conscious desire to be like some ad
mired person or class of people, may help to spread or
to check the spreading of an innovation. The young boy
who wants to seem virile imitates the speech of the 'tough',
and the snob affects the manner of speech that happens
to be natural to the aristocrat. More legitimately, the pub
lic speaker, the teacher, and, above all, the writer, exert
198
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
a wide influence over the speech of others. In spite of
all this, however, every innovation, in its beginnings, is
the result of a psychic predisposition not only on the
part of those speakers who independently originate it,
but also on the part of those who unconsciously take it
up. It would, indeed, be impossible to determine who
first spoke a given innovation, who spoke it only after
hearing it from others. Neither speaker is conscious of
saying anything novel. If the innovation fails to find accept
ance, both kinds of speakers lapse back to the old forms
of speech, without ever realizing that they once or a few
times spoke differently, and if the innovation spreads, it
remains usually for scholars who long afterward look
back at an earlier form of speech, to realize that a change
has taken place. No LondonEnglish mother, in the forty
generations from Alfred's time to ours, has realized that
her children were not learning exactly the same English
that she had learned in her infancy; and, indeed, had she
been able to hear the two forms of speech in close suc
cession, she could not have detected any difference, unless
she were an extremely careful observer. It is only under
the most favorable conditions that linguistic study has
been able to perceive the deviation of speech from genera
tion to generation in a small community. It is evident
that we are, all of us, contributing, through all our lives,
to the change of our language, but neither do we from
any direct consciousness of the process know this, nor
could we, though our lives were at stake, tell how or in
what respects we are altering the language we learned
from our parents.
To say all this, is, of course, only to repeat that the
facts of language are facts of social, not of individual
psychology. Could we definitely mark out the speaker
who first spoke a given innovation, trace the forces which
CAUSES OF THE INSTABILITY OF LANGUAGE
199
impelled him to make it to certain features of his mental
situation at the time, and similarly lay clear the motives
of all the other speakers who propagated the new form,
then we should be accomplishing the interpretation of
a social development into terms of individual psychology.
This, of course, could be done only by an omniscient
observer. It is, for that matter, immaterial who first spoke
a given innovation. Both he and those others who, in
dependently, produced the same form, as well as those
who spoke the new form only after hearing it, were un
conscious of any change. The expressive habits of the
community as a whole were ready for the innovation, —
or rather, were in such a form that what was, physically,
an innovation, was psychologically no change at all.
Here lies, of course, the great difficulty of historical
language study. In descriptive study we can, in the worst
case, confine ourselves to the phenomena in a limited
number of utterances or speakers. To tell with historical
correctness the story of a single change, however, we
should need not only an exact knowiege of when, where,
by whom, and under what circumstances the change was
first made, and of exactly how, occurrence by occurrence,
hour by hour, speaker by speaker, house by house, village
by village, it spread, but also an insight into the entire
mentality of each speaker, so as to see what favorable
predispositions the change met, and what obstacles, how
it became strengthened by hearing and speaking, and
weakened and strengthened again, — and all these occurren
ces, we must remember, belong to a phase of activity so
mechanized that the details of it are never, except in the
rarest instances, sufficiently focused by the attention to
come into vivid consciousness.
Another difficulty lies ia the fact that our records of
past speech are always, in the face.of such an ideal, ex
200
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
tremely scanty, and that they are representative of writ
ing, an activity in which the single actions are performed
much more slowly and much more under the spotlight
of the attention than are those of ordinary speech, and,
finally, that writing is capable of but a very imperfect
representation of the phonetic facts.
Historical language study is thus at best imperfect.
Its imperfections can be partly repaired by certain tech
nical means, which enable us to correct and supplement
our records of past speech, especially as to phonetic form,
and also to ascertain facts about the speech of certain
periods from which no records have come down to us.
Of these technical means, called the ' comparative method',
I shall be able to speak more fully in the next chapter;
for the present a single instance may suffice. Although
the orthography of Shakspere and of Chaucer's 'Middle
English' does not materially differ from that current to
day, we can determine with considerable precision how
the English of those times was pronounced. We are
further able to interpret into phonetic terms the orthog
raphy of the 'Old English' of Alfred's time. Beyond
all this, however, we can arrive at a great many facts
and many more probabilities about the English that was
spoken before the time of our written records, at the
time, for instance, when the 'Angles, Saxons, and Jutes',
the bearers of English speech, still lived on the European
mainland. This prehistoric English, back to a certain
time, we call 'preEnglish'. Back of preEnglish lies a
point in time only relatively determinable, about which
also we can state a good many linguistic facts: the lan
guage at this point is called 'Primitive WestGermanic'.
Back of this point lies another period, which we call
'preWestGermanic'; and back of this period another
point in time, where the language is called 'Primitive
CAUSES OF THE INSTABILITY OF LANGUAGE
201
Germanic'; then, through the 'preGermanic' period, we
come, once more, to a specific though not absolutely de
terminable point in time, thousands of years ago, when
'Primitive IndoEuropean' was spoken. Beyond this stage
of the language we cannot as yet penetrate. To return,
however, from our example to our point: in spite of all
this supplementation, our historic study cannot go be
yond the crudest outlines as compared with the ideal
demands of the situation. We can tell, at best, that a
specific change, beginning at such and such a time, —
often determinable only within a century, if at all other
wise than relatively, — and spreading in a certain gener
al direction, had become, by the expiration of such and
such a period, the universal form of speech. In very
many cases we cannot determine what the predisposition
was that made the innovation successful, at other times
we can understand the predisposition (as in the case of
was for were) but then, as a rule, we fail to see why
the change succeeded in spreading at this and no other
time, in this and no other place. This last is, indeed,
the greatest difficulty we have to encounter. It is almost
always left a mystery why a given change occurred where
and when it did, even though the motives of the change,
when it does occur, seem clear.1)
1) This drawback is one that attends every phase of investiga
tion neither amenable to experiment (as is, for instance, physics)
nor of universal validity (mathematics). That determination of
an event which the physicist or chemist can make in his labora
tory is due to the artificial simplification of the conditions which
is at his disposal. In language such experiment is impossible,
because we cannot make and unmake communities, govern all
essential factors, and observe through any length of time. No
given occurrence, moreover, — not even in the domain of natural
science, — could be fully accounted for by anything less than
omniscience: the distinction between an immediate cause and
202
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
3. Change in articulation. Phonetic change consists
of change in the articulatory habits, independently of the
semantic content of speech. In Shakspere's time, for in
stance, one of the English vowels was a long open [ɔ :],
which occurred in stone [sto : n], lone [bɔ : n], rode [rɔ : d],
and a great many other words. By the eighteenth century
the pronounciation of this sound had gradually changed,
until it was a long closed [o:]. Today we further close
the end of it, so that it has become a diphthong [ow],
and we pronounce [stown, bown, iowd], and so on. In
this instance, as in many others, the cause of the change
of habit is unknown to us. What this statement means
will appear, if we consider in detail how such changes
take place.
The Elizabethan [o:]sound, like all other speechsounds
at all times, was pronounced in a great many variants.
Even the same speaker would pronounce it now more open,
now more closed, now longer, now shorter, in an infinity of
unconscious, minute variations, — just as we today, and
all people, cannot possibly perform a repeated action, no
matter how habitual, with unfailing accuracy. So far as
the variations of quantity were concerned, the equilibri
um was maintained, and has been to this day. If a speaker
at one time shortened the sound, he lengthened it at an֊
an underlying condition is here forced upon us. If the physicist
were asked to tell why a certain electric fuse 'burned out' at a
certain time, he could tell us that such and such a current of
electricity had passed through i t , but how, ultimately, he had
come to perform this experiment at this and no other time and
place, he could not tell. Or, if a stroke of lightning had caused
the destruction of the fuse, no meteorologist could tell why the
lightning struck where and when it did. So in language, the
immediate causes of phenomena are generally, except for sound
changes, known, but the underlying conditions are too complex
for any known methods of investigation.
CHANGE IN ARTICULATION
203
other, and if one speaker tended more often to shorten
it, his neighbor counterbalanced him in the other direc
tion. With the variations of closure, however, it was
different. While in the speech of many individuals there
may, in this respect also, have been an equilibrium; while
with other individuals the more open variations may
have predominated, the more closed variations, whenever
they occurred, seem to have struck more fertile ground
in the hearers, — to have better stimulated soundmem
ory and movementmemory. Gradually the more closed
variants predominated, until the average of articulations
was shifted to a more closed sound, let us say
By
this time the most open variants of [o:] no longer occur
red, and, on the other hand, more closed forms began to
be spoken than had ever been pronounced when [ɔ :] rep
resented the mean. Why all this took place in this
direction and not in the opposite (in which a similar
change has, in fact, occurred at other times and in other
places), and why equilibrium was not, as in the case of
quantity, maintained, no one can say. Since then Eng
lish pronunciationhabits have leaned toward the closed
variants, until in the eighteenth century the mean of
pronunciation, as we have seen, became [o:], and today
we speak [ow]. Thus the same variations have been
favored by eight to ten generations, if we do not look
back of Shakspere's time; if we do, we shall find that
the process had been going on since long before, as the
sound in Old English times was [a:]. Although theories
have been proposed, attributing such movements as these
to influences of climate, food, occupation, and the like,
none of them have been more than mere surmises, con
tradicted by the next best set of facts that presented it
self. Thus, it has been suggested that phonetic change
is due to increasing speed of the process of articulation,
204
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
which, it is said, accompanies the increasing rapidity of
the mental processes due to the advance of culture and
the general development of man's intellectual powers.
This explanation is in itself plausible, because, as we
shall see, soundchange does tend to produce more and
more rapidly pronounceable and psychologically more
appropriate forms. It is true, moreover, that a prescribed
complicated series of delicate movements to be rapidly
performed will be incorrectly gone through. In sound
change, however, we see the movements being performed
in approximately the same way sometimes for centuries,
before certain variants come to be favored; and when the
mean of articulation has been shifted, stability may again
ensue. It has never been proved either that there is an
increase in the rapidity of articulation or that an increase
of rapidity would account for all such changes as have
occurred; — the vowel change of English just described,
for instance, does not seem referable, directly at least, to
increased speed of articulation. So much we can safely
say: that sound change, altogether, is an evolutionary
process, a phenomenon of the historic change of man's
physical and mental organization and habits.
While the causes of soundchange, then, are obscure,
its general manner of action and, in many cases, the trend
of its results are plain.
The action of soundchange has often been described
as a process suffering no exception and comparable, con
sequently, to the laws discovered in physics or chemistry.
In reality sound change is a change of habit in a com
munity of people and is due, ultimately, to some change
in the organization or environment of these people. And,
as mankind is undoubtedly active in the shaping of en
vironment, the description of 'phonetic laws as 'natural
laws' cannot be correct: a sound change is not a law of
CHANGE IN ARTICULATION
205
nature, but a historic occurrence. Those who, otherwise
than metaphorically, have subscribed to the above defi
nition, have been misled by a certain salient feature of
phonetic change, — namely, its unsemantic character.
From the definition of phonetic change, it is clear, that,
once certain variants are being favored, it matters not
what the semantic content of the word or of the sen
tence may be, the result is the same. The speaker has,
of course, no suspicion that he is making any variations
at all or that he and his fellows are favoring one or the
other type of variants. He is intent on expressing his
meaning, and for all he knows, is expressing it in the
same sounds, words, and constructions from one end of
his life to the other. The favoring of phonetic variants
in this or that direction, — that is, sound change, —
has nothing to do with the meaning of the particular
word or sentence that is being uttered. Owing to its
uniformity, then, throughout words of the most various
meaning, a historic change in the manner or place of a
given articulation may be called a 'phonetic law'. There
can be no objection to this term, provided we do not
allow it to mislead us. When we say, as is customary,
that by a phonetic law 'Elizabethan [ɔ :] > modern [ow]',
we mean that the average of articulation at the former
time was [o :], that the variants in the direction of [ow]
were favored, unconsciously and regardless of the mean
ings of words, and that today, as a result, [ow] represents
the average of pronunciation.
The metaphoric term 'phonetic law' is very useful, be
cause it emphasizes the phonetic, articulatory character
and the regularity, no matter what the semantic content,
of the process of soundchange. Linguistically untrained
observers will often claim that a possible soundchange
did not take place because, if it had, it would have ob
206
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
literated some important semantic distinction, or that a
given soundchange did take place because a certain se
mantic distinction, which it obliterated, was no longer felt
to be necessary. There is no need of referring to the
concrete details of the process, to show the impossibility
of such motives. For all we know, we are today in the
act of making a soundchange that will obliterate the
most clearcut or the most universal distinctions in the
English language. At least that is what has happened
again and again in every language whose history we
know. Thus, a categoric distinction in the oldest stages
of English was that of the cases of the noun; yet, by the
time of our earliest records the nominative and accusa
tive of many nouns had come to be spoken alike: for in
stance, 'stone' in these two cases was in the singular
start, in the plural stänas, although many other words
still had distinct forms: for instance, 'care', nominative
singular caru, accusative singular cara. In primitive
Germanic the nominative singular of stān had been*stainoz,1)
the accusative *stainon, but a phonetic change had led
to the dropping of these semantically important final
syllables. Meanwhile the dative case was still distinct:
e. g. singular stāne; likewise, the genitive singular stänes
was different from the nominativeaccusative plural stänas.
We know how little phonetic change has spared these
categoric distinctions: the dative case has been lost,
coinciding today with the nominativeaccusative in the
form stone [stown]; cara and caru are now both care
[keji]; the genitive singular stänes and the nominative
accusative plural stänas are now ston's stones [stownz],
only the written language making a distinction. As to
1) The asterisk means that the form does not occur in our
historical records.
CHANGE IN ARTICULATION
207
words, knight and night were in Chaucer's time different:
[kniçt] and [niçt]: today they are indistinguishably [naět].
In present English [hiz'niaět] may mean either 'his great
power' (mlight) or 'his trifle' (mite), as in 'He contributed
[hiz 'maět] to the effort', but in Middle English the former
meaning was pronounced [miçt], the latter [mi:tə ]. If we
wish to distinguish, we must do so by what we explicit
ly say, for instance by using the adjectives great and
little. In Chinese there has been a great deal of such loss
of distinctions through phonetic change; the language
is consequently so full of homonyms that, though on
paper the writing may, as with us, show which sense is
meant, in speech phrases or compounds must be used
whenever homonymy might otherwise make the meaning
obscure. Thus
'father', as in
'father and
mother', 'parents', cannot be used alone in speaking,
owing to the homonymy with a number of other words;
one must use the phrase
_ 'fatherrelative'. Sim
ilarly
'garment, clothing' cannot be used alone:
one says |
'clothingutensil', for the word by itself
is homonymous with a number of others, e. g.
'phy
sician'. A similar phenomenon appears in English dic
tionaries: our verbs have so largely become homonymous
with nouns that they have to be quoted with the word
to, e. g. in a French dictionary * dormir, to sleep', where
in German, for instance, one could write ''dormir, schlafen',
— for in German the noun 'sleep' is Schlaf.
Not only does a soundchange always extend over all
the occurrences of a single sound, but it may extend over
several sounds. The soundchange by which Elizabethan
[stɔ :n] became eighteenthcentury [sto:n] was a closing
to midposition of the long open vowel which took effect
regardless of the point of articulation; for the front
vowel counterpart of [ɔ :], namely [s :] as in
'name'
208
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
shared in the change, being in the eighteenth century
[ne;m]. Similarly, the diphthongization that followed
affected both of these vowels: we say [stown] and [nejm].
In fact, the soundchange has gone even beyond this: we
may say that there has been, since Chaucer's time, a
constant closing and diphthongization of all long vowels,
— as will appear from the following examples:
Middle
English.
[nα;mə ]
[drs: m]
Early Modern 18th Century Present
English.
[nε:m]
[ne:m]
[nejm] 'name'
[dre: m]
'dream'
[stɔ :n]
[sto:n]
[stown] 'stone'
[mo:d]
[mo:d]
[mu:d]
[muwd] 'mood'
A similar parallelism appears in:
[wi:n]
[wejn]
[wεjn]
[waěn] Vine'
[hu:s]
[hows]
[hows]
[haǒ s] 'house'.
The reason for such parallelisms is plain, if we recall
(p. 53, f.) that the various sounds of a language consist of
a number of manners of articulation practised at a
number of points of articulation. In phonetic change it
is usually one of these factors rather than the production
of any one sound that changes; this involves, of course,
all sounds in which the changed factor occurs. Thus, if
the articulation of fortis stops changes to spirant arti
culation, [p, t, k] will become, respectively, [f, 0, x], —
a change that took place in the preGermanic period in
the history of English. It was followed by another
example in point: the voiced aspirate stops [b', d', g']
became, in complete parallelism, voiced spirants đ, g].
Later the plain voiced stops [b, d, g] became unvoiced
[p, t, k]. These three changes together are known, by
the name of their discoverer, as 'Grimm's law'. So, much
later, in German, [p, t, k] became, between vowels, [f, s, x],
CHANGE IN ARTICULATION
209
whence such correspondences as English grope: German
greifen, English water: German Wasser, English make:
German machen.
There are many phonetic changes which, though the
causes that brought them about are no clearer than in
other instances, allow at least of classification as to their
immediate tendency. In speaking of soundchanges that
obliterated semantic distinctions, we saw a soundchange
by which knight and night became homonymous: early in
the seventeenth century initial k before ո was dropped.
As this did not happen after vowel, as in acknowledge, it
was probably after certain preceding final consonants
that the new variants were first favored. These new va
riants involved a simplification of the required articula
tory movements. To pronounce kn one had to begin
with voiceless, nonnasal, velar articulation [k] and then
to change to voiced, nasal, dental articulation [n], — in
other words, simultaneously (1) to start one's vocal chorda
into voicevibration, (2) to lower the velum, and (3) to
move the tongue from velar to dental articulation. It is
evident that a variant which saved, for instance, the
lowering of the velum (2), by beginning the word with
nasal articulation (or retaining it after a final nasal of
a preceding word, as in yon knight) simplified the whole
performance by lessening the number of required simul
taneous movements. Such a variant would be [ŋnejt].
À further variant which began at once with tonguearti
culation at the nposition (or kept that position after a
preceding dental consonant, as in that knight), namely
[nnejt], brought another simplification by saving the ne
cessity of a change of tongueposition (3). A variant
that saved the adjustment of the vocal chords into voi
cing position during the n sound, was to voice the initial
sound (or to continue voicing after a preceding voiced
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
210
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
sound, as in the might), giving [n:ejt] and [nejt], present
day [naìĕt]. The variants that were favored resulted,
thus, in a simplification of the movements necessary to
produce the word. They may be said to have resulted,
further, in a lessening of the total number of different
combinations of movement occurring in the language, —
since [nn], for instance, did not otherwise occur. Thus,
while we do not know the actual causes, we see here the
typical results of many soundchanges. But we cannot
follow the tempting course of arguing directly from
these results to the causes, for the results do not indi
cate why the change took place where and when it did.
Thus, if the simplification in the above instance were
looked upon as the cause, it would be inexplicable why
it did not take place earlier: by the seventeenth century
people had been speaking initial lm from time imme
morial and always, it seems, maintaining an equilibrium
of habit. Or, if we look to German, how does it come
that the simpler variants have never gained ground there,
kn being still spoken, as in Knecht [knsçt] 'servant',
Knie [kni:] 'knee', Knabe [knα:bə ] 'boy'? We are face
to face with the same difficulty that we met above, with
regard to the closing and diphthongization of the English
vowels. In this second case we can see that the favored
variants brought a simplification, — involved a lessening
of the labor of speech, but we still do not know why
they were favored here and not elsewhere, now and not
sooner.1)
1) It seems possible that the new variants in the change of
kn tended to occur rather after nonsyllabic than after syllabic
sounds (cf. acknowledge), and that the increasing diphthongization
of long vowels, which would often precede the kn words, as
in I know՝ , thou knowest etc., led the n variants to be favored
at this particular time. If this explanation should prove correct,
CHANGE IN ARTICULATION
211
Very many of the soundchanges known to have oc
curred in different languages show this same result of
simplification of movements. In knight, night, might, etc.
we have dropped the palatal spirant of Middle English
[kniçt, niçt, miçt]. This was a simplification not only
because it saved an articulation, but also because it less
ened the number of different articulations in the lan
guage, which after the change contained no more [ç] 's.
In general, the successive soundchanges in a language
often result in shortening the words. Where there is
highest stressaccent on one syllable, we find sound
changes taking place, which shorten the unstressed syl
lables. For instance, in English, which has since pre
historic times had such an accent, the primitive Germanic
*stainoz 'stone', nominative singular, and *stainon, accu
sative singular, were shortened, bv the historic time, to
Old English stmt; the Old English stāne, dative singular,
is in modern English, like these other forms, monosyl
labic stone [stown], and the Old English genitive singular
stānes and nominative and accusative plural stänas also,
are today monosyllables, stone's, stones [stownz]. The Old
English caru 'care', nominative singular, and all the
other forms of this word, in Old English disyllabic, are
today limited to one syllable, that which was in Old
English stressed, — a phenomenon so universal, in fact,
that our language, which in earlier periods had almost
no words of less than two syllables has now few uncom
pounded native words of more than one. So, to quote
a classical example, preEnglish *habēda and *habēdun
became in Old English hęfde and hfdon and are in pres
ent English (I, we) had
our soundchange would be due to the closing and diphthong֊
ization of the long vowels, which in turn, however, is unex
plained as to motive
212
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
In addition to the general facilitation involved in the
reduction of words from several syllables to one, it is
especially to be noticed, that, given a powerful stress
accent, indistinct, shortened articulation of the unstressed
syllables represents an immediate simplification, because
of the particular voice and breath conditions. The strong
stress on the accented vowel means that during its pro
duction the vocal chords are vibrating under high tension
(p. 25); after this tension is released there follows an
outrush of the breath which was shut in under the vocal
chords during voicing: it is easier, consequently, to pro
nounce them with shortened, weakened articulations and
with murmur instead of voice, lessening as much as pos
sible all interference with the breathstream. Thus, in
the history of English we find such LatinFrench loan
words as contemporaneous prohibition changing from the
full values of the vowels as written to the modern forms
with the unstressed vowels
often murmured. One might see in this weakening an
immediate result of the stressaccent on one favored syl
lable, were it not that in Italian, for instance, the same
words, with a similar accent, retain their full form con
temporaneo, proibizione. The same change as in English
has occurred in other languages with high wordstress.
The contrast in Latin, for example, between facio Ί do,
I make' and its compound conficio Ί finish' is due to the
preLatin conditions, in which all words were spoken with
stress on the first syllable: at this time the second syl
lable of conficio received its divergent weakened form.
The stressaccent of Russian has similarly changed an
older [po to ro 'p'i s'i] 'hurry up' to [pə tə ra 'p'i's'], an
older ['ktα n'aj t'e s'i] 'give greeting' to
and so on.
In other instances the simplification brought about by
CHANGE IN ARTICULATION
213
a soundchange is apparent upon closer inspection. For
instance, it has happened in the history of a number of
languages that such combinations as nr, lr became ndr,
ldr, and such as mr, ml became mbr, bl: in Middle
English, for instance, Iunres 'thunder's' became Iundres,
alre 'aldertree's' became aldre, Iymle 'thimble' became
Iymble, and *gelimre 'carpentry' had in Old English al
ready become getimbre (cf. modern timber). The apparent
addition to the required series of articulations is really
a simplification. In the transition from n to r, for in
stance, two changes had to be made simultaneously: (1)
the velum raised, to stop nasalizing, and (2) the tongue
moved from the contact of n to the position for r. The
change consists in raising the velum a little before the
tonguemovement, — an n, m with raised velum is of
course a d, , — so that only one movement need now
be made at a time: addition to the number of movements
there is none.
Some of the soundchanges so far discussed affected
certain sounds wherever they occurred in the language;
such, for instance, was the English vowelshift, also the
loss of [ç] in English. Other changes, called conditioned
soundchanges, occur only in certain phonetic surround
ings. Thus kn in English was not simplified to n be
tween vowels, as in achnowledge, the English, preLatin,
and Russian vowelweakenings occurred only in unstressed
syllables, and the preGermanic change of [p, t, k] to
[f, θ, x] (p. 208) did not take place when these sounds
were preceded by a spirant: spoon and stone, for example,
have preserved their ρ and t since before this preGer
manic change. The High German change of [p, t, k] to
[f, s, x], similarly, did not occur after spirants: the Ger
man words Spahn 'splinter' and Stein 'stone', German
representatives of spoon and stone, have retained the stops.
214
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
Initially the same sounds changed in German to [pf, ts,
kx], the former two, for instance, in Pfund 'pound'
and zehn 'ten', as opposed to the corresponding English
words.
Such conditioned soundchanges are usually transparent
as to the simplification they afford. We find, thus, that
the velar spirant [x] in German became the palatal [ç]
wherever it followed a front vowel, as in ich ['iç] 'I',
from older ['ix]. As in this case, the result is often an
assimilation of one articulation to the other, and the
term assimilation has come to be regularly used in this
connection.
When, as in this German example, a sound is assimi
lated to one preceding, we speak of progressive assimilation.
The modern English automatic soundvariation in the
pluralsuffix between [z] and [s] is the result of a pro
gressive assimilation: when in Early Modern English,
the unstressed vowel of forms like stones [stɔ :nə z], beasts
[be:st9z] was dropped, the [z] was assimilated, as to voi
cing, to a preceding unvoiced sound, whence modern
[stownz] but [bijsts].
Regressive assimilation is in the history of most lan
guages commoner. A widespread type of it is 'palatali
zation', the assimilation of a velar or dental to a follow
ing palatal. Thus preEnglish [k, g, g] became before
front vowels Old English [c, t, j]. The former two have
since become [t∫, dʒ . Instances are our words child,
ridge, yield, which were in Old English cild, hrycg,gieldan,
pronounced [cild, hryt, jeldan], and go back to Primitive
Germanic *kildiz, *hrugjoz, *geldonon. Latin cinque (with
initial [k], a late form for quinque 'five') and generum
(accusative, 'soninlaw') have had their initial sounds
palatalized in the modern forms, such as Italian['t∫iŋkwe,
'dʒ enero] and French [sε:k, ʒ γ:dr]; in these languages we
CHANGE IN ARTICULATION
215
can see also the palatalization of dentals, as when Latin
pretium 'price' and radium (accusative) 'ray' give in
Italian ['prεtso, 'radʒ o]. The tendency to palatalization
is especially active in the Slavic languages, where velar
and dental stops have been repeatedly subjected to it,
and all other consonants at least once; thus a preSlavic
*kensti' 'part' gave in Cechish[t∫α.st*] in Russian [t∫α* st'],
and in Polish [t∫ α.∫'t'∫]
Another example of regressive assimilation is the vowel
change which took place during the first millenium of
the Christian era in all the Germanic languages, assimi
lating stressed back vowels to following front vowels,
probably through the medium of palatalization of the
intervening consonants. Thus primitive Germanic *harjoz
gave Old English here 'army', *fōtiz gave f et 'feet', the
loanword (from Latin uncķa) *uŋki gave ynce 'inch', and
*mūsiz gave mys 'mice'.
A total regressive assimilation is the development of
Latin pt and kt into Italian tt, as in Septem 'seven' > sette,
octo 'eight' > otto.
Assimilation may be to both the preceding and the
following sounds, as when in preLatin s between vowels
became voiced, z; this z later changed to r, whence the
inflection of genus 'race, kin, sex', genitive generis, from
older *geneses.
The assimilative tendency may be counteracted in cer
tain connections. In English there has been a strong
tendency to voice unvoiced spirants, this tendency seems
to be assimilative and due to contiguous voiced sounds.
Thus in the early period of Modern English stones ['stɔ :nə s]
became ['stɔ :nə z], luxurious [luk '∫u: ri us] became [lug
ʒ u: ri us], with [wiθ] became [wiđ], is [is] became [iz],
was [was] became [waz], of [of] became [ov], and so on;
but this tendency was counteracted, after an accented
216
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
vowel, by some other factor, — perhaps by the outrush
of breath after the stress. Hence in such words as geese,
pence, luxury
and in the accented uses of of,
now in such cases written off, the spirant remained un
voiced. Initially, also, it was kept, owing, no doubt, to
the lack of preceding voicing, as in select, forget. At an
earlier stage of the language, probably in preEnglish,
the older [Θ] of the, this, that, then, etc. became in the
same way, owing to unaccented use of these words, [ð]
At a still earlier period, in preGermanic, there was a
change of exactly the same kind, by which for instance,
*wαsa 'I was' remained unchanged, but *ivēsumśn ' we were*
became *wēzumśn, — which difference of consonant is
preserved in the present was: were. This preGermanic
voicing is known as 'Verner's law'.
It is customary to set off certain soundchanges as
'sudden' in opposition to the majority which, like all our
examples so far, are called 'gradual'. These socalled
sudden soundchanges are changes in pronunciation which,
in part, could not have been arrived at through a series
of variants. Two types are comparatively common, meta
thesis and dissimilation.
There are but few indisputable cases of metathesis in
the known history of languages. Part of the supposed
cases are really gradual soundchanges. Thus preEng
lish *rinnan (as in the Old English compound gerinnan
'to coagulate') gave Old English teman 'to run', and pre
English *brinnan gave Old English biernan 'to burn'. In
these examples the 'metathesis' was probably a gradual
process, the r first becoming syllabic to the exclusion of
the vowel, which left only a palatal affection: [r'nan,
br'nan]; later a new vowel, determined by the palatal
coloring, arose before the r. Other cases of metathesis,
like the English dialectal ax for ask or the preGerman
CHANGE IN ARTICULATION
217
*atīk Vinegar' (modern Essig) for older *akīto are prob
ably not phonetic changes at all, as we shall see.
Dissimilation is due to the tendency which appears
when one tries to articulate such series as Peter Piper
picked a peck of pickled peppers. When the vocal organs
are to be placed repeatedly into the same position, it is
hard to keep in focus the exact part of the prospective
movementcomplex at which one has arrived: the ten
dency is to mistake the quicker movement of the atten
tion for the slower one of actual articulation, — to con
fuse an earlier for a later stage of the series; thus one
might say: Peter Piked . . . for Peter Pi(per pi)cked . . .
Another tendency is to confuse the unwonted repetition
of the same movement with some more practised succes
sion of diverse articulations, — to say, for instance,
Peter Piper ticked . . Both of these tendencies have in
rare instances brought about permanent phonetic changes.
To the former tendency are due the socalled haplologies,
such as Latin stipendium 'stipend' for older *stipipendium
or Ancient Greek amphoreús 'amphora' for earlier amphi
phoreús. As well as a repeated syllable a repeated sound
may be omitted, as in the colloquial Latin cinque [kiŋkwe]
'five' for earlier quinqué [kwinkwe]. The other phase
of the dissimilative tendency appears in such changes as
Late Latin pelegrīus 'pilgrim' for earlier peregrīnus.
Here again most of the quotable examples, including
probably this, are really not cases of phonetic change in
the strict sense, but rather of assimilative mispronuncia
tion of words of a foreign language: pelegrlnus was prob
ably originated by people whose native language was
not Latin, or at any rate did not contain this word. A
genuine dissimilation occurred in preGreek, where two
successive syllables beginning with aspirated stops were
dissimilated, the former losing its aspiration: thus, *thé
218
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
thnāke 'he has died, is dead' became téthïēke, *khékhēna
'I' have gaped' became kékhēna. The same dissimilation
took place in preIndic, such forms as *dliadhāti çhe puts*
becoming in Sanskrit dadhāti.
A similar process may lead, on the other hand, to
assimilative repetition of the same sound in the place
of two articulations originally different, as when a pre
Latin *pibeti 'he drinks' gives Latin bibit, with b for p.
Such sudden changes as all these are, however, rare,
compared to the gradual changes above described.
The specific change in the complex conditions of hu
man existence which brought about a given soundchange
is, then, as a rule, hidden from our view. We have reason
to believe that, if we knew the underlying change in the
conditions of life, we should find it affecting not the
particular sounds which we see changing, but rather
some more general factor of articulation, such as the
restposition of the vocal organs, or the manner of voi
cing and breathing. The preponderant tendency of sound
change to simplification of wordforms, and the harmony
of various soundchanges in a language (such as change
of stop articulations in preGermanic, spirantvoicing,
shifting of vowels, and weakening of unstressed syllables
in English, palatalization in Slavic), all point in this
direction. As a result of some such fundamental change
there take place the various soundchanges found to oc
cur in a given period. The individual soundchanges
bear, each of them, accordingly, the character of lessen
ing of the labor of speech by means of adaptation to
the prevailing restposition of the vocal organs or to the
prevailing manner of speaking. We may suppose that
every soundchange is assimilative in nature, changing
some discordant element in the habits of pronunciation
into an articulation harmonious with the total speech ac
CHANGE IN ARTICULATION
219
tivities of the time. Each change, however, probably in
turn displaces this total habitcomplex, so that further
adjustments become necessary and an endless series of
soundchanges results. Accordingly, when we establish
that a given soundchange is simplification, we are not
naming its cause, but merely describing, in part, the
general nature of soundchange. The cause is probably
in every case a change in the speechhabits as a whole,
due, in turn, to a change in the underlying conditions of
life. As soon as we try to determine these we are on
the open sea of surmise.
Only under one set of circumstances do soundchanges
bid fair to be thoroughly explained. We know that it
is only under the most favorable pedagogic conditions
that people ever learn to pronounce a foreign language
correctly. As a result of a simultaneous association, one
hears a resembling familiar sound where a foreign one
has actually been uttered, and even when one hears the
latter correctly, imitation is usually impossible (p. 19).
We see this in the speech of the foreign people who
learn English. In some parts of Wisconsin, for instance,
a German 'accent' is audible even in the speech of the
younger generation that does not speak German, but
learned from its parents the English (with German sounds)
which they spoke. In this case the growing intercom
munication with people who speak purer English will
no doubt in time efface the peculiarity. There have been
however, instances where a comparatively small number
of conquerors have forced their language on a people of
alien language. In such a case we may expect to find
substituted for the sounds of the new language the cor
responding nearest sounds of the old. The clearest in
stance at present known of such soundsubstitution is in
the IndoEuropean 1anguages of India. In prehistoric times
220
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
the bearers of the IndoEuropean preIndic language enter
ed the country and forced their speech upon certain sections
of the inhabitants, from whom, in the course of time ; it
spread farther and farther. As some of the older languages,
however, escaped and are spoken to this day, — for in
stance, in the Dravidian languages, — we know something
about the phonetic habits of the people upon whom the
preIndic language was forced. They had two series of
tonguetip stops, one purely dental, like the modern
French series [t, d] and one pronounced even farther
back than our alveolars, namely the cerebrals [t, d]
(p. 30). The language of the IndoEuropean invaders
had only the former series, but in all the historic lan
guages that represent it, such as Sanskrit, we find the
latter series also: it was substituted, evidently, for some
sounds not familiar to the older inhabitants, probably
for the dorsal articulations [c, t] produced in the same
place. The task of tracing such soundchanges has been
barely undertaken by students of language; it may be
expected that the phonetic change in the history of such
dialects as South German, the Romance languages, and
the Slavic languages will receive light from this treatment.
When a conditioned soundchange occurs a new multi
formity of sounds may be created Thus preEnglish
had no palatal stops until there occurred the change of
velar stops to palatals before front vowels, as in the
words child, ridge. Similarly, Old English had no zsound,
but, owing to changes in which s, under certain condi
tions, came to be voiced, we have now both s and z. As
long as the conditions remain undisturbed the result of
such a change is an automatic soundvariation. In form
ing the genitive of nouns, for instance, we use the suffix
[ө z] after sibilants, [s] after unvoiced sounds other than
sibilant3, and [z] after voiced sounds other than sibilants
ANALOGIC CHANGE
221
The variation is automatic in this suffix. The same is
true of the preterite suffix of our regular verbs (uaited,
waded, — passed, hoped, — turned, rowcd). The variation
is automatic, further, in the sibilant plural suffix of our
nouns, in so far as they are regular. In our colloquial
pronunciation [j] varies automatically with [ƒ] after [t]
and with [3] after [d], for we say have you, dont you,
did you with three different initials of you. There was
a time when of [ov], with [wiđ] were used in unstressed,
off [of], with [wi0] in stressed position (p. 215).
This automatic soundvariation may in several ways
be disturbed. Further phonetic change may do it The
preGermanic spirantvoicing after unaccented vowel, for
instance, left such automatic variations as *wαsa 'I' was':
*wezumśn cwe were' (p. 216); when, however, the stress
was later shifted everywhere to the first syllable, the
variation was of course no longer automatic, but purely
traditional, as still in the modern forms, was: icere. So,
by a preEnglish vowelassimilation (p. 215) *fōtiz, the
nominative plural of *fōt 'foot', became *fētiz, a variation
whose automatism was destroyed by the phonetic change
which dropped the second syllable of *fetiz, giving Old
English fēt: here, as in the Modern English foot: feet,
the variation is, of course, no longer automatic.
The other processes of change in language mentioned
at the beginning of this chapter (p. 196), which we shall
now discuss, may bring about the same result.
1. Analogic change. When change in the form of
words is in any sense due to their meaning, we speak
not of phonetic, but of analogic change.
We have seen that partial formal similarity between
words, when it expresses a corresponding semantic simi
larity, is due to the psychic factor of assimilation (p. 59, f.).
We have seen, further, that all such correspondence he«
222
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
tween meaning and form is maintained by repeated pro
cesses of assimilation in the mind of every speaker
(p. 93, f.). If the same assimilations were always made, the
form of words would, except for phonetic change (I use
the word here, as always, in the strict sense), remain
stable. There are, however, a number of factors which
constantly displace the conditions under which the assimi
lations of speech take place.
Such factors are changes in mental organization, in
culture, in surroundings. Not only changes in habitat
and the progress of civilization, but also the vicissitudes
of all the individual lives that go to make up the com
munity, make it impossible that the same topics should
always be spoken of, or be spoken of by the same peo
ple. The frequency, absolute and relative, with which
any sentence or word recurs is constantly changing. As
a result, words well practised a few centuries ago are
now rare, and words then rare or unknown are today in
constant use.
Another factor is the effect of phonetic change. Forms
that where once nearly alike may become very different,
owing to a conditioned soundchange. In preEnglish
there was a large group of nouns that formed their
plural in as, e. g. Old English hring, plural hringas
(modern ring, rings);, stāt, stäncas (modern stone, stones).
When one spoke the plural of such a noun the others,
of course, gave assimilative support. Among them was
also
'knīfe', plural 'knīfas'. During this period,
however, ƒ between voiced sounds became voiced, so that
we have to this day. singular knīfe, plural knives, with
change of consonant, and this plural is now, of course,
irregular: when it is being spoken the regular plurals, such
as rings, stones, cliffs, no longer lend their full support. In
other words, the conditions of wordformation are altered.
ANALOGIC CHANGE
223
Another highly potent factor is the change of speak
ing individuals. Every child has to learn all the habits
of association which form the language, including of
course the assimilative habits of inflection and derivation.
Years elapse before the child's experience with speech is
anything like that which may be called normal in the
community. Insufficient practice ; to take a common in
stance, in the preterite forms brought, came will allow
an assimilation by the regular preterite forms, such as
lived, played to become effective: the child says bringed,
corned. The child is soon cured of the most striking of
these false assimilations, but no speaker and no genera
tion of speakers ever succeeds in reproducing entirely, in
this respect, the speech of those who went before. Now
adays the great prevalence of printed speech lessens our
divergence from earlier forms, especially as it allows of
compendia (grammar and dictionary) of what is 'standard'
speech; yet the obvious fact that we cannot and do not
speak as we write is a confirmation of what has been
said. The 'ungrammatical' speech of the classes less
familiar with books, is a further witness. Thus we find
that the plural of cow was formerly kine, of hook a form
that would now be leech (Old English bēc). These
changes scarcely differ from those of the child when it
says hringed, corned, — only, in fact, in that the condi
tions of the speechcommunity as a whole were such as
to produce the innovation independently in many indi
vidual speakers and to make it so natural for their hear
ers, that these for the most part accepted the new forms
without being aroused by their novelty. Where a hearer
of an older generation, who had used and heard the older
form of the word in question too much not to notice the
innovation, would correct a speaker, there people might
become conscious of the change, but for the most part
224
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
the process is as unconscious as the child's innovation
of bringed. Every one of us is taking part in such move
ments, unconsciously, unless corrected by someone of an
older generation or someone more practised in the word
concerned, — and even then, if the change is well under
way among our fellowspeakers, we usually forget the
correction or at least the direction which it took, —
whether it was form Ճ or form B which we were told
was wrong. In communities without written records or
with but little use of writing, — that is, in all but a
few modern communities, — the authoritative force of
literary usage, grammar, and dictionary is, of course,
wanting on the conservative side.
This process, then, is called analogic change. We
ought rather to speak of innovation due to the assimi
lative influencing of articulation by semantically associated
words, — that is, of 'associative soundassimilation'. The
term 'analogic change' or 'analogy' is, in fact, retained
only because it is conveniently brief. The modification
'false analogy' is better, because it conveys at least the
idea of innovation, as opposed to the regular assimilative
processes by which all speech is formed.
The term 'analogy' is most out of place in the simplest
instances, those which most clearly show their character
of assimilations; in speaking of these many scholars ac
cordingly prefer the name 'contamination'. Contamina
tion is said to occur when the articulation of a word is
assimilatively modified by that of another single word
of related meaning. Genuine cases of such contamination
are hard to find; as a rule, when the conditions are
minutely studied, it 'appears that some further factor
beyond the single semantically associated word was ac
tive in inducing the change. The English pronoun ye
is supposed to have been a contaminationform due to
ANALOGIC CHANGE
225
the influence of we upon you. The numeral four began
in Primitive IndoEuropean with a velar or uvular con
sonant with liprounding; qǔ , and probably got its initial
under the influence of five, but there may have been
also an element of dissimilation in the change: the word
seems to have been at one time *qǔ eqüor, where dissimi
lation to *peqǔ or would be possible. Even aside from
this possibility, the process of counting is so common
that we might speak of a regressive assimilation, 'five'
affecting 'four'. The initial of the Slavic word for 'nine',
originally no, seems to have been assimilated by the
word for 'ten': Old Bulgarian deveti 'nine' (we should
expect *novetǐ ), desetǐ 'ten'. The Latin noctū 'by night'
is due to an assimilation of nocte (ablative of nox 'night')
by diū 'by day'.
In most cases the assimilative effect is due not to
a single word, but to a whole series of words in which
the assimilating sound goes hand in hand with the com
mon semantic element. Thus the word squawk may be
looked upon as a contamination of squeak by squall, but
talk and caw and even maw may also have been effective:
in such cases the term 'adaptation' has been used. Latin
gravis 'heavy' appears in Italian as greve. The change
of a to e may be looked upon as a contamination with
leve 'light' (Latin levis), or as an adaptation, if one sup
poses breve 'short' (Latin brevis) also to have been effect
ive. English render is a loan from the French rendre,
which owes its nasal to an adaptation of Latin reddere
to prehendere (French, prendre) 'to take' and other words
in Latin ֊ endere (French endre), such as vendere (French
vendre) 'to sell'. English egotism is an adaptation of
egoism to such words as despotism, nepotism. English
shimmer appeared by the side of such words as Old
English sexma 'a light' and the verb shine primarily under
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
226
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
the influence of glimmer, hut other words in immer were
no doubt also involved. A certain case of adaptation it
is, when, much later, the word flimmer appears by the
side of flame and glimmer, slummer. In this way arise
such sets of words as clash, crash, dash, flash, etc. (p. 133, f.).
For instance, flash is on the one hand due to flame and
perhaps others of the fl words, and on the other to
those of the ash group. Jounce is due to jump, jolt and
to hounce, trounce.
The third and commonest kind of analogic change, to
which the term best applies, is called also 'proportional
analogy'. When, in normal speech, we wish to form the
plural of girl and the numberelement, owing to such as
sociated words as hoys, curls, and, in fact to all regular
plurals, is at once presented as [z], the result may, meta
phorically, be viewed as the solution of a proportional
equation: 'boy: hoys as girl: x' This way of stating the
thing is, to be sure, misleading, — it is characteristic,
in fact, of a post factum way of viewing linguistic oc
currences as if they were results of deliberate individual
action, — nevertheless, it makes possible a diagrammatic
indication of the place a new form holds in the morpho
logic system. Thus when the form cows for kine arose it
could be looked upon as the result of a similar equation
to that which gave girls, e. g. dog: dogs as cow: x. Hence
the name 'proportional analogy'; needless to say that in
reality the result is due not to any such mathematical
comparison, but to a number of complex and variously
graded psychic forces in each of the many individuals
that make up the community.
'Proportional analogy' is not separable from the pro
cesses of contamination and adaptation. The English
dialectal squench, similar in meaning to quench, may be
looked upon as a contamination of this word and squelch]
ANALOGIC CHANGE
227
but, as the association of squirt and even of other words
with initial s, such as splash, spout, souse, etc., must also
have contributed to the assimilation, we may also speak
of an adaptation; finally, we may look upon the initial
S as an element entering into articulation because of its
semantic tone, due to occurrence in squash, as opposed to
quash, splash as opposed to plash, smash as opposed to mash,
and evensouseas opposed to douse: as this last was surely a
phase in the psychic process resulting in squench, this word
may be looked upon as a 'proportional' formation (plash:
splash as quench: x). In short, any attempt at classifying
assimilative formations by the number of inducing words
is frustrated by the complexity of the processes involved.
There remains the classification of assimilative pro
cesses according to the semantic character of the ele
ments involved. It appears at once that these elements
may be, from the point of view of the language concerned,
either conceptual or relational.
The conceptual elements are involved, for instance, in
the origin of the English ye (p. 224), in the changes of
initial which produced the English four and the Slavic
word for 'nine' (p. 226); further, in the origin of squawk,
of squench, and of the Italian greve. The same may per
haps be said of shimmer, flimmer, and flash, above; as
long as we can not with any freedom add immer or ֊ ash
to other elements, we can hardly call these formational
soundsequences anything but material. Let us suppose,
however, that these phonetic elements ֊ immer and ash
should become extended to more and more words, until
it became customary to use them in a given signification
with any initialelement, then they would have become
freely usable derivational elements. It is, thus, analogic
change which gradually gives 'life' — i. e. morphologic
mobility — to derivational and inflectional elements.
228
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
A few more examples of analogic change in the con
ceptual parts of words may be cited. The Latin word
for 'your' was vester: in the course of time its vowel be
cam assimilated to that of noster 'our', under the addi
tional influence, no doubt, of the parallelism of vos 'you'
and nos V e ' : the word in the modern forms of Latin
corresponds phonetically to a voster, e. g. French votre;
Italian vostro. The German verb lügen 'to lie, tell false
hoods' was formerly liegen and owes its vowel to the as
sociation of Lüge 'a lie', with the parallelism of fliegen
'to fly': Fliege 'a fly',peitschen 'to whip': Peitsche 'a whip',
and the like. English neither, instead of older nawther,
owes its form to the influence of either and the parallelism
of nor: or, never: ever.
Analogic change in the grammatical elements of words
is even commoner. If we recall that the partial phonetic
similarity between the different inflectional forms of a
word is due to assimilative development (p. 59), it will
be apparent that this kind of analogic change is one of
the chief shaping forces of language. The historical in
stances, as this leads us to expect, are frequent in which
divergence between the forms of a word is thus obliter
ated. Psychologically, the closely associated forms of
the same word are, of course, powerful factors in bring
ing about such assimilation. Of the examples of analogic
change so far quoted the child's error of bringed, comed
for brought, came belongs here: just such analogies as
these transform suppletive and irregular into regular in
flection. They have changed, for instance, the plural of
cow from line to cows, that of look from beech (i. e. Old
English lc ) to books (p. 223). In these changes the other
forms of the word are active together with the parallel
ism of the regularly inflected words. Here belongs, further,
the change in dialectal English of the preterite and un
ANALOGIC CHANGE
229
real of the verb to le. The form was entered into arti
culation instead of Standard English were because its
assimilative influence was supported by the entire volume
of habit represented by the remaining verbs of our lan
guage : I had it, They had it, I wish I had it, — I saw
it, They saw it, I wish I saw it, and so on; all confirm
the habit of articulating the same form in the plural
and unreal as in the singular of the real preterite; hence
They was there, I wish I was there. As the plural is
commoner than the unreal, and in the present tense real
partly distinguished from the singular (he has: they have,
etc.) the form were is in this value better retained than
in the unreal.
The forms was and were differ by vowel and consonant
variation. The vowelvariation goes back to Primitive
IndoEuropean time; it is known among linguistic students
by the German name 'ablaut'. The consonant variation
arose in preGermanic time through the spirantvoicing
after unstressed vowels, 'Verner's law' (p. 216). In pre
Germanic the two forms were at first *uαsa and *ivēsumé;
the spirantvoicing changed the s of the latter form to z:
*wezumé;, later the accent came to fall in all words on
the first syllable, whence Primitive Germanic *uēzume;
in preWestGermanic, finally, the z became r: *wrume;
then, what with certain preEnglish changes, we find Old
English uęes, uvęron. Owing to these same causes a number
of verbs in Old English had soundvariation in the pret
erite. Thus one said rād 'I' rode' but ridon V e rode',
wrāt 'I' wrote' but writon V e wrote', seah 'I' saw' but
sāuon 'we saw', and so on. While phonetic change is re
sponsible for the loss of the pluralending in Modern Eng
lish, the association of verbs that lacked the soundvari
ation, such as Old English fēoll 'I fell', plural fēollon 'we
fell', wōc 'I awoke', plural uōcon 'we awoke', impelled
230
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
the assimilation of the two stemforms: rode, wrote, with
vowel corresponding to that of rād, wrāt, are now used
in the plural also; saw corresponds in form to the Old
English plural. The same levelling has taken place in
the other languages that are modern forms of Primitive
Germanic. Of these the Scandinavian languages have gone
farther than English, all verbs, including var 'was, were',
having the same form for singular and plural. Dutch agrees
with English, except for the retention of the pluralsuffix,
having assimilated everywhere except in was Vas', plural
waren 'were'. German has regularized this verb {war,
plural waren), but retains ward (more commonly, howev
er, wurde), plural wurden 'became'. It is interesting, further,
to see how some of the other languages which historically
represent Primitive IndoEuropean have made the same
levelling of the preterite ablaut. Thus the Latin 'perfect'
tense, which is partly the same in origin as our preter
ite, has everywhere the same vowel for singular and
plural, e. g. tutudl 'I beat', tutudimus 'we beat', where
Primitive IndoEuropean had, respectively, *tetoud and
*tetud (for instance, in Sanskrit still tutóda and tutudima).
So in Ancient Greek, beside the singular pepoitha 'Ί have
placed confidence, I trust', we find the plural pepoķhamen
instead of an older *pépithnen1)
Another example of the regularizing force of grammat
ical analogic change is the development of the English
noun. In preEnglish there occurred a soundchange which
turned back vowels of accented syllables into front vow
els, if there followed a front vowel in the next syllable
(p. 215). The resulting soundvariation, as seen, for in
stance, in the Old English nominative singular fòt, but
1) Here the change in Latin is due chiefly to a substitution
of old middlevoice forms for active, that in Greek to direct
grammatical analogy.
ANALOGIC CHANGE
231
plural fēt from older *fotiz (modern foot: feet), is called
by linguists 'umlaut'. The inflection of the word 'foot'
was in Old English as follows:
Singular.
Plural.
Nominativeaccusative: fōt
fēt (older *fōtiz)
Genitive: fōtes
fōta
Dative: fēt (older *fōti) fōtum.
In the singular the lack of vowelvariation in most nouns
(e. g. 'stone': stān, stānes, stāne) led in time to a new da
tive form fōte; in the plural, where the nominative and
accusative, the mostused cases, had ē, the same influence
of regular nouns led to an analogic assimilation of the
vowel ō to ē in the other forms, whence the modern in
flection of singular foot, plural feet. In the case of hook,
modern plural books (p. 223), the plural form was assimila
ted to the singular in vowel and consonant and also to the
regular plural inflection with sibilant.
This kind of grammatical analogy is called 'material'
as opposed to the 'formal', in which the assimilation brings
greater unity not to the forms of one word, but to the
corresponding forms of different words. Thus the change
in the vowel and consonant of the plural of book, by which
this form became more like the singular was 'material'
grammatical analogy, but the assumption by this plural
of the regular sibilant suffix was 'formal'. The 'formal'
process differs from the 'material' in that the inducing
factor in the assimilation is not an element of the other
forms of the same word, but the total impulse of elements
of the desired meaning in numerous other words. In Old
English, for instance, only a limited part of the nouns
formed their genitive singular and nominative plural with
ssuffixes. The nominative plural of hūs 'house', word
'word', teoru 'tar', trēo 'tree' was homonymous with the
232
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
nominative singular: hūs, word, teoru, treo] the genitive
singular of caru 'care' was care, the nominative plural
cara; spere 'spear' was in the nominative plural speru,
tunge 'tongue', mōna 'moon' were in the genitive singular
and nominative plural tungan, mōnan, and so on. When
in these cases the corresponding forms of regular nouns,
such as stan 'stone' (genitive singular stānes, nominative
plural stanas) induced assimilation to the sinflection, the
different forms of any one word were often made less
alike than they were before, but the total inflectional
habits of the language gained in unity. The French or
dinal numbers formerly differed extensively from the car
dinals: 'one' was un, but 'first' premier] 'two' deux, 'se
cond' second; 'three' trois, 'third' tiers] *four' quatre, 'fourth'
quart] 'five' cinq, 'fifth' quint] but above these numbers
the ordinal was regularly derived from the cardinal by
a suffix ième, e. g. six 'six', sixieme 'sixth', sept 'seven',
sepiieme 'seventh'. Both factors, the material and the form
al, of grammatical analogy brought about a cinquieme,
quatrième, troisieme, and although second is still heard,
deuxieme is commoner, premier alone being undisturbed.
While as a rule grammatical analogy is thus regulari
zing, this is not always the case. German feminine nouns
have all their singular forms alike; the only exception
is the genitive form nachts 'at night', influenced by the
masculine genitive tags 'by day': the force of the usual
feminine declension is, however, sufficient to retain, in
all but this somewhat isolated adverbial use, the regular
genitive Nacht] compare Latin noctū (p. 225).
It is needless to add that, just as old forms are assimi
lated, so new ones are created by the analogic process.
The regular assimilations of all speech are no different
from the creation of an analogic new form, such as books
or the French deuxieme when they first were spoken, and
ANALOGIC CHANGE
233
this process, in turn, is no different from that by which
an entirely new form or word may arise. Thus, such nouns
as telephone, automobile, aeroplane were used in the plural
in English with the regular pluralsuffix as soon as they
were introduced, without the least consciousness of an
innovation (p. 70). In short, the articulation of some
new analogic form is, in the process, no different from
that of an old form. The action of the speaker who first
used the plural automobiles was no different from that by
which on the same day he may have said wagons or
horses.
Certain morphologic habits, like the English ssuffix
for the plural, extend to an unlimited number of words
and spread freely to new words, while others are limited
to certain words and do not freely spread to others, —
such, for instance, as our suffix hood for derived nouns,
as in boyhood, manhood, motherhood, priesthood, which
cannot be extended, e. g. to form unclehood or friendhood.
We speak, accordingly, of living' and 'dead' morphologic
processes. Even a 'dead' morphologic process, as long as
the formalsemantic relation between the words affected
is still felt, — that is, as long as it is still really a morpho
logic process, — can occasionally be extended by analogy.
The amount of 'life' in a morphologic process may be
of any degree, and may constantly change. Most of our
verbs form their past tense with a dental suffix; compared
to this very living process vowelvariation for tense is
dead: yet even it has, in certain cases been extended. The
preterite of the verb dive in Standard English is dived,
but is in dialectal speech frequently assimilated to that
of drive {strive), becoming dove. In German there is a
pluralsuffix of nouns, er accompanied in certain cases
by vowelvariation (e. g. Lamm 'lamb', plural Lämmer),
which has never been very living, yet, word by word, it
234
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
has spread from use a thousand years ago in a dozen
words (and in some of them not exclusive use) to exclu
sive use in about seventyfive today. The ֊ sh of such Eng
lish verbs as clash, crash was probably in Primitive Indo
European and perhaps even later a living suffix; from
this time we have the verb thrash and perhaps also mash.
By the Primitive Germanic time the suffix was dead. In
the historical period of English, however, through assimi
lation due to the meaning especially of thrash, verbs in
֊ ash have been multiplied (e. g. flash from flame) until
֊ ash (not sh) is today a fairly important morphologic
element and may, for all we know, become living. At
least, if it did, this would be precedeiited, to take one of
many instances, by the development of our living suffix
en by which we derive verbs such as fatten, shorten,
moisten from, adjectives and occasionally from nouns
(hearten). Just as there was in Primitive IndoEuropean
a living suffix which today would give ֊ sh, so in Old Eng
lish there was a living suffix ֊ ian (phonetically this gives
today zero) by which verbs could be derived from nouns
and adjectives, e. g. wundian (modern to wound) from
wund 'a wound' (modern wound). From the adjective
fægen 'glad' there was thus derived fcegenian 'to rejoice'
and from the adjective open 'open' the verb openian 'to
open'. The influence of these words caused the innovation
of deriving from fest 'firm, fast' not only fæstian but also
fcestenian (our fasten), and later, under the added impulse
of this and each new formation, other verbs in ֊ enian,
modern ֊ en, which at last made this suffixation a living
one.
If we had as complete records of the history of lan
guages as we could wish, it would thus be possible to see
in detail not only how old forms changed phonetically,
but also how new forms, whether inflectional or other,
ANALOGIC CHANGE
235
came by analogic change into the language. Only a small
minority of English, German, or French words and forms,
for instance, could be traced back by merely observing
phonetic changes, to the earliest known stage of these
languages. In by far the most instances we should find
that our word or form ('phoneme') had been created by
analogic change. As to the exact methods of this change
the internal conditions in each language are of course
decisive. Thus in French most morphologic classes are
due to the use of suffixes, hence it is by shifting these,
as in deuxième, that new words arise. In English we have
some suffixation, and new words, for example in er, such
as teacher, preacher, bicycler, advertiser can always be form
ed, but since in English vowel and consonant variations
also are used, these too can underly assimilations, so as
to produce new words of the squawk or squench type. It
is scarcely necessary to add that compoundwords, too,
in languages that have them, are formed on the analogy
of others; if, today, we can form in English a compound
like automobiledriver, in which the relation of the parts
is peculiarly compositional and would not be allowed in
syntactic collocation, that possibility is due only to the
analogy of such older compounds as carriagedriver, mule
driver, giantkiller, and so on.
It would be natural, had we not this knowledge of
analogic change, to see in many phenomena, such as the
rise of new words or the peculiar relations allowed be
tween the members of compounds, some mysterious force
which presided over the origin of speech and now in these
instances bashfully shows itself to the degenerate present.
This mistake, indeed, has often been made, and one may
read in many places lists of 'primitive creations' (such
words as squawk, flash) and references to a time when
'mere wordsi ¡ems' could be joined, in any semantic rela
236
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
tion to each other, to form compounds. But whenever
the facts in a specific case are brought to light, it appears
plainly that, apart from phonetic change, analogic change
is the only power that shapes or creates the forms of
language, — that we have no right to assume that there
ever was a golden age when this was otherwise. To say
this is only to say that the semantic value of language
is always and exclusively dependent on the habits of ex
pression of the community. If the associational habits of
speech in the community are such as to call forth the
utterance of a given form, that form will come, whether
it has ever been spoken before or is an innovation, and
will be explicable only on the basis of these habits and
never on the strength of any ulterior connection, real
or imagined, between the sound and the sense. The as
sumption, for instance, that words like squeeze, squawk,
or flap are in some way inherently significant of the ac
tions they designate and owe their origin to this signif
icance, is unfounded. They are significant to English
speaking people because, in the first place, we use them
in the sense that they have, and, secondly, because the
soundgroups they contain (squ, fl, auk, ap) occur in
other words of related meaning. These soundgroups have
gradually come, in the history of the language, through
a series of analogic formations, to carry their present
meaning. Should it appear that they are in some other
way than by mere custom representative of the experien
ces they designate, then we should know only one of the
factors that contributed to their spreading from sporadic
and innovational to regular use.
Even were a speaker consciously to set out to invent
a word, he could not escape the influence of his earlier
expressive habits, — that is, to keep to the accepted term,
could not escape the process of linguistic analogy. In the
SEMANTIC CHANGE
237
actions of an individual there come into evidence unique
factors of causation which in a communal process are
subdued and compensated by the conflicting factors of
other individuals, — where they are not, indeed, from the
start overcome by the unquestioning submission to commu
nal practice. Innumerable individual tendencies are suppress
ed in the speech, and, to a lesser extent, in the religious,
artistic, cultural, political, economic, and other activities
of every person. When an individual invents a word, these
factors come into action and, though their complexity
and singularity make the result harder to analyze than
the result of a communal process, — often, in fact, with
the data we have, impossible to analyze, — it is certain
that the laws which produce it are ultimately the same.
The most famous individual formation is the word gas,
invented about 1600 by the Dutch chemist Van Helmont.
He believed that gas was a phenomenon related to the
idea which the Greeks expressed by chaos, which in Dutch
receives nearly the same pronunciation as gas, and he
used also a term blas (a fairly regular derivative from
the'Dutch verb blazen 'to blow') for an aerial radiation
from the stars. 'Lewis Carroll's' famous poem of The
Jabberwocky in Through the Looking Glass contains a num
ber of individual creations, together with the author's
explanation. In most cases even words known to have
been invented by individuals are regular derivatives, e. g.
radium.
5. Semantic change. The third process of change in
language alters not the form of words, but only the se
mantic content with which they are associated This pro
cess is called semantic change. We have seen that, as no
two experiences are ever really identical, no word can
ever be used twice in exactly the same meaning. When
our attention analyzes a total experience into elements,
238
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
we constantly assimilate these elements to earlier ex
periences and express them by words used for these earlier
experiences. The assimilation is due to a partial similarity
between the earlier experiences and the present one, a
similarity inhering in some uniform component of both
experiences. This component common to all of the ex
periences designated by the same word is called the dom
inant element (p. 57, f.). When we say John humped his
head, for instance, we assimilate the experience of John's
head to that of the other heads we have seen and known,
even though as to size, shape, color of hair, and many
other features, his head is by no means identical with
these other heads or with any one of them. In fact, as
to certain details, both objective and subjective, the present
experience of this very head is different from any earlier
experience of the same head. In short, the experience is
assimilated, by virtue of certain dominant features, to a
host of past experiences, and is designated by the same
word. If we take into consideration the points of individu
ality of the present experience, it is clear that even here
the word has been used in a new meaning, that there
has been here a semantic change. From this to other
changes more striking to an observer after the fact there
is a gradual and by no means definable transition. The
speaker, for instance, who first spoke of a head of cab
bage was no more conscious of having made an innovation
than the utterer of John humped his head. At the time
of this new utterance the dominant elements that brought
about the new use of the word, were only very general
ones of shape and size: the cabbagehead was to the speaker
as much a head, — it called up the word head as immedi
ately, — as any human or animal head. By far the most
semantic changes, that is to say, are unconscious shift
ings of meaning directly resulting from the earlier uses
SEMANTIC CHANGE
239
of tbe word and tbe dominant element witb wbicb it is
associated, and are made independently and simultane
ously by numerous speakers. It is only tbe observer after
wards looking back over bistory wbo sees tbat a change
bas taken place.
Our example of a head of cabbage illustrates a 'partial'
semantic cbange: one in wbicb tbe older meanings bave
so far remained in use side by side witb tbe newer. As
long as tbis is tbe case and no intermediate meanings
bave been lost, tbe normal speaker is not usually conscious
of any extension. Not only were tbe people wbo first spoke
of tbe head or tbe wing of an army, tbe leg of a table,
tbe foot of a mountain, tbe nose of a cliff, tbe heart of a
cabbage or of a country, of books lying, glasses standing,
and rivers running, unconscious of making any innovation,
but we also are normally unconscious of any deviation
from wbat, upon deliberation, seems to us the more original
use of these words.
When we speak at different times of John's head, the
head of an army, and a head of cabbage, the different
momentary associations in which the word appears may,
however, involve a difference of dominant elements, even
if there was no such difference when these uses first arose.
In the first case, let us say, if we stood behind John, the
dominant element may have been the vision of a shock
of hair, in the second case of soldiers riding at the front,
and in tbe last case of a cluster of green cabbageleaves.
Tbe same mobility of dominant element appears, for ex
ample, in the successive uses of law in law and medicine,
law and order, law and chance, law of gravity, and so on.
If it should occur, now, that some of these uses should
lapse, — if, let us suppose, people stopped speaking of
a person's head and instead used some other word, such
as occiput, and stopped speaking of the study of law and
240
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
said in this connection only jurisprudence, — then the
dominant element could be said to have definitely and
permanently changed: — 'total' semantic change.
This, in fact, is a frequent occurrence. Thus disease
(dis֊ ease) once meant discomfort of any kind; but, as the
uses of the word aside from that represented, say, by
health and disease, were forgotten, the dominant element
has taken permanently one of the forms among which it
wavered in the earlier use. If, as is probable, the word
ness for 'cliff' once meant 'nose', it is an example of the
same process: the lapse of certain uses has left the domi
nant element changed. So meat once meant 'food' (cf. sweet
meat), but the value of the word in such uses as meat and hone,
meat and hide, where 'meat', as the edible part of something,
was contrasted with the inedible part, has alone survived, so
that the dominant element ('flesh') of these uses has become
fixed. To spill was once to 'destroy'; the uses other than
that in spill the milk and the like lapsing, the dominant
element changed to that of pouring out a liquid. The
adverb hardly hardly) once meant 'firmly, vigorously'.
They hardly followed the enemy then meant that they follow
ed close upon them. The other uses lapsed until only
this of 'closely' remained, and of this use the locutions
where 'closely' had the sense of 'just, barely' alone re
mained to fix the dominant element of present speakers.
The history of nearly (nearly) is similar. In all these
instances the change is at root a change in the habits of
association. In the case of the word meat, for example,
what has happened is really that Englishspeaking people
in such experiences as that of someone's having enough
to eat and to drink have ceased to associate the experience
element in question with the sounds meat and associate
it instead with the word food] the sounds meat, on the
other hand, they have come to associate with the ex
SEMANTIC CHANGE
241
perience of edible flesh. In some cases formal causes
prompt these changes of association. Thus masli originally
meant 'to mix', — cf. sour mash, bran mash, — but owing
to the association of the phonetic element ash with vio
lent action {clash, crash, dash, etc.) and of the whole word
with smash (cf.,plash: splash, lash: slash, etc.), the present
meaning of 'to crush' became associated with it.
In the examples so far given the change in habits of
association was due to the prevalence, for reasons mostly
too complex to allow of our tracing, of certain semantic
connections. A few examples can be cited where the prev
alence was due to connection with actually uttered words
of a sentence rather than with semantically related words.
The French word for 'nothing' rien originally meant 'a
thing, something' (Latin rem); it came to be used, how
ever, so prevalently in the connection ne... rien ' n o t . . . a
thing', e. g. H ne dit rien 'He says not a thing, He says
nothing' that it came to be associated with a dominant
element that included the negative idea, until now a
Frenchman answering a question 'What did he say?' can
answer Rien 'Nothing'. The same is true of jamais 'never':
formerly it meant 'any more, ever' (Latin jam magis);
the negative element has come to be associated with it
owing to prevalence of the usage in Il ne vient jamais
'He does not ever come, He never comes'. The commonest
French negative is ne
pas, originally 'not... a step'
(Latin passum), but today one can say, for instance Pas
moi 'Not I', for pas has come to be associated with ne
gation as its dominant element. Meanwhile the word pas
in the older sense of 'step' is still in use, but the normal
speaker of French is not conscious of the historial connec
tion between the two words. The same cannot be said
of personne, used in both the negative sense of 'nobody'
(due, of course, to ne ... personne) and the original of
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
242
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
'person'. The use of hut in such sentences as He had hut
one child is an example of the same process. But here
used to have the usual meaning of 'except' (as in All hut
Jolm went) and the sentence was He had not hut one child;
only after the association of the negative element with
hut was the not, now superfluous, omitted. This, indeed,
is the process by which crossreferring constructions be
come simplified. In Latin amat meant 'He (she, it) loves',
but, owing to the necessary frequency of such sentences
as Pater amat '(The) father heloves', the dominant ele
ment associated with amat ceased to include an actor:
today in French one cannot say aime, but only il aime,
elle aime 'he (it) loves, she (it) loves'.
The adjective capital was used so frequently in the
connection capital city that it came to be associated, in
spite of the conflict of its other uses (cf. capital punish
ment, a capital story), with the objectidea of 'chief city',
and is today so used. The same is true of general for
general officer, of glass for glass tumbler, of lyric for lyric
poem, and so on: the other uses have in these examples
continued by the side of the new 'condensed' meaning.
The change in morphologic and syntactic value of the
words is apparent: adjectives become nouns. Similarly
our conjunction while used to be the accusative case of
the noun while, as still appears in the archaic the while, —
the accusative expressing extent of time. Today, owing
to the loss of such caseconstructions, the connection is
lost, the value of the conjunction ivhile being totally dis
tinct from that of the noun. In expressions such as He
was frightfully angry the value of frightfully may come
to be felt as merely intensifying, until people say 1 am
frightfully glad; the German word for 'very' sehr is the
result of such a process, for it originally meant 'sorely,
painfully'.
SEMANTIC CHANGE
243
Our prepositions are an instance of an entire word
class that has received its present value from this process
of 'condensation'. In an earlier stage of the language the
relations of nouns were shown by their caseendings only,
— not only relations of actor and object affected, but
also the local relations now expressed by prepositions
At this, time there were also a number of common ad
verbs which came to be used regularly with nouns in
certain cases. This state of things was illustrated above
(p. 116, f.) from the Ancient Greek by such a sentence as
Kephalēs αpo phāros héleske. The first word is here the
genitive of the word for 'head', this case being used to
express separation: 'from the head'; αpo is an adverb,
meaning 'off', 'away': 'Hedrew (the) cloak off fromthe
head', 'He drew the cloak from the head'. The constant
occurrence of αpo with genitives of separation finally gave
rise to a semantic change by which the genitive forms
were no longer felt to express the idea of separation, but
to stand simply in government or congruence with the
adverb. So, in Old and Middle English, expressions like
He heom stōd wið 'He them stood against, He withstood
them' show the transition: is the case of lieom in itself
expressive of the relation, or is it merely the habitual
accompaniment (congruence, rection) of wið 'against'?
In the modern form He stood against them the caseform
of them is of course purely in syntactic government of
against and by itself expresses no local relation. Originally,
however, our prepositions were adverbs like the Greek
αpo in its early stage, and the form of the noun by itself
directly expressed the local relation.
There are a number of instances in which the change
of mental habit underlying a semantic change is a tan
gible alteration in the external conditions of life. The
ancient Romans were originally an agricultural and cattle
244
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
raising people; the standard and also, no doubt, the medium
of exchange for larger values was among them cattle.
Hence pecunia, the Latin word for 'money', and pecūlium,
that for 'property', are nouns originally meaning 'that
pertaining to cattle'. Under the dominant element 'me
dium of exchange', the former word was later applied to
the coined metal money used in historic times. The Eng
lish word fee also once meant 'cattle' (cf. the German
Vieh) and has passed through a change similar to that
of the Latin word. Pen originally meant 'feather', includ
ing the quills used for writing; then, when the latter were
being superseded by steel points, the dominant element
of 'writingimplement' mediated the present use. German
Feder and French plume have still both meanings, 'feather'
and 'pen'. The same is true of such words as marshall
which meant 'horse servant' (of the king), constable which
meant 'attendant of the stable', and similar words in many
languages: the conditions of court life changing, these
offices gradually lost their old significance and attained
to higher dignity, until the old dominant elements in the
words faded. The history of such words as arrive, which
once meant 'come to shore', and equip, which meant 'fit
with a ship', is probably due to similar changes in the
conditions of life. At bottom all this is no different from
the changes of meaning in such words as house, street,
carriage, car, light, hat, coat, shoe, gun, and so on, which
every advance in civilization and shift in fashion brings
about.
Thus the history of words, etymology, is interesting to
the student of civilization and culture. Often the only
trace of changes in a nation's mode of life is in semantic
changes; for instance, no better testimony for the use of
cattle as a medium of exchange in ancient Rome and
ancient England exists than the 'etymology' of pecunia
SEMANTIC CHANGE
245
and of fee. Often, on the other hand, the history of a
word can be understood only if one knows the cultural
or material history that underlies it. The German Wand
'wall' for a long time puzzled etymologists; its obvious
connection in the language seemed to be as a derivative
of the verb winden 'to wind', but this seemed semantically
improbable, — until it was pointed out that houses
with basketwork walls are still to be found in parts of
Europe.
The development of expressive material which keeps
pace with the general mental progress of a community, —
or rather, which forms an integral and vital part of this
progress, — is largely mediated by semantic change. The
processes most favorable to this growth are semantic
changes transferring a word into a new sphere of ex
perience, especially, of course, from a sensational to an
intellectual value.
Leading up to this process are those instances in which
a word originally belonging to one sphere of sensation
comes to be used for others also: this, of course, con
stitutes a subtilization of the value of the word. The transi
tion is immediate: after speaking of a clear liquid one
feels no 'transference' at all in speaking of a clear sound
or tone. Thus we speak of sharp sounds, tastes, or smells,
using a word that referred originally only to a touch
experience. We speak of warm and of cold colors; when
we use the word tonecolor we let the value of color, origi
nally visual, apply to auditory sensations, — with no
difficulty, for the dominant element of 'gradations of a
peculiar emotional value' applies to one as well as the
other. The opposite extension is, of course, equally natural:
we speak of tones in a painting. In all these instances the
emotional value of the word becomes dominant, allowing
it to be applied to experiences of similar emotional, if
246
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
very different perceptual value. The power, as instruments
of thought, — in these instances of esthetic thought, —
of such words is thereby greatly increased
These sensationwords themselves, for that matter, seem
universally to have developed, through a similar process,
out of still more concrete words. Modern examples that
point to such a conclusion are our colorwords orange and
violet: the quality is expressed in terms of the object with
which it is associated. Thus hitter was once a derivative
of hite and sour of a word meaning 'to scratch'; salty and
salt are derivatives of the noun salt; sweet, however, has
not been traced to any earlier meaning. The word tone
in Ancient Greek (from which language it has come to
us) was a derivative of a word meaning 'to stretch' and
meant originally the stretched string of a musical instru
ment. To feel was originally a derivative of a word for
'palm of the hand'.
Purely subjective terms have often the same history
of transference on the basis of an emotional dominant
element. Thus we speak of a cold reception, hitter hatred,
burning or glowing anger, and the like. Anxiety meant a
'narrow place', just as we speak of someone's being in a
pinch, having a close shave or a narrow escape, or being
in straits or straitened circumstances. Distress, similarly,
was originally 'destriction', i. e. 'constriction'.
Finally, our words denoting intellectual processes lead
back in their history, to physical actions. Thus to under
stand meant to 'stand in the midst of' (that is, to be in
a position to judge), to define meant to 'give bounds to',
to conceive meant to 'take up', just as we speak of catch՜
ing on to a thing or grasping it. To refute once meant
literally to knock out an argument. To think seems to have
meant 'to handle'; feel, which we have seen meant to
'handle with the palm of the hand' and thence came to
SEMANTIC CHANGE
247
be used of the sense of touch, then of sensation generally,
now is used also of emotion, subjectively.
In all these instances the transition was an immediate
one, a psychic resultant: and at the time of its occurrence
really no change at all. Yet, once the new meaning was
current, it required no unusual analytic gift to realize
that a transference had taken place.1) Individuals recog
nize in the use of many words an original and a trans
ferred meaning, and good speakers and poets have in all
times, now more, now less consciously, refreshed and in
tensified these transferences, or imitated them. Thus poetic
metaphor is an outgrowth of the natural transferences
of normal speech. It was a general transition, no doubt,
when people spoke of raffled or of deep or of stormy feel
ings; this general usage was revived and deepened when,
to quote a very well chosen example, Wordsworth wrote:
The gods approve
The depth and not the tumult of the soul.
The usual poetic metaphors, then, are individual creations
on the model of the regular linguistic transference. The
picturesque saying that 'Language is a book of faded
metaphors' is exactly the reverse of reality, where poetry
is rather a blazoned book of language.
Individual semantic change appears also in a great many
namings. Most towns in the United States, for instance,
are named after English and other places: Boston, Lynn,
Plymouth, New York, Cairo, Troy, or after people: St. Louis,
Bismarck. The magnet is named from a place in Asia
Minor, and copper after the island of Cyprus. The word
money meant originally the 'mint', which was named in
1) It does not concern us here that such popular realization
always distorts the process, looking upon it as a deliberate in
tellectual action, rather than an unconscious development.
248
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
Rome from the closeby temple of Juno Monēta, this last
being perhaps the family name of some old Roman clan
for whom the temple was named. So we speak of Ohm's
or Grimm's law. Probably a great many other words are
the result of individual transference: electricity, for in
stance, was derived from the Greek word for 'amber', a
substance used in producing it, by some individual. This
is true of most precise scientific terms. People's names
furnish words, all probably by way of individual trans
ference; thus, in English to burle, to boycott: Burke was
a certain Edinburgh murderer, Boycott a hated Irish land
lord who suffered this form of persecution. We speak,
similarly, of a Xanthippe, of a Quixotic action, of Homeric
laughter, of tantalizing a person (Tantalus), and so on.
It is not alwa\ s easy to say, however, whether a given
transference was originally individual or communal. The
use of names of animals for people seems, for instance,
to be a general tendency, but the individual cases are so
characteristic that we must suspect individual mots to
have started such locutions as calling a man an ass, a
hog, a fox, or an ox, a child a monlicy, a woman a mouse
or a goose or hen Similar are such expressions as white
cups or, in French, moutons 'sheep' for the white crests
of waves. The Romance languages have number of clever
derivations of this kind that make the impression of in
dividual creations: French (and English) caprice is derived
from a word for 'goat', se pavanner 'to puff oneself up,
to strut' from a word for 'peacock', the Spanish moscar
don 'bore, insist. It, bothersome person' from moscarda
'a gadfly' and calabazada 'a blow in the head' from cala
baza 'a gourd, calabash'. Transferences embodied in meta
phoric expressions extending over more than one word
are equally common. The origin of fighting windmills is
thus well known. Tempering the wind to the shorn lamb}
SEMANTIC CHANGE
249
often attributed to Sterne, though it seems to have occurr
ed before him, is no doubt also an individual creation.
Such expressions as to be hand and (in) glove seem also
to be individual, for different languages differ in the met
aphor employed; thus the German says 'to be one heart
and soul', the French 'two heads under one cap', the.
Italian 'one soul in two bodies', Spanish 'nail and flesh'.
We have seen how transferences that were never fully
conscious and have become almost entirely mechanized
may be revived by a poet who gives them a new turn.
When Shakspere speaks of taking up arms against a sea
oftroubles, the violence of the expression rouses our appre
ciation of the more literal values of the words.
This more literal value of words, especially where the
transfer is an individual one, may be obscured or for
gotten. The transferred word is thus left in an inexpli
cable meaning and may come to be associated with some
other that is historically not connected at all. We shall
meet this process again as 'popular etymology'. Thus
Welsh rabbit, a jocular individual creation, has failed to
meet understanding and been assimilated by many speakers
to rarebit. In German there are a number of unintelligible
proverbs due to popular etymologizing. Sein Sdiäfclæn
ins Trockne bringen 'to bring one's little sheep into the
dry place' is used in the sense of our 'looking out for
A number 1'. It is due to the failure to understand the
dialectal form, in which the thing brought to the dry
place is Schepken 'little ship'. Similarly Maulaffen feil
halten, used in the sense of 'to loaf around, to stand gap
ing', means literally 'to have for sale. Maulaffen; what
these are no one knows: the word looks like a compound
of Maul 'mouth, maw, snout' and Affen 'monkeys'. The
expression is an assimilated form of a dialectal Mul apen
halden 'to hold one's mouth open'.
250
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
Where phonetic change causes an automatic sound
variation, semantic change may destroy the automatism
by transferring one or both forms to different or limited
uses, — giving rise, thus, to two words or forms instead
of one. The English spirantvoicing after unaccented vow
els produced a byform of the word off with voiced
spirant, namely of (p. 215), which was used in unaccented
position. The frequent use of the accented form as ad
verb and of the unaccented as preposition brought about
an association in this sense. One came now to use off
even where the adverb was unstressed (He did not fall
off, he jumped off), and of even where the preposition was
stressed (of and for the people). The same development
may take place where the two forms are the result of
analogic change. In an older stage of German there was
a verb which today is in the infinitive gedeihen 'to thrive';
it had a participle which would be today gedungen 'thriven'.
A more regular analogic participle gediegen, however usurp
ed this use, and the old participle came to be used only
in the transferred sense of 'excellent, strong'. It has since
been lost in this meaning also. Today a still more regular
analogic formation gediehen serves as participle of gedeihen,
and gediegen has in its turn passed over into the meaning
'solid, excellent'. Further examples of such 'correlative'
semantic change, as it has been called, are the English
plurals clothes [klowz] with transferred meaning, and the
analogic cloths [klɔ ðz] or [klɔ θs] in meaning directly corre
sponding to the singular; or such formations as the ana
logic unpractical 'not practical'used where the shifted
sense of the older negative form impractical is not intend
ed; so also immoral beside immoral.
Thus, as the cultural and intellectual life of a people
grows, new experiences, assimilated at first to the old,
are designated by the old words or analogic formations
ULTIMATE CONDITIONS OF CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
251
from them, until in time the wordstock that once ex
pressed only the most concrete and simple experiences is
available for philosophic and scientific discourse of any
desired refinement.
6. The ultimate conditions of change in language.
Change in language in thus due to the inevitable shifting
of the conditions under which speech is carried on. This
is most obvious in the case of semantic change: any new
experience is assimilated to the old and expressed by the
old word, which thus has changed its meaning, — a change
which may become fixed by the lapse of the original use.
Similarly, analogic change alters the form of a word by
an assimilation to another word or set of words that is
semantieally associated, and the conditions underlying this
process, — the weakening of the supplanted form and
the strengthening of the inducing elements, — are again
conditions which must constantly arise as the subjects of
thought and discourse, the beliefs about the interrelations
of phenomena, and the material interests of a people de
velop. Phonetic change is also, no doubt, the result
of changes in the conditions of speech, even though
here the alteration in the conditions is not, as a rule, tra
ceable.
In accordance with all this, we are frequently able to
recognize the outer conditions which bring about a seman
tic change, — a recognition which is one of the chief
aims of etymologic study, — we are, further, able to see
in analogic change a constant adaptation of the speech
habits to more and more harmonious relation with ex
perience, and even in the littleunderstood processes of
soundchange the total result, at any rate, is a lessening
of the amount and complication of articulatory movement
that is connected with a given element of experience.
Two questions at once suggest themselves. To what extent
252
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
does the history of languages, in accord with all this,
show advance in mentality? And: Is it possible to trace
in any language the mental characteristics of the nation
which speaks it?
As to the former question, there is no doubt that the
changes of language are not a chaos of haphazard and
conflicting alteration, but an evolutionary process. Just
as no individual, to the day of his death, ceases learning
to speak, so mankind is ever altering its speech to more
suitable forms. We have seen that phonetic change bears
the appearance of a constant adaptation and readaptation,
that analogic change tends to bring about the expression
of similar semantic content by uniform instead of varied
articulations, and that semantic change even more directly
leads to the apt expression of what is at any time the
content of thought. We must keep in mind, however,
that language is traditional and social: tendencies toward
alteration are constantly stifled by the conventional articu
lations, forms, words, and constructions which the speaker
hears from others, — for the hearing of the conventional
forms reawakens the older impressions, as opposed to the
innovation. It is only when a tendency to alteration corres
ponds to the mental predisposition of a large pari of
the community that it gradually gains ground. Language
is thus not extensively subject to conscious change: its
development is by a gradual selective evolution, uncons
ciously made by the speakers, who merely use those
forms of speech which present themselves most directly
for articulation. As the correspondence of a new form of
speech with the remaining speechhabits, and with the
relations of experience, must, if the new form is to find
acceptance, outweigh the mere habituation of an other
wise less adapted older form, the change, when it does
take place, will usually be a step in advance. We may
ULTIMATE CONDITIONS OF CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
25 3
accordingly expect to see in every language a slow but
certain progress in adaptation to the forms of experience.
This is clearly apparent in the broader outlines of the
history of languages. The older stages show us compli
cated formations, by dint of which a fairly complex ex
perience is without analysis or with but partial analysis
expressed in a single word. An action with its actor,
mode, manner, tense, circumstances, and objects affected
may, for instance, appear in a single word. Such words
as the already quoted Nahwatl ninakakwa 'Imeateat'
or okikcetšlcotonlce'Theyhimneckcut(past)', i. e. 'They
cut his throat', or the Tsimshian [aldaǐ e:] ?to walk in
the dark', or, for that matter, the Latin amāvisset 'he
(she, it) would have loved', illustrate this. We may
consider such words as indicative of an older state of
language, in which the purely emotional responses of
pre linguistic times may be conceived as having barely
developed into a repetition of the same soundsequences
under similar experiences. It is an advance when all but
one of the more material elements receive only anaphoric
personal expression in the single word and are more ex
plicitly mentioned by crossreference, as in the Aztec
nikkwa in nolcatl 'Iiteat, the meat' or in the quoted
Latin word, e. g. Pater amāvisset 'Thefather, he
wouldhaveloved'. It is a further step in advance
when the value of the crossreference elements is lost by
semantic change ('condensation') and the words bear each
a separate meaning, though the formerly crossreferring
forms are still conventionally used together in congruence,
as when in English we use loves with an actor in. the
third person singular, but with the other persons say
love. When at last these habits also have been removed,
we come to more unified words; thus we use a form like
may without regard to person and number of the actor.
254
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
Even here the word expresses the tense as well as the
action itself: we should, perhaps, call it a step in advance,
if the tense also came to be expressed by a separate word,
as in J am writing, I was writing. Wordcomposition
may thus be an heirloom from the days when what we
now call a compound represented the regular type of word,
— that is, when words regularly contained two or more
material semantic units. It is conceivable, under that
condition, that some muchused member of compounds
with a very general sense, like that of 'thing', could lose
its specific meaning, until compounds of which it formed
part represented but one material element, as opposed
to others that still represented two or more. Thus the
Nahwatl 'absolutive', as in nakatl 'meat' or 'It is meat',
may originally have been a compound, the semantic fad
ing of whose final member (tl) first allowed people to
express the idea of 'meat' outside of compounds, such
as ninakakwa 'Imeateat'. The same may be true of
the Primitive IndoEuropean nominativesuffix s, which
may have been originally a final member of compounds
and, by losing its material value, have become the means
of liberating an idea like *ekwos 'horse' from exclusive
use in such compounds as *ekwodomos 'horsetamer'.
However all this may be, it is certain that we find in
all languages a constant diminution of the unanalyzed
content of single words, a lessening of crossreference,
congruence, and government in favor of explicit discur
sive expression, or, to look at the same thing from an
other point of view, a growing constancy in the form of
words, as opposed to morphologic variation. In the older
stages material elements are viewed either in connected
groups (compound words) or, if alone, then only in some
particular relation as to time, space, number, manner,
and the like, and as to each other (inflected words); it
ULTIMATE CONDITIONS OF CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
255
is but gradually that the speech of man attains a fuller
analysis of experience, an analysis into simpler independ
ently recurring elements. Thus the earliest scientifically
attainable stage of English shows us eight cases and
three numbers of nouns in three genders, most variously
and irregularly inflected, with adjectives agreeing in full
congruence, a crossreferring verb containing mention of
the actor and inflecting by cumbrous, complicated, and
highly irregular prefixation, infixation, suffixation, and
soundvariation in three persons and three numbers in
two voices, all in a variety of modes and tenses, the
latter based principally on manner of action, secondarily
on relative time. If we contrast this with our modern
brief forms and comparatively regular inflection and our
simple sentencestructure, in which congruence and gov
ernment play but a small part and crossreference none,
the advance is unmistakable.
As all such development is gradual and unconscious,
we must not be surprised, on the other hand, when we
see, alongside the progressive simplification, an occasional
formation of the old kind arising, or a soundchange
complicating what was formerly simpler. English has
been rapidly losing derivational complexities, yet we find
old compounds denoting manner by a second member
Old English lice 'in the manner of', becoming the reg
ular means of deriving adverbs from adjectives, and this
second element becoming phonetically reduced to an
otherwise meaningless suffix ly, as in quickly, slowly,
sharply. The same thing has happened in the history of
the Romance languages, where the Latin mente 'with a
mind' came to be used as a suffix in the same sense,
e. g. French lent 'slow' lentement 'slowly' (would be Lat
in lenta mente 'with a slow mind'). While in these in
stances the process Lay still be looked upon as a liber
256
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
ation of the single word from the compound through
semantic fading of the other member, that is hardly pos
sible when in the Romance languages we see a new
tenseinflection arising from an older syntactic collocation:
Late Latin amare habeo 'I have to (am to, shall) love'
became the modern Romance future, the second word
being reduced to a suffix, e. g. French j'aimerai 'I shall
love', — a counterdevelopment which well illustrates
the complexity of linguistic progress. It is only by dint
of innumerable changes and readjustments and after the
most various tendencies have conflicted and come into
harmony, that simplification can occur, — and it is, in
consequence, only by careful examination of the histor
ical details that we can ever obtain a just idea of the
growth of language.
To what extent languages are adapted to the national
character of the speakers is a far more difficult question;
but the difficulty lies in the vagueness of the latter term.
At the present state of our knowledge the character of
a nation is very much what our personal bias makes as
wish to think it. Tbe most completely known of national
activities is language; it is very difficult, for instance, to
decide what of a nation's art or religion is truly communal
and what individual in origin.
It is possible, where we know that a nation has chang
ed its language, to trace characteristics of the earlier
language in the nation's peculiar use of the newer, and
these stable characteristics, as it were, of a nation's
speech, have the first right to be called national. Such
a characteristic are the [t, d] sounds of the languages of
India (p. 220). Another possible instance is the following.
Irish is like English a modern form of Primitive Indo
European. Unlike this language and unlike English and
the other sisterlanguages (with an exception to be noted),
ULTIMATE CONDITIONS OF CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
257
it has a few remarkable characteristics. One is the toler
ance for phonetically divergent forms of the same word
without corresponding semantic variation beyond what
is implied in the mere existence of the forms (p. 102, f.),
— as in the example tà ha 'There are cows' but a va
'his cows', and the like. In fact, there is a general lack
of stability of the wordunit. Another peculiarity of
Irish is the tendency to identify the emotionally dominant
idea of the sentence with the central element of the pred
icate of an abstract subject and verb: It's his brother
he's cheating; the latter feature appears also in the Eng
lish spoken by Irish people. It is possible that the Indo
European speech of Ireland received these peculiarities
from an earlier language which it superseded.
At any rate, it so happens that the Latin which re
placed in France a sisterlanguage of Irish and developed
into Modern French, shows some of the same peculiari
ties. It gives little phonetic recognition to the word
boundary (p. 99, ff.), containing even such forms as du 'of
the', au 'to the' (masculine) which, while plainly felt as
two words, de (à) and le (compare, for instance the fem
inine de la, à la and the form used before vowels, de V,
à l'), are phonetically indivisible, [dy, o]. French is toler
ant of double forms of words, used, as in Irish, not au
tomatically and yet without genuine semantic differentia
tion; such doublets, for instance, as [vu] and [vuz] 'you'
or [a] and [at] 'has' are distributed not entirely by the
occurrence of the longer form before vowel ([vu fεt] 'you
do' but [vuz ave] 'you have'; [εl a] 'she has' but [at εl]
'has she?'), for this form occurs only before words close
ly connected in certain relations of meaning. The iden
tification of emotionally dominant element by peculiar
syntactic position is also prevalent: C'est eux qui Vont
fait 'It's they who have done it', C'est là que je l'ai vu
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
258
INTERNAL CHANGE IN LANGUAGE
'It's there that I saw him', C'est moi qu'ils ont hattu 'It's
me the beat'
Thus future research in what may be called compara
tive phonology, morphology, and syntax may reveal na
tional linguistic habits to which any language a people
may come to speak is subjected. It will then remain
to compare and relate these with such other characteris
tics of the nation as ethnologic study shall have ascer
tained.
All this, then, brings us to the question of the relation
between language and race, to the question of what people
speak alike and what differently, and to the consideration
of the various changes in this distribution, — in short,
to the external history of language.
CHAPTER VIII
E X T E R N A L CHANGE OF L A N G U A G E S .
1. Language never uniform. We have repeatedly
seen that language, far from being an object or an in
dependent organism of some kind, is merely a set of
habits. Such similarity as there is between successive
utterances is due, therefore, entirely to the psychic assimi
lative effects of earlier utterances upon later. The assimi
lative predisposition is in every individual constantly
changing, for, if nothing else, then at least the utter
ance last spoken will alter the conditions of the next one.
We may say, then, that the language even of a single
individual is never exactly the same in any two utteran
ces. What unity there is is due to the assimilative effect
of earlier upon later actions.
In this regard the effect of the speech one has heard
from others is the most important factor. In early child
hood the individual's language is entirely in imitation
of it, and even later, when one's own habits are reliable,
one hears much more than one speaks. This, of course,
is the link between the speech of different individuals
which makes language a communal or social, not an in
dividual phenomenon. Nevertheless, the predispositions
of any two individuals will never be identical. They will
differ more, as a rule, than the successive states of one
and the same individual because, in addition to constitu
260
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
tional differences, the past langungeexperience of the
two speakers is always different. Even more truly than
the language of every utterance may be called unique,
it may be said that every speaker has his own peculiar
linguistic habits. These, in fact, are in everyday expe
rience often noticed as idiosyncrasies of pronunciation,
construction, and vocabulary: 'The style is the man'.
In spite of these individual divergences, the circum
stance that language is our means of communication and,
as such, is learned both in the beginning and all through
life from our fellowspeakers, assures an extensive uni
formity. The associative processes which produce an
utterance are the effect of other people's utterances which
we have heard from infancy to the present. Consequent
ly a closeknit social group in which communication takes
place frequently between all members possesses a rela
tively uniform set of speechhabits.
It would be very difficult, if not impossible, to find
such a community. Everywhere there are groups of in
dividuals among whom there is more communication
than between members of the group and outsiders. One
need think only of the family, the neighborhood, the
trades and professions, the pleasures, games, vices, creeds,
parties, and the social, economic, and educational strata
The result of the more lively communication within such
groups is, of course, in every case, a relative uniformity
which is at the same time a divergence from the speech
of those outside the group. Even superficial observation
shows us family dialects, neighborhood phrases, trade
and professional vocabularies, jargons such as those of
the racetrack or the baseball field, speech of the slums,
of the middle class, of the aristocrats, — and so on,
without end. Any one speaker's habits present a com
bination of those different dialects which he has heard
LANGUAGE NEVER UNIFORM
261
and spoken, a unique combination modified, further, by
individual factors.
The most important of these dialectdivision s have
always been the local. These are of various degrees.
Where there are several local groups communicating
freely with each other, each group will have its dialect,
but the differences between these dialects will not be
great enough to destroy mutual intelligibility. This condi
tion is found, for example, in European countries, where
often every village speaks its own dialect. When such
connected groups cover a very large area and communi
cation between members of those at the extreme ends is
rare, these extreme dialects may be mutually unintelli
gible, although, as each dialect of the whole group un
derstands those near it, they are connected by an un
broken chain of communication. Within what would
otherwise be such a group there may, however, be some
partial barrier, a political or tribal boundary, a river or
a range of hills, and the like, — which lessens intercom
munication of the two sides without preventing it. There
we may find a decided break in resemblance, even though
the dialects on the two sides are still intelligible to each
other. Finally, a barrier of the kinds described, or one
more impenetrable, may divide mutually unintelligible
languages.
Where a barrier of the last kind exists, reflection and,
especially, scientific research may discover some resem
blance between the languages. A Norwegian and an Eng
lish sailor who learned each others' languages would re
alize that they presented, in spite of being mutually un
intelligible, considerable similarity, as opposed, for in
stance, to Greek or to Malay. Scientific study shows
English and Greek to possess great morphologic and
syntactic similarity and an original, though phonetically
262
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
obscured resemblance of vocabulary, which mere reflec
tion on the part of ordinary speakers of the languages
would not discover; between these languages and Malay
on the other hand, no such similarity has been discovered
by science. We speak, then, of 'related' and 'unrelated'
languages, according to our lights.
2. Increase of uniformity. Wherever history shows
us anything of the past, we find barriers to intelligibility
decreasing. Our continent, north of Mexico, once harbored
a few million Indians speaking over a hundred, perhaps
several hundreds, of mutually unintelligible languages;
today this area contains more than a hundred million in
habitants, nearly all of whom speak English.
Such increase of uniformity occurs in various ways.
Conquest may, as in America, partly annihilate the con
quered und partly assimilate them to the language of
the conquerors. Where the latter are less numerous the
assimilating process is commoner, but seems to fail, if
the vanquished are culturally superior. The Romans,
who conquered Italy, Iberia, Gaul, Dacia, and Greece,
were able to impose their language on the people of all
these countries except the culturally superior Greeks.
Differences of language may disappear, if one language
is politically or cultura' ly supreme: this is often the last
phase of a preceding conquest, as in the gradual spread
of English in Wales and Ireland, or of Russian in Siberia.
Languages of large communicative value may spread as
second languages of speakers for commercial and similar
purposes: so English, French, Spanish, Hindustani, Malay,
and others are spoken more or less inexactly by large
numbers of people whose native language is less widely
known. In this way arise trade jargons, the various
forms of Lingua Franca, Pidgin English, 'Chinook' and
the like.
DECREASE AND INCREASE OF UNIFORMITY
263
3. Decrease of uniformity does not offset the
increase. This growing uniformity is in part — and
only in part — offset by a constant process of differen
tiation. A language spreading over a large area does
not remain uniform. The various barriers to communi
cation result gradually in a differentiation at first into
dialects, then, often, into mutually unintelligible lan
guages.
Thus, at the dawn of history we find Greece, many of
the surrounding islands, and a strip of the coast of Asia
Minor speaking numerous, in the main mutually intelli
gible dialects. The cultural and commercial supremacy
of Athens and the districts of Asia Minor resulted in the
spread of a uniform Greek speech, based chiefly on their
dialects and called the Koine ('common language'), over
all of this territory except, it seems, a small district
around Sparta. By the early centuries of our era this
language was uniformly spoken, but dialectdifferentia
tion soon set in, and by the nineteenth century the differ
ent communicative conditions had resulted in a set of
dialects as unlike one another as were those of ancient
Greece. It now seems that the speech of Athens will
again become the common language of all Greece.
In Italy earliest history shows us a welter of the most
various languages and dialects, many, so far as science
can tell, wholly unrelated to others, some mutually un
intelligible, though somewhat similar, and still others
existing in groups of mutually intelligible dialects. Through
military and political supremacy the Romans gradually
extended their language, Latin, over all of Italy; their
later conquests carried it over what is now Spain, Por
tugal, France, Latin Switzerland, and Roumania. It may
be that the inhabitants of these countries who learned
Latin spoke it from the first in a form so much assimi
264
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
lated to their earlier speechhabits that, say Portugal and
Roumania never could have understood each other. At
any rate, dialectal differentiation at once set in, and, as
the Roman power decreased, the link of communication
which had connected these dialects failed. Today we
have five or six mutually unintelligible languages, each
broken into a number of continuous dialects, such as
those of Italy or France. These dialects correspond, often,
to political, tribal, or geographic barriers: they are being
superseded, at present, by languages of important centers,
as, for instance, those of France by the speech of Paris,
and those of Spain by Castilian. Spanish and Portuguese,
in turn, have spread by conquest over the southern part
of the Americas, where they have superseded numerous
Indian languages. The unification has here vastly out
weighed the differentiation, for the modern Romance
languages, divisible into five or six mutually unintelligible
groups, within each of which dialectal differentiation is
limited and is rapidly disappearing, represent the extinc
tion of dozens, probably hundreds, of languages of Europe
and America. These old languages were spoken each by
a few thousand people, the Romance languages are spoken
by many millions.
At the time of our earliest records, from the seventh
to the tenth century of our era, what is now Holland,
Germany, and part of England was a territory of some
dialectal differentiation; yet it appears that an English
man could then understand a North German. The dia
lectal break that there was between the English dialects
and those of the mainland was due, of course, to the
emigration of the English tribes in the fifth century.
This differentiation went on until English and the con
tinental speech became mutually unintelligible. At the
same time the differentiation within each of these groups
INFERENCES FROM HISTORIC CONDITIONS
265
oecaine so great that the speakers of the different Eng
lish dialects could often not understand each other, and
the same was true of the dialects of the continent. To
day all of these dialects are, however, disappearing before
the spread of three favored forms of speech: Standard
English, Dutch, and German. While the speakers of the
old dialects are not succeeding in speaking these stand
ardized dialects without some assimilation to the forms
of their local speech, — Standard German as spoken in
Bavaria differing much from that, say, of Mecklenburg,
Standard English of Scotland from that of Kent, — yet
they can understand one another's forms within each
group. Meanwhile English, for instance, has superseded
most of the Celtic speech of England, German much of
the Baltic and Slavic of what is now Germany. We must
not forget, also, the increase in population: the England
of King Alfred's time had perhaps two .million inhab
itants, only part of whom spoke English. Meanwhile
Standard English has spread to Ireland, North America,
and Australia, and has become the uniform speech of
many millions. The differentiation which there is in
Standard English will probably never rise to the point
of unintelligibility, for printing, rapid travel, and com
mercial intercourse are constituting communicative bonds
more close, probably, than those which twohundred
years ago existed between the north and south of the
little island of Britain.
4. Inferences from historic conditions. These histor
ic instances allow of certain general conclusions. Where
we find an area in which a number of mutually intelli
gible dialects are spoken, we infer that these are the re
sult of differentiation of an older uniform speech. We do
not hesitate to suppose, for instance, that the ancient
Greek dialects were differentiated from a uniform pre
266
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
historic speech, which we call Trimitive Greek', — just
as the modern Greek dialects are divergent local forms
of the Koine. Similarly, we conclude that the earliest
historic forms of English and the continental dialects of
Holland and Germany were differentiated, during a pe
riod that we call 'preEnglish', 'preFrisian', 'preSaxon',
'preFranconian', 'preBavarian', etc., from a uniform
prehistoric dialect, which we call Trimitive West Ger
manic'.
Related languages we accordingly look upon as results
of differentiation. Just as we see Portuguese, Spanish,
French, Italian, and Roumanian diverging from Latin,
we conclude, in every case where languages are, beyond
the possibility of mere coincidence, alike, that their dif
ference is due to gradual differentiation from a uniform
speech. Among the Indians of North America we find,
for instance, related languages spoken over three consid
erable pieces of territory. A large part of the northwestern
interior from the Pacific coast to east of the Rocky
Mountains; a few small bands in British Columbia and
Washington and a strip of villages fourhundred miles
long in Oregon and California; a large area of Arizona,
New Mexico, western Texas, and Mexico; — these three
districts, each embrace a number of mutually unintelli
gible languages, which, however, all present features of
similarity that lead us to call them related (the 'Athapas
can' family of languages) and to suppose that they are
all divergent forms of a prehistoric uniform language
(Trimitive Athapascan').
We have, of course, no right to suppose, in such cases,
that the same number of people spoke the 'primitive'
uniform language, or that it was spoken over the same
area, as its later forms. It is possible, as mentioned, that
the people of Portugal and those of Roumania could
INFERENCES FROM HISTORIC CONDITIONS
267
never have understood each other; it is certain that the
people of these countries who learned Latin from the
Romans never spoke it correctly enough to reach uni
formity over the entire district. We can scarcely imagine
a prehistoric Athapascan state of uniform language all
over the West of our country: probably a comparatively
large tribe broke up into parts which separated and then,
after communication had ceased, became differentiated in
speech, grew, linguistically assimilated other Indians, and
again split into independent speechcommunities.
It is very important, when we make these deductions,
thus to keep in mind the exact meaning of our results.
When we say that the West Germanic languages and
dialects, — English, Frisian, Dutch, and German, — are
differentiated forms of a uniform prehistoric language,
which we call Primitive West Germanic, we have no
right to assume anything about the exact manner in
which the differentiation took place. For instance, Prim
itive West Germanic may have become differentiated
by certain barriers in its territory, — by a religious con
federation of certain of the clans, let us say, to which
the other clans did not belong. A later splitting of the
West Germanic group may not have coincided with this
earlier division. Thus, before the emigration of the Eng
lish there was a dialectal differentiation: some of the
dialects changed an older [a] to [s], saying, for instance,
đt 'that' instead of dat. The English who emigrated
were part of those who had made this change; the Frisi
ans, who had also made it, remained behind. There follow
ed, of course, the great divergence of English from
Frisian and all the other continental dialects, due to the
overseas separation. Thus, in spite of the difference to
day between English on the one hand and the continental
dialects on the other, we know that there was a time
268
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGE
when English and Frisian belonged together, as opposed
to all the others, — that the divergence of English from
the mainland dialects was not the first differentiation to
break the Primitive West Germanic unity. Had history
not in this case favored us, we might be led to the wrong
assumption that the first differentiation was the separa
tion of English.
Primitive West Germanic, so far as its forms can be
determined, and also the various historic West Germanic
dialects, all show a decided resemblance to the languages
of Iceland, Norway, Sweden, and Denmark. These lan
guages, with their dialects, furnish another instance of
differentiation from an earlier language. At present we
find the dialectdivision separating Iceland sharply from
the rest. The remaining dialects are differentiated by
lines running chiefly east and west, so that a dialectbelt
will run, for instance, across a stretch of Norway and
Sweden, regardless of present political boundaries. Had
we no older records, we should, to be sure, deduce a
Primitive Scandinavian or Primitive N o r t h Germanic
parentlanguage, but the surmises which we might make
on the basis of the modern dialects would be wrong.
For our oldest records show us Norwegian and Icelandic
almost alike: the divergence of the latter did not progress
very far until some centuries after the settlement of Ice
land by Norwegians a thousand years ago. Opposed to
the almost uniform IcelandicNorwegian or WestScan
dinavian of the medieval records, we find Swedish and
Danish closely alike: EastScandinavian. This older
division has, then, been superseded by developments in
an entirely different direction. Thus, while it is safe to
set up a uniform 'primitive' language, the process of
differentiation itself may be obscured by repeated changes
in various directions, as when more modern changes have
INFERENCES FROM HISTORIC CONDITIONS
269
crossed and in part obliterated the old division between
WestScandinavian and EastScandinavian in favor of a
new northandsouth division on the continent, opposed
to a divergent Icelandic.
Of Primitive North Germanic (Primitive Norse, Primi
tive Scandinavian) a small amount is historically preserved
in some of the runic inscriptions. Primitive West Ger
manic and Primitive North Germanic both closely re
semble the language of a fourthcentury Gothic Bible
translation used by the Goths in Italy. From this three
fold relationship we deduce an older uniform language,
Primitive Germanic, from which, in a period called pre
WestGermanic, preNorthGermanic, and preEastGer
manic (cpreGothic'), the three languages became differ
entiated. Here we must guard against the mistake into
which we might in the other cases have fallen, had we
lacked, — as here we do, — historic records. It.is pos
sible, for instance, that the threefold division which we
know was preceded by an entirely different dialectcleav
age in Primitive Germanic. This would mean that such
a division as Primitive West Germanic contains some dia
lectal differences dating from the Primitive Germanic time,
and was therefore never wholly uniform after the original
cleavage of Primitive Germanic. In so far as we insist
that English, Dutch, Frisian, and German go back to an
absolutely uniform older speech, that speech would then
be Primitive Germanic; in so far as we considered only
those features which today appear and ignored a possible
but un authenticated older dialectcleavage, it would be
Primitive WestGermanic.
The Germanic languages more distantly, though un
mistakably resemble a number of languages of Europe
and Asia. This resemblance is increased when we com
pare not the historic forms, but the various 'primitive'
270
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
languages, such as Primitive Germanic and Primitive
Greek, which we deduce from closely related groups.
Thus the closely interrelated Baltic languages (Lithuanian,
Lettish, and the now extinct Prussian) point to a Primi
tive Baltic, which, with Primitive Slavic, appearing histor
ically differentiated in the modern Slavic languages
(Russian, Polish, Bohemian or Cech, Servian, Bulgarian,
etc.), points to a Primitive BaltoSlavic. The languages
of Persia and Iran generally we derive from a Primitive
Iranian, those of India that here come into consideration
from a Primitive Indic; Primitive Iranian and Primitive
Indic resemble each other so closely as to point un
mistakably to Primitive IndoIranian ('Primitive Aryan')
from which both are descended. Similarly we deduce a
Primitive Armenian, Primitive Albanese, Primitive Italic
(from Latin, Oscan, and Umbrian), and Primitive Celtic.
All these 'primitive' languages, including Primitive Greek
and Primitive Germanic, show so much similarity that
we conclude that they are differentiated forms of a Prim
itive IndoEuropean, an ancient uniform language.
We must, however, again keep in mind all the limita
tions that require observation, if our conclusion is to
have scientific value. In the first place, our conclusion
does not justify us in supposing that the same number
of people or the same districts that now speak the various
IndoEuropean languages spoke Primitive IndoEuropean.
We have, for instance, seen English spread from a mil
lion or less speakers to many millions, some of whom
gave up another language for English, and, geographic
ally, we have seen it spread from a part of England
over almost all of the British Isles, most of North
America, and Australia, not to speak of smaller colonies
of Englishspeaking people all over the world. In so far
as we insist upon Primitive IndoEuropean being a uni
INFERENCES FROM HISTORIC CONDITIONS
271
form state of speech, we must, in fact, assume that it
was spoken by a homogeneous and therefore limited
community, — a community of not more than a few
thousand speakers.
Furthermore, we have no right to assume that Primi
tive IndoEuropean was carried bodily, as it were, into
all the countries where IndoEuropean languages now
exist. English, not Primitive IndoEuropean was carried
to America. The branches of the Primitive IndoEuropean
parent community surely altered their speech while mi
grating to those countries upon which they were to im
pose it. The people who in these countries had to learn
the language of the dominant Indo ֊ Europeanspeaking
immigrants surely spoke the new language in some ap
proximation to their own, — of one such change at least
we have good evidence (p. 220). These speakers of an
implanted IndoEuropean may then have been instrumen
tal in the further spread of the language. The de
duction of a Primitive IndoEuropean speech does not,
therefore, make probable any such improbabilities as that
there was a time, say, when a man from the north of
Europe could have understood a Greek or a Hindu.
Again, it is too common in history to see changes of
language or culture in a people, to allow of our assuming
that the present speakers of IndoEuropean languages
are all descended, physically, from speakers of Primitive
IndoEuropean. To all questions in this direction it can
only be answered that anthropologists and ethnologists
have found that language, culture, and physical descent
are not coordinate in history. It even bids fair to ap
pear that physical descent and physical characteristics
are not coordinate. In other words, while we have knowl
edge of IndoEuropean languages, of a Primitive Indo
European language, and, to some extent, of the linguistic
272
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
history which produced the former out of the latter, we
know nothing about the people who spoke Primitive
IndoEuropean, — nothing about their habitat, appea
rance, descent, or descendants, and of their culture only
so much as is involved in our knowledge of their speech.
As to the process of cleavage of Primitive IndoEurope
an also we must draw no hasty conclusions. .There are
certain phenomena in which the historic 'western' lan
guages, namely, the Greek, Italic, Celtic, and Germanic,
are apparently opposed to the 'eastern', BaltoSlavic,
IndoIranian, Armenian, and Albanese. We find certain
velar sounds in the former corresponding to sibilants in
the latter, — in Primitive IndoEuropean they were prob
ably palatals; — thus the word for 'hundred' is in An
cient Greek hebaton, in Latin centum, Old Irish cet, Gothic
hund (English handred; for the h see Grimm's law,
p. 208), but in Lithuanian szimtas (sz is [∫]), Avestan
(an old Iranian language) satə m, Sanskrit šatαm. It was
supposed, accordingly, that this divergence represented
the oldest dialectal cleavage of Primitive IndoEuropean
into an eastern and a western dialect; the eastern lan
guages were called the 's' or 'satšm' group, the western
the lc' or Centum' group. More careful observation,
however, makes it probable that the cleavage into 'centum9
and 'satə m languages was not a dialectal cleavage of
Primitive IndoEuropean, but that the languages have
separately arrived at the historic forms. Aside from the
peculiar position of Albanese between the Greek and
Italic 'centum' languages, there have recently been dis
covered in Central Asia (East Turkestan) manuscripts in
an IndoEuropean language (to which has been given the
name Tocharic) which has velar, not sibilant sounds in
the corresponding words, (e. g. leänt 'hundred'). Lithu
anian, further, contains a number of words with velars
THE PROCESS OF DIFFERENTIATION
273
instead of the sibilants which such words as that for
'hundred' and the close resemblance of Baltic to Slavic
would lead us to expect. Finally, investigation has shown
that Indic, in spite of its close resemblance to Iranian,
never had sibilants in most of the words in question.
Thus it appears that the line of cleavage between velar
development and sibilant development of the Primitive
IndoEuropean palatals does not coincide with the other
lines of dialectal differentiation, and would perhaps still
less do so, had we records of intermediate dialects that
have been lost.
5. The process of differentiation. The uniformity
of linguistic habit in a community is maintained by the
common expressive predisposition of the speakers, due
to their having heard since infancy approximately the
same set of words, forms, and constructions. In so far as
this predisposition, owing to the necessarily divergent
experience of individuals, varies from speaker to speaker,
we find individual peculiarities of speech; in so far as it
varies for families, social strata, occupations, and the like,
we find the stratification of language mentioned at the
beginning of this chapter. The concurrence of the mem
bers of a community is known as usage. Usage, we know,
is constantly changing: soundchanges, analogic changes
and semantic development never cease; and the changes
of usage are never the same in any two separated communi
ties. The differentiation of a uniform speech into dialects
and into separate languages takes place wherever there
is any interruption, absolute or relative, of communication.
Where geographic or social barriers have lessened commu
nication we find the usage of the separated communities
diverging more and more, until at first welldefined dia
lects and then mutually unintelligible languages are found
to exist. This process of divergence is outweighed, as we
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
274
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGE
have seen, by the constant replacement of uniformity due
to warlike, economic, or cultural domination of single
communities.
6. Deduction of internal history from related forms.
The case is frequent that we find historically a set of re
lated dialects or languages but lack records of the uni
form speech from which we must suppose that they have
become differentiated. If we had no records, for instance,
of Latin, we should speak of it as 'Primitive Romance',
that is, as the uniform parentspeech of the Romance lan
guages. The divergences of usage which differentiate these
languages would have to be reconciled in this 'primitive'
language. If we found, for instance, the word for 'father'
in French père [pε:r], in Spanish and in Italian padre, we
might be doubtful as to what was the form in the common
parentspeech, from which these forms by divergent phonet
ic and analogic changes had become differentiated. We
might perhaps set up a 'Primitive Romance' *padre or
*pedre. The Latin forms, accusative patre(m) and ablative
patre show us that the է became d and was in French
finally dropped, and that this language also changed the
old a to è; furthermore, we find similar developments in
many parallel forms.
Where the older uniform language is not accessible,
our reconstructions are, correspondingly, most uncertain.
Nevertheless, they have a great value as formulae. The
word 'father' is in Old English fder (for the d see p. 59, f.);
in the oldest Frisian (eleventh century) we find feder;
the north German dialects show the oldest form (ninth
century) fader; the south German (ninth century) fater.
As the common prehistoric form from which these were
differentiated we set up a 'Primitive West Germanic' *fader,
supposing the English and Frisian to have changed a to
e, and the South German d to t The starred form thus
DEDUCTION FROM RELATED FORMS
275
set up is a formula in the sense that other words also
show the same correspondences of sound. It means, there
fore, that the word 'father' in the West Germanic speech
group is composed of the sounds indicated, to wit: (1) that
which everywhere appears as f, (2) that which appears
in English and Frisian as e and in the other dialects as
a, — symbolized by a in our formula, (3) that which
appears as d in all but the south German dialects, where
it is t, — symbolized by d, (4) that which appears every
where as an unaccented e, (5) that which appears every
where in our group as r. Thus, to illustrate sound (3), we
set up a Primitive West Germanic *daudo for the Old
English dead (modern dead), the Old Frisian dad, the Old
Low (i. e. North) German ddd, and the Old High (i. e.
South) German tōt Here the symbol d recurs; the au is
a similar token for Old English ēa, Old Frisian ā, north
German o, and south German o before dentals or h (other
wise south German au); the final o is due to considera
tions which we may here overlook. Our Primitive West
Germanic forms, then, are mere formulae until they find
some kind of corroboration. If they find this, it will appear
that in the Primitive West Germanic speechcommunity
d was spoken and that in the preSouth German develop
ment there was a change from this d to t. Or, if further
facts were to appear showing that our Primitive West
Germanic form was, in absolute phonetic value, wrong,
then a Primitive West Germanic t, changing in all the
dialects but South German to d, would be indicated.
The existence of North Germanic (Scandlianavian) and
East Germanic (Gothic) forms gives us the possibility of
testing our West Germanic results. The Old Icelandic and,
it is supposed, also the Primitive North Germanic form
of our word 'father' is faðer, the Gothic fadar (with the
d pronounced đ, as certain internal conditions in Gothic
276
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
conclusively show). These forms indicate that our Primi
tive West Germanic *fader was in all probability (not
with absolute certainty!) correct as to the a and the d:
the latter because the voiced d is nearer to the đ of the
other languages than the alternative of t The comparison
of the three Germanic branches is symbolized in the for
mula of a Primitive Germanic *fαðer, — with accent on
the first syllable, as in all the historic dialects. This form,
if literally correct, indicates a change of đ to d in pre
West Germanic and a change of e in the unaccented syllable
(as other words show, only before r) to a in preEast
Germanic. If wrong, our formula would still express the
general correspondence of d to đ, of er to ar in these
languages.
Our Primitive Germanic form is again tested by the
Primitive IndoEuropean correspondences. We find the
word 'father' to be in Sanskrit pita (accusative pitαram),
in Avestan pita (accusative pitardm), in Ancient Greek
pater, in Latin pater, in Old Irish athair, and in Armenian
hair.
The correspondence of initial p of other languages in
this and other words to Germanic f makes it extremely
probable (but not certain!) that p was the older sound,
changed in the preGermanic development to f; for a
change of an older ƒ to p independently in Sanskrit, Greek,
Latin, and the other languages (which in other than ini
tial position also in part show p) would be a very im
probable coincidence; — as would also the origin of all
these sounds from some sound not represented in any of
the historic languages, e. g. an m. Nevertheless, should
we in spite of this be wrong, the p in our Primitive Indo
European formula would still be a convenient symbol for
the general correspondence of Germanic f, Sanskrit, Greek,
and Latin p (Irish initial lost, Armenian initial h). This
DEDUCTION FROM RELATED FORMS
277
correspondence reappears in other words, such as that
for 'cattle', where we set up, — on the basis of Gothic
faihu (pronounced felm), Old Icelandic fē, Old English
feo (modern fee; for the change of meaning see p. 244),
Old Low German féhu, and Old High German film, — a
Primitive Germanic *fehu, which stands beside Latin peca,
Sanskrit paša (with sibilant, cf. p. 272), Lithuanian pekus
(with velar stop, cf. p. 272,f.). Hence, be it with literal value,
or, what is less probable but also possible, with only
symbolic value, we set up the first sound of our Primitive
IndoEuropean word as p~.
To return to the word 'father', the a of the different
languages, as opposed to the i of Sanskrit and Avestan
would appear as the more probable earlier form. We find,
however, that in other cases an a of the other languages
is found also in Sanskrit and Avestan, as in Old Icelandic
aka 'to ride, drive', Primitive Germanic *akeði 'he drives',
Old Irish (ad)aig, Latin agit, Ancient Greek αgei, Arme
nian atsem 'I lead, bring', corresponding to Sanskrit αjati
'he leads', Avestan azaiti. Consequently we suppose that
Primitive IndoEuropean had two vowels, represented in
most languages, owing to soundchange, by a, but distinct
in IndoIranian as a and i. This supposition is by no
means certain and has been disputed; it receives corrobora
tion, however, from certain conditions of vowelvariation
in the different languages. The Primitive IndoEuropean
vowel which preceded the i of IndoIranian and the a
of the other languages we represent by the symbol d.
The third sound of our word has caused much trouble.
After Grimm's law (see p. 208), by which the old p of
our word, for instance, became Germanic ƒ, had been
established, it was expected that the է of the other lan
guages should correspond to a Germanic þ 1 ), not a đ, —
1) þ is the Germanic sign for [0].
278
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
as, for example, in the word 'brother': Sanskrit hlirātā
(accusative bhrātaram), Avestan bräta (accusative brātardni),
Ancient Greek phrāter ('fraternity brother'), Latin frater
Old Irish brāthir, Old Bulgarian bratǔ , bratrü, Lithuanian
hroterélis (with diminutive suffix), and Primitive Germanic
*brōþer (seen in Gothic brōðar, Old Icelandic brōðer, Old
English brō]or, Old Frisian brother, Old Low German brother,
Old High German bruoder). This difficulty was at last
solved by Verner (p. 216): after the Primitive IndoEuro
pean unvoiced stops (e. g. t) had in preGermanic become
spirants Ա յ ) these spirants became voiced, if they followed
an unaccented vowel (as in the Primitive IndoEuropean
word for 'father', where the Sanskrit and Greek accent
shows the second syllable to have been stressed). It was
not till after this spirantvoicing that the accent in pre
Germanic was thrown universally on the first syllable;
whence the Primitive Germanic *fαðer.
The next sound again causes difficulty. Sanskrit and
Avestan show an a, the other languages an e, and for a
long time it was believed that the former was the Primi
tive IndoEuropean sound. It was discovered, however,
that the IndoIranian languages also once had an e. This
appears in the fact that velar sounds are palatalized (p. 214)
in these languages before those a's to which e corresponds
in the other languages. For instance, the Primitive Indo
European enclitic word for 'and' *qûe, appearing in Latin
as que, in Ancient Greek as te (from Primitive Greek *qûe),
in Gothic as h (from Primitive Germanic *hwe), is in
Sanskrit ca and in Avestan ča. Thus the e of the European
languages is in such cases assured as the more original,
Primitive IndoEuropean sound, which in preIndoIranian
first palatalized a preceding velar and then changed to a,
coinciding there with the Primitive IndoEuropean a.
This probability of a Primitive IndoEuropean e corrob
DEDUCTION FROM RELATED FORMS
279
orates our supposition that the vowel in Primitive Ger
manic was e, not the Gothic a. The long quantity of the
vowel in Sanskrit and Greek in our word also appears
original from a number of comparisons.
As to the final r, various considerations have led to
the conclusion that in Primitive IndoEuropean there was
an automatic soundvariation by which the r was kept
before certain following sounds, especially vowels, and lost
before others. In the different languages one or the other
of the resulting forms was analogically generalized.
Hence we get, all in all, the formula of a Primitive
IndoEuropean *pə tē or *pə tēr. In part the absolute phonet
ic value of this formula may be doubtful, but it serves
none the less well as a brief symbol for the various corre
spondences between the IndoEuropean languages: corre
spondences which could not be otherwise succinctly ex
pressed. The correspondences so symbolized, moreover,
aid us in shaping our Primitive Germanic formula: thus
they assure us of an e rather than an a in the second
syllable of this word. In the word for 'dead' the Gemanic
forms alone would lead us to set up a formula of one
syllable; it is the IndoEuropean relationship of the word
which shows us that in Primitive Germanic and in Primi
tive West Germanic it must have had two syllables (cf.
the formula above, p. 275). Beginning with the Primitive.
IndoEuropean formula, then, with its rather relative value,
the history of the word 'father' can be traced, with more
and more certainty as we go on, to the present time; and
the same is true of all the lexical, phonetic, morphologic,
and syntactic features of the language.
The method of thus tracing the history of languages
wherever a number of related languages are given, is known
as the comparative method. The vista which it opens to
us for English presents the development from a primitive
280
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
to the modern state. For, by any criteria we have of such
things, 'Primitive' IndoEuropean was really a language
of decidedly primitive aspect. It had three genders, three
numbers, and eight cases of nouns, adjectives, and pro
nouns ; and several voices, modes, manners, and tenses of
verbs, each in three persons and three numbers, according
to the person and number of the actor. All these were
inflected with great complication and irregularity, by means
of suffixes and intricate soundvariation, especially of vow
els, together with some infixation and prefixation, in
cluding highly irregular reduplicated forms. The deriva
tion, also, was complex, different suffixes, as also in in
flection, demanding shifts of accent and soundvariation
in the kernel of the word. Composition was frequent and
was accompanied by changes of form in the members of
the compound as opposed to their independent form as
simple words. The syntax identified, as today, actor and
subject, but in the predication of a quality the abstract
verb could be omitted, as in Latin (p. 111). As the verb
included pronominal mention of the actor, crossreference
as well as government related actor to action. The cases
of nouns were used in government, — that is, the differ
ent caseforms expressed relations in which the noun stood
to the verb or to other nouns. The adjective varied in
. congruence with the noun which it modified. The develop
ment from that time to this can be traced with increasing
certainty as one approaches the testimony of narrower
and narrower ranges of comparison.
7. Interaction of dialects and languages. The re
sults of the comparative method do not extend to a set
of phenomena which, accordingly, must be set aside wher
ever this method is used. As the comparative method is
based upon the unity of soundchange with regard to
different words within any dialect, it cannot be applied
INTERACTION OF DIALECTS AND LANGUAGES 281
to words and forms which have come into one dialect
from another dialect. Such words and forms, however,
are very common. Wherever there is communication be
tween different speechgroups, one or both come to use
words heard in the language of the other, — words, usu
ally, which have been associated with the appearance of
some hitherto unknown object or idea introduced by the
foreign people: as when we speak of chiffons and ruches
by their French names, or of Sprachgefühl, Allaut, Um
laut, Zeitgeist, Wanderlust, Pretzels by their German. If
the two speechgroups that are in contact are mutually
intelligible dialects, the borrowing may be quite general;
if they are unintelligible, the mediators are those who,
more or less perfectly, have learned the foreign speech.
The disturbance of usual phonetic conditions appears
in such a word as street, High German Straße, which,
normally, would point to a Primitive West Germanic
*strtu. This should then correspond, by Grimm's law,
to a Latin word with d for the second է (the first, stand
ing after spirant, is unaffected); but the Latin word we
find is strāta (via) 'paved road'. The explanation is, of
course, that the West Germanic people received the word
and the knowledge of paved roads from the Romans, —
at a time, needless to say, long after the soundchange
known as Grimm's law had ceased to act.
Languagemixture, where the historical conditions are
known, often determines the absolute date of a change,
which the comparative method alone can, naturally, never
fix. Thus the German Straße shows that the change of
postvocalic է to a sibilant in High German (cf. p. 208)
occurred after the Romans had made their appearance in
Germanic territory.
As loanwords are usually of cultural significance, the
study of etymology (p. 244) receives from them an added
282
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGE
interest. The wellknown contrast between the Old Eng
lish ('AngloSaxon') stock and the FrenchLatin borrow
ings of English need hardly be mentioned; though many
of the French words are today as common as those of
older currency in the language, e. g. heef, change, place,
chair, table, their adoption by the English can always be
reduced to a cultural cause. Similarly, if to a smaller ex
tent, we have words from every nation with which speakers
of English have come into contact; from American Indian
languages, for instance, the vegetable squash, succotash,
tobacco, not to speak of totem, papoose, squaw, wampum,
wigwam, tomahawk, powwow, which are still felt as foreign.
Many other loanwords have come to us through a series
of languages, as banana, hammock (originally from Carib
bean languages, through Spanish or Portuguese), candy,
sugar, pepper, ginger, cinnamon (originally from oriental
languages, whence they came through Arabic, Hebrew,
Greek, Latin, etc.).
Culturally significant words are not only thus bodily
taken over, but are often imitated. Thus the Latin word
conscientia 'conscience', a compound of con 'with' and
scientia 'knowledge', was imitated in the Germanic lan
guages; thus German says Gewissen, Swedish samvete,
Danish and Norwegian sam֊ vittighed ; English has direct
ly taken the Latin word in French form. The same is
true of, such Latin words as concipere 'to conceive', from
capere 'to grasp', German begreifen; Latin objccium 'ob
ject', literally 'thing thrown before one', older German
Vorwurf, and so on. The Slavic languages similarly imi
tate abstract words from German, Latin, and Greek; thus
Russian ['so v'is't'] 'conscience', [pə n'i' i m a . t ' ] c o n c e i v e ,
understand' are modelled on the German compounds,
[pr'id 'm'εt 'object', also, is literally 'thing thrown be
fore one'.
INTERACTION OF DIALECTS AND LANGUAGES 283
When the foreign word is taken bodily into the lan
guage, it is subjected to assimilative influences. Its sounds
are replaced by those of the borrowing speech, and its
structure is often assimilated to that of the native words.
This may not happen while the word is still used by
those who know the foreign language and know that the
word is foreign; as soon as it becomes genuinely popu
lar, — that is, part of the universal usage, — it is sure
to be assimilated. Most examples of sudden soundchange
(p. 216) really belong here. Latin peregrinus 'pilgrim'
became pelegrimus and pilgrim in the mouths of people
whose native language was not Latin. The Latin acetum
Vinegar' became *aiīko in the mouth of Germans, whose
language had at that time no closed e, but, as the nearest
sound, only ī, and no suffix īto but a common one ķko.
Hence the modern High German form Essig [εsik] or
[9εsiç], This form shows us, moreover, that the German
change of a to e before i ('umlaut', see p. 215) and of է
after vowel to s (cf. Straße above and p. 208) and of k
after vowel to [x, ç] (the form with Ύ in modern German
is analogic) occurred since the first contact with the Ro
mans.
So the Old French sillabe has become in English syl
lable in approximation to our suffix able. Hammock was
introduced into English from the Spanish hamaca, itself
a no doubt assimilated form of a Carib word. In Eng
lish it was little changed, because it happened to resemble
the native words in och, such as hassock, hammock. In
German, however, where it resembled nothing in the na
tive stock, it was assimilated into the form of a compound
Hängematte 'hangmat'. Such complete change of an ob
scure word into a semantically organized form is called
'popular etymology' It changed in German the Graeco
Latin arcuballista 'crossbow' into Armbrust, literally
284
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
'armbreast*, in English the GraecoLatin asparagus into
sparrowgrass (asparagus being meanwhile constantly re
stored by those who know Latin). Old French crevice (it
self a loanword from Germanic) has become crayfish and
crawfish.
When words pass from one dialect to another, mutual
intelligibility modifies the assimilating process, in the
sense that the phonetic differences are often correctly
compensated. Thus we should naturally and unconsciously
put into the equivalent American sounds a new word we
heard from a Londoner. Nor need the words so borrowed
necessarily be of cultural significance. Dialectmixtures
are as a rule recognizable only if some phonetic inconsist
ency is retained. Thus in the speech of the northern
central part of the United States the vowel of such words
as hath, glass, laugh, path is [ę], but many speakers who
have grown up in this pronunciation will, when on their
dignity, use the British [a], — often inconsistently. In
this way arise 'hyper' forms, where the affectation of a
foreign pronunciation is carried beyond its scope in the
imitated dialect itself; as when one speaks also [man],
where the English pronunciation itself has [ę]. The same
phenomenon appears in German: speakers whose dialect
has [i] for Standard German [y] will affectedly substitute
[y]'s for their natural [i]'s even where the standard lan
guage has [i], saying [ty:r] not only for Tür 'door' but
also for Tier 'animal', Standard German [ti:r].
Where words are permanently borrowed from one dia
lect by another, they may betray themselves, like loan
words from foreign languages, by their phonetic habit.
London English, for instance, has no native words with
initial V; such as are not LatinFrench are borrowings
from a dialect south of the Thames, which regularly has
initial v֊ for ƒ, e. g. vat, vixen. High German has no
INTERACTION OF DIALECTS AND LANGUAGES 285
words with b, d, g after short vowel, except those like
Krabbe 'crab', Dogge 'mastiff, which are loans from Low
German. Phonetic investigation has shown that certain
Latin words, such as lupus 'wolf, bōs 'head of cattle',
popina 'cookshop' are borrowings from neighboring dia
lects, such as, perhaps, the Sabine.
It is a phenomenon of dialectmixture when we find in
English a number of the commonest words bearing un
mistakable North Germanic character. The northern and
central English dialects of Alfredian times and the Scandi
navian speech of the Norse invaders of that period were
not only mutually intelligible, but so much alike as to
seem only different forms of one language. When the in
vaders settled by the side of the English, each dialect
came to be interspersed with words of the other. Ultima
tely the English, spoken by greater numbers and also in
the south, where there were no Scandinavians, carried
off the victory but retained, for ever after, a number of
words in Scandinavian form. Such words are egg, give,
guest, kettle, oar, they, skirt, sky. The word egg, for instance,
is the Scandinavian correspondent of the German Ei,
Primitive Germanic *ajjon; North Germanic, but not West
Germanic changed jj to gg. Give and guest would have
been palatalized in preEnglish, like yield (p. 214); kettle
similarly, like child. The case of skirt is especially inter
esting. In Old English sk had become sh [∫], and the cog
nate of Norse skirt was in English shirt People were led,
as a result of such doublets, — scrub and shrub, skirt and
shirt, and the like, — where sh was spoken, to speak sk
also: consequently sk occurs by the side of sh in many
words that were not Scandinavian at all, — as in scatter
by the side of shatter. Since that time words with sk have
been multiplied, until those actually brought in by the
Scandinavians are in the minority.
286
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
The transition from dialectmixture to the unevenness
of individual speech is, of course, a gradual one. It may
be illustrated by several intermediate phenomena. Forms
from slower and from more rapid speech exist side by
side, e. g. cannot: can't, does not: doesn't. The same is
true of morphologic doublets: a speaker who ordinarily
says If he were here, he would help us may; after speaking
with members of less conservative strata, occasionally say
If lie was here
Another such phenomenon is the mixture of older with
younger forms of speech. In most instances the older
form has been preserved in some set phrase, subject to
phonetic change, of course, but growing lexically or morpho
logically antiquated. Thus the Old English samblind
'halfblind' remained in use after the prefix sam 'half
had ceased to be mobile or even to occur in any words
but this; the word consequently, became assimilated into
sandblind and associated with a meaning 'totally blind'
Another striking instance is the German expression mit
Kind und Kegel in the sense of 'bag and baggage', which
today means, word for word, 'with child and ninepin';
— Kegel is really here an otherwise lost word meaning
'bastard'. The English You had letter go preserves an
otherwise lost use of had which troubles some speakers.
Ultimately, of course, the syntactic development which
crystallizes certain forms of discursively joined words
into the various set forms of materially specialized con
structions (such as preposition plus noun in English) is
a process of preserving in set use what was formerly a
flexible manner of speech. Thus, to add an example to those
already given (pp. 114, ff., 171, ff.), our perfectic expression
with have originated in such sentences as I have written
a letter, which meant originally 'I have a letter written,
in written condition' (literally or in the sense of 'have
INTERACTION OF DIALECTS AND LANGUAGES 287
to my credit'). This turn of speech has been preser
ved as an expression of perfectic action, and, as its ori
ginal meaning lost dominance, has been extended to
such forms as I have slept, I have lost a hook, where it
could not at first have been used. This mixture of lin
guistic strata is thus a factor in the regular linguistic
development.
Where alphabetic writing exists, older phonetic stages
may be preserved and borrowed by later times. This has
occurred most universally in the Romance languages,
spoken in communities extensively familiar with written
records of the older stage of their language, Latin. Thus
the Latin causa 'cause, affair' has become the French
chose 'affair, thing', but is preserved through writing in
the French cause 'cause, lawsuit'; the Latin secūritätem
(accusative of Secūritas) 'security' has become súreté 'sa
fety, security' (whence the English loan surety), but has
had written existence, whence the French took sécurité
'assurance, unconcernedness' and the English, through
the French, security. The Latin separare became French
sevrer 'to wean, deprive' (from the French English borrow
ed sever), but was preserved in writing and borrowed
as French séparer and English separate. These examples
could be multiplied in great numbers. They are not essen
tially different from the 'spellingpronunciations', in which
an archaic spelling leads to the revival of phonetically
divergent ancient forms. Thus the old է of often, soften
has been long lost by phonetic change, but the influence
of the orthography leads many speakers, some consciously,
some unconsciously, to pronounce it. Indeed, there may
arise in this way forms that were never spoken at all,
such as ye for the, due to misreading of the old character
þ (for th), and author, where learned orthographic ped
antry alone is responsible for the h, which, however,
288
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
long ago has led to the substitution of [0] for the old
er [t].
There can be no doubt, in fact, that the existence of
written tradition has, by constantly demanding the associa
tion of fixed and conservative forms, impeded phonetic
change. If we had no alphabetic writing, or if only a few
of us could read, such forms as _
would long
ago have given way entirely to such as [ju'v sti] or even
to such assimilative reformations as
or [Vorsti].
The written form thus tends to preserve the phonetic
form of the language; though of course, it can do so only
to a comparatively small extent. Our conscious control
over the forms of writing is not yet extensive: the ob
stacles which the various attempts at improving English
spelling have met are an example; nevertheless, as these
attempts themselves show, not to speak of the successful
governmental regulation of orthography in European coun
tries, consciousness and systematic reasoning in this sphere
are gaining ground. When the community will consciously
and deliberately shape its orthography a great step to
ward the conscious influencing of language will thus have
been taken. It is possible, in fact, that, very gradually,
language, like religion, government, and other once purely
communal processes, is developing into a conscious activ
ity.
8. Standard languages. How fast and ultimately how
far this development will progress it is, of course, impos
sible to say. To it belong, however, a number of characteris
tic features in the rise of the socalled standard languages.
These are favored dialects which, either in written form
alone or also in oral, are used all over a dialectally differen
tiated territory. At first they are used for communication
between members of different dialects, the speaker whose
STANDARD LANGUAGES
289
dialect represents the less cultured community using, as
well as may be, that of the more civilized neighbor. Gradu
ally it comes that members of two dialects that are per
haps with difficulty intelligible to each other, will use, in
speaking together, the same favored dialect, though it is
native to neither of them, until at last it may become a
second language for formal and nonlocal discourse all
over the area. Soon there will be speakers in many parts
of the country who can speak only the favored dialect, —
such, for instance, as the upper classes of English, Ger
man, or French society, who rarely can speak the 'patois'
of their native locality, but know only the 'national' or
'standard' language. The latter may ultimately crowd out
the local dialects; this happened in ancient Greece and
in the Roman Empire (where both related dialects and
foreign languages gave way to Latin) and is rapidly happen
ing in modern England.
Meanwhile the favored dialect is used as the language
of literature and is learned by many out of books: the
individual writer has considerable power to influence it.
Cicero, Dante, Chaucer, the translators of the King James
Bible, Goethe, and other writers of great and enduring
renown have permanently moulded their language: in
Shakspere we see the origin not only of many quotations,
but also of some set forms of speech, which have come
to us by virtue of his having used them. As the lan
guage of books, the standard language is subject to fixed
canons of correctness: what good authors do not use is
wrong. This consideration, as well as the necessity of
teaching the standard speech to people who first learned
a local dialect, leads to the compilation of grammatical
descriptions of the language and to lexical summaries,
dictionaries. Thus we arrive finally at a conscious standard
of correctness, which modifies linguistic growth, especially
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
290
EXTERNAL CHANGE OF LANGUAGES
in checking the spread of the easily recognizable morpho
logic innovations of the was for were type. New forms
or words are usually recognized as such, — as dialectal,
vulgar, incorrect, etc. — and consequently associated with
a peculiar emotional tone. If a good author uses their,
they may become part of the standard language, although
they will long be felt as lacking in dignity. Such words
are in English slob, slobber, whang, thump, thwack, squunch,
piffle, and the like. Sometimes they gain ground rapidly;
thus mob, the assimilatively shortened form of mobile val
gus was fifty years ago frowned upon as a barbarism.
Entirely unchangeable are of course the literary languages
which exist only in written form, such as Latin in the
Middle Ages, Sanskrit, Classical Arabic, Hebrew. Al
though these may be occasionally spoken, the great pre
ponderance of use is in careful writing according to the
rules of the grammar and lexicon and on the model of
classical authors.
The standard language may be the dialect of the capital
in conservative form, as in France, England, and Russia
(Moscow), or a mixed dialect as in ancient Greece, where
the Koine was composed of Athenian and Ionic (Asiatic
Greek) elements. It has happened in a number of cases,
now, that in the determination of the forms of such a
language, individuals have been of influence. Modern
Standard German, of complex origin, was, after all, brought
into shape more by the careful work of Luther in his
Bibletranslation than by any other one factor. Modern
Servian was molded by Karadjič upon older forms of the
language, and the 'Landsmaal', one of the two competing
standard languages of Norway, is in great part the crea
tion of a nineteenthcentury linguistic student, Ivar Aasen,
who founded his work on the southwestern dialects of
his country.
STANDARD LANGUAGES
291
Thus it may fairly be said that language also, even if
in smaller measure than any other social activity, has
shared in the human progress from unconscious evolution
into conscious shaping of conditions. In this phase of
linguistic development two features are of special impor
tance: the conscious teaching of languages, for the pur
pose, of course, of establishing communicative bonds, and
the conscious observation of language, linguistic science.
CHAPTER EX
THE TEACHING OF LANGUAGES.
1. The purpose of foreignlanguage instruction.
In communities whose culture is undeveloped no lan
guages are taught. The beginning of languageinstruction
comes always when ancient writings of artistic or, especi
ally, ethical and religious importance are to be handed
on to suceeding generations. Thus the Hindus study the
Vedas and the Sanskrit epic and classical literature, the
Mohammedans classical Arabic and the Koran, the Parsis
Avestan, the Jews Hebrew, the Chinese the old literature
of their country. In Europe the ancient Greeks of histor
ical time studied Homer, whose language was even for
them highly antiquated, the Romans Greek, the medieval
and modern nations Ancient Greek and Latin.
To these studies are added, as the consciousness of
nations increases, the languages of important fellowna
tions. This is a deliberate widening of the bonds of com
munication (p. 291): it is desired that a large element of
the nation understand the writing and speech of foreign
contemporaries. Just as the study of ancient languages
is to preserve the cultural tradition, so that of modern
is to keep the community abreast of modern progress.
The latter study is prompted also by material motives,
such as the need of foreign languages in commerce and
the desirability of promptly utilizing foreign inventions
CHARACTER OF THE INSTRUCTION
293
in science and industry. One may say that today the
nation which contains no large class of people who un
derstand foreign languages dwells in pitiable seclusion.
Finally, as the idea of humanity takes form, there
comes the wish not only to be acquainted with the char
acter and history of one's own nation, but also, in part
as an elucidation of these, to understand the motives,
achievements, and ideals of the sistercommunities. At
this stage, which the European nations more fully than
America have reached, the school studies include not
only instruction in foreign languages, but also a suitable
introduction to the life, culture, and ideals of the foreign
nations.
2. Character of the instruction. It is only in the
last twentyfive years and in the European countries that
success in modernlanguage teaching has ever been at
tained. Of ancient languages this cannot be said: it is
true, however, that where here also success has been
won, it has been by the same general methods as are
today used for modernlanguage instruction in Europe:
by a conscious or unconscious accordance with the fun
damental processes of languagelearning and, for that
matter, of speech in general. Where, as in our own
practice, this accordance is wanting, failure is inevitable.
Of the students who take up the study of foreign lan
guages in our schools and colleges, not one in a hundred
attains even a fair reading knowledge, and not one in a
thousand ever learns to carry on a conversation in the
foreign language. This is due to the fact that almost
every feature of our instruction runs counter to the uni
versal conditions under which language exists. While a
growing number of our teachers have acquainted them
selves with the modern methods, their efforts are largely
checked by the antiquated outer circumstances, such as
294
THE TEACHING OF LANGUAGES
the late age at which pupils begin the study and the
small number of class hours, coupled with the reliance
on home assignments, which are of little use in language
instruction.
Our fundamental mistake has been to regard language
teaching as the imparting of a set of facts. The facts
of a language, however, are, as we have seen, exceedingly
complex. To explain to the student the morphology
and syntax of a language, be it his own or a foreign one,
would require a long time, and, — even if it were done
correctly by linguistically trained teachers, — would be
of little or no value. To set forth the lexical facts would
be an endless task, for not only does each word of the
foreign language differ in content from any word of the
native language, but this content itself is very difficult
of definition. The greatest objection of all, however, is
that, even if the pupil managed somehow to remember
this immense mass of facts, he would scarcely be the
more able, what with it all, to understand the foreign
language in its written or spoken phase. Minutes or
hours would often elapse before he could labor out the
value of a sentence by recalling the facts concerned.
Language is not a process of logical reference to a con
scious set of rules; the process of understanding, speak
ing, and writing is everywhere an associative one. Real
languageteaching consists, therefore, of building up in
the pupil those associative habits which constitute the
language to be learned. Instead of this we try to ex
pound to students the structure and vocabulary of the
foreign language and, on the basis of this, let them
translate foreign texts into English. Such translation is
a performance of which only people equipped with a
complete knowledge of both languages and with consid
erable literary ability are ever capable. As a method
AGE OF THE PUPIL
295
of study, moreover, it is worthlcss, for it establishes as
sociations in which the foreign words play but a small
part as symbols (inexact symbols, of course) of English
words.
The excuse usually given for this practice is that
American conditions make only a 'reading knowledge' of
the foreign language, — especially, if ancient, — of im
portance, — that it is not our purpose to enable pupils
to order a meal in the foreign language. Reading, how
ever, is no different from the other phases of using a
language: the expressions of the language are not the
given members of mathematical equations or puzzles,
but mast enter into a set of rapidly and easily function
ing associative habits. Correct methods of language
teaching differ from those which we are at present un
successfully using not in aim, — any aim can here be
attained by good as surely as it missed by bad teaching,
— but in adaptation to the mental conditions underlying
the activities of speech. In what follows I shall natu
rally speak of American conditions and 'assume that the
ability to read rather than to speak is aimed at: needless
to say that even here the desired associations cannot be
formed without much oral and auditory practice. I be
lieve, moreover, that American conditions are coming to
make a 'speaking knowledge' more and more desirable
and that the time is not far off when here as well as
abroad the ability to converse in one or two foreign
languages will be looked upon as one of the ordinary
marks of education.
3. Age of the pupil. The best age at which to begin
a foreign language is that between the tenth and twelfth
years. If the study is begun earlier, the progress is usual
ly so slow that nothing is gained, the pupil who begins
later soon overtaking him who began younger. If the
296
THE TEACHING OF LANGUAGES
study is begun at the age indicated, further languages
may be taken up at intervals of a few years; as the
student accumulates experience, the later languages will
be learned more rapidly and with less effort than the
earlier, until a facility may be acquired which astonishes
those who have had less practice. It is worth while to
say this, because there exists a superstition to the effect
that languages are acquired by some special power of
the intellect which wanes in maturity. 1 ) If the first for
eign language is begun later than the twelfth year or
so, — and here we see, perhaps, the source of the bit
of popular psychologizing just mentioned, — we find a
growing disinclination on the part of the pupil to go
through the constant practice by which alone success is
attainable. Older students who have never before studied
a language are too exclusively practised in conscious,
logical grouping of facts to accept the repetition of what
is already understood but not yet assimilated; when they
have grasped the 'meaning' of a text in terms of the na
tive language, they are disinclined to go on using the
text with attention to the foreign expression. The nec
essary simplicity as to content of the elementary texts
also bores them. At the age of ten or twelve, on the
other hand, the pupil is attracted by the novelty of what
he learns, enjoys the growing power of expression and
understanding in a new medium, and the playing at being
something strange (e. g. an ancient Roman, a German,
or a Frenchman), nor is he intellectually too superior to
the simple content of the earlier lessons. Once the habit
of foreignlanguagestudy has been at this age set up,
1) It actually happens that students in our universities are
excused from language requirements on the plea that they are
'too old' to learn languages.
EQUIPMENT OF THE TEACHER
297
the student finds no difficulty in going on to other lan
guages even when he is more mature, for he knows from
experience the necessity of the processes involved and
the fruits which they so soon bear.
4. E q u i p m e n t of t h e teacher. As to the prepara
tion of the teacher, a prime requisite is, of course, mastery
of the language to be taught, — in modern languages
a knowledge comparable to that of an educated native
speaker and in ancient a fluent reading ability and some
facility in writing. This is so obvious that it needs no
elaboration, yet we constantly find in our schools and
colleges teachers whose knowledge falls far short of this
demand. Such teachers are from the beginning incapable
of successful instruction, for, though they may vocifer
ously explain (in English) the abstract grammatical facts
of the foreign language, they cannot give the pupil
practice which will form and strengthen in him the asso
ciative habits which constitute the language. If the services
of a teacher approximately possessing these qualifications
cannot be obtained, the instruction should be given up,
as it is only a waste of time.
The same may be said, though not so universally, of
teachers possessing this but lacking another qualification;
namely, the knowledge and experience of how a lan
guage must be taught. Next in uselessness to a teacher
who does not know the language is the teacher who, to
be sure, does know, it, — he may be a native speaker
of it, — but has not the linguistic and pedagogic knowl
edge of how to impart it. In English, — and, if he is
a foreigner, often in broken English, — he indulges in
descriptions of the beauty, conformity to logic, etc. of
the language, and when tbe pupils, on the strength of
this, fail to learn anything, he attributes the failure to
their sloth, stupidity, or narrowminded dislike of what
298
THE TEACHING OF LANGUAGES
is foreign. Ultimately such teachers become either in
different easygoers or irascible cranks.
School languageteaching has been successful only
where thorough knowledge of the foreign language and
training in the necessary linguistic and pedagogical prin
ciples, supplemented by experience in practiceclasses
under supervision, are demanded of all candidates for
teaching positions. Even then centralized control, for
instance by a government bureau, has been found desir
able, as every one will understand who has heard at our
teachers' meetings the grotesque 'methods' which un
controlled and isolated teachers, innocent of the most
fundamental principles of the subject or of any accepted
writings about it, have developed during winters of
teaching. While all instruction, to be worth anything,
must be moulded by the teacher's personality, his whim,
conceit, or lack of information must not be allowed to
ignore the results of generations of labor and experience.
In short, the languageteacher must be a trained pro
fessional, not an amateur. The postponement of much
elementary languageteaching to our colleges brings,
aside from the unfortunate age of the students, the great
disadvantage that it practically excludes such teachers.
In accord with the true purpose of college and university,
the instructors there employed are not pedagogues but
people who have found their calling in the handing on
of culture or in scientific teaching and research. The
professional languageteacher who occasionally finds his
way into these institutions soon learns that he can ex
pect neither honor nor advancement for excellence in his
vocation: he must exchange it for more purely cultural
or scientific studies or be content with a minor position.
Nearly all of the elementary languageteaching in our
colleges is done, accordingly, by doctors of philosophy
DRILL IN PRONUNCIATION
299
who have no training and no ambition in this direction,
but find their interest and seek their advanccment in
linguistic or literary teaching and research. Their in
struction is directed, with ulterior evil effect on that
of the secondary schools also, by men who have come
to the front in some special branch of linguistics or in
literature and have often no understanding of the prob
lems and conditions of foreignlanguage teaching. As
long as this work is inappropriately left to colleges,
these institutions should give employment and promotion
to teachers who make it their business, and allow liter
ary and linguistic scholars to stick to their last, for they
are no more capable of this work than are grammar
school and highschool teachers of conducting graduate
seminars.
5. Drill in pronunciation. Instruction in a foreign
language must begin by training the pupil to articu
late the foreign sounds correctly and without difficul
ty or hesitation. We have seen in Chapter II that the
teacher's ability to pronounce these sounds does not in
volve ability to tell others how they are pronounced.
This information must be given in terms of movement
of the articulatory organs. The instruction must begin,
therefore, with the elements of phonetics as applied to
the pupil's native language and, by contrast, to the for
eign one. Description alone is, of course, of no avail:
the pupils must be brought to practise the foreign arti
culations until they have become automatic. This prac
tice should be enlivened by the subjectmatter, but it must
remain practice in articulation, an unidiomatic articulation
being in no case allowed to pass muster. Overgrown
pupils, especially if unused to accurate and painstaking
study, will content themselves with noting certain gener
al resemblances to native sounds and interpreting the
300
THE TEACHING OF LANGUAGES
examples into the nearest corresponding native articula
tion. The phonetic drill must be based, in the case of
languages that are unphonetically written, such as French,
on a transcription into a phonetic alphabet. After pro
nunciation has been mastered, the irregularities of the
standard orthography will cause much less difficulty
than if they were at the beginning presented in inextri
cable confusion with the foreign pronunciation.
6. Method of presenting semantic material. As
time goes on, the pronunciation will require less and less
of conscious attention on the part of the learner. From
the very beginning, however, the significance of the ex
pressions that are practised should be made use of. The
very first phonetic examples should be characteristic
words and phrases. The signification of these cannot,
as we have seen in Chapter IV (p. 85, ff.) be taught in terms
of the pupil's native language. This would involve either
false statements or, if these were to be avoided, lengthy,
complicated, and easily forgotten explanantions. The
foreign utterance must, instead, be associated from the
very first, with its actual content. The beginning should
be made, therefore, with expressions concretely intelli
gible: formulas of greeting, short sentences about objects
in the classroom, and actions that can be performed
while naming them.
As the work goes on to connected narrative and de
scriptive texts, this method must be continued. The texts,
therefore, must at first be confined to very simple dis
course about concretely illustrable matters. Pictures are
here of great use. Any new text must be explained in
terms of what has already been learned, not in English.
Translation into the pupil's native language or other ex
plicatory use of it must be avoided, for two reasons. The
terms of the native language are misleading, because the
METHOD OF PRESENTING SEMANTIC MATERIAL
301
content of any word or sentence of the foreign language
is always different from any approximate correspondent
in the native language. A pupil taught that the German
leocn means 'read' will say ich lesen instead of ich lese.
If he is taught that wenn means 'when', he will confuse
it with als, and if he is taught that ob means 'if, he will
confuse it with wenn. Once such associations are formed,
— and their fictitious simplicity makes them compara
tively easy to fix, — no amount of explanation or insist
ence on the part of the teacher will overcome them.
The second reason for the avoidance of translation is that,
in the association of the foreign word with the native
one, the latter will always remain the dominant feature,
and the former will be forgotten. The learner will know
that he has met the foreign word for 'pencil', but the
sound and spelling of the foreign word will be very hazy
in his mind. Where continued translation has given
facility in these associations, the pupils scarcely look at
the foreign text before the English word, right or wrong,
becomes conscious. The result is that their foreign vo
cabulary remains small; they are forced to look up in
the glossary over and over again the same common word,
and, whenever they look it up, their habit leads them to
fix only the native interpretation and to go on with the
text. Every teacher has known students who have read
hundreds of pages in a foreign language and yet have
to look up dozens of the commonest words in any page
of a new text — or even of the old, if they are asked to
reread.
Instead of translation the work with a text should
consist of repeated use of its contents in hearing, read
ing, speaking, and writing. The beginning is best made
before the pupil has even seen the text. The teacher
explains in the foreign language the new expressions
302
THE TEACHING OF LANGUAGES
which are to occur and leads the pupils to use them in
speech over and over again. Then the pupils are required,
first, to read the new selection correctly after the teacher,
later, to answer, with the book, then without it, simple
questions about it, to converse about its subjectmatter,
and to retell it in speech and in writing. The text
should not be left until every phase of it has been thor
oughly assimilated: no text should in the beginning be
used whose linguistic contents are not important and com
mon enough to deserve such assimilation.
The range of work that the pupil can do outside the
classroom is here very small. The danger that he will
practise false pronunciation or usage must make the
teacher very cautious in the assignment of outside lessons.
Copying the text and preparation of lists of words and
sentences taken directly from it are least dangerous. As
the work must thus be done almost entirely in the class
room, eight hours a week of classwork are not too much
in the first year or two.
It is only after the pupil has mastered for speaking
and writing as well as reading a good central stock of
words, forms, and constructions, that more rapid reading
should be undertaken. Without a nucleus of expressive
material over which the pupil has full and accurate con
trol, the necessary analogies even for that degree of
understanding which we call a readingknowledge are
lacking.
7. Grammatical information. The amount of text
covered in the first year or two cannot be large. It is
to be measured not by the page, but by the amount of
new material introduced. Beginners will do well, if they
learn a thousand words in the first year of the first
foreign language. A hundred pages of carefully pre
pared easy text will contain this amount of material.
GRAMMATICAL INFORMATION
303
The texts need not be arranged in terror of introduc
ing new grammatical features before they have been
systematically — i. e. theoretically, — explained. Gram
mar, as such, is not necessary for the use or understand
ing of a language: the normal speaker or reader is not
conscious of the grammatical abstractions. In foreign
language teaching grammar is of use only where it def
initely contributes to the ease of learning. When a new
text appears the learner should be able to tell where he
has met the words and phrases it contains and others
like them. Now, when he meets, let us say, a new in
flectional form of a known word, the differences in the
use of the two forms should be carefully illustrated and
practised. After a time, when a considerable number
of such collocations has been made, — when a number
of singulars and plurals, for instance, have been com
pared as to use and form, — the grammatical statement,
if simple enough to be of help, may be given. In fact,
it will be unnecessary, for the pupil will with consider
able interest, have formulated it for himself. On the
other hand, the grammatical statement must often be
kept temporarily incomplete. The German dative case,
for instance, is of so heterogeneous use that a statement
of its value would take a long time and would be unin
telligible to any but a linguistically trained learner. In
stead, we may collect our accumulated examples of datives,
observe the forms, and their occurrence after certain verbs
and certain prepositions and independently in the sentence.
All this need not be done at once: the dative with prep
ositions, especially, in its contrast with the accusative,
may, as the most definitely recognizable use, be collected
and observed long before the other types. In every in
stance the forms themselves in their natural connection
should be practised to the point of thorough habituation
304
THE TEACHING OF LANGUAGES
before the abstract statement is given. Consequently the
grammatical features of a new text are of secondary im
portance, provided that it is easily explained and under
stood. Grammar should be used only as a summary and
mnemonic aid for the retention of what has been al
ready learned. Where it cannot be so used, it should be
omitted.
8. Texts. While the matter read should, of course,
be characteristic of the foreign nation's life and culture,
the selections should not hasten to tell too much at the
cost of simplicity. Selections of literary value should not
be introduced before the pupil can understand them: if
he cannot, their literary qualities are lost to him. The
transition from the mere learning of the foreign language
to the study of its literature and culture must be gradual,
especially in the case of the first language studied. This
language, however, should by the end of the secondary
school period, have become so familiar that the last years
are spent entirely in the study of works of ethical, ar
tistic, and generally cultural interest. In the languages
later begun the practice in acquiring languages will make
up for the shorter time of study. All reading, no matter
of what nature, should be within the pupil's immediate
range of understanding of the foreign language. The
great bulk of the time must be taken up in fixing in the
pupil's mind the value of the foreign expressions, until
these, when seen or heard, are automatically understood.
It is only on the basis of such knowledge as this that
reading can go on at a rate which makes an ideal
effect upon the pupil possible. The premature reading,
or rather pottering through foreign literature in our
schools (e. g. Wilhelm Tell in the second year of ill
taught German) is a mere workingout of senseless
puzzles.
REFERENCES
305
The interpretation of what is read must always be
pedagogic rather than scientific in purpose. The aim of
foreignlanguage instruction is to acquaint the pupil
with the foreign language, through it with the foreign
culture, and generally, as in all other school studies,
to train him to a higher mentality, in every sense of
the word. The scientific study of the foreignlanguage
or literature is entirely inappropriate for a school for
eignlanguage course. By postponing this course to the
highschool and college we have brought about confusion
of elementary foreignlanguage learning with the aims
of scientific linguistics and scientific literary history.
These studies belong to a later stage of education, in
which, to be sure, both should be represented; but an
exposition of Grimm's law in the elementary German
classroom, or of the motives of romanticism in that of
secondyear French is a deplorable farce.
The texts, then, as the pupil grows familiar with the
language and at the same time progresses towards matu
rity, should be selected more and more for their inner
content. From the simplest elementary selections we may
proceed to easy short stories, then to more serious histor
ic, descriptive, and narrative prose and to drama and
poetry. Toward the end of the course summaries of the
literary, cultural, and political history, — preparing for
possible college courses in these subjects, — should be
read.
9. References. The English reader will find details
about the methods of languageteaching in the two follow
ing books and in the bibliographies which they con
tain:
Otto Jespersen, How to Teach a Foreign Language,
London and New York (Macmillan) 1904 and 1908.
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
306
THE TEACHING OF LANGUAGES
Leopold Bahlsen, The Teaching of Modern Languages,
Boston (Ginn) 1905.
The latter book contains a brief review of the history
of languageteaching in Europe, which shows plainly that
our languageteaching differs from that of the European
countries not as a mere difference in choice of methods
(e. g. that they use the 'direct' and we some other 'meth
od'), but that most of our practice is half a century
or so behind that of the European schools, which has
kept better pace with scientific insight into language.
CHAPTER X.
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE.
1, The origin of linguistic science. Linguistics (Ger
man Spracliivissenschaft, French linguistique) took its
beginning, historically, in the study of writings which
were preserved for their religious or esthetic value. As
these texts antiquated, interpretation of their language
became necessary and led finally to a grammatical codifi
cation of their forms. In this way the study of philology
German Phiilologie, French pliilologie),— that is, of nation
al cultural tradition, — came to include a linguistic
discipline whose aim was the practical one of making
intelligible and preserving certain writings. Thus origina
ted the treatises of the Indian grammarians (chief among
them Panini, fourth century B. C.), the Ancient Greek
grammar (especially Dionysios Thrax, second century B C.,
and Apollonios Dyskolos, second century of our era), the
Latin grammars (Donatus, fourth century, Priscian, sixth
century), the Hebrew grammar, and so on.
The linguistic study at this stage was properly a means
to an end, a prodrome to philology. Nevertheless, there
were always scholars, who, be it from a genuine but mis
guided interest in language or from sheer pedantry, con
fined themselves to this grammatical study. Thus there
developed a pseudolinguistics, which occupied itself with
grammatical dissection of texts, with haphazard etymolo
308
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
gies, and with vague theorizing as to origins.1) A further
impulse to this grammatical study was felt when the pop
ular language deviated from that of the texts to the
point where the latter became unintelligible, or when
people of alien speech adopted the culture and with it
the philologic studies of a more advanced nation. Both of
these conditions were given in medieval Europe, where
classical Latin had become unintelligible to the people of
Romance tongue and was foreign to the northern nations.
At first the teaching of Latin (and, when it was revived,
that of Greek) was conducted on a sensible basis: the
language was spoken, written, and read until the student
had firm command of it and easy access to the classical
literature. Later, however, pedantry prevailed: in spite of
such great educators as (in the sixteenth century) Ascham
and (in the seventeenth century) Ratichius and Comenius,
theoretical grammar came more and more to be looked
upon as a means of learning the ancient languages. This
went so far that, for example, up to very recent times
English schoolboys had to memorize the entire contents
of a Latin grammar before they were allowed any real
contact with the language. It was only a slight allevia
tion of this barbarity when the rules of grammar were
at least illustrated by disconnected sentences. This latter
method prevailed when, early in the nineteenth century,
modern languages came to be studied in Europe for practi
1) Owing to this occupation the term 'philology' has come
to be misused in English first as meaning linguistics and then
even in reference to misplaced and piddling grammatical study.
The best usage, however, — t h a t , for instance, of the greatest
of Englishspeaking linguistic scholars, the American William
Dwight Whitney, — does not sanction this; philology is the
study of national cultural values, especially as preserved in the
writings of a people, linguistics the study of man's function of
language
THE ORIGIN OF LINGUISTIC SCIENCE
309
cal purposes; accordingly, the grammatical facts of these
were codified in imitation of Latin and Greek and became
the basis of instruction. This sentencemethod, used in
the books of A h n , Ollendorff, and many successors, is
still, in various modifications, supreme in American schools
In this way pseudolinguistics, supported by a false
pedagogic idea, held the field until the nineteenth cen
tury. There had, to be sure, been attempts in the preced
ing centuries to attain a genuine understanding of lan
guage, but these were frustrated chiefly by the aprioristic,
purely logical — unhistorical and unpsychologic — manner
of consideration and also, in spite of the comparison of
Arabic, Hebrew, and the writers' own modern languages,
by the confinement of the study to a narrow and acciden
tal group of idioms. The work of such men as Schottelius,
de Brosses, Fulda, and even, early in the nineteenth cen
t u r y , Bernhardi, remained, therefore, without direct re
sults.
It was the opening to Europe of India and the widen
ing of cultural and scientific interests which we call the
romantic movement, that led to a more fruitful study of
language.
The romantic interest in things ancient and distant
made European thinkers ready to receive the Indian cul
ture which such men as William Jones and Colebrooke
brought from the East. This culture included, in the manner
above described, grammatical treatises dealing with San
skrit, the sacred and literary language of India, — trea
tises in which European scholarship found a linguistic
achievement beyond any it had known. For, while the
Sanskrit grammar had not attained to the idea of a science
of language and served in India the same purpose of
misinstruction of the young that Latin grammar had
fulfilled in Europe, its original task of preserving through
310
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
millenia the norm of classical usage was satisfied by a
highly exact description of Sanskrit pronunciation and
wordformation. The former of these, especially, was a
revelation to European students, who had never given
attention to the articulations of speech. Medical investiga
tors, meanwhile, — owing, again, to the romantic impetus,
— came to study the physiology of language, until we
find the two tendencies, represented, for example, by the
physiologist Briicke and the linguist and philologian
Scherer, culminating in the modern discipline of phonet
ics. In respect to wordformation also, the transparency
of the Sanskrit language and the excellent treatment it
had received from the Hindu grammarians, afforded a
new insight into the development of linguistic forms.
Modern linguistics more than any other phase of our
cultural life, is a heritage from India.
The romantic impulse led to a widening of the group
of languages studied, which, with the insight afforded by
Sanskrit, resulted in the recognition that a number of
languages of Europe and Asia are related. This recogni
tion, made by William Jones and Friedrich Schlegel, was
shaped by Franz Bopp (1791—1867) into a scientific
investigation, which showed definitively that these lan
guages are divergent forms of an earlier uniform parent
language. This investigation, brought into fuller and more
accurate form and subjected to more careful method by the
work of such men as August Friedrich Pott (1802—1887)
and August Schleicher (1823—1868), has grown into the
study of IndoEuropean linguistics, which to this day has
remained the central and bestknown field of linguistic
science.
The progress of IndoEuropean linguistics gave new
interest to the study of Latin, Greek, Sanskrit, and the
modern European languages. The first three were directly
THE ORIGIN OF LINGUISTIC SCIENCE
311
involved in the origin of IndoEuropean study, and the
groups of modern languages soon received their individual
treatment. This has been fullest in the Germanic and the
Romance languages. Jacob Grimm (1785—1863) laid
the foundation of the former in his monumental Deutsche
Grammatik ('German', — we should say today 'Germanic'
— Grammar), the first great scientific linguistic work of
the world, and perhaps even today the greatest. On Grimm's
model C. F. Diez (1794—1876) founded the study of the
Romance languages in his Grammatik der romanischen
Spraclien. The scientific study of the Celtic group received its
basis in the Grammatica Celtica of J. K. Zeuss (1806—1856)
and that of the Slavic languages in the Vergleichende Gram
matik der slawischen Spraclien of Franz von Miklosich
(1813—1891).
The new interest in linguistics did not, of course, con
fine itself to the IndoEuropean languages: it led also to
the study of language in general. This study received its
foundation at the hands of the Prussian statesman and
scholar Wilhelm von Humboldt (1767—1835), especially
in the first volume of his work on Kavi, the literary lan
guage of Java, entitled Über die Verschiedenheit des mensch
lichen Sprachbaues and ihren Einfluβ auf die geistige Entwickelung des Menschengeschle hts ('On the Variety of the
Structure of Language and its Influence upon the Mental
Development of the Human Race'). Humboldt's work has
been followed in two directions. The study of the lan
guages of the world has resulted in a series of disciplines
parallel to IndoEuropean linguistics, each studying a set
of related idioms. The chief families today so recognized
are the Semitic, the Hamitic (these two are thought to
be in turn descended from a common earlier speech), the
Uralic (Hungarian, Finnish, and other languages), the
Altaic (Turkish, Tartar, etc.; these two groups also are
312
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
thought by many to be related), the Caucasian (in the
Caucasus; the most important language is Georgian), the
M:dayoPolynesian, the IndoChinese (Tibetan, Burmese,
Siamese, Chinese), the Dravidian, the Bantu, and the vari
ous American families, such as the Athapascan and the
Algonquian. These have progressed in various degrees
toward a scientific comprehension like that which we have
of the IndoEuropean languages. The study of the American
languages, though supported in praiseworthy manner by
our government, is hampered by many external conditions,
including the lack of investigators with linguistic and
especially phonetic training.
The other direction in which Humboldt may be said
to have led the way, — although here the older gramma
rians have been not without influence, — is the study
of the conditions and laws of language: its psychic and
social character and its historical development. This study
was furthered by the growth of psychologic insight and
of the historical point of view and method, — both of
which are from the beginning related to the linguistic
studies by the common origin in the romantic movement.
Especially active in the psychologic interpretation of lan
guage was H. Steinthal (1823—1899); the American schol
ar W. D. W h i t n e y (1827 — 1894) applied to the historic
phase a remarkable clearness and t r u t h of comprehension,
to be appreciated in a field from which mystic vagueness
and haphazard theory have been slow to recede. Both of
these men have been followed by numerous investigators
who have contributed to our understanding of the men
tal processes of speech and of its change and develop
ment in time; the great advance of psychology in recent
decades and the rise of social and ethnologic studies have
been, of course, of the highest benefit to this phase of
the science of language
HOW TO STUDY LINGUISTICS
313
2. How to study linguistics. a) The student who
wishes to devote all or any considerable part of his time
to the study of language should begin with that language
whose facts are immediately accessible to him, — of course,
his own. He should diligently watch his articulations,
practise their phonetic notation, and observe individual
and local variations from his own usage. This observation
must be accompanied by an elementary study of phonet
ics, for which one of the following books, in the beginn
ing preferably the last named (which contains a brief
phonetic text in three varieties of English, including
American), should be used:
Henry Sweet, A Primer of Phonetics, third edition, Ox
ford 1906.
Otto Jespersen, Lehrlmch der Phonetik, second edition,
Leipzig and Berlin 1913.
Paul Passy, Petite phonctigue comparee, second edition,
Leipzig and Berlin 1913.
A fuller and by far the best treatise on phonetics, which
the student should later use, is:
Eduard Sievers, Grandciige der Phonetik, fifth edition,
Leipzig 1 9 0 1 . '
The learner should then go on to the morphology and
syntax and finally the phraseologic and stylistic features
of the language he hears and speaks every day. There
are, unfortunately, few descriptions of modern English
which can be consulted in this connection. The southern
British usage is given in:
Henry Sweet, A Primer of Spoken English, fourth edi
tion, Oxford 1906.
The northern British usage, more conservative and more
like the American, is given in:
R. J. Lloyd, Northern English: Phonetics, Grammar,
Texts, Leipzig 1899.
314
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
b) The approach to the historic development of lan
guage should then be made through the medium of Eng
lish. For this the aids are copious. One may first read:
Otto Jespersen, Growth and Structure of the English
Language, Leipzig 1905.
J. B. Greenough and G. L. Kittredge, Words and their
Ways in English Spcech, New York (Macmillan). 1901,
and then the various 'readers' and 'primers', true models
of their kind, of the late Henry Sweet, published by the
Oxford University Press, viz., for Old English:
Henry Sweet, AngloSaxon Primer, eighth edition;
Henry Sweet, AngloSaxon Header, eighth edition;
Henry Sweet, A Second AngloSaxon Header: Archaic
and Dialectal,
and for Middle English:
Henry Sweet, First Middle English Primer, second
edition;
Henry Sweet, Second Middle English Primer: Extracts
from Chaucer, second edition.
These should be supplemented by the historical accounts
of the development of English in:
Heny Sweet, Primer of Historical English Grammar,
which is a condensed version of:
Henry Sweet, Short Historical English Grammar, which,
in turn, is a separate publication of part of the historical
material of:
Henry Sweet, New English Grammar (two volumes).
Especially important is the last of these, which con
tains a readable and fairly complete account of the phonet
ic, morphologic, and syntactic development of English
from Old English to the present time.1) This historical
1) The general linguistic and grammatical disquisitions at
the beginning of the book are not, however, to be recommended
HOW TO STUDY LINGUISTICS
315
study of English should be rapid and extensive rather
than intensive, — unless, indeed, one intends to take
English for one's special field, — for it is more important
at this stage to get a general idea of linguistic develop
ment than to learn the particular historic facts of English.
c) Simultaneously with the preceding study the general
facts and principles of linguistics should be the subject of a
course of somewhat more intensive reading. If one has
not studied psychology, some modern text of it should
be read. The beginning of linguistics is best made with
one of Whitney's books:
W. D. Whitney, Language and the Study of Language,
New York (Scribner) 1867 (and successive reprints),
W. D. Whitney, The Life and Growth of Language,
New York (Appleton) 1875 (and successive reprints).
These books, though today incomplete, are fundamental
works of our science and are, moreover, written in a
style of remarkable clearness and dignity. After this,
one should read, for the principles and methods of modern
linguistics:
B. Delbrόck, JEinleitung in das Studium der indogerma
nischen Sprachen, fifth edition, Leipzig 1908,
H. Paul, Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte, fourth edition,
Halle 1909. (An English adaptation of the second, 1886,
edition is Strong, Logeman, and Wheeler, Introduction to
the Study of the History of Language, London 1891),
H. Oertel, Lectures on the Study of Language, New York
(Scribner) 1902.
The semantic phase of linguistic development is clever
ly and interestingly, though, unfortunately, from the
standpoint of 'popular' psychology, discussed in
M. Breal, Essai de Semaniique, fourth edition, Paris 1908.
(An English translation of the third, 1897, edition by
Mrs, H. Cust appeared in London in 1900).
316
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
Later it is advisable, because the books so far named
are for the most part not fully modern as to psychologic
interpretation, to study carefully the great linguistic work
of the philosopher and psychologist Wundt:
W. Wundt, Vφlkerpsychologie, 1. und 2. Band, Die Sprache,
third edition, Leipzig 1911.
It is convenient to supplement this with the Indo
European linguist Delbruck's critique and valuation, which
appeared in answer to the first edition (1900) of Wundt's
book:
B. Delbruck, Grundfragen der Sprachforschung, Strab
burg 1901,
and with Wundt's answering statement, important as
to the relation of psychology, descriptive linguistics, and
historical linguistics:
W. Wundt, Sprachgeschichte und Sprachpsychologie,
Leipzig 1901.
A highly suggestive book on the history of language is
Otto Jespersen, Progress in Language, with Special
Reference to English, London 1894 (and reprints).
d) The general aspects of language cannot be under
stood without at least some acquaintance with divergent
forms of speech. The best aid for this is the clear little
description of eight languages of widely different types
(with an illustrative text of each),
F. N. Finek, Die Haupttypen des Sprachbaues, Leipzig
1910.
A very useful list of the languages of the earth,
arranged in families, — though perhaps too optimistic
in the assumption of relationships, — is another booklet
by the same author:
F. N. Finck, Die Sprachstämme des Erdh'eises, Leipzig
1909
HOW TO STUDY LINGUISTICS
317
Brief summaries, valuable for reference, of the gramma
tical facts of a large part of the languages of the world
are given in
F. Mtiller, Grundriss der Sprachivissemchaft, four vol
umes, Vienna 1876, ff.
The more general, in part the practical aspects of lin
guistics, are treated in the lively, if not always fully
modern book,
G. von der Gabelentz, Die Sprachwissenscliaft, second
edition, Leipzig 1901.
The relation of linguistics to ethnology, strangely neg
lected in all these books, is briefly discussed by Pro
fessor Boas in the Introduction of the Fortieth Bulletin
of the Bureau of Ethnology of the Smithsonian Institu
tion, namely:
F. Boas, Handbook of the American Indian Languages,
Parti, Washington 1911.
A good introduction to ethnology, containing an ex
cellent chapter on language, is:
R. R. Marrett, Anthropology, New York (Holt) and
London [1011].
e) Meanwhile the student will have chosen some lan
guage or group of languages as his special field of study,
— as, for example, English, German, French, Latin, Greek,
or Sanskrit, or, of groups, the Germanic, the Romance,
or the Slavic languages. If, as is usually with us the
case, some IndoEuropean language or group is chosen,
the study should be accompanied by that of the Indo
European family in general. There are two excellent
brief compendia of what is known, about this group; the
first fuller and more exact, the second better suited to
continuous reading:
K. Brugmann, Kurze vergleichcnde Grammatik der indo
germanischen Spraehen, StraBburg 1904.
318
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
A. Meillet, Introduction a I'Etude Comparative des
Langues IndoEuropeennes, third edition, Paris 1913.
These books contain ample bibliography, not only of
IndoEuropean publications, but also of those on the
various groups constituting the family. A fuller account,
with complete bibliography, is
K. Brugmann and B. Delbrόck, Grundriβ der vergleichenden Grammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen,
first edition, five volumes, Straβburg, 1886—1900, second
edition, first three volumes, ibid. 1897—1911. (For those
parts which have not yet appeared in the second edition
the first must be used; the first two volumes of this have
appeared in an English translation in four volumes:
J. Wright, R. S. Conway, and W. A. Rouse, Elements of
the Comparative Grammar of the Indo-Germanic Languages,
New York, Westermann, 1888 — 1895).
If the student's chosen language belongs to any one
of the large branches of IndoEuropean, he should make
also a study of this branch and of the other languages
in it; — thus, if he is specializing in English, he should
not neglect Germanic linguistics and the study of Frisian,
German (High and Low, including Dutch), Scandinavian,
and Gothic. The nucleus of one's work should be, how
ever, the intensive study of some one language or group,
based, if possible, on the present speech as heard, as well
as on texts, — for comparative purposes of course on
the oldest, — and on the standard books and articles
about the subject. In this work the student will learn
to understand also the general principles more thorough
ly than is possible at second hand. In time he will find
gaps in our knowledge or errors in our interpretation
which he will be able to fill out or to correct, if he is
willing to devote himself to a strict adherence to historic
RELATION OF LINGUISTICS TO OTHER SCIENCES 319
fact in all its details and to an inflexible discrimination
between mere.surmise and scientific certainty.
3. Relation of linguistics to other sciences, a) To
philology. Linguistics, we have seen, took its origin in
philology, — in the study of national culture. The re
lations between the two sciences are still manifold. The
most original of these relations, the practical one, is ob
vious: for philologic study thorough knowledge of the
language of the community and of its writings is a nec
essary instrument. If the community has a long cultural
history, as in the case of France, Germany, or England,
this knowledge must extend to the various historic forms
of the language and will naturally shape itself into a
study of the linguistic history of the nation. The philol
ogist must not, however, mistaking the means for the
end, confine himself to this linguistic study: if he wishes
to remain philologist, his aim must be the understanding
of the more conscious cultural activities of the nation;
if he wishes to go over to linguistics, it will be his duty to
study also the elements and principles of this science and,
to some extent, the linguistics of other nations. The few
scholars who have been successfully active in both philol
ogy and linguistics made a study of both sciences, —
a twofold task exceeding the abilities of most men; there
has been on the other hand some confusion, beyond that
in name, of the two sciences, usually in the shape of
philologists who neglected the genuine values of their
own science for amateurish but pedantic pseudolin
guistics.
Aside from the practical relation of linguistics to philol
ogy, there is an intrinsic connection between them, which,
however, has been overestimated rather than neglected
This connection inheres in the fact that language is the
most elementary cultural activity and bears traces, al
320
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
ways, of the more deliberate cultural achievements of a
nation, both in the clearness and flexibility of its syn
tactic and stylistic forms and in the vocabulary. The
cultural features of the latter are revealed, of course, by
etymology, in the study of semantic changes 'and word
borrowings.
b) To literary history and criticism (German Literatur
wissensella ft). The science of literary history, recently
also named (in my opinion, misnamed) 'comparative liter
ature', has like linguistics, grown out of philology, with
the aim of studying not the cultural achievements of this
or that nation, but the development of literature (story
telling, poetry, drama, and so on) among nations, groups
of nations (such as western Europe), and among mankind
universally. As the instrument of literature is language,
the student of literature needs a general, if elementary
knowledge of the nature and development of language;
as, on the other hand, the use of language in literature
is a powerful factor in the history of the former, the lin
guist must often consult the student of letters.1)
c) To history. Since language changes in time, its his
tory is part of that of the speaking community. This is
true most evidently of the external history of language, —
of its differentiation into dialects, its uniformization by
a standard form of speech, its spread over tributary
peoples, or of a nation's adoption of an alien language
1) Utterly unscientific is the notion that linguistics is in some
way an illegitimate rival of the study of literature, and that
any and all linguistic students ought properly to transfer their
activity to the latter field. This notion is an offshoot of the
idea that only professional study of literature enables one to
love or understand it. As a matter of fact, linguistic scholars,
owing to their contact with texts of various languages, are ofter
fair connoisseurs of literature
RELATION OF LINGUISTICS TO OTHER SCIENCES
321
under conquest. It is no less true, however, of the internal
history, where every change of language is of course real
ly a historic event.
Nevertheless, historians have not, as a rule, included
linguistic history in their studies or treatises. The ex
ceptions are twofold. Wherever there has been a con
scious linguistic activity, especially in the formation or
spread of a standard or literary language, history has
taken notice. Thus, of the history of the English lan
guage, the rise of London English during the Chaucerian
period, of the history of German, the origin of Standard
German in the imperial offices and in Luther's Bible
translation, have alone been included in the histories of
these nations. While this exclusion of most linguistic
history has been tacitly made, it can be justified, if one
limits history to those events in which deliberate individ
ual action has demonstrably or presumably played a
part. The second phase of linguistic development which
has been included in history is the testimony of vocabu
lary to material surroundings and events; thus the stratum
of Romance loanwords introduced into English after
the Norman conquest finds mention in histories of the
English people. In so far as the data so furnished by
language come directly from historic periods, they are
useful in cultural history (German Kulturgescliiclite); in
so far as they are derived, by the comparative method,
from prehistoric times, they are of moment, — though
the methods of interpretation are not yet certain, — in
prehistory (German Urgescliiclite).
d) To cthnology. Language is the most purely com
munal of human activities, — the one least amenable to
modification by individuals and least obscured by the
secondary rationalizing explanations familiar to ethnol
ogists. The unconscious communal grouping of ideas
B l o o m f i e l d , Study of Language
322
THE S T U O F LANGUAGE
(formation of categories) takes place nowhere so freely
as in language. This is true not only of the grammatical
groupings and those implied in the vocabulary, — for
every word involves a classification of experiences (p. 63),
— but even of the soundsystem, which represents a
communal selection of a limited number of places of artic
ulation and manners of articulation from among a pos
sible infinite variety (p. 53).
Thus the language of any single community at a given
time is an important part of the ethnologic data concern
ing it. This does not mean, however, that linguistics is
part of ethnology, for it is only the descriptive data
which the two sciences have in common. The linguist
can collect these data and proceed to the interpretation
of their origin and relation to other forms of speech, or
at least to their insertion into a general scheme of lin
guistic development and distribution; their comparison
with the other ethnic data, such as those of religion,
myth, and custom, with view to a characterization of the
community, must be left to the ethnologist.
e) To psychology. The relation of linguistics to psy
chology is, on the one hand, implied in the basic position
of the latter among the mental sciences. These sciences,
studying the various activities of man, demand in differ
ing degrees but none the less universally, a constant
psychologic interpretation. Perhaps this is but negatively
true: perhaps the student of a mental science could and
ideally should refrain from any running psychologic inter
pretation; in practice, however, such interpretation is un
avoidable. In describing an analogic or semantic change,
for instance, linguists most usually outline the conditions
of mental predisposition which brought it about. If they
do not do this in terms of scientific psychology, they
will resort to rationalizing 'popular psychology', — to
RELATION OF LINGUISTICS TO OTHER SCIENCES
323
such explanations as t h a t the new form was desired for
greater 'clearness' or 'convenience'. As language is in
its forms the least deliberate of human activities, the one
in which rationalizing explanations are most grossly out
of place, linguistics is, of all the mental sciences, most
in need of guidance at every step by the best psychologic
insight available.
On the other hand, psychology makes a wide use of
the results of linguistics. Modern psychology recognizes
two sources of information. The one is introspective
analysis under the control of mechanical (experimental)
devices which record the physical correlates of the men
tal process. The information so obtained applies to the
activity of the individual human mind. This activity is
always conditioned, however, in varying degrees, on past
experiences which in themselves are products of mental
action of other individuals. T h u s , when one speaks a
sentence, the form it takes is due to the utterances which
the speaker, since infancy, has heard from the other
members of his community. It is due, in other words,
to a series of connected mental processes extending in
definitely back into time and occurring in an indefinite
number of individuals. Such mental processes, then, as
those involved in the utterance of speech cannot find
their explanation in the individual, — he receives his
speechhabits from others, — but must be traced for ex
planation from individual to individual ad infinitum.
They are products of the mental action not of a single
person, but of a community of individuals. These prod
ucts, — not only language but also myth, art, and
custom, — are the data which make possible the second
phase of psychology, social psychology, (German Vφlker
psychologie). As language, moreover, is less subject than
these other activities to individual deliberate actions
324
THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE
which interfere with the communal nexus, it is the most
important domain in the study of social psychology.
f) To philosophy I shall not presume to enter here
upon the epistemologie problems in which linguistic con
siderations must play a part. Far more of our experience
than one generally assumes is shaped by the linguistic
habits in which we live. The apparatus of logic, more
especially, depends upon the language we speak: the
logical forms, in other words, must develop historically
with the language. Not only our more abstract concepts,
but also those of qualities and actions are due to lin
guistic forms, or rather, are the subjective phase of lin
guistic forms, which have been evolved in the course of
time. Much of our philosophy, in consequence, moves
captive in the plane of its authors' language, which it
should, for freedom, transcend, — as it can only through
the study of language.
To come to a simpler matter, the development of lan
guage occupies a peculiar and interesting position in the
universal growth of things which philosophy essays to
study. Faster than biologic evolution, so fast indeed that
a change like the one from the IndoEuropean parent lan
guage to modern English takes place, as it were, under
our very eyes, yet incomparably slower and more unifi
able, to our comprehension, than the historic change in
other human activities, linguistic development may rep
resent to us a type of progress intermediate between
these
The unfolding of the unconscious into consciousness
takes place nowhere to our direct knowledge so clearly
as in the activity of speech. In the spread of single
languages over whole continents, and in the more con
scious shaping of these languages, lies the beginning of
a growing rationalization of speech. If movements such
RELATION OF LINGUISTICS TO OTHER SCIENCES
325
as that for an artificial worldlanguage, which would
seem to be here in the current of natural progress, have
met with failure, this is because they have been but
superficially rational and for the most part mere distor
tions of the languages we have unconsciously developed.
Linguistic science has not come to a point where the
artificial creation or preservation of a language is pos
sible or even conceivable. Nevertheless, such misplaced
attempts throw light upon the growing consciousness in
the domain of communicative activity. One need think
only of international signals, numerals, the division of
time, the metric system, and the like, to see the increas
ing amenability of this domain to purposeful modification.
It is in this development, — in such phases of it as the
teaching of reading and writing and of standard languages
and foreign languages in schools, in the treatment of the
deaf and dumb, in stenography, in the preparation of
international means of communication, — that linguistic
science finds more and more its active part in human
progress. In short, linguistic science is a step in the self
realization of man.
INDICES.
The numbers refer to pages.
Words in brackets are to be taken as crossreferences.
1 . AUTHORS, e t c .
Aasen 290
Ahn 309
Apollonios Dyskolos 807
Ascham 308
von der Gabelentz 317
Goethe 289
Greenough 314
Grimm 208, 311.
Bahlsen 306
Bernhardi 309
Bible, King James translation
289; Luther's translation 290,
321
Boas 317
Bopp 310
Breal 172, 316
de Brosses 309
Briicke 310
Brugmann 317, 318.
Van Helmont 237
Herder 14
Herodotus 13
Homer 292
Horace 181
von Humboldt 311, 312.
Carroll 237
Chaucer 59, 195, 289, 321
Cicero 289
Colebrooke 309
Comenius 308.
Dante 289
Delbruck 315, 316, 318
Diez 311
Dionysios Thrax 307
Donatus 307.
International Phonetic Associa
tion 23.
Jespersen 305, 313, 314, 316
Jones 309, 310.
Karadjič 290
Kittredge 314
Koran 292.
Lloyd 313
Luther 296, 321,
Marrett 317
Meillet 318
von Miklosich 311
Müller 317.
Edkins 19
Epicureans 14.
Oertel 315
Ollendorf 309.
Finck 316
Fulda 309.
Pānini 307
Passy 99, 313
328
INDICES
Steinthal 312
Sterne 249
Stoics 14
Sweet 313, 314.
Paul 315
Pott 310
Priscian 307.
Ratichius 308
Rousseau 14.
Scherer 310
von Schlegel 310
Schleicher 310
Schottelius 309
Shakspere 195, 249, 289
Sievers 313
Vedas 292
Verner 278.
Whitney Y, 308, 312, 315
Wordsworth 247
Wundt YI, 316.
Zeuβ 311.
2 . LANGUAGES.
English, mentioned on almost every page, is not here included;
see Table of Contents and cf. also WestGermanic, Germanic,
and IndoEuropean.
Albanese: relationship 270, 272
(IndoEuropean)
Algonquian
languages (Mes
quaki) 171, 312
Altaic languages (Tartar, Tur
kish) 311
American Indians: gesturelan
guage 4, 6; languages of
(Algonquian, Athapascan, Ca
ribbean,Chinook j argon,Green
landish, Lule, Nahwatl, Tsim
shian): objectivity 63, f., gen
ders 109, diversity 262, de
crease 262, 264, loanwords in
English 282, study 19, 312;
picturewriting 7
Arabic: sounds 24, 33, 54, pos
sessor with object 107, 149,
loanwords through A. into
English 282, literary language
290, study 293, 309, (Semitic)
Armenian: sounds 36, 40, rela
tionship 270, 272, history 276,
277 (IndoEuropean)
Arowak: numbers 89 (Caribbean)
Aryan = IndoIranian
Athapascan languages 312: dis
tribution 266, f.
Avestan: relationship 272, his
tory 272, 276, 277, 278, study
292 (Iranian)
Aztec = Nahwatl.
Baltic languages (Lettish, Lithu
anian, Prussian):
qualities
with object 106, relationship
270, 272, f., decrease 265 (In
doEuropean)
Bantu languages (Kafir, Subiya)
312 ; genders 109, 143, number
and person as gender 143,
congruence 153, 182
Basque: numbers 90
Bohemian = Čechish
Bulgarian: relationship
270,
history 225, 278 (Slavic)
Burmese: relationship 312 (Indo
Chinese)
Bushman (Kham) 90: sounds 27.
Canarese: sounds 54 (Dravidian)
Caribbean languages (Arowak)
89: loanwords in English
282, 283
Caucasian languages (Georgian)
312
INDICES
329
244, 248, 255—8, 274, 287,
Čechisli: sounds 26, 29, word
spread 262, 264, standard lan
stress 49, 101, relationship
guage 264, 289, f., relation
270, history 215 (Slavic)
ship 266, loanwords in English
Celtic languages (Irish): emotion
212, 225, 281—4, 287 study
al relations 171, relation
VI, 300, 305, 317, 319 (Ro
ship 270, 272, decrease 265,
mance)
study 311 (IndoEuropean)
Chinese: sounds 24, 51, 54, 55, Frisian: history 267, 274, f., re
lationship 266—9, study 318
writing 22, words 85, f., 98,
(WestGermanic).
wordform 93, 101, derivation
152,168, homonymy 207, com
pounds 97, 161, 189, parts of Georgian: sounds 40, sentence
110, 173, f., relationship 312.
speech 126, f., 128 — not as
(Caucasian)
in English 112, f., 126, sen
tencestress 53, sentencepitch German: sounds 19,24,28—40,51
— 3 , 55, 195, 210, 219, writing
177, wordorder 113, 115—7,
22, words 49, 75, 81, f., 86—
119, 188, congruence 130, f.,
9, 162, 164, derivation 106,
tense 68, f., 144, number 108,
207, genders 109, 129, f., 142,
142, interrogation 92, dialects
f., 151, inflection 87, 93, 129,
22, relationship 312, literary
f., 143, f., 147, f., 153, f., 156,
language 22, 292, study 19,
180, 184, 186, sentence 48, 98,
292 (IndoChinese)
173, 191, 193, f., history 208,
Chinook jargon 262
f., 213, f., 216, f., 230, 232—
Cistercian monks' gesturelan
5, 242, 244, f./ 249, f., 274, f.,
guage 5.
277, f., 281f 6, loans from
Latin 216, f., 281, 283, loan
Danish: sounds 29, f., 33, 40,
words in English 70, 281, re
genders 109, relationship 268,
lationship 264—7,269,standard
influence of Latin 282 (Scan
language 265, 289, f, 321,
dinavian)
study 301, 303—5, 317, 319
Dayak: 157 (Malayan)
(WestGermanic)
Dravidian languages (Canarese)
312: influence upon Indic 220 Germanic languages (Gothic,
Scandinavian, WestGermanic)
(cf. 192)
269; history 201, 206, 208,
Dutch 237: sounds 28, relation
211, 214—6, 218, 221. 229 f.,
ship 266, f., 269, history 230,
234, 272, 276—9, 285, rela
standard language 265, study
tionship 269, f., study 311,
318 (West Germanic).
317, f. (IndoEuropean)
Finnish: cases 107, f., 144, re Gothic: history 272, 275—9, re
lationship 269, study VI, 218.
lationship 311 (Uralic)
(Germanic)
French: sounds 27—40, 44, f.,
writing 22, 300, words 87—90, Greek: sounds 32, 47, 51, 152,
writing 20, derivation 152,
163, liaison 99—102,257, gen
composition 164, inflection 92,
ders 109, sentence 48, 53, 99,
109, 116, f., 142, 145—8, 156
171, 173, 175, 257, f., history
—7, 164, sentence 116, f., 184,
90, 214, 225, 232, 235, 241, f,
330
INDICES
128, f., 131,151, 257, sentence
history 116, f., 217, f., 230,
175, 256, f., history 272, 276
243, 265 f., 272, 276—9, loan
—8 Celtic)
words from G. 237, 282—4,
relationship 261, f., 270, lite Italian: sounds 29, 31, f., 45, 53,
rary languages 263, 289, f.,
92, derivation 105, 165, verb
study 292, 307—10, 317 (In
107, pronoun 88, genders 132,
doEuropean)
history 214, f., 225, 227, 274,
Greenlandish: sounds 33, 54, in
relationship 266, literary lan
flection 107, 110, f., 135, 149,
guage 289 (Romanee)
f., 174, objectivity 104, f„ Italic languages (Latin) 270, 272,
sentence 110, f., 179, 190, f.
285 (IndoEuropean).
Hamitic languages 311
Japanese 20, 48, 70, 88, 167
Hebrew: sounds 24, loanwords Javanese, see Kavi.
through H. into English 282,
literary language 290, study Kafir 153—5, 182 (Bantu)
Kavi 311 (Malayan)
292, 307, 309 (Semitic)
Kham 90 (Bushman).
Hindustani 262 (Indic)
Hottentot 27
Latin (for modern development
Hungarian 31, 311 (Uralic).
see Romance): writing 20, f.,
Icelandic: wordstress 49, 101
inflection 135, 154—7, tenses
relationship 268, history 275,
68, 144, voices 115, 145, 173,
genders 109, cases 92, 108,
277, f. (Scandinavian)
115, f., 144, 167, 1 8 5 7 , pro
India, languages of: sounds 28,
nouns 88, f., 118, 176, adjec
30, 54, 256, writing 20, sen
tive 106, sentence 68, f., 98,
tence 192; see Dravidian and
f., 107, 111, f., 118, 148, 162,
Indic
168, f., 172, 176, 179, .192,
Indians see Americans Indians,
194, 253, congruence 181,
Indic languages (Hindustani,
wordorder 171,186, f., history
Sanskrit) 219, f., 270 (Indo
212—5, 217, f., 225, 230, 232,
Iranian)
241—4, 248, 255, f., 272, 274,
IndoChinese languages (Chinese)
276—8, 283, 287, loans from
312
other Italic languages 285,
IndoEuropean languages (Al
loans to English 106, 212, 281,
banese, Armenian, Baltic, Cel
284, 287, to German 281, 283,
tic, Germanic, Greek, Indo
influence on other languages
Iranian, Italic, Slavic, Tocha
282, relationship 270, spread
ric) 269—73, 276—80, sentence
257, 262—4, 266, f., 289, lite
172, Primitive I.E. 106, 201,
rary language 289, f., study
225, 229, 234, 254, 256, f.,
292, 307—10, 317 (Italic)
study 310—2, 317, f.
IndoIranian languages (Indic, Lettish 24, 270 (Baltic)
Iranian) 270, 277, f. (IndoEu Lithuanian: sounds 31, 47, 51,
ropean)
derivation 106, relationship
Iranian languages (Avestan) 270,
270, history 272, f., 277, Ł
272 (IndoIranian).
(Baltic)
Irish: soundvariation 102, f., Lule 150, 174.
INDICES
331
Malay 85, f., 86, 88, 93, 98, 156,
215, influence of other lan
f., 261, f. (Malayan)
guages 282, relationship 270,
Malay anlanguages (Dayak, Kavi,
spread 262, literary language
Malay) 132, 157. MalayoPo
290 (Slavic).
lynesian)
MalayoPolynesian
languages Sanskrit: sounds 26, 51, 54,
sandhi 102,128, inflection 155,
(Malayan, Polynesian) 312
numbers 142, cases 144, 167,
Mesquaki 171 (Algonqu an).
184, voices 145, f., conjugations
145, f., reduplication 156, f.,
Nahwatl: inflection 135, 146,
compounds 106, 160, f., 164,
149, 157, compounds 160, 164,
sentence 192, 194, relation
f., 254, sentence 98, 167, 169,
ship 230, history 218, 220, 230,
179, 253
272, 276—9, literary language
North Germanic = Scandinavian
290, study 292, 307, 309, f.,
Norwegian: sounds 31, • 37, f.,
317 (Indic)
51, 53, 92, 100, f., 152, 164,
177, pronouns 89, genders 109, Scandinavian languages (Danish,
Icelandic, Norwegian,Swedish)
derivation 152, composition
143, 173, 268, f., relationship
164, sentence 173, 177, rela
269, history 230, 275, loans
tionship 261, 268,influence of
to English 285, study 318
Latin 282, literary languages
(Germanic)
290 (Scandinavian).
Semitic languages (Arabic, He
brew) 33, 107, 133, 311
Oscan 270 (Italic).
Servian 270, 290 (Slavic)
Polish: sounds 31, f., 49, 101, Siamese 312 (IndoChinese)
pronouns 88, history 215, re Slavic languages (Bulgarian,
Čech, Polish, Russian, Ser
lationship 270 (Slavic)
vian): sounds 29, f., 32, 40, f.,
Polynesian languages 54, f. (Ma
44, f., 47, 53, f., pronoun 89,
layoPolynesian)
genders 142, manner 145, de
Portuguese 264, 266, 282 (Ro
rivation 106, sentence 92,
mance).
history 215, 218, 225, 227, 265,
272, f., influence of other lan
Romance languages (French,
guages 282, relationship 270,
Italian, Portuguese, Rouma
study 220, 311, 317 (Indo
nian, Spanish): sounds 40, 44,
European)
f., 47, 53, f., derivation 106,
248, genders 143, relation Spanish: sounds 28, 31, f., his
tory 248, 274, loans to Eng
ship 262, f., 266, f., history
lish 282, f., relationship 266,
255, f., 274, spread 264, study
spread 262, 264, standard
220, 311, 317, 321 (See Latin)
language 264 (Romance)
Roumanian 266 (Romance)
Russian: sounds 31, 36, 38, 40, Subiya 143, 182 (Bantu)
f., 45, 48, f., 51, 65, 152, pro Swedish: sounds 30, 37, 51, 53,
100, f., 152, relationship 268,
noun 65, 88, adjective 111,
influence of Latin 282 (Scan
135, manner 145, sentence 92,
dinavian).
111, 173—4, history 212, f.,
332
INDICES
Uralic languages (Finnish, Hun
Tartar 311 (Altaic)
garian) 107, 144, 311 (Ural
Tibetan 312 (IndoChinese)
Tocharic 272 (IndoEuropean)
Altaic).
Tsimshian 151, 157, 253
Turkish: sounds 36, inflection West Germanic
languages
95, f., sentence 192, relation
(Dutch, English, Frisian, Ger
ship 311 (Altaic).
man) 200,. 266, f., relation
ship 268, f., history 229, 274,
Umbrian 270 (Italic)
f., 279, 281, 285 (Germanic)
UralAltaic languages (Altaic, Wolof 174.
Uralic) 311
8. SUBJECTS.
Ablaut 153, 229
abnormal sibilants 31
absolutive 178, f., 254
abstract words 65, f.
actionwords 65, f.
actor and action categories 67,
f., 112, 115, 121, 148, 1 7 2 5
adaptation 225, f.
adjective 122, f.
adverb 123, f.
affix 153—6
alphabet 20
alveolars 28
analogic change 59, f, 196, 221
—37
analysis of experience 59—63,
85—90, 142, 237, f.
anaphoric words 89
animals 56, f.
aphasia 67
apperception 57, f., 60, f.
article 117, f., 175, f.
articulation 19—55,195, f., 299,f.
arytenoids 24, 26
aspect, see manner
aspirate initial 26, 33, 40; a.
stop 40, 53, f.
assimilation 59, f., 196, f., 219,
221—51, 283, f.
assimilation of articulations 214
—6
association 57, f., 66, f., 69, f.,
82, 120, 133, f., 139—41, 197,
219, 221—51
attribute, attribution 61, 110, f.,
122, 149, f.
attributive languages, see objec
tive
automatic soundvariation 23,
54, f., 151, 155, f., 220, f., 250.
Back vowels 34
bilabials 28
blade 30, f.
breath 9, 24, 26
breathed, see unvoiced
Cartilage glottis 26
case 107, f., 122, 143, f., 183, f.
categories 67—9
cerebrals 30
change 16, f, 195—258
child 10—3, 223
choke 40; cf glottal stop
close syllable stress 47
command 76, 121
comparative method 200, f., 274
— 80
compound syllable pitch 51, f.;
c. s. stress 47, 52
compound words 96—8,104, 106,
140, 159—66, 235, f., 254
concept 58, 63, 65, f., 85—7
condensation 241—8
INDICES
333
Geminate, see doubled
gender 109, 129, f., 142, f, 182
gestures 4—7, 14, f.
glides 40, f.
glottal stop 24, f., 33, 40
glottis 24—6, 40
government 182—6
grammar 289, 302—4, 307—9
Deafmutes 5
Grimm's law 208
declarative, see statement
definite and indefinite categories group stress 48—50
gums 28—30
117, f., 175, f.
deictic words 64, f., 88, f.
Haplology 217
dentals 28—31
high vowels 34
derivation 141, 150, f
homonymy 125, 157, f., 181,185,
dialects 260, f.
206, f.
diminutive 105, f.
hypotaxis 191, 193, f.
diphthong 43
discursive relations 60—2, 110 Imperative 92, 147, f.
—4, 169—70
inclusive 88
dissimilation 216—8, 283
infinitive 118, f., 121
dominant element of experience infix 155, f.
7, 58, 63, 83, f., 238—51; d. e. inflection 140—50
in sentence 50, f., 113, f., 170, intensity, see stress
f., 175.
interdental 28
dorsals 28, 30—3
interjection 73—7, 124
doubled 45, 52, f.
interrogative, see question
duration 52, f.
invention of words 12, 236, i
congruence 127—81, 180—2
conjunction 124, 193, f.
consonants 28—33, 153
contamination 224, f.
coronals 28—30
crossreference 178—80.
Emotional relations in sentence
49, f., 113, 170, f.; cf. domi
nant element
enclitics 49, 100
ethnology 256, 317, 321, f.
etymology 244, f., 281, f.
evolution of language 252—6
exclamation 70, 73—7, 91, f., 121
exclusive 88
exocentric compounds 161
explosives, see stops
expressive movements 1—10.
Kernel 153, f.
Labials 28
labialized 41
labiodentals 28
languages 261, f.
laryngeals 24, f., 83
larynx 24, 33
laterals 29, f., 43
lenes 39, 53, f.
length, see duration
liaison, see sandhi
lips 28, 31, 34, 41
Formational elements 62, f., 79, literary languages 290, 292
loanwords 70, 106, 132, 280—6
f., 9 3 6 , 103—9, 221—37
local relations 107, f., 116, f
fortes 39, 53, f.
logical, see discursive
tricatives, see spirants
loose, see wide
front vowels 34.
334
loudness, see stress
low vowels 34
lungs 9, 24.
INDICES
onomatopoeia 81
open syllable stress 47
oral articulation 27—38
origin of language 13—6
Manner of action 144, f.
orthography, see writing
manner of articulation 54, 208 outcry 9, 73.
material relations in sentence
Palatals 31, f.
114—9, 171—4
meaning, see association, seman palatalization 214, f.
palatalized articulation 31, 41
tic change
palate 27—31
metaphor 247—9
parallel forms 141
metathesis 216, f., 283
parataxis 191, 193, f.
mid vowels 34
participle, see verbal adjective
mixed vowels 34
parts of speech 112, 120—7
mixture of articulations 41
person 121, 148, f.
mixture of dialects 284, f.
philology 307, f., 319, f.
mode 146—8
morphologic categories 68—70, phonetic alphabet 23, 300
phonetic change, ph. law, see
103, 141 — 50
soundchange
morphologic classes 108—10,120
phonetic semantic parallelism
—40, 221—37
136, f.
morphologic soundvariation 151
phoneticsemantic wordclasses
—8
131—5
morphology 110, 120—66, 221
phonetics 19, 299, 313
—37
picturewriting 7, 20
murmur 25, f.
pitch 25, 51, f, 151, f., 177, f.
musical sound 27.
place of articulation 54, 208
Names 247, f.
plain stops, see pure
narrow vowels 84
postdentals 28—30
nasals 27, f., 43
predicate, predication 61, 64,
nasalized 27, f., 38
110, f., 12 l
natural syllables 42—6
prefix 155—6
noise 27
preposition 117, 124, 143
nominal languages, see objective primitive creations 235
proclitics 49, 100
nonsyllabics 42, f.
pronoun 64, f., 87—9, 123, 143
noun 111, f., 121, f., 136—8
number 121, f., 141, f., 148, f. pronunciation, see articulation
proportional analogy 226, f.
numerals 89, f.
psychology VI, 14, 222—4
numeratives 130, f.
pun 99, f.
nursery words 11, f.
pure initial 40
Object affected 115, f., 121, 127, pure stop 40, 53, f.
143, 148, f., 176, 187
objective languages 64, 104, f., Qualitywords 65, f.
107, 111
quantity, see duration
objectwords 63, f.
question 52, 71, 91, f.
INDICES
335
Reduplication 156, f.
relation 66, 105, 107, f.
relative pronoun 193, f,
root 154
rounded 31, 34, 4 1 .
syllablepitch 51, f.
syllablestress 43—7
syntactic categories 68, f., 112,
115, 117, f., 121, 174—6
syntax 119, 167—94.
Sandhi 101, f.
semantic change 7, 16, 78, 237
—51
semantic parallelism 139
semivowels 42
sentence 48—53, 60—3, 76, 110
—9, 167—94
sentenceequivalents 170
sentencepitch 51, f., 92, 176—8
sentenceword 64, 111, f., 253
serial relation 113, 124
set phrase 116, f., 122, 124, 188,
f., 248, f., 286, f.
sibilants 30, f
soft palate 32; cf. velum
song 10
sonority 42—5
sound 8, f., 14
soundchange 16, 77, 202—21
soundsymbolism 79, f, 93, 235, f.
soundvariation, see automatic,
morphologic
spelling, see writing
spirants 27, f.
standard languages 288—90.
statement 71, 91, f.
stops 27, f., 39, f.
stress 25, 42—53, 152, 177, f.
stressgroup 48—50
stresssyllable 44—8, 52, f.
subject 61, 110, f., 115, 121
subordinate clause 124, 190—4
substitution of sounds 219, f.
suctionsounds 27
suffix 154
suppletion 158, f
syllabaries 20
syllabics 42—7
syllable 42—53
syllableboundary 48—6
Teeth 29—32
tense 62, 68—70, 121, 144, 183
tense vowels, see narrow
tonecolor 27—29, f'.
tongue 27—38
total experience 56—63
transitive verbs 176; t. words 127
translation 300, f.
trills 29, 33, 43
triphthong 43.
Umlaut 152, 230, £
unrounded 34
unvoiced 25
uvula 27, 33
uvulars 32, f.
Telars 32
velum 26, f.
verb 111, f., 121, 138, f.
verbal adjective 122, 191, f.
verbal noun 122
Verner's law 216, 229
vocal chords 9, f., 24—6, 33
vocative 92, 144
voice 9, 25
voiced 25
voices of verb 145, f.
vowels 27, 33—8, 152, f.
Whisper 26
wide vowels 34
word 48—51, 62—70, 82—90,
93—110, 120—66, 221—51
wordorder 92, 114—8, 127, f.,
185—8, 193, f.
wordpitch 51
wordstress 48—50
writing 7, f. 1924, 287, f